PDF

IntelliVue Information Center System
Release N
Installation and Service Manual
Part Number 4535 642 58111

Printed in the U.S.A. June 2011
Edition 1
*453564258111*
Notices
Proprietary Notice This document and the information contained in it is proprietary and confidential
information of Philips Healthcare (“Philips”) and may not be reproduced, copied in
whole or in part, adapted, modified, disclosed to others, or disseminated without the
prior written permission of the Philips Legal Department. Use of this document and
the information contained in it is strictly reserved for current Philips personnel and
Philips customers who have a current and valid license from Philips for use by the
customer’s designated in-house service employee on equipment located at the
customer’s designated site. Use of this document by unauthorized persons is strictly
prohibited. Report violation of these requirements to the Philips Legal Department.
This document must be returned to Philips when the user is no longer licensed and in
any event upon first written request by Philips.
Warranty Philips provides this document without warranty of any kind, either implied or
Disclaimer expressed, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability
and fitness for a particular purpose.
Limitation of Philips has taken care to ensure the accuracy of this document. However, Philips
Liability assumes no liability for errors or omissions and reserves the right to make changes
without further notice to any products herein to improve reliability, function, or
design. Philips may make improvements or changes in the product(s) or programs(s)
described in this document at any time.
Copyright Notice © 2011 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. All Rights Reserved.
Manufacturer Philips Medical Systems

3000 Minuteman Road
Andover, MA 01810-1085
(978) 687-1501
Printed in USA
Acknowledgments Windows and MS SQL Server are registered Trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Printing History New editions of this document incorporate all material updated since the previous
edition. Update packages may be issued between editions and contain replacement
and additional pages to be merged by a revision date at the bottom of the page. Pages
that are rearranged due to changes on a previous page are not considered revised.
2
The documentation printing date and part number indicate its current edition. The printing
date changes when a new edition is printed. (Minor corrections and updates that are
incorporated at reprint do not cause the date to change.) The document part number changes
when extensive technical changes are incorporated.
First Edition ........................................................................................... June 2011

M3140 IntelliVue Information Center Low Acuity Database
M3150 IntelliVue Information Center Local Database
M3155 IntelliVue Information Center Network Database
M3145 IntelliVue Information Center Small Network Database
M3151 IntelliVue Information Center Client
M3170 Patient Link
M3169 IntelliVue Small Database Server
M3154 IntelliVue Large Database Server
M3177 Trend Display
Release N.0.xx
Software
Release
History
Release Software Kit SSN
Date Hardware Description
VUF Part Number Prefix
N.00.xx 6/11 453564037431 - DC7700 PC
453564056761 - DC7700 PC
453564067761 - HP rp5700 PC
453564037461 - ML350 G5 1.86 GHz
453564056771 - ML350 G5 1.86 GHz
4535 640 89511 - ML350 G5
4535 641 62631 - ML350 G6
4535 64 163221 - DL380 G6
453564213941 - ML350 G6
453564213951 - DL380 G7
3
About this Document
This document contains Service and Installation information for the M3154 IntelliVue Large
Database Server, M3169 IntelliVue Small Database Server, M3140 IntelliVue Information
Center Low Acuity Database, M3150 IntelliVue Information Center Local Database, M3155
IntelliVue Information Center Network Database, M3145 IntelliVue Information Center
Small Network Database, M3170 Patient Link, M3177 Trend Display, and the M3151
IntelliVue Information Center Client.
Model Referred to in text as . . .
M3169 IntelliVue Small Database Server Small Database Server
M3154 IntelliVue Large Database Server Large Database Server
M3150 IntelliVue Information Center Local Database Information Center
M3140 IntelliVue Information Center Low Acuity Database Information Center
M3155 IntelliVue Information Center Network Database Information Center
M3145 IntelliVue Information Center Small Network Database Information Center
M3170 Patient Link Information Center
M3151 IntelliVue Information Center Client Information Center Client
M3177 Trend Display Trend Display
Refer to Software Release History for supported PC/Server Hardware.
4
Table of Contents
Introducing the IntelliVue Information Center System 1
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Information Center Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
M3140 Local Database (Low Acuity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
M3150 Local Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
M3145/M3155 Network Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
M3151 Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
M3170 Patient Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
M3177 Trend Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
M3154 Database Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Large Network Database System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
M3169 Small Database Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
USB Recorder System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
UPS with Hardware Watchdog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Topologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Philips CareNet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Network Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Compatible Patient Monitors and Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Main Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Patient Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
All Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Configuring the Information Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
Configuring Patient Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
Getting Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
Clinical Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
Patient Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
Alarm Annunciation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
Arrhythmia Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
ST Segment Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40
Memory Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40
Hard Disk Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40
BIOS Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40
Export Devices Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40
Components and Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42
Basic Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42
Purchased Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
2-Channel USB Recorder Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45
4-Channel Serial Recorder Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45
Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46
USB Input Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46
Other Hardware Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46
Upgrade Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-47
Hardware Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-47
Product Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-48
Printer Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52
Mounting Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52
Clinical Network Active Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52
Installation Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-53
1
Cable Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-53
Language Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-55
Hardware Description 2
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
PC Workstation Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Database Server Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Keyboard-Video-Mouse Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Philips Recorder Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Printer Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
UPS with Hardware Watchdog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Database Server UPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Power Distribution Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Mounting Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Keyboard Mounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Other Mounting Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
CareNet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Serial Distribution Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
SCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
SDN Interface Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Branch Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Wall Box Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Cable Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Cable Pin Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Installing Additional Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
HP rp5700 Card Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
HP DC7700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
Physical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66
Electrical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68
Customer Supplied Display Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69
Regulatory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71
Philips Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71
Prescription Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71
Philips Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71
Software Description 3
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
PC Workstation Platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Peripheral Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Windows Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
IntelliVue Information Center Application Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Architectural Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
2
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Site Planning and Preparation 4

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Site Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Location Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Network Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Reviewing Clinical Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Philips Hardware Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Information Center (Local Database) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Database Server Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Design Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Site Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Equipment Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Network Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Network Card and TCP/IP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Equipment Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Hardware Installation 5
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Cable Plant Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Unpacking and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Unpacking Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Inspecting Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Installing System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Setting up Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Mounting Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Information Center Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Small Database Server Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Large Database Server Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Connecting the DBS to Hospital Intranet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Installing Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Interconnecting the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
IntelliVue Information Center Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Touch Display Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Setting up a Remote Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Setting up a KVM Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Installing and Configuring KaVoom Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Hospital Intranet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Providing Electrical Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Network Names and IP Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Default Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
MAC Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Host Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
3
Device Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Setting Host Names and IP Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Testing Network Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Optional Second Network Interface Card Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Software Installation & Configuration 6

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Stopping the EWS Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Application Software Re-initialization and Re-installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Config Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Backup Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Restore From Archive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Software Versions and Security Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Purchased Options and Support Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Database Server General Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Local General Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Unit Paging Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
Network Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
Device Pooling Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
Display Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58
Equipment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60
Bed Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-79
Report Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-84
Security Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-86
Report and Recording Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-87
Date and Time Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-94
Creating an Archive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-95
Finishing Config Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-95
Report Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-96
MiniConfig . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-97
Label Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-103
Re-assigning an Assigned Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-104
Manually Assigning a Monitor Equipment Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-105
Manually Removing a Monitor Equipment Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-105
Manually Assigning a Telemetry Equipment Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-106
Manually Removing a Telemetry Equipment Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-106
Automatically Assigning an Equipment Label (Alternative) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-107
Activating the Database Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-108
Activating the Network/Server System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-110
Maintenance, Troubleshooting, and Repair 7

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Surface Cleaning Information Center Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Cleaning the Touch Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Performing Routine Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Clearing Workstation and Server Air Intakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Replacing UPS Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Cleaning the USB 2-Channel Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Cleaning the 4-Channel Serial Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
4
Cleaning the USB 4-Channel Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Checking Display Sweep Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Troubleshooting Symptoms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Troubleshooting Strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
System Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
User Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Service Personnel Troubleshooting Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
Support Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
Network Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
Telemetry Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-61
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-70
Other Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-72
Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-75
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-77
HL7 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-81
Client.exe tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-81
Qryclnt.exe Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-82
ST/AR Configuration Reporting Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-83
LED Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-90
Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-94
Clearing Tripp Lite UPS Watchdog Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-94
Updating the Tripp-Lite UPS Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-95
Correcting APC UPS Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-96
Correcting SDN Interface Card Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-99
Correcting Philips Recorder Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-99
Restoring Printer Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-100
Adding DBS Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-100
Adding Printers at the Database Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-100
Repairing Philips Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-102
Restarting the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-102
Re-installing Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-102
Updating the BIOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-102
Flashing BIOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-102
Configuring the ILO Setting for the Large Database Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-103
Restoring Large DataBase Server RAID Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-104
ML350 G5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-104
ML 350 G6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-104
DL 380 G6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-104
DL 380 G7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-105
Configuring BIOS Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-107
M3154 Database Server BIOS Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-107
Information Center/Client PC BIOS Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-124
Software Re-Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-136
Updating Firmware on Information Centers
and DataBase Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-143
Updating the DataBase Server Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-144
Updating the IIC Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-145
Using the Japanese Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-147
5
Using Antivirus Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-148
Configuring Antivirus Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-149
Updating Virus Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-150
Virus Found . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-152
Replaceable Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-153
Testing Product Assurance 8

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Visual Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Power On Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Performance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Database Storage Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Power Failure Response Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Setting Display Sweep Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Modem Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Worksheets A
Design and Configuration Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Device Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Network Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-17
Equipment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-18
Patient Data Transfer/Web Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-20
Installing the Web Access Option B

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Installing Web Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
Updating System Files For EWS Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
Installing the Web NIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
Entering the NIC IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7
Using the Web User Access Config Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9
Adding Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9
Using Clinician Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10
Installing a Local Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13
Testing and Inspecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-14
External Modem Installation C

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
RAS Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
Installing and Configuring an External Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
Connecting the Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
Reconfiguring RAS on Windows 2003 Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
Testing RAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
Testing and Inspecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
6
Remote Access to Information Center Systems D
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
Server Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
Accessing PC Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
Dial Out Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2
Making the Remote Access Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2
Using Remote Desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
Using RAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5
Reviewing the Remote Log Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5
Accessing the Remote Event Viewer or Application Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5
Using the System Tools Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6
Logging Out of the Remote Desktop Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7
Disconnecting RAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7
Test and Inspection Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7
Data Export - Installation on the Database Server E

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1
Installing Data Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3
Installing Second NIC in ML350 G5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3
Entering the NIC IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-4
Configuring the Host Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-5
Testing Network Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-6
Enable the Receiving System to Receive Exported Data for Data Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-8
Windows NT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-8
Windows 2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-9
Windows XP/2003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-12
Demo Mode F
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1
Hardware and System Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1
Installing and Configuring Demo Mode Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-2
Installing the Demo Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-2
Running Config Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-4
Restoring the Archive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-5
Logging On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-20
Starting Demo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-21
Restarting Simulation Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-21
Turning On QT Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-22
Things to Know About Demo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-23
Re-installing IIC Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-24
ActiveX Control Deployment Tool G

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1
Technical Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1
Supported Information Center Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-2
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-3
7
8
1
Introducing the IntelliVue Information Center System
Overview
The IntelliVue Information Center system running the Information Center Release M
application software integrates of a wide range of functionality into a single, standard PC or
Server running a Microsoft® Windows™ Operating System. The Information Center
combines the features of a central monitor -- multipatient waveform and parameter display,
alarm annunciation, multilead arrhythmia monitoring, and ST analysis -- with the patient data
review of a clinical review station to meet the diverse needs of the clinical environment.
Display formats, monitoring controls, alarm response, and patient data presentation can be
configured to suit user preferences and to optimize user performance. Information System
functionality can also be purchased in various ways to tailor the system to specific clinical
needs and applications.
An IntelliVue Database Server can be connected to the IntelliVue Clinical Network for
storing patient data obtained from patient monitors connected to Information Centers. Patient
data are transmitted through the Network to the Database Server for storage, analysis, and
review. The M3154 Large Database Server can store data for up to 128 patients, which can be
viewed by all M3155 Information Centers on the Network and by 12 additional Network-
connected M3151 Information Center Clients. The M3169 Small Database Server can store
data for up to 48 patients, which can be viewed by three M3145 Information Centers on the
Network and by three additional Network-connected M3151 Information Center Clients.
Real-time patient monitoring data can also be overviewed by all Information Centers and
Clients on the Network.
The M3145 Information Center is used with the Small Database Server. Otherwise, it is
identical in features and specifications to the M3155 Information Center.
Chapter 1 includes the following:
Information Center Systems page 1-2

Topologies page 1-13
Philips CareNet page 1-16
Compatible Patient Monitors and Software page 1-17
Features page 1-22
Clinical Applications page 1-32
Upgrades page 1-40
Components and Options page 1-42
1-1
Information Center Systems

An Information Center system consists of medical software running on a standard PC with a
Windows Operating System. The specific workstation, display, UPS, and optional printer
shipped with each system may vary depending on the date of purchase.
Displays are sold separately. Philips cannot guarantee compliance with the EMC Directive of
any display not supplied by Philips and will not install those displays. Throughout this
document, only general descriptions of devices are provided. For more detailed information
on a particular device see the manufacturer documentation.
Warning Components, topologies, and configurations specified by Philips have been tested to meet
a variety of patient monitoring standards. Hardware and software not supplied by
Philips as part of an Information Center system are not approved or supported for use
with Philips Information Center and Clinical Network/Database Server systems.
Use of hardware and software that has not been approved by Philips for use with the
Information Center and Clinical Network/Database Server can result in the loss of
central monitoring - including alarm annunciation - or in degradation of monitoring
performance.
Figure 1-1 Basic Information Center Workstation Components
1-2
M3140 Local The M3140 Information Center can operate as an independent,stand-alone central monitor.
Database When the Information Center is operating independently it stores all patient data. Stored and
(Low Acuity) Real-time patient monitoring data can only be reviewed on the Information Center on which
it was obtained.
Standard Each M3140 Information Center includes the following standard components:
Components
• PC processing unit with:
USB Connectors
CD/DVD Drive
Windows XP Operating System Software
Information Center Application Software
Audio Card
10BT/100TX Ethernet Network Adapter Card
• Keyboard
• Mouse
• External Speaker
• 2-Channel USB Recorder
• Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
Optional The following optional components are also available - refer to the option list at the end of
Components this section:
• Display (must be ordered separately)

• Printer (must be ordered separately)
• Trackball
• Mounting hardware for PC, Display, and UPS
• Interconnecting cables
M3150 Local The M3150 Information Center can operate as an independent (stand-alone) central monitor.
Database When the Information Center is operating independently it stores all patient data. Stored
patient monitoring data can only be reviewed on the Information Center on which it was
obtained. Review of Real-time patient monitoring data is limited to any Information Center
connected to the same CareNet switch.
The Information Center Web Access option permits viewing of all patient data stored on the
Server (waves, alarms, events, ST segments, trends, and viewable recording strip data) by PCs
on the Hospital Information System (HIS). Up to 10 simultaneous users can access stored
patient data using standard web browsers -- Internet Explorer (Release 5.0 or greater and must
allow downloads of signed Active X controls) and Netscape (Release 4.7 or greater. Netscape
does not support near real time overview).
Standard Each M3150 Information Center includes the following standard components:
Components
USB Connectors
CD/DVD Drive
1-3
Audio Card
• Keyboard
• Mouse
• SDN Interface Card

• Dual Video Card (Information Centers and Clients only)
• Video Splitter (6-way) for remote slave displays
• Trackball
• Mounting Hardware for PC, Display, and UPS
• Interconnecting Cables
M3145/M3155 The M3145/M3155 Information Center connects to a Large or Small Database Server which
Network stores the patient data. Patient monitoring data can only be reviewed by another Information
Database Center on the network that is connected to the same Database Server.
Standard Each M3145/M3155 Information Center (Figure 1-1) includes the following standard
Components components:

USB Connectors
CD/DVD Drive
Windows XP Operating System software
Audio Card
10bt/100tx Ethernet Network Adapter Card
• Keyboard
• Mouse

• Dual Display Card (Information Centers and Clients only)
• Video Splitter (6-way) for Remote Slave Displays
• Trackball
1-4
• Mounting Hardware for PCs, Displays, and UPS

1-5
M3151 Client An Information Center Client provides real-time waveform monitoring display and patient
review functions at hallway locations.
Standard • PC processing unit with:

Components USB Drive
CD/DVD Drive
Audio Card
• Keyboard
• Mouse

• Dual Video Card
• Video splitter (6-way) for Remote Slave Displays
• Trackball
• Mounting Hardware for PC, Display, and UPS
M3170 The M3170 Patient Link operates as a M3150 Information Center local database without a
Patient Link display. The M3170 Patient Link provides a central location for bedside recordings and
reports initiated from SDN hardwired bedsides, M2/3/4 bedsides and IntelliVue Patient
Monitors. In addition, the Patient Link provides support for bed to bed overview and alarm
reflection for M3/4 bedsides and IntelliVue Patient Monitors. Patient Link cannot be used
with Telemetry besides. Patient names are not included on the recording annotation
M3170 Patient Link does have a clinical user interface option (Care Group Settings),
however, it does not generate alert sounds and relies on the bedside monitor for visual and
auditory alarm notification. If this use model is required, a Display would need to be order
and installed in the Central Nursing Area. All Clinical User Settings and Patient Settings are
set to the factory defaults and cannot be changed. The only configuration changes that can be
applied are those in the Config Wizard.
1-6
Standard Each M3170 Patient Link includes the following standard components:
Components
USB Drive
CD/DVD Drive
Keyboard and Mouse (required for installation and support only)
M3177 Trend The M3177 Trend Display allows you to view patients trending history through the use of
Display various trending charts that display in trending sectors. The trending sectors display the
patient’s trending data allowing you to gain a clearer perspective on a patient’s current status
and how your patient’s condition is developing over time. The Trend Display application is
available as an option on dual-display Information Centers. If used as an M3177 application
on a dual-display system, it can be set up with both displays showing trending data or with
one display showing trending data and the second display containing a full screen Patient
Window.
The M3177 Information Center is available with a single trending display or with two
trending displays. The Trend Display application is for viewing patient trending data; it
provides no visual or audible alarms.
M3154 The M3154 Large Database Server is a Server that provides database storage of patient
Database monitoring data for all devices on the Network. Information Center application software
Server provides for storage of up to 96 hours of patient monitoring data (full disclosure waveforms,
physiologic parameters, alarms, multi-lead arrhythmia, ST segments, and EASI 12-lead
presentations) from 128 patients. Patient monitoring data, including events and trends, can be
reviewed by any M3155 Information Center or M3151 Client on the Network.
The Information Center Web Access option permits viewing of all patient data stored on the
Server (waves, alarms, events, ST segments, trends, and viewable recording strip data) by PCs
on the hospital’s HIS intranet. Up to 100 simultaneous users can access stored patient data
using standard web browsers -- Internet Explorer (Release 5.0 or greater and must allow
downloads of signed Active X controls) and Netscape (Release 4.7 or greater. Netscape does
not support near real time overview).
1-7
Repeater
Standard • Server with:

Components USB Drives
DVD/CD Drive
10BT/100TX Ethernet Network Adapter Card (for Clinical Network access)
10BT/100TX Ethernet Network Adapter Card (for connection to Hospital LAN)
• Keyboard
• Mouse
• UPS
• Microsoft Windows 2003 Operating System Software
• Information Center Application Software which stores the following data for up to 128
patients:
24 hours of full disclosure waveforms (4 waveforms per patient) and physiologic
parameters
150 30-second alarm records and saved strips, 4 waves per record
24 hours of trends with 1 minute of resolution
24 hours of ST segments
24 hours of events with 1-hour strip function
Optional Options for the Large Database Server follow:

Components
• 48, 72, or 96 hours of patient data storage per patient
• Clinical Network connectivity for 2, 4, 6, or 8 Information Centers
• Web access to stored patient data from browser equipped PCs on the hospital LAN
• Export of derived 12-Lead information for EASI 12-Lead IntelliVue Patient Monitor
data in XML format
• HL7 formatted messages containing Information Center collected data can be output to
an external HL7 compliant receiver
• Alert Data Integration
• Interface to Philips/Zymed Holter for Windows
Large You can interconnect up to 22 Large Database Servers on the hospital LAN. This
Network connectivity provides Information Centers with the ability to transfer patient data to a clinical
Database unit outside of its Database Server. The clinical operator selects a destination clinical unit
System when discharging. Retrospective data, near real-time waves, parameters, and alarms for
patients across care units that are on separate database servers can also be reviewed. Web-
based applications can be displayed on the Information Centers if an Application Server is
present.
• In a large network system, you can combine E.0 and greater Large Database Server
systems. All Large Database Servers and connected Information Centers and Clients
must be running the same revision of Information Center software. ( L.0 Information
Centers are connected to an L.0 Database Server; J.0 Information Centers are
connected to a J.0 Database Server, and so on.)
• One of the Large Database Servers must be designated as the “Master Server”. The
master server maintains the list of other servers in its database; it also provides for the
addition/deletion/changing of additional servers during monitoring. In a mixed large
network system, the Master Database Server must be running J or greater.
• The Master Database Server must be installed and configured first.
1-8
• The remaining Large Database Servers (non-masters) must add the Master Server name in the
Purchased Options and Support Information screen. If a non-master server is not registered with
the Master Database Server, it cannot receive or send patient data outside of its domain.
• If a Master Database Server adds a non-master server to its list you must verify that the non-
master does not already have a Master Database Server associated with it. If the non-master has
another Master Database Server name configured, it will not accept the new Master Database
Server.
• The Master Database Server behaves as the external time source for all non-master servers. If an
external time source (other than the Master Database Server) is configured, all connected
Information Centers and Clients have the Date/Time configuration window disabled. The
Database Server is enabled, but it is overridden by the external time source. If there is no
external time source configured, only the Master Database Server domain has the Date/Time
application enabled.
• The Master Database Server list is part of the archive/restore for the Master Database Server and
all the non-masters.
• When restoring archive files in a large network system, verify that the archive is for the correct
Database Server. If a Master Database Server archive is restored on a non-master Database
Server, an invalid configuration is introduced (two Database Servers cannot be set to master).
• When Web Access/Large Network system option is enabled and a new Master/non-master
relationship is configured, all clinician data (user names, passwords) on the non-master server
will be lost. To re-enter the clinician data, refer to Using the Web User Access Config Tool,
page B-9.
• Because the Master Database Server is responsible for maintaining the Patient List, the non-
master Database Servers cannot use the Information Center Web to view the review applications
if the Master Database Server is offline. There is no message on the Information Centers
connected to the non-master Database Server that the Master is offline.
• IntelliVue Telemetry System network devices can be added (with Config Wizard) to more than
one Database Server in a large network system. Only one server can be configured to receive
alerts from these components (configured as part of the IntelliVue Telemetry System).
• You can configure compatible printers on the Monitoring or Hospital LAN. If a DBS configured
printer is local or on the Hospital network, then you can share it with Information Centers in the
domain (page 7-100).
1-9
Time All patient monitoring network components are time synchronized. Single synchronization is
Synchronization supported from a master time source located either within the Clinical Network or provided externally
by the hospital. The external time source is added as a network device as part of the configuration of
Equipment Setup, page 6-61. Table 1-1 illustrates the supported configurations and the time
synchronization rules:
Table 1-1 Time Synchronization Behavior

Can Date/Time be set on this
System Component Expected Behavior on Time Change
component?
M3150 Information Center (Local Database) Without External Time Source
Information Center Yes Immediate Synchronization
Bedside No Synchronized within 5 minutes
M3150 Information Center (Local Database) With External Time Source
Information Center No Synchronized 0-15 minutes
Bedside No Synchronized within 5 minutes after Information
Center synchronization
Database Server System Without External Time Source
Database Server Yes Immediate synchronization
Information Center No Synchronized within 1 minute
Information Center Client No Synchronized within 1 minute
Bedside No All bedsides synchronized within 5 minutes
Database Server System With External Time Source
Database Server No Synchronized 0-15 minutes
Information Center No Synchronized within 1 minute after Database Server
Information Center Client No Synchronized within 1 minute after Database Server
Bedside No All bedsides synchronized within 5 minutes after
Database Server
Large Network System Without External Time Source
Master Database Server Yes Immediate synchronization
Non-Master Database No Synchronized within 1 minute
Servers
Information Center No Synchronized within 1 minute
Information Center Client No Synchronized within 1 minute
Bedside No All bedsides synchronized within 5 minutes
Large Network System With External Time Source
Master Database Server No Synchronized 0-15 minutes
Non-Master No Synchronized within 1 minute after Master Database
Database Servers Server
Information Center No Synchronized within 1 minute after Master Database
Server
Information Center Client No Synchronized within 1 minute after Master Database
Server
Bedside No All bedsides synchronized within 5 minutes after
Master Database Server
1-10
M3169 Small The M3169 Small Database Server is a Server that provides database storage of patient
Database monitoring data for all devices on the Network. Information Center application software
Server provides for storage of 48 hours of patient monitoring data (full disclosure waveforms,
physiologic parameters, alarms, multi-lead arrhythmia, ST segments, and EASI 12-lead
presentations) from 48 patients. Patient monitoring data, including events and trends, can be
reviewed by up to three M3155 Information Centers and three Clients on the Network.
Standard • PC with:
Components USB Drives
CD/DVD Drive
10BT/100TX Ethernet Network Connector
• Keyboard
• Mouse
• UPS
• Microsoft Windows XP Operating System
• Information Center Application Software which stores the following data for up to 48
patients:
24 hours of full disclosure waveforms (4 waveforms per patient) and physiologic
parameters
150 thirty-second alarm records and saved strips, 4 waves per record
24 hours of trends with 1 minute of resolution
24 hours of ST segments
24 hours of events with 1-hour strip function
Optional Options for the Small Database Server include:

Components
• 48 hours of patient data storage per patient
• Clinical Network connectivity for 1, 2, or 3 Information Centers
USB
Recorder
System
Standard The following parts are bundled into the 862120 USB Recorder System.
Components
A01 - one recorder
A02 - two recorders
• USB Recorder Device

• Universal Power Supply
• 5 meter DC Power Cable
• DC Power Y-cable (included when A02 and A03 options are ordered)
• 5 meter USB Cable
• Combiner Bracket (included when A02 and A03 options are ordered)
• Speaker Mount
• Localized Power Cord
1-11
Optional The following optional components are also available:

Installation
Components • M3180A #A24 wall mount for up to two USB Recorders
• 989803109871 - 10 rolls of paper
• 989803109881 - 80 rolls of paper
UPS with
Hardware
Watchdog
Standard The following parts are bundled into the UPS with Hardware Watchdog (available in limited
Components geographies)
• SmartPro Rack Mount 500VA Watchdog UPS (120V or 230V)

• Rack Mounting Bracket
• Upright Tower Mounting Bracket
• Owners Manual
• Localized AC Power Cord
If the UPS with Hardware Watchdog is not available in local geography, an APC UPS is
supplied.
Optional The following optional components are also available:

Installation
Components • M3180A-#A18 PC Wall Mount
• M3180A-#A26 UPS and PC Wall Mount
• 453564088981 HP rp5700 PC Wall Mount
1-12
Topologies
Topologies
Table 1-2 shows the export applications supported in each system configuration and
Figure 1-2 and Figure 1-3 show the topologies. Note that these figures do not show the full
system capabilities. Refer to IntelliVue Clinical Network Installation Guidelines and
Topologies for information about supported Network Topologies.
Table 1-2 Topologies

M3150
M3140 M3150 M3170 M3169 Small M3155 M3154
Information
Information Information Patient Database Information Database
Center with
Center Center Link Server Center Server
Second NIC
12-lead Export by means
x x x x
of network
12-Lead Export by means
x x x x x
of Removable Media
Holter Export x x x x
Research Data Export x x x x
Web Access
x x x
(IIC Apps on Web)
Browser access on
x x x x x
Information Center1
Manual Lab Data Entry x x x
Transfer Patient Data
x
across DB servers
Access to Patient Data
x
across DBSs via Web
2,3
HL7 Export x x x2 x x x
Device Location x x x x x
Alert Data Integration x x x x
Admit (in-bound) from
x x x x
Hospital ADT
Wave Strip Export x x x x
Alert Data Export Supported in Release E.01 only
1Requires an Application Server
2
Requires a second NIC
3
M3140 with second NIC is no longer Plug and Play
1-13
Topologies
Application
Server
128 patients
10 Mbps
(max)
100 Mbps
HIS LAN
Access
Wired IntelliVue
Patient Monitor IntelliVue Large
Database Server
100 Mbps
HIS LAN
Access
HIS LAN
Printers
100 Mbps
Information Center
16 patients
100 Mbps
Network Switch
16 patients
IIC
Clients
Information Center
16 patients
16 patients
10 Mbps IIC
Clients
16 patients
Monitoring LAN
Printers (static IP Addresses)
Figure 1-2 Typical Basic System Topology
1-14
Topologies
CareNet IntelliVue Clinical Network

IntelliVue Patient
Monitors Monitoring LAN Printers
Information Center
12 patients
V24 Patient 16 patients

Monitors CareNet IIC
Switch Clients
10 Mbps
12 patients
100 Mbps Network Switch
100 Mbps
Information Center
IntelliVue
Patient Monitors CareNet 16 patients
Switch
IIC
Clients
Philips Telemetry
System
Laser Printer
Application 12 patients HIS LAN
Server Printers
10 Mbps
Wired
M2/M3/M4 100 Mbps
HIS LAN
Monitor
10 Mbps
IntelliVue Large
Database Server
Information
Center HIS LAN for
128 patients WEB Access
(max) 100 Mbps
Wired IntelliVue 16 patients 100 Mbps

Patient Monitor
100 Mbps
Information
Center IIC
Clients
Wireless Intellivue 16 patients Network Switch

Monitors 16 patients
10 Mbps
100 Mbps
IIC
Clients
16 patients
IntelliVue 802.11
Standalone Thick
Access Point
Monitoring LAN Printers
Figure 1-3 Typical Complex System Topology
1-15
Philips CareNet
Philips CareNet
Information Centers are designed to operate on Philips CareNet network, consisting of the
Serial Distribution Network (SDN) and the Philips System Communications Controller (PCC/
SCC) or the CareNet Controller. See Figure 1-4.
Philips CareNet is a local area communications network designed to share patient

physiological waves, parameters, and other data among bedside monitors, recorders, printers,
and other computer systems.
The PCC/SCC is the active device of the SDN, providing communications links to
instruments connected to the SDN and controlling data flow, timing, synchronization, and
distribution throughout the network. The Information Center processing unit contains an SDN
interface card for communication with the SCC and its SDN networked instruments.
Network Network cables between the SCC and wall boxes for system instrument connections (bedside
Cabling monitors, central stations, and so on) can be Philips’ proprietary, shielded, System
Distribution Cable (SDC) or standard LAN, Cat 5 and higher, Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP)
cable.
Patient Monitors PCC/SCC Information Center System

Telemetry
Monitor
Processing Unit
Switch
Display
UPS
Bedside
Monitors
Speaker 4-Channel Serial
Recorder (Optional)
2-Channel
Keyboard Recorder (USB)
IntelliVue
Telemetry
System
Figure 1-4 Typical Information Center Monitoring System Network
1-16
Compatible Patient Monitors and Software

The Information Center is designed to be compatible with recent Philips Healthcare - bedside
monitors, telemetry mainframes, central stations, and other computer systems compatible with
Philips’ Serial Distribution Network. It can both send data to and receive data from SDN
compatible instruments, recorders, and printers.
CMS 2002 Patient Philips Telemetry

Monitoring System V24 System
Patient Monitor
Philips IntelliVue Wired/Wireless M2/M3/M4

Telemetry System IntelliVue Patient Monitors Wired Patient Monitors
Wired/Wireless MP5 Wired/Wireless Wired/Wireless

Wireless MP5T HeartStart MRx MP2/X2 Patient Monitor
Patient Monitor Patient Monitor
Figure 1-5 Information Center Compatible Bedside and Telemetry Monitors
1-17
Table 1-3 Products Compatible with Release N.0 and EASI
Software Release Software Release

Product Name Product Number
Req’d for Rel. N.0 Req’d for EASI
IntelliVue Patient Monitor M8005A/M8007A/ C.00 and later C.00 and later
M8010A
MP51 Wired or Wireless Monitor M8105A F.00 and later E.00 and later
MP5T Wireless Monitor M8105AT F.00 and later F.00 and later
MP22 Wired or Wireless Monitor M8102A F.00 and later F.00 and later
X22 Monitor M3002A F.00 and later F.00 and later
Component Monitoring System M1175/76/86A C+ and later C+ and later
Philips V24 Patient Monitor M1205A C+ and later C+ and later
IntelliVue Telemetry System (PWD) M4840/M4850 B.01.xx B.01.xx
Digital UHF Telemetry M1403A/J E.00.19 E.00.19
Philips Telemetry System M2600A E.00.19 E.00.19
IntelliVue Instrument Telemetry MP20/30/40/50 C.00 and later C.00 and later
(1.4GHz wireless)
TeleMon M2636C A.0 to C.0 A.0 to C.03
Philips M2/M3/M4 Wired Monitor M3046A D.11.00 (Release D) E.0
M2/M3/M4 Measurement Server M3000A or D.12.00 (Release
D.1) and later paired
with M3000A4
E.00.23 (Release E)
when paired with
M3001A
HeartStart MRx Wired or Wireless M3535A 8.00.00, 9.00.00, Not Supported
Monitor F.00.01
1
IIC Release G.0 and later supports an MP5 that is used as a traditional monitor.
2IIC Release K.0 supports an MP5 or X2 with a telemetry label and supports additional
parameters (NBP, SpO2, Welch Allyn Sure Temp) being sent by means of telemetry
when an MP5 or X2 is not networked.
3New transmitters/transceivers require C.00 and later.
4Only wired M2/M3/M4 connections are supported on Release J.0 and later IntelliVue
Information Centers.
Note Some system level functions are not available unless the IPM (IntelliVue Patient Monitor) has
the latest software release.
1-18
Intellivue
Patient Monitor
Compatibility
IPM Information Center

Software D.01 E.0 E.01 F.0 G.0 H.0 J.0 K.0 L.0 M.0
A.2      
B.0        
B.1       
C.0        
D.0        
E.0      
F.0      
G.02      
H.0    
J.0  
1
Native Language Support (NLS) Text Catalog Upgrade (page 7-78) is required on IIC
and DBS.
2With IPM release G, VueLink data is sent by means of SCADA coding. SCADA
parameter support is provided with IIC Rls. L and later. Earlier releases require a
software patch and NLS catalog upgrade when connected to a release G and later
bedsides so parameters are mapped correctly under both MDIL and EMFC coding HL7
configurations.
MP2/X2 and MP5/MP5T Compatibility
Information Center
Monitor Software
D.01 E.0 E.01 F.0 G.0 H.0 J.0 K.0 L.0 M.0
MP51, 2 E.0, F.0      
MP2 F.0, G.03,   
H.0
MP5T F.0, G.03,   
H.0
MP5/X2 F.04, G.03   
H.0
1
IIC Release G.0 and later supports an MP5 that is used as a traditional monitor.
2
IIC Release J.0 and later is required to support MP5 features: Welch Allyn Sure Temp and
Telemetry as a Parameter (TAAP).
3
IIC Release L.0 and later is required to support MP5, MP5T, X2, or MP2 monitors using
Wireless Telemetry as a Parameter (WTAAP).
4
IIC Release K.0 and later supports an MP5 or X2 with a telemetry label and supports addi-
tional parameters (NBP, SpO2, Welch Allyn Sure Temp) being sent by means of telemetry
when an MP5 or X2 is not networked.
5
WTAAP support with Release L.0 and later.
1-19
Table 1-4 Information Center Compatible PC Models

PCModel Number Software Rel N.0
453564057431 Supported
HP DC7700 RR203UC
HP DC7700 GF894UC
HP rp5700 KB212UC
HP rp5700 SL008UC
Table 1-5 Information Center Compatible Server Models

Server Model Number Software Rel N.0
HP ML350 G5 AH450A
Compaq ML350 G5 AH450A
HP ML350 G5 AN216A
HP ML350 G6 AN200A
HP DL380 G6 2GHz Rack Mount AW198A
HP ML350 G6 BT822A Tower
HP DL380 G7 BT823A Rack Mount
The following Philips equipment is not compatible with Information Center systems.
Table 1-6 Information Center Non-Compatible Equipment
Product Name Product Number Software Release
Monitor Terminal 78534A/B/C all
Comprehensive Monitor Terminal 78532A/B/C all
Compact Configured Monitor 78352B, 78353A, 78354B all
Minishot/Miracle Bedsides 78352A, 78352C, 78353B, all
78354A, 78354C
Digital UHF Telemetry M1403A all Releases prior to E.01
SDN Arrhythmia System 78720A/B all
Central Monitor 78560 all
Patient Information Center 78501/502/504/508/509 all
Clinical Event Review M1251A all
1-20
IIC Compatible
Software
Table 1-7 Information Center Compatible Software
Product Name Software Release Required for N.0

1,2
TraceMasterVue B.02.03
B.03.xx
C.00.xx3
Holter 2.6 and later
Application Server N.00.xx
Emergin Integration Server 8.00.11 (SP1), 9.00, 10.0
Emergin Runtime Library 8.00.09 (SP1), 9.00, 10.0
Clinical Data Services B.01.17
Device Location Map Application A.00.06, A.00.13, A.00.16 and later
4
Research Data Export Client Application B.00.xx
CareVue Integration Engine/ICIP5 C.00
Enhanced Web Server (for DBS) N.00.xx
PDA Viewer Software K.00.10 and Later
1
IIC Release K.00.xx and later does not support TraceMasterVue NT.
2
XML 1.04 is required on IIC.
3
TMV C.00.xx requires .NET 3.0.
4
RDE viewer does not support EASI lead export. Standard lead export must
be selected in Config Wizard to view waves (page 6-27).
5
IIC Release M.00.xx supports ICIP C.0 if ICIP is resident on the hospital
LAN, not the Philips Monitoring LAN. ICIP C.0 software update is required
for new ADT HL7 functionality in IIC M.0.
1-21
Features
Features
The Information Center is a central monitoring station that provides multi-patient display of
real-time patient waveforms and physiologic parameters. It also provides annunciation of
alarms and patient data storage and review functions--full disclosure waves and parameters,
alarms, ST segments, events, trends, and EASI 12-lead presentations. The patient monitoring
features of the Information Center are described briefly in this manual; for detailed
information, refer to the Information Center Instructions for Use.
Main Screen The Main Screen of the Information Center can show up to 16 patients in Patient Sectors
that can have 3 waves per patient with a maximum of 24 waves per screen (32 waveforms for
one display, but dual display is recommended). You can design Patient Sector arrangement to
suit user preference and can have up to 2 columns and 8 rows. The patient name can be shown
in various formats.
Patient data can be color coded for easy identification. Colors for waves and parameters can
be individually selected using color pallets available in display configuration screens. Patient
Sectors in alarm are highlighted in color for immediate recognition of alarm conditions and
severity. The date, time, and messages regarding Recorder and Printer status appear at the top
of the Main Screen.
1-22
Features
Figure 1-6 Main Screen
Patient You can view specific data for each patient in the Patient Window (Figure 1-7). To open
Window the Patient Window for a particular patient you must position the cursor in the patient
sector so that the Patient Window button appears. When you click the button the Patient
Window for the selected patient opens and can show up to 4 waves and 12 parameters.
When you open the Patient Window on an Information Center with a single display, the
Main Screen resizes to accommodate the Patient Window. For systems with a second
display, the Main Screen is the first display and the Patient Window opens in the second
display. The Main Screen can also occupy both displays. The Patient Window in a dual
display system can show up to 7 waves for a single patient.
In dual display systems, both displays can have Patient Sectors on the Main Screen. For
example, on a 16-patient system the Main Screen of each display includes 8 Patient Sectors.
This feature is available for 8, 12, and 16-patient information centers. When an application
window is open, all patient sectors move to one display, and the application opens on the
second display. To close the application, click the Main Screen button.
Additional functions for accessing patient information and changing monitoring parameters
are at the bottom of the Patient Window.
Figure 1-7 Patient Window
Data Storage The Large Database Server can store up to 96 hours of patient data for up to 128 active
patients, e.g. eight Information Centers with 16 patients each. The Small Database Server can
store up to 48 hours of patient data for up to 48 active patients, e.g. three Information Centers
with 16 patients each. Patient data are kept on the Server until the patient is discharged. The
Large Database Server can store up to 64 discharged patients; a Small Database Server can
store up to 24 discharged patients; and a Standalone Database Server can store up to 8
discharged patients.
1-23
Features
The 96 hours of stored patient data include:
• full disclosure waves, 4 waveforms per patient

• physiologic parameters
• One hundred and fifty 30-second alarm records and saved strips, 4 waves per record
• trends with 1 minute of resolution
• ST segments
• events with 1-hour strip function
All Controls All Controls is the primary control window for an Information Center. When you click the
All Controls, the following selections appear.
• Patient Management
• Alarm Management and Setup
• Patient Data Review
• Configuration and Support
Patient Management, Alarm Management and Setup, and Patient Data Review are
intended for clinical users. Their purpose and operation are described in detail in the
IntelliVue Information Center Instructions for Use.
Note Not all features described may be available in all systems unless they are purchased. Not all
features are available in local mode.
Patient Patient Management provides selections for managing Patient Sectors. These include
Management Admit, Care Groups, Discharge, Sector Setup, Stored Waves, Standby, and Lab
Data Entry.
Alarm Alarm Management and Setup permits configuration of Arryth Alarms, ST Alarms,
Management Record/Store/Page, ST Setup, QT Setup, Volume Control, Telemetry Setup, and
and Setup Paging Controls.
Patient Data Patient Data Review windows display patient physiological parameters and alarm events
Review that have been collected over time from bedside and telemetry monitors. Review windows can
be designed in a variety of formats to facilitate clinician evaluations of patient status and
decisions of diagnosis, prognosis, medication, and patient transfer and discharge.
Note Refer to the Information Center Instructions for Use for detailed descriptions of the
Patient Data Review selections.
Patient Data Review provides Trend Review, Alarm Review, Event Review, Wave
Review, ST Review, and 12-Lead Review selections. Stored data for all patients on the
Server are available for review by any Information Center and Client on the Network. Full
Control, Read Only, or No Access to patient data stored on the Server is controlled at the
1-24
Features
Information Center supplying the data. All stored data - full disclosure waves, alarms events,
ST segments, and trends - for each patient can be reviewed.
Trend Review • Tabular display of physiological parameters

• Graphical presentation at 1 min. resolution using bivariate trend plots
• 10 configurable groups with 5 bivariate trend plots, 10 parameters per
group
• Exact parameters displayed for cursor time location
• Simultaneous display of trend plots:
• single display - 2 trend plots
• dual display - 5 trend plots
• Trends displayed in 1, 4, 8, 12, and 24 hour time scales
Alarm Review • 30-second compressed waveforms of alarm or saved strip events
• Up to 4 waveforms per event
• Simultaneous display of alarm events:
• single display - 5 alarm strips
• dual display - 10 alarm strips
• Search by alarm severity
• Interval measurement
• Label alarm
Event Review • 10 configurable groups, up to 5 alarm criteria per group
• strip displayed for verification of event criteria
• total occurrences of alarms calculated and displayed in 1, 4, 8, 12, and
24 hour time scales
Wave Review • Continuous Full Disclosure of up to 4 configurable waves per patient
• 1 to 60 minutes wave duration per screen:
• single display - 1 wave for up to 30 minutes
• dual display - 4 waves for up to 60 minutes
• Timeline, Trend, and Event Navigators
• Strip Reports
ST Review • ECG complexes stored at 1 minute resolution for connected patients
• 50 mm/sec. presentation for increased resolution
• EASI 12-lead presentations
• Superimposition of up to 4 sets of complexes with ST values
• Trend, event and ST topology navigators for fast searches and greater
context
12-Lead Review • Retrospective review of 12 derived leads
• 2.5 to 10 second snippets
• 3 x 4, 6 x 2, and 12 x 1 (row by column) display and reports
(12 x 1 is not available on single display)
• EASI leads from M3-E patient monitors are not available
Trend Review displays graphs or tables of patient physiological parameters that have been
automatically stored during patient monitoring. All parameters stored can be trended. Trends
are organized into pre-configured trend groups. Each group can contain up to 10 trends
presented two at a time in trend charts with up to 5 bivariate trend plots of 10 parameters per
group. One trend uses the left axis and the other the right axis. Data include the parameter
name, measurement units, trend plot, scales, and values. Several different trend presentations
are provided, depending on the parameter.
1-25
Features
• Periodic Parameters: Single-value, periodic, continuously monitored parameters, such

as heart rate, are displayed as a single line plot. Triple-value, periodic parameters, such
as invasive blood pressure, are shown as 3, single line plots of the same color.
• Aperiodic Parameters: Aperiodic, non-continuous parameter presentations depend
on the number of values to be shown.
• Multiple Parameters: Multiple parameters, such as ST, are presented as separate
curves, each of a different color.
• Discrete Events: Discrete events, such as VPB count, are histograms.
The time scale of trend plots can be 1, 4, 8, 12, or 24 hours and the vertical scale is
changeable. Information Center systems with a single display can display 2 trend plots and
systems with dual display, 5 trend plots. Trend storage of 24 hours is standard with 48, 72, or
96 hours available as options.
Alarm Review shows the alarm events that have been automatically stored during patient
monitoring and alarm strips that were saved for each alarm. Stored alarms are those that were
configured in Alarm Management and Setup and have been stored in the alarm history
database during patient monitoring. Up to 50, 30-second alarms can be stored in the standard
system and up to 150, 30-second alarms as a purchased option. Each stored alarm includes the
date and time, alarm text, and a 30-second compressed waveform. Systems with a single
display can display 5 alarm strips, and systems with dual display, 10 alarm strips.
Saved strips are those that are manually saved from Wave Review, Event Review, or Alarm
Review windows. These strips are labeled “Saved” and can be viewed along with stored
alarms. Up to 10 strips can be saved in the standard system and up to 30 for the 150, 30-
second alarm option for the Information Center. Each saved strip contains up to 4, 8-second,
uncompressed waveforms and includes the date and time.
Event Review provides an overview of the frequency and duration of specific events, such
as VTach, along with a strip of the waveform during the event. Up to 10 event groups can be
configured with up to 5 alarm criteria per group. Each event includes the name of the event,
its duration, the name and value of the parameter that exceeded its limit, and the time and
date. Event bars show the duration of the event and are color coded to represent its severity as
follows:
• Red 3-star event *** most severe

• Yellow 2-star event ** medium severe
• Cyan 1-star event not severe
The waveform strip is automatically displayed on the screen for the event bar selected and is
updated when the event cursor is repositioned. The total number of occurrences of alarms are
calculated and displayed in 1, 4, 12, and 24 hour time scales. Event storage is 24 hours
standard with 48, 72 or 96 hours available as options. The waveform strip is 1 hour standard.
EASI 12-Lead Review (a method of deriving 12 ECG Leads using 5 electrodes) permits
you to view all available leads from the Patient Window. Details of EASI 12-Lead ECG
monitoring are provided in the IntelliVue Information Center Instructions for Use.
1-26
Features
Configuration Configuration and Support has applications for clinical users, nurse managers, and
and Support service personnel. Some of these applications are password protected to prevent accidental
system or network changes by unauthorized users.
Status Logs is available to all clinical users and is not password protected. This function
opens a Status Logs window that provides the operational status of all devices connected to
the network. This application can be used to quickly identify and report device problems.
Unit Settings accesses unit-wide configuration controls.This function is password protected

and intended for nurse managers or persons responsible for setting unit-wide patient
monitoring configurations. To change the initial default Unit Settings password see
Change Clinical Units Password, page 7-70. This function must only be used by
persons responsible for setting patient monitoring unit-wide settings.
Service is password protected and permits access to Service Mode configuration. For more
information refer to Service Screen Menu Selections.
Central Reports permits configuration, printing, and scheduling of Trend, Alarm, Event,
Wave, Summary and Bedside Reports.
Label Assignment is password protected. It permits you to automatically or manually

assign equipment labels to patient monitors and manually assign equipment labels to
telemetry devices. For more information refer to Label Assignment, page 6-104.
Alert Data An alerting system is available (in limited geographies) for secondary notification of patient
Integration alarms. Information Center systems with the Alert Data Integration option acquire patient
alarm data from the bedside or telemetry monitoring system and automatically relay text
alarm messages (by means of LAN connection) to a receiving device. No waveform data is
sent. The receiving device is configured through Config Wizard. See Network
Configuration, page 6-39. A clinician can assign beds to a paging device through
All Controls > Paging Controls. For more detail refer to the Information Center
Instructions for Use.
Warning Alert Data Integration is a secondary alarm notification system. It is not intended for
primary notification of alarms, physiological, or demographic data. Receipt by the
external software device of alarms is not confirmed and delivery to the end device is not
guaranteed. Clinicians using Alert Data Integration must remain within monitoring
distance of the primary alarm notification device.
The primary alarm notification device is either the bedside monitor (if present) or the
Information Center (for telemetry monitors).
The pager/phone format is configured in the Emergin system. When an alarm is silenced, a
cancel message is sent to the Alert Data Integration receiving device. If that device has not yet
sent out the alarm page, then the message is cancelled and not sent out. If the message has
been sent, the receiving device will clear the message from the end device. If connection
between the Information Center and Alert Data Integration receiving device is lost for any
reason no alarms are sent and the message “Alarm paging not available” appears in the
Information Center system message area.
1-27
Features
Data Reliability The large Database Server utilizes RAID (Redundant Array of Independent Disks) technology
to assure fault tolerant data collection and storage in the event of disk failure. Data are written
to multiple disks simultaneously to provide data storage redundancy. If the Server or Network
fails for any reason, Information Centers revert to local database operation so that patient
monitoring data collection are maintained. The small Database Server does not use RAID.
Remote Access Error Logs, showing all events that occur in each device on the Network when it starts and as
it operates and giving device operational status, can be accessed during patient monitoring by
means of a modem (if supported) in the Server. This permits efficient troubleshooting and
problem identification without disruption to patient care. Archive/Restore and Backup Error
Log utilities are also available remotely.
Information The Information Center Web provides remote, read-only access to physiologic patient data
Center Web that is resident on a Database Server or M3150 Information Center. Patient Data Review
Access applications can be accessed through the hospital HIS intranet using standard web browsers,
such as Internet Explorer and Netscape. In a Large network system, up to 100 simultaneous
users can view stored waves, alarms, events, ST segments, trends, and viewable recording
strip data for each patient monitored by the M3150/M3169/M3154. You can access data with
a log-on procedure using the hostname of the M3150 Information Center/Database Server or
the IP Address of the Web LAN card as the URL. The Information Center WEBTM Login
screen is illustrated in Figure 1-8.
The URL can also be the Server hostname if the hospital LAN DNS (Domain Name Server)
is properly configured. If there are multiple Servers on the Network, each Server hostname
must be unique.
Figure 1-8 Login Dialog for Information Center Web
1-28
Features
A user-selected Password is required to access the Select Patient screen (Figure 1-9) from
which you can choose a listed patient and the type of stored data you want to view.
Notes Part of the Web configuration procedure permits specifying the hospital intranet PCs that can
access the Server and review patient data.
All Philips Patient Monitoring products that operate in a LAN environment undergo industry-
standard virus checking as part of the product manufacturing process. If installed as specified,
the Information Center will not introduce a virus onto the hospital LAN. In order to allow the
level of access desired by users while ensuring that viruses do not affect the operation of the
Information Center product, it is imperative that hospitals are vigilant in maintaining a virus-
free intranet. This is the responsibility of the hospital, not Philips Healthcare.
Figure 1-9 Patient List
Configuring Config Wizard, which runs at product installation, permits configuration of the Information
the Center system hardware and software (including the Network and many of the Network
Information device parameters). You can access Config Wizard directly from the Service screen
Center Configuration menu if you must reconfigure specific parameters after initial software
installation.
Warning When Config Wizard runs on the Database Server, all Information Centers and Clients
on the Network will restart and open in local database mode. No patient data is stored by
the Server during this time.
1-29
Features
Service Screen Access to the Service screen requires a Service Password. An initial Service Password is
Menu provided, which should be used by assigned service personnel who are properly trained.
Selections
All Service tools are available in English only. The Service screen menus include:
• Support Logs which provide operational history and Philips device and network
condition,
• Diagnostics tools for troubleshooting Philips system problems for Philips and
Windows applications,
• Configuration applications for configuration of network and connected devices (after
initial software installation),
• Security tools which permit or restrict access,
• Other Services that provide Windows configuration tools and remote access
capability,
• Shutdown which permits controlled shutdown of Philips application software and
access to the Windows Desk top, and
• Maintenance applications for troubleshooting the network and connected devices.
Warning Service menu selections with an exclamation point (!) only run when the Information
Center or Client is in non-monitoring mode, during which no patient monitoring can
occur.
Note If a service application screen appears over the Information Center Main Screen, use the
mouse to move the screen. If a service application is open but not shown, press Alt + Tab
simultaneously to select the application and bring it forward.
The Read Only Config Wizard selection on the Configuration drop-down menu provides
read-only access to network and device settings while all devices are in monitoring mode.
Configuring Configuration of patient monitoring applications can be done by setting unit wide default
Patient settings or patient specific settings. Unit wide default settings provide clinical configuration
Monitoring settings as the default values for all patients on the unit. You can override these default
values, however, to tailor monitoring applications to the needs of a specific patient.
• Unit Wide Default Settings - Unit wide default settings are made in the Unit Settings
function of the Configuration and Support menu of the All Controls window. This
window provides for setting unit wide default values for alarms, patient data review,
output devices (recorder, display, sound volume), and telemetry frequencies. As noted
earlier, unit wide configuration controls are protected by a Unit Settings Password.
Descriptions of unit wide configurations and patient specific configurations are
described in the Information Center Instructions for Use.
• Patient Specific Configurations - Unit wide default settings and some system
configurations can be changed by the clinician to meet the needs of a specific patient
using the patient monitoring applications accessed from the All Controls window.
1-30
Features
Changes in alarm settings, trend groups, stored waves, patient sector displays,
equipment assignment, and so on, can be made in these applications.
Note All patient-specific settings return to unit-wide default settings when a patient is discharged.
Archiving and Configuration settings for system and patient monitoring applications can be saved to archive
Restoring media so they are available if you need to reconfigure the system after software upgrades.
System Settings These archiving and restoration features are available from the Configuration menu of the
Service screen.
Getting Help On-line Help screens provide additional descriptions of each application. The types of Help
information available include:
Clinical User Help which is available by clicking the Help button in the upper right of each
clinical application
Service Help which is available for Service applications and provides application
descriptions and configuration procedures
A Help button appears in the upper right corner of the application window. Help information
from this location is for Philips applications only.
Windows Help which is a standard part of the Windows operating system for applications
that are not part of Philips software
You can access these screens by clicking the Windows menu bar Help button.
1-31
Clinical Applications
The Information Center is a patient monitoring central station that provides a wide variety of
clinical monitoring applications. The primary application is the central display of
physiological waveforms and parameters from patients connected to networked bedside and
telemetry monitors. Information Center applications derived from these measured data include
alarm annunciation, arrhythmia analysis, ST segment analysis (for telemetry monitors), and
extensive patient data history review capability.
Patient Information Center application software provides the display of physiologic waves and
Monitoring parameters for up to 16 patients from bedside and telemetry monitors connected to an
Information Center by means of CareNet.
Typical Plug-in Plug-in modules (Figure 1-10) that can be used with Philips’ bedside monitoring systems
Modules produce data that can be viewed at the Information Center. For more information refer to the
Information Center Instructions for Use and Table 1-8.
Figure 1-10 Typical Plug-in Modules (not all-inclusive) used in Philips Bedside
Monitoring Systems
VueLink modules provide SDN interfaces with external monitoring devices. There are three
VueLink module options, each interfacing with a specific device group:
• Stand-alone parameter devices

• Ventilators
• Gas analyzers
Several external devices are supported within each device group.
1-32
Table 1-8 Typical Philips Plug-in Modules

Philips Model Number Module Name Abbreviation
1
M1001A/B Electrocardiogram ECG
1
M1002A/B Electrocardiogram/Respiration ECG/Resp
M1006A1/B Invasive Pressure P
1 1
M1008A /B Noninvasive Blood Pressure NPB
M1012A Cardiac Output CO
M1015A Sidestream Carbon Dioxide CO2
M1016A Carbon Dioxide CO2
M1017A Fractional Inspired Oxygen FIO2
M1018A Transcutaneous Partial Pressure of Oxygen and tcpO2/tcpCO2
Carbon Dioxide
M1020A1/B Oxygen Saturation/Plethysmography SpO2/Pleth
M1021A Mixed Venous Oxygen Saturation SvO2
M1029A Temperature T
M1032A VueLink
M1027A Electroencephalograph EEG
M1034A Bispectral Index BIS
M1014A Spirometry AWF/AWV/AWP
2
M3001A Multi-Measurement Server MMS
M3012A2 Hemodynamic Measurement Server Extension HMSE
2
M3015A Microstream Carbon Dioxide
M3016A2 Mainstream Carbon Dioxide CO2
M3014A2 Mainstream Capnography

1
Compatible with SDN only
2 Compatible with IPM only
Waves and Table 1-9 describes Information Center patient monitoring capability. The Philips Module
Parameters column lists the Plug-In Module data source
Table 1-9 Information Center Patient Monitoring Capability

Philips
Waves Parameters
Module
ECG ECG Electrocardiogram HR Heart Rate
HR-Pls Difference between HR and Pls rate
PVC Premature Ventricular Contraction
ST ST segment values for up to 12 leads
QT QT interval
QT-HR Heart rate based on current QT interval
QTc QT corrected value
dQTc delta between QT baseline and current
corrected QT value
1-33

Philips
Waves Parameters
Module
ECG/Resp RESP Respiration RESP (or RR) Respiration Rate
P ABP Arterial Blood Pressure ABP1 Arterial Blood Pressure
ART Arterial Pressure ART1 Arterial Pressure
PAP Pulmonary Artery Pressure PAP1 Pulmonary Artery Pressure
PAWP Pulmonary Artery Wedge Pressure
AO Aortic Pressure AO1 Aortic Pressure
LAP Left Atrial Pressure LAP Left Atrial Pressure
RAP Right Atrial Pressure RAP Right Atrial Pressure
CVP Central Venous Pressure CVP Central Venous Pressure
P, P1, P2, P3, P4 Non-specific Pressure P1, P11, P21, P31, Non-specific Pressure
P41
UAP Umbilical Arterial Pressure UAP1 Umbilical Arterial Pressure
BAP Brachial Arterial Pressure BAP1 Brachial Arterial Pressure
FAP Femoral Arterial Pressure FAP1 Femoral Arterial Pressure
UVP Umbilical Venous Pressure UVP Umbilical Venous Pressure
ICP Intercranial Pressure ICP Intercranial Pressure
IC1, IC2 Alternate Intercranial Pressure
CPP Cerebral Perfusion Pressure
NBP NBP1 Non-invasive Blood Pressure
PlsNBP Pulse from NBP
CO CO Cardiac Output
CI Cardiac Index
Tblood Blood Temperature
SVR Systemic Vascular Resistance
SVRI Systemic Vascular Resistance Index
CCO Continuous Cardiac Output
CCI Continuous Cardiac Index
CO2 CO2 Carbon Dioxide AWRR Airway Respiration Rate
EtCO2 End tidal Carbon Dioxide
ImCO2 Inspired Minimum Carbon Dioxide
FIO2 FIO2 Fractional Inspired oxygen
tcpO2/ tcp O2 Transcutaneous partial press. - O2
tcpCO2 tcp CO2 Transcutaneous partial press.- CO2
SpO2/Pleth SpO2 Arterial oxygen saturation SpO2 Arterial oxygen saturation
PLETH Plethysmogram PULSE Pulse Rate
dSpO2 delta between SpO2 measurements
SvO2 SvO2 Mixed venous oxygen saturation
T2 T1, T22 T3, T4 Temperature
DiffT Temperature difference
EEG EEG1 Electroencephalograph SEF Spectral Edge Frequency
EEG2 MDF Mean Dominant Frequency
PPF Peak Power Frequency
TP Total Power
1-34

Philips
Waves Parameters
Module
BIS EEG Electroencephalograph BIS Bispectral Index
EMG Electromyographic Activity
SEF Spectral Edge Frequency
TP Total Power
Bursts EEG Bursts
Spirometry AWF Airway flow AWF Airway Flow
AWP Airway pressure AWP Airway Pressure
AWV Airway Volume
PIP Peak Inspiratory Pressure
TV Tidal Volume
Predictive pTOral Predictive Temperature (oral)
Temperature pTRect Predictive Temperature (rectal)
pTAxil Predictive Temperature (axillary)
1 Parameters can be Systolic (SYS), Diastolic (DIAS), and Mean (MEAN).
2 Temperature labels can include Tart (arterial), Tblood (blood), Tcore (core), Tesoph (esophageal), Trect (rectal), Tskin (skin),
Tven (venous), Tnaso (nasopharyngeal), Tamb (ambiant), Tcereb (cerebral), Tymp (tympanic), and Tvesic (vesical).
Telemetry The IIC can also display patient data from Philips Telemetry systems (Figure 1-11):
Monitoring
• M1403A/J Digital UHF Telemetry system (software Release E.00 and later),
• M2600 Philips Telemetry system, and
• M4840/4850 IntelliVue Telemetry System.
Note The Information Center can monitor up to 16 patients from two Philips telemetry mainframes
without an SCC (page 2-40).
The M1403A/J Telemetry system provides ECG monitoring of two ECG waves with the
ability to view up to seven leads. M2600A Philips Telemetry provides ECG monitoring of
three ECG waves of up to seven leads. The M2600A also provides SpO2 measurements. ST
Segment analysis is available as an option for both systems, but it is not required when used
with the Information Center because the Philips system provides ST Segment analysis of
telemetry data as a standard feature.
The M4840/M4850 Philips IntelliVue Telemetry Systems provide ambulatory and bedside
monitoring of ECG and SpO2 parameters of adult and pediatric patients in health care
facilities. The M4840 uses the FCC-allocated WMTS spectrums 1395-1400 MHz and 1427-
1432 MHz. The M4850 uses the ISM 2.4 MHz spectrum. For both systems this bi-directional
RF link permits clinically significant data and control information to be received from and
sent to the patient-worn Transceiver.
1-35
M1403A/J Digital UHF M2600 Philips

Telemetry System Telemetry System
M4840/M4850 Philips
IntelliVue Telemetry System
Figure 1-11 Telemetry Systems for Information Center Monitoring
Alarm Information Center software also provides extensive alarm annunciation capability and
Annunciation flexibility. Alarm events are detected by comparing physiological data against preconfigured
limit values. Alarms detected by Information Center software include:
• Arrhythmia alarms (for data from both bedside and telemetry monitors)
• ST Segment alarms (for data from telemetry monitors only)
The Information Center displays alarm events that it detects as well as those generated by
networked monitors.
Priorities Information Center software prioitizes alarms into the following levels of severity:
• Red***life threatening (e.g. Asystole)

• Yellow**alarm limit exceeded (e.g. high heart rate)
• Red!!!Red level inoperative (INOP) condition
• Yellow!!Yellow level INOP condition
• CyanINOP condition (e.g. patient leads off)
Annunciation Alarms are announced by the following indicators:
• Patient Sector turns blue (Red and Yellow alarms only)

• Alarm Tone indicates the alarm severity (no sound for soft INOPs)
• Alarm message appears in Patient Sector and Patient Window of the same color as
the alarm.
1-36
For rate alarms, the message indicates a parameter in alarm, the maximum or
minimum value of that parameter, and the alarm limit that was violated
(e.g. HR 134 > 120).
For event alarms, the message indicates the event that caused the alarm
(e.g. Asystole).
• ECG recording generates for preset periods preceding and following the alarm event
(Red and Yellow alarms only).
Figure 1-6 shows a typical Main Screen with patients in alarm. Note that Patient Sector
CCU2 has the alarm message ***TACHY 160 > 140. Patient Sectors in alarm are
backlighted in blue for easy identification, and the alarm message window is backlighted in
the color of the alarm severity. For example, the CCU2 message shows a red alarm (***)
message.
Table 1-10 summarizes the various alarms that can occur, including the corresponding alarm
sound, alarm message location, ECG recording generation, and alarm meaning. Alarm
messages are described in the IntelliVue Information Center Instructions for Use.
Table 1-10 Information Center Alarm Priorities
Alarm Sound Message Recording Meaning
Red (***) Traditional/CareNet On Display Yes Life threatening, e.g.
sound: continuous, high- with *** AYSTOLE
pitch rapid tone
IEC/ISO sound: repeated
bursts of five rapid high-
pitch beeps
Yellow (**) Traditional/CareNet On Display Yes non-arrhythmia alarm limit
sound: continuous, with ** violation (except for HR,
medium-pitch tone which is an Arrhythmia
IEC/ISO sound: repeated alarm)
bursts of three rapid
low-pitch beeps
Yellow (*) Traditional/CareNet On Display Yes Arrhythmia yellow alarm
Arrhythmia sound: noncontinuous, with * detected
medium pitch tone
(~10s)
IEC/ISO sound: two
rapid low-pitch beeps
Yellow (**) Traditional/CareNet On Display Yes Nurse Call button on
Nurse Call on sound: noncontinuous, with ** telemetry transmitter
Telemetry medium pitch tone (~8s) depressed and system
IEC/ISO sound: two configured to alarm
rapid low-pitch beeps
1-37
Table 1-10 Information Center Alarm Priorities

Alarm Sound Message Recording Meaning
Hard INOP (*) Traditional/CareNet On Display No Inoperative condition that
sound: continuous, slow with no * prevents monitoring, e.g.
low-pitch tone LEADS OFF, or has direct
IEC/ISO sound: repeated effect on the patient, e.g.
bursts of two slow low- NBP CUFF OVERPRESS
pitch beeps
Soft INOP (*) none On Display No Inoperative condition that
with no * prevents signal processing,
e.g., NOISY ECG.
Monitoring continues during
this INOP condition.
Arrhythmia In addition to patient monitoring, the Information Center system provides arrhythmia
Monitoring monitoring for both bedside and telemetry monitored patients. The multi-lead arrhythmia
monitoring algorithm is designed for adult, pediatric, and neonatal patient ECG waveforms
for heart rate and ventricular arrhythmia. Multi-lead arrhythmia monitoring is performed on
the user-selected primary ECG lead and the secondary ECG lead.
The following arrhythmia monitoring functionality is provided for both standard models of
the Information Center system. For both models, beat annotation and rhythm and ectopic
status messages are provided in the Patient Window.
Basic Basic Arrhythmia functionality includes the basic cardiotach functions of heart rate, PVC
Arrhythmia rate, beat-to-beat heart rate, and the detection of the following alarms:
• Asystole
• Ventricular fibrillation
• Ventricular tachycardia
• Extreme bradycardia
• Extreme tachycardia
• Pacer not capturing
• Pacer not pacing
• PVC/min
• High heart rate
• Low heart rate
Enhanced Enhanced Arrhythmia adds the following alarms to Basic Arrhythmia functionality.
Arrhythmia
• Irregular heart rate
• Nonsustained V-Tach
• Supraventricular Tach
• Ventricular Rhythm
• Run PVCs
• Pair PVCs
• R-on-T PVC
• Multiform PVCs
• Pause
• Ventricular bigeminy
• Ventricular trigeminy
1-38
Details of the arrhythmia alarms and user interfaces are provided in the IntelliVue
Information Center Instructions for Use. Details of the arrhythmia algorithm are described
in the Arrhythmia Monitoring Application Note provided in the system Documentation CD.
ST Segment The Information Center system provides ST segment analysis for adult patients monitored
Monitoring through telemetry. ST segments can be analyzed for up to six leads of ECG monitoring
(depending on the type of telemetry monitor and patient cable) for both non-paced and
atrially paced patients, but not ventricularly paced patients.
# Cable Philips Digital UHF Animation

Wires Telemetry Telemetry Telemetry
3 1 lead 1 lead
4 up to 6 leads
5 up to 6 leads 2 leads
ST segment analysis for patients monitored by bedside monitors is performed at the bedside
monitor and is not available on the Information Center.
Details of displayed ST data, ST alarms, and user interfaces are provided in the IntelliVue
Information Center Instructions for Use; details of the ST Segment algorithm are described
in the ST Segment Monitoring Application Note provided on the User Documentation CD.
1-39
Upgrades
Upgrades
Upgrade Options, page 1-47, lists software upgrade options for Information Center
models.
Memory Memory upgrades may be required when upgrading to Release N.

Requirements
Table 1-11 Memory Requirements
Memory Requirement1 Memory

Model
Upgrade
DC7700 Add 512 MB Memory 1 GB 862143 (H20)
rp5700/DC6700/DC7700 1 GBMemory 1 GB 862143 (H25)
1 GBMemory (1 x 1 GB) 1 GB 862143 (H27)
ML350 G5 2 GBMemory (2 x 1 GB) 2 GB 862143 (H29)
1For more than 16 patients or more than 16 patients and Trend Display you must have 2 GB.
Hard Disk The following hard disk upgrades are required when upgrading to Release N.0.
Requirements
Table 1-12 Small DBS Disk Space Requirement - DC7700/rp5700

EASI Full Disclosure Req’d Disk Space (GB) Upgrade Required
 24 17 No Upgrade Needed
 48 27 No Upgrade Needed
24 12 No Upgrade Needed
48 17 No Upgrade Needed
BIOS Release M requires specific BIOS configuration for the supported PCs and servers. To
Requirements modify the BIOS configuration (page 7-107).
Export When upgrading to M, be sure that the user-configurable Username and Password for the
Devices 12-Lead, Alert Data Integration, and Holter Export devices are the same as those configured
Passwords in the remote computer. You may have to reconfigure the particular device Username and
Password if changes to the device occur in Config Wizard.
1-40
Upgrades
Release Export User Name Password Share

M Holter User Configurable User Configurable PMDExport
12-Lead User Configurable User Configurable PMDExport
ADI/Paging User Configurable User Configurable
HL7
Hospital ADT User Configurable User Configurable
Wave Snippet PMDExport P^d3*p0rt PMDExport
1-41
Components and Options
Components and Options

Philips offers Basic Systems which include the workstations, minimum software capability
required for Patient Care Network operation, and a variety of Options to tailor the system to
specific hospital requirements.
Basic Table 1-13 lists the basic hardware and software of Information Centers, Clients, and
Systems Database Servers.
Table 1-13 Basic Hardware and Software for Information Center Systems
M3155/
Hardware Description M31501 M3151 M31701 M3154 M3169
M3145
Processing Unit Workstation Workstation Workstation Workstation Server Workstation
with 3-1/2 inch disk2 and      
DVD/CD-ROM drives
Hard drive memory 40 GB 40 GB 40 GB 40 GB 3 @ 72 GB 40 GB
each
RAM 1 GB3 1 GB 1 GB 1 GB 2 GB 1 GB
Audio card     No No
SDN Interface card     No No
10/100 Mb/s NIC      
Keyboard and Mouse      
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) 650 VA 650 VA 650 VA 650 VA 1000 VA 650 VA
Philips Recorder and Rack with 60V     No No
power supply
Speaker (external)    No No No
Isolation Transformer (Japan only)   No  No No
Software Description
Windows Operating System software Workstation Workstation Workstation Workstation Server Server
Philips applications software including:      
Monitoring for # patients up to: 4, 6, 8, 12,
16
Data Storage for # patients up to: 4, 6, 8, 12, 4, 6, 8, 12, 128 48
Data Review for # patients up to: 16, 24, 32 16 4, 6, 8, 12, 128 48
16
Display of up to 4 waveforms    
per patient
Multi-lead arrhythmia analysis   
(22 alarms)
ST Segment analysis   
1-42
Purchased Options
Table 1-13 Basic Hardware and Software for Information Center Systems
M3155/
Hardware Description M31501 M3151 M31701 M3154 M3169
M3145
Wave storage - 4 waveforms per patient  Patient Data Storage 24 - 96 hr 24 - 96 hr
provided
Alarm Storage of 30 sec. alarm records  150 alarms 150 alarms
and saved strips, 4 waves per by Database Server
record
ST Segment storage  24 - 96 hr 24 - 96 hr
Trend storage with 1 min. of resolution  24 - 96 hr 24 - 96 hr
Event storage with 1 hour strip function  24 - 96 hr 24 - 96 hr
1
A local database M3150 system and M3170 Patient Link will only monitor a maximum of 16 SDN beds.
2
New PC hardware does not have a 3-1/2 inch disk drive.
3
For more than 16 patients or more than 16 patients and Trend Display you must have 2 GB.
Purchased Options
Table 1-14 lists options that can be added to basic Philips systems at initial purchase. The
Purchased Options are preloaded into the Information Center System before it is shipped.
Options must be purchased under the following Philips systems product numbers.
• M3140 Information Center Low Acuity Product # 865435

• M3150 Information Center Local DB Product # 865436
• M3145 Information Center Small Network DB Product # 865117
• M3155 Information Center Large Network DB Product # 865418
• M3151 Information Center Client Product # 865415
• M3169 Small Database Server Product # 865419
• M3154 Large Database Server Product # 865420
• M3170 Patient Link Product # 865421
• M3177 Information Center Trend Display Product # 865416
Table 1-14 Purchased Options for Philips Systems

Option Description M3150 M3145/55 M3151 M3170 M3154 M3169 M3177 M3140
A01 1 M3145/55 Connectivity 
A02 2 M3145/55 Connectivity  
A04 4 Patient Review Capability     
1-43
Purchased Options
Table 1-14 Purchased Options for Philips Systems

Option Description M3150 M3145/55 M3151 M3170 M3154 M3169 M3177 M3140
A24 24 Patient Review Capability  
A32 32 Patient Review Capability  
A64 64 Patient Review Capability 
C01 Dual Display    
C03 150 Alarms 
C14 HL7 Export   
C17 12-Lead Analysis/Export  
C23 Holter Data Export  
C67 Alert Data Integration  
C70 Web Serving 
C71 Patient Data Transfer 
C72 Wave Strip Export License (Non-Philips)  
C73 Add SDN   
C74 Web Server 
C75 Biomedical PC     
C76 Research Data Export  
D48 48 Hour Clinical Event Review   
D72 72 Hour Clinical Event Review   
D96 96 Hour Clinical Event Review  
E01 EASI Full Disclosure   
H10 PC Hardware       
H11 Tower Server Hardware 
H12 Rack Server Hardware 
H20 UPS Hardware        
H30 Remote Solution Host Card     
IPM Standard Bedside/s 
L01 Printed English IFU (US Only)      
MP3 MP80/90 Connect 
TEL Telemetry Bedside 
TRD Trend Display   
W01 802.11 Network Capability   
WLD Device Location US Only  
WS1 1 Web Server 
WS2 2 Web Servers  
WS3 3 Web Servers 
1-44
Purchased Options
2-Channel Order the 2-Channel USB Recorder options (Table 1-15) under Product # 862120.
USB
Recorder
Options
Table 1-15 Purchased Options for Recorder

Option Description M3150 M3145/55 M3151 M3170
A01 One Recorder    
A02 Two Recorders    
4-Channel The 4-Channel Serial Recorder is available in limited geographies. Order the 4-Channel
Serial Recorder options under Product # M3160A.
Recorder
Options
Table 1-16 4-Channel Serial Recorder

Product Description M3150 M3145/55 M3151 M3170
M3160A 4-Channel Recorder    
PSE11268 4-Channel Recorder paper, package of 24 rolls    
1-45
Purchased Options
Display Table 1-17 lists displays available for Philips systems. Order the product number indicated
Options for the Information Center model.
Note Displays are sold separately. Philips cannot guarantee compliance with ANSI/AAMI EC-13 or
the EMC Directive of displays that it does not supply and will not install them.
Table 1-17 Display Models for Information Center Systems

Product Description M3140 M3150 M3145/55 M3151 M3154 M3169
865058 Large Flat Panel Display    
865059 Large Touch Flat Panel Display   
USB Input Order the USB Input device options under Product # 865034. These options are required only
Devices for the Remote PC solution.
Table 1-18 USB Input Devices

Option Description
KBD Add USB keyboard
MOU Add USB Mouse
TRB Add USB trackball
Other Table 1-19 lists hardware upgrade options available.

Hardware
Options
Table 1-19 Hardware Upgrade Options
Part Number Description M3150 M3145/55 M3151 M3170 M3154 M3169
4535 641 67971 Trackball   
862098 Keyboard-Video-Mouse Switch   
862123 Add Hardware Watchdog Timer UPS    
862167 Add Hardware Watchdog Timer UPS (Japan)    
1-46
Upgrade Options
Upgrade Options
Hardware Table 1-20 lists upgrade options for pre-existing hardware available under Product # 862143.
Upgrades
Table 1-20 IIC Hardware Upgrade Options
Option Description M3150 M3145/55 M3151 M3170 M3154 M3169
H10 Add SDN Card to DC7700 and earlier   
H17 Add Dual Display Card to DC7700 and later   
H20 Add 512 Mbytes Memory to DC7700 
H23 Dual Display to rp5700   
H24 Add SDN Card to to rp5700 and later   
H25 Add 1 GB Memory to rp5700/DC7700    
H26 Add NIC to rp5700    
H27 Add 1 GB Memory to DC7700/rp5700    
H29 Add 2 x 1 GB Memory to ML350 G5 
6-Way Video Table 1-21 lists 6-way video splitter upgrade options available under Product # 862211.
Splitter
Table 1-21 6 Way Video Splitter Upgrade Options
Option Description
H01 6-Way Video Splitter
K01 One Display Connection
K02 Two Display Connection
K03 Three Display Connection
K04 Four Display Connection
K05 Five Display Connection
1-47
Upgrade Options
Product
Options
M3150 Table 1-22 lists M3150 upgrade options available under Product # 865278.
Table 1-22 M3150 Upgrade Options
Option Description
A02 2 Patient Capability
U03 Software Upgrade
U16 Upgrade M3140 to 16 Bed M3150
C01 Add Dual Display Hardware
C02 Add Second NIC
C03 Add 150 Alarm Events
C04 Add 2 Patient Capability
C14 Add HL7 Export
C17 Add 12-Lead Analysis/Export
C23 Add Export Data to Holter System
C67 Add Alert Data Integration
C72 Add Wave Strip Export License (Non-Philips)
C73 Add SDN Card
C74 Add Web Server
C76 Research Data Export
D24 Add 24 Hour Clinical Event Review
E01 Add EASI Full Disclosure
H10 PC Hardware
PTU Philips Technology Upgrade
S01 Add Dual Display License
TRD Trend Display
WLD Device Location (US Only)
W01 802.11 Network Capability
M3151 Table 1-23 lists M3151 software upgrade options available under Product # 865279
Option Description
TRD Trend Display
1-48
Upgrade Options

Option Description
H10 PC Hardware
M3140 Table 1-24 lists M3140 software upgrade options available under Product # 865277
Option Description
H10 PC Hardware
M3145 Table 1-25 lists M3145 upgrade options available under Product # 865281.
Option Description
U04 Upgrade M3150/51/69 to 4 Bed M3145
C14 Add HL7 Export
C72 Add Wave Strip Export License (non-Philips)
C73 Add SDN Card
TRD Trend Display
H10 PC Hardware
1-49
Upgrade Options
M3155 Table 1-26 lists M3155 upgrade options available under Product # 865282
Option Description
U04 Upgrade M3150/51/45/69 to 4 Bed M3155
C14 Add HL7 Export
C72 Add Wave Strip Export License (non-Philips)
C73 Add SDN Card
TRD Trend Display
H10 PC Hardware
Option Description
C02 Add Second NIC
C14 Add HL7 Export
C73 Add SDN Card
H10 PC Hardware
1-50
Upgrade Options
M3177 Table 1-28 lists M3177 options available under Product # 865280
Option Description
H10 PC Hardware
Option Description
A01 1 M3145/55 Connectivity
C26 Add 1 M3145/M3155 Connectivity
C70 Add Web Serving
WS1 Add 1 Web Server
WS2 Add 2 Web Servers
WS3 Add 3 Web Server
D24 Add 24 hour Clinical Event Review
H10 PC Hardware
Option Description
A02 2 M3155 Connectivity
C25 Add 2 M3155 Connectivity
C71 Add Large Network/Web Serving
1-51
Upgrade Options
A Customer Engineer must install purchased upgrade options and configure the Information
Center as required.
Printer
Options
Table 1-31 Printer Options for Information Center Systems
Part Number Description M3150 M3145/55 M3151
4535 641 68061 HP LaserJet Printer Yes Yes Yes
Mounting Table 1-32 lists available mounting options that must be ordered under Product # M3180A.
Options
Table 1-32 M3180A Mounting Options for Information Center Systems
Option Description M3150 M3145/55 M3151 M3154
A08 Under Table Drawer for keyboard Yes Yes Yes No
A09 Desk Top Shelf for keyboard Yes Yes Yes No
A10 Wall Mount for Power Distribution Module (Japan) Yes Yes Yes No
A11 Wall Mount for UPS Yes Yes Yes No
A13 Wall Mount for flat panel display Yes Yes Yes No
A18 Wall Mount for PC Yes Yes Yes No
A24 USB Recorder Wall Mount Yes Yes Yes No
A26 Hardware Watchdog Timer/PC Wall Mount Yes Yes Yes No
A27 Hardware Watchdog Wall Mount Yes Yes Yes No
A29 HP rp5700 Wall Mount Bracket Yes Yes Yes No
989803131321 Flat Panel Display Ceiling Mount Yes Yes Yes No
Clinical Table 1-33 shows Clinical Network active components that must be ordered under listed
Network Product numbers
Active
Components Table 1-33 Active Components for M3185 Clinical Network
Product # Description
862084 24 Port Managed Switch (used as Core or Tier)
862085 8 Port Unmanaged Switch
862086 10 Mbit/s UTP repeater
989803131221 100-FX SC Transceiver (Fiber Port) for the Core and Tier Switches
862088 10 Mbit/s media translator pair
862089 100 Mbit/s media translator
862095 Bedside Wireless LAN Adapter
862113 Intellivue Access Point
989803171211 ITS 4843B Smart-hopping 1.4 GHz Access Point
989803171221 ITS 4852A Smart-hopping 2.4 GHz Access Point
865346 ITS 3171A Smart-hopping Access Point Controller
1-52
Upgrade Options
Installation Table 1-34 lists Installation materials ordered under Product # M3199AI.
Materials
Table 1-34 M3199AI Passive Components for M3185 Clinical Network
Option Description
UTP Cable
P01 305 m (1000 ft.) Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) Plenum Cable
Patch Cables
J09 0.3 m (1 ft.) UTP Patch Cable
J11 2 m (7 ft.) UTP Patch Cable
J20 3.7 m (12 ft.) UTP Crossover Cable
J21 0.9 m (3 ft.) UTP Crossover Cable
J30 3.0 m (9.8 ft.) Fiber Optic Patch Cable - ST/ST
J31 3.0 m (9.8 ft.) Fiber Optic Patch Cable - SC/SC
J32 3.0 m (9.8 ft.) Fiber Optic Patch Cable - ST/SC
J33 MT-RJ/MT-RJ 1 m Cable
J34 MT-RJ/MT-RJ 3 m Cable
J35 MT-RJ/SC 1 m Cable
J36 MT-RJ/SC 3 m Cable
Access Point Antenna Extensions
A20 0.9 m (3 ft.) Access Point antenna extension
A21 3.0 m (10 ft.) Access Point antenna extension
Patch Panel Kits
A01 24-Port Patch Panel Kit
A05 Patch Panel Wall Mount Kit
Wall Mount Kits
A10 Dual Port, single gang, RJ45 UTP Wall Box Kit (US only)
A11 Dual Port, single gang, RJ45 UTP Surface Mount Kit
A12 Quad Port, dual gang, RJ45 UTP Wall Box Kit (US only)
A13 Quad Port, dual gang, RJ45 UTP Surface Mount Kit
Cable Philips systems come with standard length cables, but additional cable lengths are available.
Options Table 1-35 lists Cable options that must be ordered under Product # M3181A.
Table 1-35 M3181A Cable Options for Philips Systems
Length Length
Option Description
(m) (ft)
A01 LaserJet 6P printer cable (standard) - IEEE 1284 3.0 9.8
A02 LaserJet 6P printer cable (option) - IEEE 1284 10 32.8
A03 Workstation to Printer Spooler cable - IEEE 1284 3 9.8
A04 Workstation to Printer Spooler cable - IEEE 1284 10 32.8
A05 Workstation to Keyboard/Mouse switch data cable 1.8 6.0
A06 Parallel Printer cable for LaserJet Printer - IEEE 1284 3 9.8
A10 Extended distance cable kit (includes cables for display, mouse, approx. approx.
keyboard, and recorder rack) 6.0 19.7
A11 15-Pin Mini D-Sub Male to 5 BNC coax adapter cable 1.0 3.3
A12 15-Pin Mini D-Sub Male to 5 BNC coax adapter cable 5.0 16.4
1-53
Upgrade Options
Table 1-35 M3181A Cable Options for Philips Systems

Length Length
Option Description
(m) (ft)
A13 Video extension cable 5.0 16.4
A14 Keyboard/Mouse extension cable 4.0 13.1
A15 UPS cable to Workstation (option) or Server (standard) 1.0 3.3
A16 UPS cable to Workstation (standard) or Server (option) 2.0 6.6
A17 5 BNC to 5 BNC video coax adapter cable 3.0 9.8
A30 SDN cable from wall box to M3150 Workstation (std.) 2.0 6.6
A31 SDN cable from wall box to M3150 Workstation (opt.) 4.0 13.1
A32 SDN cable to Plenum cable 30.0 100
A33 Recorder/Rack power supply cable to M3150/51 Workstation (std)
Recorder/Rack cable 3.0 9.8
Power Supply cable 1.0 3.3
A34 Recorder/Rack power supply cable to M3150/51 Workstation (option)
Recorder/Rack cable 6.0 19.7
Power Supply cable 1.0 3.3
A35 LDC cable kit to M3150 workstation 15.0 50
A36 SDN 9-pin D from SDN Card to standard UTP faceplate (RJ45 cable) 2.0 6.6
A37 SDN 9-pin D from SDN Card to standard UTP faceplate (RJ45 cable) 4.0 13.1
A39 Cat 5 USB Extender 100 328
A40 STP Cable 15.2 50
A41 STP Cable 100 328
A42 Serial Cable 3 9.8
Table 1-36 lists cable options for the Remote Slave Display that must be ordered under
Product #78599AI.
Table 1-36 78599AI Cable Options for Remote Slave Display

Option Description Length
C62 75-Ohm Video Non-Plenum Coax Cable 152 m (500 ft.) roll
J87 Connector Kit for Non-Plenum Cable (5 BNC Connectors)
Part Numbers for components and options are provided in the Information Center
Replaceable Parts List.
1-54
Upgrade Options
Language Philips system software and workstation and server keyboards are available in the following
Options languages. The desired language for both software and keyboard should be specified at time
of purchase.
Chinese (Simplified) Hungarian

Chinese (Traditional) Italian
Czech Japanese
Danish Norwegian
Dutch Polish
English Portuguese
Finnish Russian
French Spanish
German Swedish
Greek
Alarm/inop messages for IntelliVue Patient Monitors and User Help text for non-western
character sets - Greek, Polish, Russian, Czech, Japanese, Chinese - are displayed, recorded,
and printed in English only. Service applications and Help text are in English only.
1-55
Upgrade Options
1-56
2
Hardware Description
Overview
The IntelliVue Information Center system consists of proprietary Information Center
Release M software executing on PCs and Servers running Windows Operating Systems. To
fully understand, utilize, and maintain these systems, support personnel should be familiar
with Workstation and Server functionality and Windows Operating Systems. Only brief
descriptions of these appear in this document.
Hardware and software are rapidly evolving and training programs change frequently. It is
important that service support personnel stay current with the training and skills required to
effectively support the product.
Chapter 2 includes the following sections:
System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2-1
Mounting Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2-31
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2-65
Regulatory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2-71
System Components
Hardware components of IntelliVue Information Center systems (Figure 2-1) are typically
industry standard equipment tailored to IntelliVue Information Center applications.
Hardware components change as newer models with improved performance features become
available. Therefore, this document describes general hardware features and illustrates typical
units supplied at the document printing date. All shipped hardware includes documentation
specific to the equipment. Refer to the IIC Service Documentation of your media kit for
additional PC workstation and LaserJet printer documentation.
Warning Hardware and software products (including PCs, Servers, peripheral devices, and
network infrastructure components) that are not supplied by Philips as part of an
Information Center system are not approved or supported by Philips for use with
Information Center and Clinical Network/Database Server systems.
performance.
2-1
System Components
Figure 2-1 Information Center System Hardware
PC IntelliVue Information Center software is designed to operate on PC workstations specifically

Workstation tailored for Philips applications. Release M of the Information Center, Client, and Small
Hardware Database Server uses the HP DC7700 or rp5700 PC.
The HP DC7700 is shipped as a Desktop unit but can be configured as a Minitower (refer to
the HP Hardware Documentation). When using an HP DC7700 as a Minitower, you must
change the DVD/CD Drive so that it is horizontal.
2-2
System Components
DC7700 Controls
and Connections
1 Disk Drive Eject Button 12 SDN Connector

2 Disk Drive Activity LED 13 Optional Hospital LAN NIC
To add a second NIC refer to page 2-61.
3 3-1/2 inch Disk Drive 14 Serial Connector
4 DVD/CD-ROM Drive 15 2-Channel FELP Recorder Connector (only with SDN
Card M3180-60021)
5 DVD/CD-ROM Eject Button 16 Amplifier Card (for external speaker)
6 DVD/CD-ROM Activity LED 17 Clinical Network (Monitoring LAN) Connector
7 USB Connectors 18 USB Connectors (6)
Use the top (3) left USB Connectors for USB
Recorders. Use either of the top two connectors for
2-Channel Recorders and the third for a 4-Channel
Recorder. Two 2-channel recorders and one
4-channel recorder are supported at each IIC.
8 Hard Drive Activity LED 19 Main Display Connector - for Single Display systems
9 Power Button 20 UPS Connector
10 Power LED 21 Keyboard Connector
11 Y-Cable Connector - for Dual 22 Mouse Connector
Display systems (page 2-49)
2-3
System Components
HP rp5700
Controls and
Connections
1 DVD/CD-ROM Drive 11 Keyboard Connector

2 DVD/CD Drive Activity LED 12 UPS Connector
3 DVD/CD Eject Button 13 Parallel Connector
4 Hard Drive Activity LED 14 Main Display Connector
On Single Display systems, plug the Main Display
into the PC 15-pin Main Display connector. On Dual
Display systems, plug the Main Display into the
Main Display connector, then plug the Second
Display into the Second Video Card connector .
5 Power Button 15 4-Channel Recorder Serial Connector
6 Power LED 16 USB Ports (4)
Use top (2) left ports for 2-Channel Recorder, the top
right for a 4-Channel Recorder, and the bottom right
for first Touch Screen.
7 USB Ports (2) 17 Clinical Network (Monitoring LAN) Connector
Use top port for Memory Stick; use
bottom port for second Touch Screen.
8 Horizontal Upper Slot, Audio Card 18 Horizontal Lower Slot, Optional Hospital LAN NIC
Connector for speaker Connector
The external speaker connection must
be secure so it cannot be accidentally
disconnected.
9 Power Cord Connector 19 Vertical Slot 2, PCI Express SDN Connector
10 Mouse Connector 20 Vertical Slot 1, Second Display Connector for Dual
Display systems
2-4
System Components
Database With Release M the Intellivue Information Center Large Database Server runs on the HP
Server Proliant ML350 G5/G6 Tower Servers and DL380 G6 Rack Server.
Hardware
HP ML350 G5
Server Front
1 Power On/Standby Button 8 USB Connectors

2 Power On LED 9 DVD Drive
3 Internal Health LED 10 DVD Drive LED
4 External Health LED 11 DVD Drive Eject Button
5 Network Activity (NIC) LED 12 3 1/2 Inch Disk Drive
6 UID LED 13 Disk Drive Eject Button
7 UID Button 14 Disk Drive LED
15 Hot Swap Drive Bays
Figure 2-2 HP ML350 G5 Server Front
2-5
System Components
ML350 G5
Rear Panel
Connectors
1 Power Cord Connector 7 iLO2 Connector

2 Keyboard Connector 8 Clinical Network LAN Connector
3 Mouse Connector 9 Second Serial Connector
4 Serial UPS Connector 10 Parallel Connector
5 Display Connector 11 Optional Hospital LAN Connector
6 USB Ports
Figure 2-3 ML350 G5 Rear Panel Connectors
2-6
System Components
HP ML350G6
Server Front
1 DVD Drive 9 UID LED

2 DVD Drive LED 10 Network Activity (NIC) 2 LED
3 DVD Drive Eject Button 11 Network Activity (NIC) 1 LED
4 Hot Swap Drive Bays 12 External Health LED
5 Access Panel 13 Internal Health LED
6 Front Bezel 14 Power On LED
7 USB Connectors 15 Power On/Standby Button
8 UID Button
Figure 2-4 HP ML350G6 Server Front
2-7
System Components
ML350 G6
Rear Panel
Connectors
1 Power Cord Connector 6 Video Connector

2 LAN Connector 2 7 Keyboard Connector
Hospital LAN (Optional)
3 LAN Connector 1 8 Mouse Connector
Monitoring LAN
4 USB Ports (2) 9 Serial UPS Connector
5 iLO2 Connector
Figure 2-5 ML350 G6 Rear Panel Connectors
2-8
System Components
DL380 G6 Rack
Connectors
1 Quick Release Levers (2) 12 NIC1 Connector

Optional Hospital LAN NIC Connector
2 Systems Insight Display 13 NIC2 Connector
Clinical Network (Monitoring LAN) Connector
3 Hard Drive Bays 14 Mouse Connector
4 DVD Drive 15 Keyboard Connector
5 USB Ports (2) 16 Serial Connector
6 Video Connector 17 PCI Slot 3
7 PCI Slot 5 18 iLO 2 Connector
8 PCI Slot 4 19 NIC3 Connector
HP Smart Array P400 Controller
10 USB Ports (2) 21 PCI Slot 2
Figure 2-6 DL380 G6 Rack Connectors
2-9
System Components
DL380 G7
Controls and
Connectors
Figure 2-7 HP DL380 G7 Controls and Connectors

Optional Clinical LAN NIC Connector
Hospital Network (Monitoring LAN) Connector
7 PCI Slot 5 18 iLO Connector
8 PCI Slot 4 19 NIC3 Connector - Not Used
9 PCI Slot 1 20 NIC4 Connector - Not Used
2-10
System Components
System A brief description of the IntelliVue Information Center system components follows.
Components
Component Description
Mouse/Trackball Point and click capability for activating buttons and other control features on
Philips screens is achieved with a standard computer interface mouse or trackball.
The mouse is provided as standard equipment, but a trackball can be ordered as a
purchased or upgrade option. See Components and Options, page 1-42.
Keyboard A keyboard permits entering patient and other information. Language keyboards
are provided for each of the supported geographies.
Display Displays must be ordered separately. See System Components, page 2-11.
Computer Memory 1 GB of RAM is required to run Information Center software applications. For
more than 16 patients or more than 16 patients and Trend Display you must have
2 GB.
Hard Drive The M3154 Database Server has three hard drives, each with a capacity of at least
72 Gbytes, which is sufficient for monitoring data for 96 patients from 8
Monitoring LAN A 10BaseT/100BaseTX Ethernet network adapter is provided for connecting the
IntelliVue Information Center to an Ethernet LAN. It also permits Information
Center or Database Server connection to a Clinical Network switch. The Network
connection is through 100 Mbit/s UTP CAT 5 (or higher) cable.
Hospital LAN Card A second 10BaseT/100BaseTX Ethernet Network Interface Card (NIC) is
provided for systems that require a second connection to the Hospital
LAN (e.g. Large Network/Web Access, HL7 Interface). The Network
connection also uses 100 Mbit/s UTP CAT 5 (or higher) cable.
SDN/Recorder A legacy SDN/Recorder Interface Card provides interface between
Interface Card signals on the SDN and the PC and for communication with the Philips
FELP 2-Channel Recorder. (No longer available)
SDN Card A PCI Express SDN Card provides interface between signals on the SDN
and the PC.
Audio Card and The processing unit has an audio card than enables an external speaker to
Speaker annunciate alarms. The external speaker should be located where it can
be heard by clinicians.
DVD/CD-ROM The Server processing unit includes a standard DVD/CD-ROM drive for
Drive installing Windows Operating System and Philips application software. If
your hardware does not have an internal DVD Drive, and external drive
is available.
3.5-inch Disk Drive Earlier systems may include a 3.5-inch disk drive, which is not available
on newer systems.
USB Memory Stick On some systems you can save an archive on a USB memory stick that is
included in the PC Accessory Kit. The Memory Stick has a self-adhering
holder with retractable lanyard that you can attach to the PC chassis. You
can remove the Memory Stick from the holder and use it on other PCs in
your system.
2-11
System Components
Component Description
Graphics Card For Dual Display installations, a second graphics card may be required.
This card is installed in the factory with the Dual Display Upgrade
Option, and must be installed by a Philips customer engineer if the
upgrade is purchased at a later date. Installation of a Dual Display Card in
a Single Display system is not permitted.
RAID The Large Database Server utilizes RAID (Redundant Array of
Independent Disks) technology to assure fault tolerant data collection and
storage in the event of disk failure. The Small Database server does not
use RAID.
USB Ports The number of and use of USB ports depends on the hardware.
Displays Refer to the specific Display Installation Guide for a complete description of its
troubleshooting procedures., functionality, and maintenance requirements.
Flat Panel Color Flat Panel Displays (Figure 2-8) are available as purchased products. The Color Flat
Display Panel Display has a screen resolution of 1280 x 1024.
Video In
On/Off
Switch
AC Power In
Figure 2-8 Typical Flat Panel Display Front and Rear Panel Controls
If you want to supply your own Display, it must comply with criteria and specifications on
page 2-69.
2-12
System Components
Flat Panel Color Flat Panel Touch Screens (Figure 2-9) are also available for purchase.
Touch Screen
Video Cable
Power
USB Cable
Figure 2-9 Typical Touch Screen Panel Connections
Dual Display The Dual Display Option (available for Information Centers and Clients) permits expanding
Option the viewing area to two Displays. With two Displays, the Patient Sectors of the Main
Screen appear on the first Display, and patient data review applications and control screens
appear on the second Display. The second Display must be ordered separately.
Remote Slave The Remote Slave Display Option permits viewing Information Center data at remote
Displays locations. Remote Display cable lengths can be up to 90 m (300 ft). Up to six Remote Slave
Displays can be connected to an Information Center system. Remote Displays must be
ordered separately.
The Remote Slave Display Option requires a Video Splitter (Figure 2-10). The 6-way
Video Splitter uses AC power. The video output of the PC connects to 5 BNC Video Splitter
inputs; the Displays connect to the 5 BNC Video Splitter outputs.
Input
(RGBHV)
Outputs
AC Power Input (RGBHV)
6-Way Video Splitter
Figure 2-10 Remote Slave Display 6-Way Video Splitter
2-13
System Components
Keyboard- A Keyboard-Video-Mouse (KVM) Switch (Figure 2-11) permits control of up to four

Video-Mouse Information Centers with one keyboard and mouse. This permits managing 64 patients with
Switch one set of controls. It also permits a Single Display to serve as the Second Display for all
Note A Touch Screen connected to a KVM Switch cannot be used as the second Display.
The KVM Switch front panel SELECT button selects which Information Center the
keyboard and mouse will control, and LEDs indicate selected PC and which PCs have
power turned on. Rear panel USER PORTs connect to the single keyboard, mouse, and
second display, and other ports connect to corresponding ports on the rear of Information
Center workstations. The KVM Switch can be used with only a keyboard, only a keyboard
and mouse, or a keyboard, mouse, and second display (can not be used with dual resting
display option) Complete installation instructions are included in the KVM Switch
Installation Note that comes with the device.
SELECT PC Button
GREEN LED
Illuminated = Attached PC
is turned ON
AMBER LED
Illuminated = Selected PC
USER Ports
Figure 2-11 Keyboard-Video-Mouse Switch
2-14
System Components
Philips The IntelliVue Information Center Release M software supports both 2-Channel and optional
Recorder 4-Channel recordings (not in all geographies) from both SDN bedsides and from IntelliVue
Systems Information Centers. Refer to the appropriate Recorder description.
2-Channel USB The 2-Channel USB Recorder is a 50mm wide thermal array recorder that provides high
Recorder resolution, high quality waveforms. The grid and waveforms are printed simultaneously to
assure accurate registration. The recorder has the capability for up to two waveforms with
multiple lines of annotation, which includes:
• Patient name (as in the Admit window)

• Patient Medical Record number (as in the Admit window)
• Bed label
• Date and time of the first printed waveform
• Alarm/INOP message of the highest priority, most recent event
• Patient parameters available at the time of recording
• Recorder speed
If you are connecting more than one recorder together, use the appropriate connector cable to
connect the recorders to the Universal Power Module.
1 Run/Cont key - prints a continuous recording 4 USB Connector - Connect to PC
2 Stop key - stops the currently printing recording 5 Strain Relief Clip
3 Power - connect to Universal Power Module 6 LED
2-15
System Components
Button and LED Descriptions
Button Description LED State
Stop Printing stops immediately Yellow LED flashes three times, then Green LED On
Continuous Recorder starts after pause of several seconds Green LED Blinking
LED blinks
LED State Description
Blinking Green Continuous Record Mode
Blinking Yellow After recorder powers up but before communication is established with the host Information Center
Communication is lost
“Paper Out” condition is detected
“Door Open” condition is detected
Green On Normal Record Mode - either printing or in standby
LEDs Off No power
Troubleshooting
LED
Indication Action
Behavior
OFF “USB 2-Channel Recorder Not Ready” Verify AC power connection to power adapter and
Power supply has failed or has been disconnected power cable connection to recorder. If power
adapter LED is off, replace power.
BLINKING “USB 2-Channel Recorder Not Ready” Verify the Information Center is running normally.
Communication with the Information Center is lost Check all recorder cabling. If LED is still blinking,
disconnect the power cable from the Recorder and
wait 20 seconds. Reconnect power to the Recorder
device.
BLINKING “USB 2-Channel Recorder hardware fault” Disconnect power cable from the Recorder and wait
Recorder device has malfunctioned 20 seconds. Reconnect power. If LED is still
blinking, replace the recorder device.
BLINKING “USB 2 -Channel Recorder out of paper” Install new paper: M4816/M4817A
Recorder is out of paper
BLINKING “USB 2 -Channel Recorder door is open” Check paper supply and close door.
Recorder door is open
2-16
System Components
4-Channel Serial The Information Center also supports a serial optional 4-Channel Recorder (not available in
Recorder all geographies) for the M3150 Information Center, M3170 Patient Link, and Database
(Optional) Systems. Recordings are obtainable from both SDN bedsides (not for M2/M3/M4/IntelliVue
patient monitors) and from IntelliVue Information Centers.
The Philips 4-Channel Serial Recorder includes the following components.
Qty Part Number Description

1 M3160A 4-Channel Serial Recorder with 24 Vdc Power Supply and Cable
1 CAB-CTG 09452 Serial Interface Cable (7.6 m, 25 ft.)
1 PSE11268 24 Rolls
Use Part Number PSE11268 to order additional thermal paper (24 rolls -
112 mm x 68 m). For paper loading instructions, refer to page 7-6.
The 4-Channel Serial Recorder is a fixed-head thermal line printer that can produce up to 4
waveform tracings on a 112 mm paper strip. Annotation and grid markings appear on the
tracings; the resolution is 8 dots/mm. Various wave and grid formats can be selected from the
appropriate application. When upgrading existing system PCs, BIOS changes may be required
for the 4-Channel recorder to connect properly to the Serial Port. See the Troubleshooting
and Repair sections of this manual for details.
Complete details about using the recorder with the Information Center(s) are included in the
Information Center Instructions for Use. Controls and Indicators for the 4-Channel serial
recorder follow.
1 Out of Paper - Illuminates when the paper has not been properly set or when there is no paper
2 Power - Illuminates when power is on
3 Error - Illuminates to indicate that an error occurred during data transmission or there is a
problem with the recorder
4 On Line - Illuminates when the recorder is ready to accept data
Blinks during normal operation
5 Stop - Stops the currently printing recording
6 Feed - Makes the recorder eject paper for as long as the button is depressed
2-17
System Components
A Serial 4-Channel recorder can be physically tied to one Information Center in a stand-alone
system, or may be shared across four Information Centers within a single Database Server
system. When a 4-Channel recording is generated it is routed to the
4-Channel recorder. The recording destination is set either by Config Wizard (page 6-88) or
by the Recording Setup application (under Unit Settings). The default setting for this control
is the local machine if a 4-Channel recorder is installed. Otherwise, the default is none, which
disables any control that requests a 4-Channel recording. When an Information Center is fully
configured the user can select any Information Center with a 4-Channel recorder as a
destination.
The 4-Channel Serial Recorder has the following selectable recorder speeds. Recorder speed
accuracy is + 2%.
50 mm/s300 cm/min.
25 mm/s150 cm/min.
12.5 mm/s 75 cm/min.
The Recorder print head has the following characteristics:
Width: 104 mm printable width

Resolution: 8 dots/mm x 8 lines/mm
System Behaviors with the Serial 4-Channel Recorder:
Error Messages - the Information Center resting display status line will display messages
that indicate any error conditions with the recorder (e.g., 4-Channel Recorder Not Ready
which indicates out-of-paper, no power, not connected, or internal failure).
Queuing - if the user requests a 4-Channel recording and the recorder is already busy, then
the recording will be held in queue until the recorder becomes available.
Gain Change - whenever the gain is changed for a waveform in an on-going 4-Channel
recording, the wave label is annotated on the recording strip.
BIOS Settings - Changes may be required to the BIOS settings when a 4-Channel recorder is
added. Refer to Updating the BIOS, page 7-102.
to UPS
AC Output Power Supply to Serial Port Interface
Cable to PC Workstation
Figure 2-12 Philips 4-Channel Serial Recorder Rear Panel Connections
2-18
System Components
4-Channel USB The Information Center also supports an optional 4-Channel USB Recorder (not available in
Recorder all geographies).
(Optional)
Button and LED Descriptions
1 LED Condition Indicator Indicates the current recorder state. See the table below for
descriptions.
2 RUN/CONT (continue) key Makes a currently printing recording continuous (if possible).
3 STOP key Stops the currently printing recording.
LED State Description
Blinking Green A continuous recording is in progress.
Blinking Yellow Identifies one of the following conditions:

• The recorder is powering up and establishing communication with the
Information Center.
• The recorder has lost communication with the Information Center.
• Recorder is out of paper.
• Recorder door is open.
• A recording has been stopped by pressing the Stop key.
Green On Normal record mode, either printing or in standby.
Off Power has been removed from the recorder.
2-19
System Components
4-Channel USB Recorder Connections

Power - connect to USB Connector -
Universal Power Module Connect to
Information
Center PC
Figure 2-13 4-Channel USB Recorder Connections
Printer IIC Release M supports printers that use the HP Universal Printing PCL 5 driver (Refer
Support to HP site for compatib le printer list). Printers can reside on the Monitoring or Hospital LAN,
and are configured using the Windows Print Manager Service. If you want to use a printer on
the Hospital LAN you must configure it at the DBS then share it with other devices on the
domain.
Maximum Number
Device
of Printers
M3150 Information Center (local database) 2
M3170 Patient Link
M3140 Information Center
M3154 Database Server system 8
(connection to M3155 Information Centers)
Large Network M3154 Database System 96
M3169 Small Database Server System 4
(connection to M3145 Information Centers)
2-20
System Components
UPS with The Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) includes a Hardware Watchdog that restarts the
Hardware Information Center in response to detected PC and Operating System (OS) lockup conditions.
Watchdog
Upgrading the When you order an upgrade to your G/H system to a current release, the default UPS driver
UPS may not match the UPS installed on-site. A SetupUPS utility, included with the upgrade,
permits changing the UPS driver from APC to TrippLite and vice versa without having to
reload the Operating System. Refer to the Readme file on the upgrade media for installation
instructions.
UPS Location • Install the UPS inside and away from excess moisture, heat, conductive contaminants,
Requirements dust, or direct sunlight.
• For best performance keep temperature at 59 - 86°F (15 - 30°C).
• Leave adequate space around all sides of the UPS for proper ventilation. Do not
obstruct the vents or fan openings.
Warnings • Before using the UPS, be sure that the battery wire is connected.
• Connect the UPS directly to a properly grounded AC power source. Do not use
adapters that would eliminate the UPS connection to ground.
• The UPS contains a Battery. The output terminals may be live even when the UPS
is not connected to an AC power source.
• Do not use extension cords to connect the UPS to an AC power source.
• Do not plug the UPS into itself; this will damage the UPS
• If the UPS is to be connected to a motor-powered AC generator, the generator
must provide filtered, frequency-regulated computer-grade output.
• Do not open the UPS for any reason except for battery replacement. There are no
user-serviceable parts inside.
• The batteries present a risk of electrical shock and burn from high short-circuit
current; observe proper precautions. Use tools with insulated handles, and replace
the existing batteries with the same number and type (Sealed Lead Acid). DO
NOT OPEN THE BATTERIES. Do not short or bridge the battery terminals with
any object.
• During hot-swap battery replacement the UPS does not provide backup power if
there is a blackout or other power interruption.
• With the exception of battery hot-swapping, do not operate the UPS without
batteries.
2-21
System Components
UPS Front Panels TrippLite 110-127VAC 60Hz and 220-240VAC 50/60Hz
Item Description Behavior

1 Power LED Steady Green when UPS is ON and supplying connected devices with AC power.
2 Voltage Steady Green when UPS is automatically correcting high or low AC voltage without utilizing battery
Correction power.
3 Output Load LED color indicates approximate electrical load of equipment connected to the UPS AC outlets.
Level • Green - light load
• Yellow - medium load
• Red - overload
If the LED is red (steady or flashing) unplug the devices to clear the overload.
Caution— Be sure to correct overloads immediately, or the UPS could shut down and not operate if power is lost.
4 Battery The Battery Charge LED color indicates the charge state of the UPS battery
Charge When the UPS is operating on AC power:
• Green - indicates a full charge
• Yellow - indicates that the UPS has approximately a 50% charge
• Red - indicates the UPS is beginning to charge (or in the charging process)
When the UPS is operating on battery power:
• Green - indicates a high level of energy
• Yellow - indicates a medium level of energy
• Red - indicates a low level of energy
5 Battery A Steady Red light with an intermittent audible alarm indicates that the UPS batteries need to be
Warning recharged or replaced.
6 Mute/Test Silences/Mutes UPS audible alarms
• Press and release the button.
Initiates a Self-Test (Devices can remain connected to the UPS during the self-test.)
• With the UPS plugged in and turned ON, press and hold the Mute/Test button for two seconds.
Continue holding the button until the alarm beeps several times and the UPS performs a self test.
7 On/Off/ To turn the UPS ON:
Standby • With the UPS plugged in an AC power supply1, press and hold the On/Off/Standby button for one
second and release.
To turn the UPS OFF:

• With the UPS on and receiving power, press and hold the On/Off/Standby button for one second
and release.
• Unplug the UPS from the wall outlet.
1Afteryou plug the UPS into the AC power supply, the UPS batteries automatically charge. You must turn the UPS ON to power
the outlets.
2-22
System Components
TrippLite 100- 127VAC 50/60Hz

1 OVERLOAD Red LED - illuminates when UPS capacity has been exceeded while it is in online operation. the
UPS alarm beeps continuously. Immediately remove overload until light and alarm turn off. If the
overload condition is not removed, the UPS transfers from online to bypass operation.
2 REPLACE Red LED - illuminates and alarm sounds three beeps if the UPS detects a battery fault or if the
BATT UPS fails the automatic self-test (when UPS is powered on). and the UPS battery is less than fully
charged. UPS should be charged for 12 hours, and then a second self-test should be performed.
After the initial alarm, the UPS beeps once every hour until the problem is corrected.
3 BATT LOW Yellow LED - illuminates when UPS battery charge level is low. The UPS alarm beeps until either
the battery charge is depleted or the batteries are adequately recharged.
4 OFF Switch This switch turns off power at the UPS receptacles. Press the switch and hold it until a beep is
heard, then release it. The UPS continues to charge and the fan continues to cool internal
components even after the receptacles are turned off.
To turn the UPS off completely, including the charger, disconnect the UPS’s power cord after
pressing the OFF switch.
5 ON LINE Indicates normal online operation
• Green LED -indicates normal online operation (filtering and resynthesizing incoming AC line
voltage to provide pure sine wave output). When illuminated, LOAD ACTIVE METER
LEDs can be used to monitor the load level of the UPS
6 ON BATT Green LED - indicates that AC line voltage is not present the UPS is providing power to the
devices with battery power. The UPS beeps every two seconds unless silenced by the On/Test
switch. Illuminated BATT ACTIVE METER LEDs determine the battery charge level.
7 BYPASS Yellow LED - indicates that UPS DC/AC inverter is deactivated and the UPS is in the Bypass
mode (during normal operation this LED lights briefly when the unit is plugged in). If an internal
fault or overload occurs, this is LED illuminated to show that the connected devices receive
filtered AC utility power, but will not receive battery power during a blackout.
2-23
System Components

8 LINE • Steady Green LED - indicates that AC line voltage at wall outlet is nominal
• Flashing Green LED - indicates that the line voltage or frequency is outside the nominal
range (too high or too low). No action is required; the UPS continuously and automatically
filters AC line power to provide equipment with AC power, regardless of brownout or over
voltage conditions.
• Off - indicates that AC line voltage is not present (blackout) or is at an extremely high
voltage.
9 ON/TEST/ Controls four separate functions:
Alarm Silence • UPS Power On - turns the UPS on
Switch Press this switch, hold it for several seconds until you hear a beep, then release it. The
ONLINE LED illuminates.
• UPS Self Test - During normal online operation, press this switch and hold it until you hear a
beep. This initiates a 10 second battery self test. The UPS shifts to battery power (the ON
BATT and BATT ACTIVE METER LEDs illuminate) for 10 seconds.
• Alarm Silence - silences the UPS On battery alarm
Press this switch and hold it until you hear a beep.
• UPS Cold Start - To use UPS as standalone power source, press and hold the switch until you
hear a beep.The ON BATT LED illuminates.
10 LOAD ACTIVE Green LED - illuminates when UPS is receiving AC power to indicate the set of four dual-function
METER LEDs is displaying the load level of the UPS.
11 BATT ACTIVE Green LED - illuminates when UPS is operating from battery power to indicate that the set of four
METER dual-function LEDs is displaying the battery charge level of the UPS. The ON BATT LED also
illuminates.
12 FAULT Flashing Red LED - The UPS detects an internal fault (overheating, over voltage, etc.) or it detects
a wiring fault in the wall outlet. The UPS only detects wiring faults when it is plugged into a utility
outlet but not turned ON. If the light persists after restarting the UPS, check the wall outlet.
UPS Rear Panels

Input Breaker Battery Backup UPS
USB port Power Outlets
RS-232 port
Emergency Power
Surge Only Outlet
Off Port
Figure 2-14 TrippLite 110-127VAC 60Hz UPS Rear Panel
2-24
System Components
Surge Only Outlet

Input Breaker
USB port
ACC SLOT
INPUT BREAKER
RS-232 USB EPO SWITCHED OUTLET UNSWITCHED OUTLET SURGE OUTLET INPUT
RS-232 port
Battery Backup UPS Power Input
Emergency Power Power Outlets
Off Port
Figure 2-15 TrippLite 220-240VAC 60Hz UPS Rear Panel
BATTERY
OUTPUT RS-232 CONNECTOR
DC36V/30A
RS-232 port
L
O T
A V
D S
1 S
Battery Backup
UPS Power Outlets ACC
Fan
L
O
A
D
2
CAUTION
15
Input Breaker A INPUT
M BREAKER
P
INPUT
Power Input
Figure 2-16 TrippLite 110-127VAC 50/60Hz UPS Rear Panel
2-25
System Components
Connecting
Devices to the
UPS
Warning Do not connect devices other than those approved by Philips to the BATTERY BACKUP
outlets on the UPS. If you connect devices other than what is listed in this section
equipment can fail and possibly interrupt patient monitoring.
Connect the following devices to the BATTERY BACKUP outlets on the UPS; do not
connect these devices to the SURGE outlet (Figure 2-14 and Figure 2-15).
• PC workstation,
• 2-Channel Recorder 60V Power Supply,
• 2-Channel USB Recorder Power Distribution Module,
• 4-Channel Recorder 24V Power Supply,
• Network Switches,
• Media Translators,
• Routers,
• Access Point Controllers,
• Sync Units, or
• Remote Power Supplies (Power Over Ethernet).
Displays and video splitters can be connected to the SURGE outlet of the UPS or to a
separate non-UPS outlet.
LaserJet Printers should not be connected to a UPS.
2-26
System Components
Database The UPS provided with each Database Server provides up to 90 seconds of battery power to
Server UPS maintain system operation and eliminate time consuming software rebooting during short
power transitions.
Caution The Philips 9 pin UPS communication cable (gray) must be used when connecting the devices
to the APC UPS. Do not use the black COM cable that ships with the UPS.
Warnings When the UPS is shipped the internal battery wire is not connected. Before you can use
the UPS you must connect the internal battery wire.
Only Voltage Outputs labeled BATTERY BACKUP should be used for UPS protection.
The Small Database Server UPS (Figure 2-17) is rated at 650 VA and comes in the
following capacities:
• 100-127 VAC (50/60 Hz),

• 110-127 VAC (50/60Hz), and
• 220-240 VAC (50/60 Hz).
120V 230V
I/O Port
COMPUTER SITE
INTERFACE PORT WARNING 4321
4321 FAULT
OVERLOAD
PROCTECTOR
Overload
Protector !
UPS OUTPUT
120V 50/60 Hz
BATTERY
Reset FULL-TIME SURGE
PROTECTION
BACKUP
Switch
On/Off
Test l Switch SURGE PROTECTION
AND BATTERY BACKUP
650 VA 400W)
UPS 220-240V-
3.0A, 50/60Hz
+
0 Outputs
ACCESSORY
SURGE
PROTECTION
TOTAL INPUT
OUTPUT 120V-
CURRENT 50-60 Hz
12A MAX 12A
230V AC in
Figure 2-17 Small Database Server UPS (650V)
2-27
System Components
The Large Database Server UPS (Figure 2-18) is rated at 1000 VA and comes in the
following capacities:
• 100 VAC (50-60Hz),

• 120 VAC (50-60 Hz), and
• 230 VAC (50-60 Hz)
Test
Switch
On/Off
Test l Switch
I/O Port
SENSITIVITY
SENSITIVITY SITE WARNING FAULT
Reset
OUTPUT 220-240-50/60 Hz
Switch
OUTPUT 120-50/60 Hz
1000 Model VA 670W 1000 Model VA 670W 4.5A MAX
1500 Model VA 969 W 1500 Model VA 960 W 6.8A MAX
USB PORT
USB PORT
UPS UPS
OVERLOAD
Outputs
OVERLOAD
PROTECTOR Outputs PROTECTOR
INPUT
INPUT 220V-240 50-60 Hz
120V 50-60 Hz 7A MAX
12A MAX
TVSS GND TVSS GND
Overload
100 V and 120 V 230 V Protector
Figure 2-18 Large Database Server (1000 VA) UPS
2-28
System Components
UPS Behavior After power failure the UPS operates as follows.
Seconds after
UPS/System Behavior
power failure
0 Line power fails and UPS goes to battery power. Philips systems
continue to run, but displays will be blank (no power).
If line power returns during the 90 - 120 second period, normal
operation is restored automatically.
90 - 120 The Operating System begins a system shutdown and Philips

application software ends.
120 - 150 The UPS shuts off power to the device. The UPS then typically beeps every 5
seconds until power is restored or the UPS is turned off.
When line power is restored, the UPS automatically supplies power to the device.
If line power is restored between 90 and 120 - 150 seconds after power failure,
the following message may appear.
It is now safe to turn off your computer.
• Click RESTART to initiate a software boot sequence, after which normal
Information Center operation resumes.
Warning If a power failure lasts for 150 seconds or longer the Server must be manually restarted
following the proper restart procedure.
Note Power failure and restoration messages appear in the Event Log.
2-29
System Components
Power A Power Distribution Module (M3166A) is provided with all Japanese orders to comply
Distribution with Japanese regulatory requirements. It is designed to accept selectable input voltages from
Module 100V to 240V (at 50-60 Hz) and produce selectable low output voltages of 100-127 V and
selectable high output voltages of 200-254V. Its input rating is 1440 VA and its output rating
is 1400VA. AC output voltages are electrically isolated from AC input voltages. The Power
Distribution Module is shown in Figure 2-19 along with its front and rear panels. The front
panel contains the On/Off switch
High Output Voltage Low Output Voltage Input Voltage
J1 1400 VA J2 700 VA
P1
100/120-127/200/220-240V
Positive
240/240-254/240/220-240 V 120/120-127/120/110-120 V
50-60 Hz Earth
J3 J4 J5 J6 1440 VA Terminal
Output Voltage
(all high or low)
Equipotential
! Terminal
S2 S1
S3 S2 S1
240/240-254/ 120/120-127/ 100 V
240/220-240 V 120-127 V
120/110-120 V
200 V
1400 VA 700 VA 220-240 V
Voltage
Switches
Figure 2-19 Power Distribution Module

A description of the PMD front panel controls and outputs follows.
• J1 is a high output voltage receptacle.
• J2 is a low output voltage receptacle.
• J3-J6 are additional output receptacles that are either high or low voltage depending on
the position of switch S3.
• S3 sets voltage output of J3-J6 high if set to 240/240-254/240/220-240 V~

sets voltage output of J3-J6 low if set to 120/120-127/120/110-120 V~
• S1 and S2 should be set to match the input voltage on receptacle P1 according to the
following table.
2-30
Mounting Equipment
Table 2-1 Input and Output Voltages for S1 & S2 Switch Settings
if set set then1 or2

P1 S2 S1 J1 & J3-J6 J2 & J3-J6
Input Voltage Output Voltage HIgh Output Voltage Low
100 V 240 V 120 V
120 - 127 V 240 - 254 V 120 - 127 V
200 V 240 V 120 V
220 - 240 V 220 - 240 V 110 - 120 V
1
If S3 set to 240/240-254/240/220-240 VAC
2
If S3 set to 120/120-127/240/110120 VAC
Note The Input Voltage (P1) for Japanese installations is typically 100V.
A more detailed description of the Power Distribution Model is provided in the Power
Distribution Module Installation Note which is included in the Service Documentation
of the IIC media kit.
Mounting Equipment
A variety of mounting equipment solutions are available for Information Center components.
Keyboard Mounting options are available for the computer keyboard (Table 1-32). Installation
Mounts procedures for desired mounting equipment are available in the equipment installation notes.
Other When using Information Center systems in a clinical environment, some of the components
Mounting need to be available to the user - Display, keyboard, mouse, speaker, recorder, and printer.
Equipment Other components - processing unit, UPS, power supplies, and video splitter - can be placed
in an out-of-the-way location.
2-31
Mounting Equipment
These components can be placed on the floor, on shelves, or mounted to a vertical surface.
Figure 2-20 The following illustration shows a typical dual display Information Center
installation.
18.5
Figure 2-20 Clinical Installation with Wall Mount Hardware
DC6700/DC7700 Figure 2-21 illustrates mounting an HP DC6700/DC7700 on a vertical surface.

Mount
Note If mounting the HP DC7700 on a vertical surface, you must change the DVD/CD drive
orientation (page 2-2).
2-32
Mounting Equipment
Figure 2-21 DC7700 PC/Hardware Watchdog Mounting Hardware
Step 1. Position PC on Lower Bracket Plate so it contacts stop flange.

Step 2. Insert Top Bracket in wall channel .
Mounting the You can use the rp5700 as a Desktop, Tower, or Wall-Mounted Unit.
HP rp5700
Using the Tower Stand
The Tower Stand permits you to use the PC in Tower Orientation.
If you want to use the PC as a Tower unit, do the following.
2-33
Mounting Equipment
Caution—Do not place the computer on its side without the tower stand. The stand is
required to prevent the computer from falling and causing damage to the unit.
Step 1. Shut down the PC, disconnect the power cord from the power outlet, and disconnect
any external devices.
Caution—Voltage is always present on the system board as long as the computer is plugged
into an active AC outlet. You must disconnect the power cord to avoid damage to the internal
components of the computer.
Step 2. Using electrostatic precautions, remove the computer cover.

a. Place the PC on an ESD approved work surface facing front.
b. Push in on the tabs on each side of the computer to release the latches that
secure the cover to the computer chassis.
c. Slide the cover forward about 1.3 cm (½ in), and lift it off. Then place the
cover in a safe place.
2-34
Mounting Equipment
Step 3. Push the peg out toward the front side of the bezel . Rotate the plate 90 degrees
then pull back on the peg to lock the logo plate in place.
Step 4. Replace the computer cover.

Step 5. Lift the computer so that its right side is facing down and place it on the stand
. Be sure that the arrow on the stand is pointing toward the front of the computer.
The computer front should be completely open. Leave a 10 mm (.39 in) clearance on
the sides and top of the computer and at least a 50 mm (1.97 in) clearance in the rear.
The rear vents must be completely open.
Step 6. Reconnect any external devices, then the power cord.
2-35
Mounting Equipment
Using the Wall Mount Bracket
With the rp5700 Wall Mount Bracket you can mount the PC on a horizontal or vertical
surface.
When you order an rp5700 Wall Mount Bracket an rp5700 Wall Mount Bracket Installation
Note is included in the package. Refer to the Installation Note for under counter or wall mount
information.
Ordering the HP rp5700 Wall Mount Bracket

The rp5700 Wall Mount Bracket must be ordered as M3180A-A29.
2-36
Mounting Equipment
UPS Mount Wall mount hardware for the UPS, 60V Recorder Power Supply, and Video Splitter is
illustrated in Figure 2-22.
Wall Mount Assembly Detail
Wall Mount Assembly
Mounting Cover
Wall Mount Assembly with Cover
Figure 2-22 UPS Mounting Hardware
2-37
CareNet
The processing unit and UPS system mounts can be combined for a single wall mount
installation (Figure 2-23). The systems can be mounted vertically or horizontally, depending
on the space available.
Figure 2-23 Combined Wall Mount Options

Optional mounting hardware is listed in Chapter 1, Mounting Options. Detailed Installation
Notes are provided with each mounting hardware Option.
CareNet
The Information Center is designed to show data from bedside and telemetry monitors
connected to Philips CareNet, which consists of the Signal Distribution Network (SDN) and
System Communications Controller (SCC), or the CareNet Controller (depending upon which
version of controller you have). The controller manages communication between the
Information Center and devices connected to the SDN. An overview summary of the SDN/
SCC is provided in this section. Detailed description of the design, theory of operation, and
other information on the SDN and SCC are included in the Serial Distribution Network
System Communications Controller Service Manual and in the CareNet Controller
Installation and Service Guide.
Serial The Serial Distribution Network (SDN) is a local area communication network designed to
Distribution share patient information (waveforms, parameters, alarms) with devices connected to the
Network network (patient monitors, central stations, displays, recorders, and other computer systems).
System The SDN is a digital communications network that allows high speed, real-time transmission
Description of digitized patient data. The communication protocol, data formatting, and hardware
accommodate a variety of communication needs in the patient monitoring environment.
2-38
CareNet
The SDN functions automatically without user interaction and without direct patient
connections. Once installed, it is reconfigurable by the user with no hardware modification.
Its topology ensures minimum impact of single-point failures.
Components The SDN consists of the following components:
• System Communications Controller (SCC), or CareNet controller

• SDN interface circuitry (SDN Card) located within each instrument connected to the
SDN
• Branch System Distribution Cables (SDC)
• Equipment Local Distribution Cables (LDC)
• Wall box hardware, connectors, and receptacles
Topology The SDN uses a topology that comprises up to 32 individual branches (0-31) emanating from
the center - the SCC. Only one SCC can be used per SDN and multiple SDNs may not be
interconnected. One SDN can accommodate up to 24 bedside instruments (one patient per
branch), 6 central station systems, 6 digital telemetry mainframes, 6 careports, 1 arrhythmia
monitoring system, and 1 other computer system. The SDN topology is shown in Figure
2-24.
Caution—For Information Center application software to operate properly, one Information

Center must be connected to Branch 0 of the SDN.
2-39
CareNet
13 14
12
11 15
16
10
17
Branches 1-24 9
Patient Monitoring
18
Devices
8
19
7
6 SCC 20
5 21
22
4
3 23
2
24
Branch 0
Information 0 25
Center
31 26
30 27
29 28
Branches 30-31
Branches 25-29
Computer Systems
Telemetry Mainframes,
Central Stations,
Careports
Figure 2-24 SDN Topology
SCC The System Communications Controller (SCC) is the active device of the SDN. Its
functions are to provide the communication link among instruments connected to the SDN,
establish SDN polling cycles, and control data flow, timing, synchronization, and distribution
throughout the system.The SCC is shown in Figure 2-25.
Figure 2-25 Serial Communications Controller
2-40
CareNet
The SCC performs basic SDN fault detection to insure reliability of SDN system
communication as well as self-diagnostic routines for SCC fault detection, troubleshooting,
and servicing.
Warning For the Information Center system to comply with IEC 60601-1-1, a second Protective
Earth (PE) must be provided for the SDN. This is normally accomplished by providing a
second PE to the SCC (Chapter 4, Philips Device Requirements).
Note The Information Center can also monitor up to two telemetry mainframes without an SCC. In
this configuration, the telemetry mainframe output is connected directly to the Information
Center SDN Card connector. Priority wire connections are required for this application. See
Figure 2-26.
SDN Interface The SDN Interface Card is the intelligent interface between the SDN and the PC host. It
Card receives and sends messages to and from other instruments over the SDN. Figure 2-26
shows A block diagram of SDN Interface Card circuitry.
Figure 2-26 SDN Interface Card Block Diagram
Branch Cables SDN branch cables are installed to connect the SCC to wall boxes where SDN instruments are
connected. Branch cables can be of two general types -- shielded, Serial Distribution Cables
(SDC) or Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) cables. For both cable types, there are limitations on
the length of cable runs to ensure reliable communication.
SDC Serial Distribution Cables (SDC) are proprietary, 2-conductor, twisted pair, shielded cables
that are 0.34 in (0.9 cm) in diameter. The wires and shield have the following colors and
assignments.
Pink + positive
Blue - negative
Shield drain ground (GND)
SDC branch cables are limited to a maximum length per branch of 152 m (500 ft.).
2-41
CareNet
XSDC For longer cable runs, Philips shielded, Extended System Distribution Cable (XSDC) can
be used. It has heavier gauge conductor wires with a cable diameter of 1.1 cm (0.44 in).
XSDC wire colors and assignments are the same as for SDC. XSDC branch cables are limited
to a maximum length per branch of 304 m (1000 ft.). Only two XSDC cable runs are allowed
per SCC.
UTP SDN branch cables can also be LAN Ethernet, Cat 5, Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) cable.
UTP cable consists of 4 twisted pairs of unshielded conductors in which one pair (BLUE/
white and WHITE/blue) carries the SDN signal and the other pairs are connected to ground.
UTP cable is compatible with either the 568A or 568B wiring standards for RJ 45 jacks. UTP
branch cables are limited to a maximum length per branch of 90 m
(295 ft.).
SDC, XSDC, and UTP cables are available from Philips. Specifications for these branch
cables are summarized in the following table.
Table 2-2 Branch Cables for Philips Systems
Cable + Signal - Signal Shield Maximum Length
Type Color Color Color Meters Feet
SDC Pink Blue Green 152 500
XSDC Pink Blue Green 304 1000
UTP BLUE/white WHITE/blue All other 90 295
LDC Local Distribution Cables (LDC) for connecting the processing unit to SDN wall boxes are
Philips proprietary computer cables with a 9-pin connection to the processing unit and an
Philips 5-pin barrel connector to an Philips SDN wall box. A 15 m (50 ft.) LDC cable kit
(M3181A #A35) is also available. Cables and wall boxes are described in the following
sections.
A typical SDN installation for an Information Center using UTP cable is shown in Figure
2-27. SDN on UTP installation materials for Philips installations are given in Installation
Materials, Table 1-34.
Figure 2-27 Typical SDN for an Information Center System Using UTP
2-42
Cables
Wall Box Kits Wall box kits for connecting Philips LDC to SDN/UTP wiring are available from Philips.
These are special Philips wall box kits designed to fit into standard U.S. electrical wall boxes
[NEMA, single or dual gang with conduit knockouts, minimum depth = 4.0 cm (1.6 in.)] and
typical European wall boxes [minimum depth = 4.0 cm (1.6 in.)]. SDN/UTP Wall Box Kits
for both U.S. and European installations are shown in Figure 2-28. Wall box kits for SDN
installations using SDC and XSDC are also available from Philips.
Detailed descriptions of proper installation of wall box kits are provided in the Installation
Note Installing SDN Using UTP Cable and are included with the wall box kit. Ordering
information for wall box kits is provided in Installation Materials.
U.S. Wall Box Kit European Wall Box Kit
Figure 2-28 SDN UTP Wall boxes for Philips Connections
Cables
Equipment cables for Philips devices are of two general types, those that provide power and
those that carry communication signals. This section provides descriptions and drawings of
each cable. Detailed wiring diagrams for each Information Center model are provided in
Chapter 5, Hardware Installation.
Cable Information Center Systems equipment cables are described in Table 2-3 and illustrated in
Descriptions Figure 2-29 and Figure 2-30.
Table 2-3 Equipment Cables for Information Center Systems

Figure Item Description Option Length (m) Length (ft)
1 Display power cable - (all displays)
2 Display signal cable - (all displays)
3 Female/Female VGA cable adapter
4 15 Pin Mini D-Sub Male to 5 BNC coax adapter cable A11 1.0 3.3
15 Pin Mini D-Sub Male to 5 BNC coax adapter cable A12 5.0 16.4
5 6-way Video Splittera
6 Video Splitter power cable
7 5 BNC/5 BNC coax adapter cable A17 3.0 9.8
2-43
Cables
Table 2-3 Equipment Cables for Information Center Systems

Figure Item Description Option Length (m) Length (ft)
8 5 Male BNC connectors (for Plenum coax cable) J89
5 Male BNC connectors (for Non-plenum coax cable) J87
9 BNC Plenum coax cable P35 90 max. 300 max.
BNC Non-plenum coax cable C62/C63 90 max. 300 max.
10 Mouse or Trackball cable
11 Keyboard cable
Not Illustrated Keyboard/Mouse extension cable A14 4.0 13.1
Not Illustrated Extended distance cable kit (includes cables for display, mouse, A10 6.0 19.7
keyboard, and recorder rack)
12 APC UPS signal cable to M3150 PC (option) A15 1.0 3.3
APC UPS signal cable to M3150 PC (standard) A16 2.0 6.6
13 PC power cable
14 SDN cable: wall box - PC (standard) A30 2.0 6.6
SDN cable: wall box - PC (option) A31 4.0 13.1
15 Speaker cable 6.0 19.7
16 4-Channel Serial Recorder 24V Power Supply power cable
17 4-Channel Serial Recorder signal cable 7.6 25
18 SDN 9-pin D from SDN Card to CAT 5 UTP (RJ45 connector) A36 2.0 6.6
SDN 9-pin D from SDN Card to CAT 5 UTP (RJ45 connector) A37 4.0 13.1
19 USB Connector to Display signal cable
a
Various options available under #862211.
2-44
Cables
AC Power Display
Display PC
Main
Screen AC Power
Display
PC
Slave Display
Hardwired to 10
Mouse or PC
Trackball
11
Wire from PC
Keyboard
UPS PC
AC Power PC
(UPS)
SDN
Wallbox PC
Figure 2-29 Information Center Systems Equipment Cables
2-45
Cables
Wire from
Speaker PC
AC Power PC
(UPS)
4-Channel PC
Serial Recorder
Serial Port B
SDN Interface Wall Box
Display USB
Figure 2-30 Information Center Systems Equipment Cables
2-46
Cables
Cable Pin Pin connections for cables connecting Information Center medical components -- Recorders
Connections and SDN -- are illustrated in the Figure 2-31 and Figure 2-32. For pin connections for
other products and cables, refer to the equipment documentation.
Socket 4 Socket 1
AC Power
(UPS)
Socket 2
Socket 3
Socket 1:Black Power Ground

4-Channel Serial Recorder Socket 2:
24 VDC Power Supply Socket 3: Outer Shield
Socket 4: Red: 24VDC
Pin 9 Pin 5
Pin 5 Pin 9
Pin 6 Pin 6
Pin 1
Pin 1 4-Channel Serial
Recorder Cable
Pin 5
Pin 1 SDN 9-pin D from SDN Card to standard

CAT 5 UTP wall plate (RJ45 connector)
Pins on D-9 Connector Pins on RJ 45 Plug

3 -----------------------------------------> 5
8 -----------------------------------------> 4
5 -----------------------------------------> 1,2,3,6,7,8, Drain
Figure 2-31 SDN Card and 4-Channel Serial Recorder Pin Connections
2-47
Cables
SDN Wall Box and The UTP cable from the SCC to the wall box has 4 pairs of unshielded, twisted wires. Pair 1 -
Signal Cable - WHITE-blue and BLUE-white -- carries the SDN signal from the SCC and is connected to
sockets A (+) and E (-) of the SDN wall box. The other UTP cable pairs are connected to
ground.
Figure 2-32 SDN Pin Connections
2-48
Installing Additional Cards
If your system requires connection to the hospital intranet, your system must accommodate a
second LAN connection. A Network Interface Card (NIC) can be installed if necessary on
M3140 Low Acuity Information Centers, M3169 Small Database Servers, and systems with
options C02, C14, C17, C23, C67, C74, and C76.
An Audio Card is used on M3140, M3145, M3150 and M3151 Information Centers. Before
you install or replace a NIC or Audio Card, you must create an archive.
Warning All installed cards must be in the correct slots for proper Information Center operation.
Refer to page 2-3, page 2-4, page 2-8, and page 2-6.
HP rp5700
Card Location
Card Location
System Vertical Slot 1 Vertical Slot 2 Horizontal Upper Horizontal Lower
Low Profile Low Profile Full Height Full Height
M3150 Second Video PCI Expressa Audio Card Network Inter-
SDN face Card (NIC)
Option C01 Option C73
Options C02,
C14, C17, C23,
C67, C74, C76
M3155/M3145 Audio Card Open
M3151 Open
M3177 Second Video Open Open Open
Option C01
M3140 Open Open Audio Card NIC
M3170 Open PCI Expressa Open NIC
SDN
Options C02,
Option C73 C14
M3169 Open Open Open NIC

a
PCI Express slot also accommodates Remote Solution Host Card.
2-49
Creating an The HP rp5700 has a USB port that

Archive you can use for saving an archive on a
USB memory stick, that is included in
the PC Accessory Kit. The Memory
Stick has a self-adhering holder with
retractable lanyard that you can attach
to the PC chassis. You can remove the
Memory Stick from the holder and use
it on other PCs in your system.
You must create an archive on

removable media before opening the
PC to add or replace a card. For details
about creating an archive refer to
page 6-96.
Warning You cannot restore an archive from hardware earlier than the HP rp5700 that has an
assigned SDN device to an rp5700 that does not have an SDN card. In order to create a
compatible archive you must remove the SDN devices from the current system, then
create the archive.
Removing the PC Step 1. Place the PC on an ESD approved work surface facing front.
Cover
Step 2. Push in on the tabs on each side of the computer to release the latches that secure
the cover to the computer chassis.
Step 3. Slide the cover forward about 1.3 cm (½ in), and lift it off. Then place the cover
in a safe place.
2-50
About the The HP rp5700 has the following Expansion Slots.

Expansion Slots
1 An ADD2 (Advance Digital Display 2)/SDVO (Serial Digital Video Output) Expansion Slot
Accommodates Second Video Card
2 A PCI Express x1 Expansion Slot
Accommodates SDN Card
3 A PCI Expansion Slot populated with Riser Card
The Riser Card accommodates two additional cards--NIC and Audio Card
Installing a NIC Step 1. With the PC cover removed (page 50), press the latch release on the front of the
power supply , and then raise the power supply to the upright position .
Step 2. Open the Riser Card slot cover retainer that secures the slot covers.
2-51
Step 3. Pull the lower slot cover straight out of the chassis.
Riser Card that has 2
sockets for PCI cards
Step 4. Align the NIC with the lower slot in the Riser Card and press the card straight into
the socket. When installing the NIC, press firmly on the card so that the whole
connector seats properly in the socket.
Riser Card
Socket
After adding a NIC, you must re-install the Operating System and Application Software and
reconfigure the system using the archive.
Installing an Step 1. With the PC cover removed (page 50), press the latch release on the front of the
Audio Card power supply , and then raise the power supply to the upright position .
2-52
Step 2. Open the Riser Card slot cover retainer.
Step 3. For the Audio Card pull the upper slot cover straight out of the chassis.
Step 4. Before installing the Audio Card, connect the appropriate Input Sound Cable
connector to the card. Refer to the following illustration for the correct Input Sound
Cable connector.
Input Sound Cable
Mother Board
Connector
Input Sound Cable

Connector
to PC Front Speaker Plug
(Optional)
Input Sound Cable
Audio Card
Connector
2-53
Step 5. Align the card with the upper slot in the Riser Card (see arrow) and press the Audio
Card straight into the socket. When installing the Audio Card, press firmly on the card
so that the whole connector seats properly in the socket.
Step 6. Close the slot cover retainer.

Step 7. Return the power supply to the down position until it locks.
Step 8. Raise the drive cage to the upright position.
2-54
Step 9. Rotate the fan duct out of the chassis.
Step 10. Unplug the PC front speaker connector from the mother board. Then connect the
appropriate Input Sound Cable connector (which is attached to the Audio Card) to
the mother board .
Step 11. Attach the appropriate Input Sound Cable connector to the PC front speaker
plug . You must push the speaker plug into the cable connector until you hear it
click. It is a recessed connection which may require using a small screwdriver, or
equivalent, to secure the connection.
If you do not intend to use the PC front speaker because remote speakers are being
used, you do not have to attach the Input Sound Cable connector to the speaker.
2-55
Step 12. Connect power connector P3 from power supply to the Audio Card.
Step 13. Return the fan duct and drive cage to original orientation.
Warning Be sure that the external speaker connection is secure and cannot be accidentally pulled
out.
2-56
Installing a The HP rp5700 has two Expansion Slots (page 2-51) that accommodate the Second Video
Second Video or and PCI Express SDN card. Refer to page 2-4 for card locations.
SDN Card
Step 1. With the computer cover off (page 2-50), open the slot retainer. Then remove the
appropriate Expansion Slot cover by pulling the slot cover straight up out of the chassis.
Step 2. Install the PCI Express SDN Card.

The PCI Express SDN Card for the rp5700 is not backward compatible to earlier PCs.
The new card has a PCI Express interface instead of a PCI interface.
PCI SDN Card used on HP dc7700 and earlier PCI Express SDN Card used on HP rp5700
0189
0189
0189
a. Remove the PCI Express SDN card from the package.

b. Align the bracket on the SDN card with the appropriate PCI Express x1 slot and
press the card straight into the socket. Press firmly on the card so that the whole
connector seats properly in the socket.
c. When SDN Card installation is complete, you must verify the SDN Card LED
sequence. Refer to PCI Express SDN Card LED Behavior Description.
d. Be sure to follow the Test and Inspection Performance Assurance Procedures after
any installation or upgrade to a Philips Information Center or Clinical Network/
Database Server system before using the system with patients.
2-57
Step 3. Install the Second Video Card.

a. Remove Second Video Card from packaging along with the low profile bracket.
b. Before you can install the low profile bracket you must remove the full height
bracket that ships on the Video Card. Remove the 3/16 inch hex standoffs on
either side of the VGA connector, then remove the bracket from the card.
c. Fit the low profile bracket to the Second Video Card VGA connector and securely
tighten the 3/16 inch hex standoffs.
Caution—If you are tightening the nuts by hand, be careful not to over torque the nuts or you
can damage the connector.
d. Align the bracket on the Second Video Card with the appropriate slot and press
the card straight into the ADD2 socket.
Press firmly on the card so that the whole connector seats properly in the socket.
Step 4. Close the slot cover retainer.
Step 5. Replace the computer cover.

Be sure that the cover snaps in place.
After adding a Second Video card, you must re-install the Operating System and Application
Software and reconfigure the system using the archive. Refer to page 7-133.
Warning Be sure to follow the Test and Inspection Performance Assurance Procedures after any
installation or upgrade to a Philips Information Center or Clinical Network/Database
Server system before using the system with patients.
2-58
HP DC7700
Dual Display For the HP DC7700, the Dual Display Graphics Card and Y-Cable are required if you want
Graphics Card to use two displays. In this configuration, the Main Screen appears on the primary display
and the Patient Window and control screens appear on a second display.
When this option is purchased as part of an initial Information Center installation, the Dual
Display Graphics Card is pre-installed and the Information Center software is preconfigured
for operation. When purchased as an upgrade option, the Dual Display upgrade kit includes an
Installation Note that describes installation and configuration.
Installation of the Dual Graphics Card into the processing unit is described in the model-
specific HP Hardware Reference Guide provided in the IIC Service Documentationof the
Media Kit. See page 2-3 for Dual Video Card placement on HP DC7700 systems.
Note When installing a system upgrade, installation of a dual display card in a single display system
is not allowed.
For HP DC7700 Dual Display systems, you must attach a Y-Cable to the PC Dual Video
Card connector. Then, attach the Main Display plug to the Y-Cable Connector 1, and the
Second Display plug to the Y-Cable Connector 2.
(2) Connect to
Secondary Display
Connect to Dual
Graphics Card
Connector
(1) Connect to
Main Display
Amplifier Card or The Amplifier or Audio Sound Card provides external speaker capability to Information
Audio Sound Centers and Clients processing units. It is a qualified, standard component and is pre-installed.
Card
Replacing amplifier card on the HP DC7700 PC
Step 1. Connect both the Input Sound Cable and the Power Extender Cable to the Audio
Card (M3180-60030). The Input Sound Cable connectors are all different; before
connecting be sure that you are using the right connector.
Step 2. Install the amplifier card in the appropriate slot. See page 2-3.
2-59
Step 3. Disconnect the existing sound cable from the motherboard. Then connect the Input
Sound Cable to the Mother board.
Connect new sound

cable to Audio Card
Connect new sound

cable to Motherboard
connector
Audio Cable
Step 4. Connect the Power Extender Cable to the audio card.
Power Cable to
Audio Card
Step 5. If necessary, tie-wrap the disconnected sound cable as illustrated.
2-60
Warning Secure cables with plugs not firmly attached by screw connections to prevent accidental
unplugging. Be sure to make strain relief loops when fastening the cable tie.
Be sure that the speaker cable cannot accidentally be pulled out because it accommodates
alarm sounding. Secure the cable to another screw-connected plug using cable ties.
Make Strain Relief

Loop - Secure with
Cable Tie
Figure 2-33 Speaker Cable - Strain Relief Loop
Installing a PCI If you are using a second NIC on the HP DC DC7700, a PCI Extender Card is also required.
Extender Card
and NIC
Note Before adding a second NIC, create an archive on removable media (page 6-96).
Installing the PCI Extender Card
Step 1. Open the PC.
a. Place the PC on an ESD approved work surface facing front.

b. Lift the latch and slide the cover backwards. Be sure to place the cover in a safe
location.
2-61
Step 2. Unlock the PCI Board Hold Down Bracket by pressing down on the two green tabs
and remove it.
The PCI Extender Kit (M2384-66012) consists of a Support Bracket that attaches to the PC
chassis underneath the Motherboard and a PCI Extender Card for installing the second NIC.
Step 3. Install the PCI Extender Kit Support Bracket to the PCI chassis underneath the
Motherboard as follows:
a. Position the two tabs of the Support Bracket so that they are facing the
Motherboard and pointing down at an angle.
b. Press the Support Bracket down and so that its tabs are under the Motherboard.
tabs
Motherboard
Support Bracket
Press Bracket down

with tabs under
Motherboard
c. Slide the Support Bracket to the left and secure it in place.
Slide Bracket to
the left and secure it
in place
Step 4. Install the PCI Extender Card.
2-62
a. Plug the PCI Extender Card into the connector on the edge of the Motherboard.
b. Align the mounting holes on the PCI Extender Card over the screw holes in the
Support Bracket. It may be necessary to adjust the Support Bracket position.
Step 5. Secure the PCI Extender Card to the Support Bracket using two #6 machine screws
provided with the Kit. Use a Torx setting of #15.
Installing the NIC

Step 1. Unpack the LAN Card (M1381-66407) and discard the cable.
2-63
Step 2. Remove the appropriate slot cover and plug the NIC into the PCI Extender card so
that it aligns with slot.
Step 3. Close the PC.
a. Position the PC Card Hold Down Bracket over the PC Cards.

b. Secure the Hold Down Bracket in place with its green tabs and replace the cover
on the PC.
c. Lock the cover in place with the latch.
After adding the second NIC, you must re-install the Operating System and application
software, and reconfigure the system using archive media created before installing the NIC.
2-64
Specifications
Specifications
This section provides physical, environmental, electrical, and safety specifications for
Information Center system components and displays.
Caution The following specifications are for units shipped at the time of this manual’s
publication. Units shipped with later systems may vary, with newer models substituted
as they become available.
Physical Table 2-4 gives the current specifications of the maximum dimensions and weights of each
Specifications component in the Information Center System.
Table 2-4 Physical Specifications of Information Center System Components
Product Height Width Depth Weight
Philips Component
Part # cm (in.) cm (in.) cm (in.) kg. (lbs.)
HP DC7700 PC 4535 640 37431 7.49 (2.95) 31.5 (12.4) 33.48 (13.18) 5.48 (12.08)
4535 640 56761
HP rp5700 PC 4535 640 67761 10 (3.94) 34 (13.4) 38 (15) 8.43 (18.6)
HP rp5700 PC 4535 642 13931 10 (3.94) 34 (13.4) 38 (15) 8.43 (18.6)
HP ML350 G5 Server 4535 640 37461 44.45 (17.5) 22 (8.66) 60 (23.6) 27.22 (60)a
4535 640 56771
HP ML350 G6 Tower Server 4535 641 62631 47 (18.5) 21.8 (8.59) 59.6 (23.46) 31.8 (70)b
HP ML350 G6 Tower Server 4535 642 13941 47 (18.5) 21.8 (8.59) 59.6 (23.46) 31.8 (70)c
HP DL380 G6 Rack Server 4535 641 63221 8.59 (3.38) 44.55 (17.54) 69.22 (27.26) 27.27 (60)d
HP DL 380 G7 Rack Server 4535 642 13951 8.59 (3.38) 44.55 (17.54) 69.22 (27.26) 27.27 (60)e
Large Flat Panel Display 862058 45.5 (17.9) 45.0 (17.7) 24.5 (9.6) 13.6 (29.9)
Large Flat Panel Touch Display 862059 45.5 (17.9) 45.0 (17.7) 24.5 (9.6) 9.8 (21.5)
6-Way Video Splitter 862211 4.3 (1.75) 44 (17.5) 21.6 (8.5) 1.7 (3.9)
Keyboard (English) 4535 640 11331 4.6 (1.8) 46.0 (18.1) 18.9 (7.5) 1.1 (2.4)
Keyboard-Video-Mouse Switch 862098 4.8 (1.9) 20.6 (8.1) 12.7 (5.0) 0.77 (1.7)
2-Channel USB Recorder 862120 11.2 (4.4) 14.3 (5.6) 14.5 (5.7) 0.19 (.42)
4-Channel Serial Recorder M3160A 24.9 (9.8) 14.0(5.5) 19.0 (7.5) 2.5 (5.5)
4-Channel USB Recorder 4535 640 54581 9.9 (3.88) 19.8 (7.78) 11 (4.32) 0.86 (1.9)
UPS w/Hardware Watchdog SMART500RT1U
8.5 (18.8)
4535 640 57081
4.45 (1.75) 44.5 (17.5) 29.8 (11.75)
UPS w/Hardware Watchdog SMX500RT1U 8.2 (18.0)
4535 640 37311
UPS w/Hardware Watchdog SMART1050SLT 26.04 (10.25) 17.15 (6.75) 33.7 (13.25) 17.82 (39.6)
4535 640 44751
UPS (650 VA, 120 V)) 0950-2832
UPS (650 VA, 230 V) 0950-3406 16.8 (6.6) 11.9 (4.7) 36.1 (14.2) 11.4 (25.0)
UPS APC Rack Mount (1500VA 100V) 453564271191 8.69 / 3.42 47.98 / 18.89 46.38 / 18.26 25 / 55
UPS APC Rack Mount (1500VA 230V) 453564271201 8.89 / 3.50 43.18 / 17.00 45.72 / 18.00 28.18 / 62.00
Power Distribution Module M3166A 16.0 (6.3) 25.9 (10.2) 51.0 (20.1) 20 (44)
2-65
Specifications
Table 2-4 Physical Specifications of Information Center System Components

Product Height Width Depth Weight
Philips Component
Part # cm (in.) cm (in.) cm (in.) kg. (lbs.)
UPS for Database Server M3882-60001 19.1 (42)
(1000 VA, 120V)
UPS for Database Server (Japan) M3884-60001 19.1 (42)
21.6 (8.5) 17.0 (6.7) 43.9 (17.3)
(1000 VA, 100V)
UPS for Database Server M3883-60001 18.9 (41.5)
(1000 VA, 230V)
a
Net weight without drives
bWeight includes all hard drives, power supplies, and processors installed.
c
Weight includes all hard drives, power supplies, and processors installed.
d
Weight includes all hard drives, power supplies, amd processors installed.
e
Weight includes all hard drives, power supplies, amd processors installed.
Environmental Table 2-5 lists information on the environmental operating requirements for the current
Requirements system components. Data for both the Philips system as a whole and for individual
components are provided.
Table 2-5 Environmental Requirements for Information Center System Components
Product Temperature (Operatinga Relative Humidity

Part # and Storage) (Non-condensing)
Philips System 59 - 86 oF 20 - 80% @ 30oC (86 oF)
15 - 30 oC
Philips Components
Large DBS M3168F Operating 10 - 35oC
453564037461 (50 - 95oF)
453564056771 Storage -40 - 70oC
(-40 - 158oF) Operating 10 - 90%
453564162631 Operating 10 to 35oC Storage 5 - 95%
453564163221 (50 to 95oF)
453564213941 Storage -30 to 60oC
453564213951 (-22 to 140oF)
PC M3167G 10 to 40oC Operating 20 to 85%
453564037431 (50 to 104oF)
453564056761 -30 to 60oC
(-22 to 140oF) Storage 5 - 95%
453564067761
453564213931
Large Flat Panel Display 862058 50 - 104 oF 0 - 80%
10 - 40 oC
Large Flat Panel Touch Display 862059 50 - 104 oF 0 - 80%
10 - 40 oC
Video Splitter 6-Way -40 - 158 oF
862211 5 - 95%
-40 - 70 oC
2-Channel USB Recorder 862120 32 to 122oF 10 - 95%
0 to 50o C
2-66
Specifications
Table 2-5 Environmental Requirements for Information Center System Components
Product Temperature (Operatinga Relative Humidity

Part # and Storage) (Non-condensing)
4-Channel Serial Recorder/Power Supply M3160A 41 - 104 oF 20 - 80%
5 - 40 oC
4-Channel USB Recorder 865032 32 to 95oF 15 - 90%
0 to 35oC
UPS with Hardware Watchdog SMART500RT1U 32 - 104 oF 0 - 95%
4535 640 57081 0 - 40 oC
UPS with Hardware Watchdog SMX500RT1U 59 - 86 oF 20 - 80%
4535 640 37311 15 - 30 oC
UPS with Hardware Watchdog SMART1050SLT 59 - 86 oF 20 - 80%
4535 640 44751 15 - 30 oC
UPS (650 VA, 120V) 862099 41 - 104 oF 15 - 80%
UPS (650 VA, 230V) 0950-3406 5 - 40 oC
UPS for Database Server M3882-60001 32 - 104 oF 0 - 95%

(1000 VA, 120V) 0 - 40 oC
UPS for Database Server (Japan) M3884-60001 32 - 104 oF 0 - 95%
(1000 VA, 100V) 0 - 40 oC
UPS for Database Server M3883-60001 32 - 104 oF 0 - 95%
(1000 VA, 230V) 0 - 40 oC
UPS APC Rack Mount (1500VA 100V) 453564271191 32 - 104 oF 0 - 95%
0 - 40 oC
UPS APC Rack Mount (1500VA 230V) 453564271201 32 - 104 oF 0 - 95%
0 - 40 oC
Power Distribution Module M3166A 23 - 140 oF 0 - 95%
5 - 60 oC @ 40 oC
aOperating temperature is de-rated 1.0oC per 305 m (1000 ft) to 3050 m (10,000 ft) above sea level, no direct
sustained sunlight. Maximum rate of change is 10 oC/Hr (18oF/Hr). System performance may be reduced
if operating with a fan fault or above 30oC (86oF).
2-67
Specifications
Electrical Table 2-6 lists electrical specifications for current system components.
Specifications
Table 2-6 Electrical Specifications of Information Center System Components
Manual Input Power

Product Input Voltage
Philips Component Switching Frequency Output (typ)
Part # (VAC)
Required? (Hz) (Watts)
Large DBS
HP ML350 G5 453564056771 47 - 63 800
100 - 240 No
HP ML350 G6 453564162631 50 - 60 240
HP ML350 G6 453564213941
HP DL380 G6 453564163221 100 - 240 Yes 50 - 60 240
HP DL380 G7 453564213951 100 - 240 50 - 60 240
No
PC and Small DBS
HP DC7700 453564056761 50 - 60
100 - 240 No 200
HP rp5700 453564067761 50 - 60
HP rp5700 453564213931
Large Flat Panel Display 862058 81 - 264 No 48 - 62
Large Flat Panel Touch Display 862059 100 - 240 No 50 - 60
6-Way Video Splitter 862211 100 - 240 No 50/60 10
4-Channel Serial Recorder/ 24VDC M3160A 100 - 120 No 50 - 60 70
Power Supply 220 - 240
UPS with Hardware Watchdog SMART500RT1U 93 - 133 60 + 2
4535 640 57081
UPS with Hardware Watchdog SMX500RT1U 193 - 258 50/60 + 2
4535 640 37311
UPS with Hardware Watchdoga SMART1050SLT 108 - 132 50/60 + 3
4535 640 44751
UPS (650 VA, 120V) 862099 100 - 127 Yes 50/60 38
UPS (650 VA, 230V) 0950-3406 220 - 240 Yes 50/60 38
UPS for Database Server M3882-60001 82 - 144 n/a 50 - 60
(1000 VA 120V)
UPS for Database Server (Japan) M3884-60001 82 - 144 n/a 50 - 60
(1000 VA 100V)
UPS for Database Server M3883-60001 160 - 286 n/a 50 - 60
(1000 VA, 230V)
UPS APC Rack Mount (1500VA 453564271191 103 - 132 No 50 - 60 670
100V)
UPS APC Rack Mount (1500VA 453564271201 220 - 240 No 50 - 60 670
230V)
Power Distribution Module M3166A 100, 120 -127, Yes 50 - 60
200, 200 - 240
a
Requires Power Distribution Module in Japan (connect to J2). See page 2-30.
2-68
Specifications
Conversion factors for power dissipation are the following:

BTU/hr = Watts x 3.413
Kcal/hr = Watts x 0.8598
Conversion factor for air conditioning requirements for power dissipation is:
air conditioning power dissipation
1 ton = 8900 BTU/hr = 3024 Kcal/hr
Customer Table 2-7 lists recommended requirements for displays and video cables connected to
Supplied Information Centers and Clients.
Display
Requirements For displays and video cables not supplied by Philips as part of an Information Center system:
• The support user is responsible for all aspects of Display selection, purchase,
installation, repair, and disposal
• Philips cannot assure system compatibility
• Philips cannot assure compliance with the ECG aspect ratio and 25 mm/s +10% sweep
speed specification of Information Center software, which complies with the ANSI/
AAMI EC-13 Standard for Cardiac Monitors, Heart-Rate Meters, and Alarms.
Table 2-7 Recommended Display Specifications for Information Center Displays

Specification Value
Screen Resolution 1280 x 1024
Vertical Refresh Rate 60 Hz
Viewable width of 1280 dots This value is the Visible Display Width that is entered in the Config
Wizard Device Setup and Support Information Screen. The valid range
is 267 to 1188 mm.
Red, Green, & Blue Video Inputs ~ 0.7 V p-p
Vertical & Horizontal Multi-Sync Inputs 5 VTTL
Video Cable Connector HD 15 Male
Color Depth 24-bit (or greater) True Color
Note The ECG aspect ratio and 25 mm/s + 10% specifications are likely to be met with a high
quality display and video cable that satisfies the specifications recommended in Table 2-7.
Some displays have visible and/or protruding menu keys that can interfere with the operation
of the Application software. Verify when installing customer supplied displays that these
buttons are protected from the possibility of interference.
2-69
Specifications
Flat Panel A small number of missing pixels is normal for flat panel (LCD) displays and is not an
Specifications indication that the display is not meeting specifications and needs to be replaced. The
following specifications for a typical flat panel display are listed here:
Monitor Backlight (Brightness)

Working Conditions
– Ambient temperature: 25 +/- 5 degrees C
– Brightness control (Vvr4): 0V
Definition of defect
– Brightness falls under 50% of the minimum brightness value of the flat panel
display (Minimum brightness 210 cd/m2)
– The lamp does not turn on
– The lamp starts flashing
Inspection Specifications for Pixel Drop Out

Area to be inspected
– Inside display dot area (345.6 x 276.48 mm) - display dot area is the “active area”
– One pixel consists of 3 dots (red, green and blue)
Bright pixels definition
– Bright pixels are classified as follows (based on luminance samples)
L>0, 75Lx+0, 25Ln (according to ISO 13406-2:2001)
L is the measured luminance of the pixel
Lx is the average pixel response to a maximum luminance command
(e.g. white)
Ln is the average pixel response to a minimum luminance command
(e.g. black)
Number of bright pixels standard
– Bright pixels 15 or less
– Number of two bright pixels connections 4 or less
Note Display should be all black when bright spots are counted. Distance between defects is 5 mm
or more. Distance to the third defect should be 20 mm or more.
Dark pixels definition

– Dark pixels are classified as follows (based on luminance samples)
L < 0, 75 Ln + 0, 25 Lx (according to ISO 13406-2:2001)
L is the measured luminance of the pixel
Lx is the average pixel response to a maximum luminance command
(e.g. white)
Ln is the average pixel response to a minimum luminance command
(e.g. black)
Number of dark pixels standard
– Number of defects 16 or less
– Number of two dark pixels connections 5 or less
Note Display should be all white when dark spots are counted. Distance between defects is 5 mm or
more. Distance to the third defect should be 20 mm or more.
2-70
Regulatory
Regulatory
Philips The Information Center Release M.0 software complies with applicable portions of ANSI/
Software AAMI EC-13 and with requirements of the Council Directive 93/42/EEC of 14 June 1993
concerning medical devices. It carries CE-marking to the European Medical Device Directive.
0123
Prescription Rx ONLY. Federal Law restricts this device to sale by or on the order of a physician.
Device
Philips The PC workstation, Server, USB 2-Channel Recorder, UPS, and Displays comply with IEC
Hardware 60950-1, CISPR 22 Level A, CISPR 24, and EN 61000. They carry CE- marking to the
European Low Voltage and EMC Directives.
Warning Information Center system components are not suitable for installation in the Patient
Care Vicinity (Patient Environment) -- any area within 1.5 meters (4.9 ft.) horizontally
and 2.5 m (8.2 ft.) vertically above the floor from any patient care location in which
medical diagnosis, monitoring, or treatment of the patient is carried out.
2-71
Regulatory
2-72
3
Software Description
Overview
The Information Center medical application software is the heart of the Information Center. It
operates on a PC workstation and uses a Windows Operating System software to provide the
full range of central monitoring functionality.
The system application software is described in the following sections.
• PC Workstation Platform - provides a brief description of the PC Workstation and

peripheral hardware required for proper software operation.
• Windows Operating System - describes the Windows Operating System software

required by the Information Center system. Because this is a standard product for which
extensive documentation is available, only a brief overview is provided.
• IntelliVue Information Center Application Software - describes the Information

Center applications software, including its features and architecture.
• Services - describes embedded management services (EMS) tools available to service

personnel for managing and maintaining Information Center systems.
Application Software
Windows Operating System
PC Workstation Platform
Figure 3-1 Major Components of the Information Center System
Table 3-1 Media Kit
Description
USB Flash Drive Media Kit
Installation Support Tool (IST) CD
Application Software/Service Documentation USB Flash Drive
DVD Media Kit
Installation Support Tool (IST) CD
Application Software/Service Documentation DVD
3-1
The PC provides the hardware platform for the Information Center system. It works in
cooperation with a variety of peripheral devices to provide Information Center functionality.
The Information Center is a PC configured for proper operation of application software. The
PC supplied by Philips have been configured, tested and validated to meet the specific
medical device requirements for operating the application software. Therefore, they are the
only hardware approved for use in Information Center systems.
Warning Hardware products not supplied by Philips for IntelliVue Information Center systems
are not approved or supported by Philips for use with Information Center.
performance.
Peripheral In addition to the PC, the Information Center hardware platform includes a variety of
Devices peripheral devices that are compatible with it and achieve the desired performance. These
include input devices (keyboard and mouse), output devices (displays, speaker, recorder and
3-2
printer), and networking (SDN/SCC/PCC), as well as supporting hardware such as the UPS
and Power Distribution Module.
Input Devices
Keyboard Mouse
Output Devices
Displays Speakers Recorders Printers
Network Device
SCC
Support Devices
UPS PDM
Figure 3-1 Peripheral Devices of the Hardware Platform
3-3
The Information Center software uses the Microsoft Windows XP and Windows 2003
Operating Systems (the operating system used depends on device type). The Windows OS
provides a 32-bit operating system for the Information Center, which requires a multi-tasking
environment to run multiple application capability simultaneously.
Other features of the Operating System that make it suitable for the Information Center are
integrated networking, a modular architecture that makes integration easy, open, and
expandable, and built-in security capability.
Operating The Operating System (OS) for the PC Workstation is Microsoft WindowsTM XP. The
System Operating System (OS) for the M3154 Database Server is Microsoft WindowsTM 2003
Server. These Operating Systems are used in a wide variety of products. Their adequacy and
reliability for use with Information Center software has been validated by Philips in extensive
system and safety tests.
Information Center software interacts with OS software only through standard Application
Programming Interfaces (APIs). The Operating System and its APIs are described in detail in
Microsoft Windows documentation but only briefly here. Philips support personnel are
encouraged to gain knowledge of these subjects through the variety of OS documentation and
training programs available.
Application Examples of Operating System API services used by Information Center application software
Programming are the following:
Interfaces
• Windows graphical user interface
• Windows Print Manager
• Access to hardware device drivers
• Performance monitoring
• Event Viewer for storage of system and application error information
Note A function of the Windows operating system is to hide inactive applications behind active
applications. If an application is open but is not visible, press Alt + Tab keys to select the
application and bring it to the forefront.
Information Center APIs have also been extensively documented and exercised by Philips in
unit tests to assure their reliability.
The operating system also provides software management functions for Information Center
software -- File System and Registry (and peripheral hardware drivers).
File System The File System (NTFS) is a high performance file system used by Windows for storing data.
3-4
Registry The Registry is a structured set of records stored in a single OS database. It provides a secure,
unified database of configuration data for the operating system and Information Center
application software.
The Registry replaces the Microsoft MS-DOS system files (AUTOEXEC.BAT and
CONFIG.SYS) and common Microsoft Windows files ( SYSTEM.INI, WIN.INI, and
REG.DAT). It incorporates fault-tolerance which ensures that the Registry remains intact
even if a power failure occurs in the middle of an update.
The operating system uses the Registry to:
• store configuration data,

• provide startup information,
• pass and receive device driver configuration parameters, and
• store new configuration data.
The Registry is constructed from various components of the Windows OS. These include:
Hardware Data - When Windows starts, the Registry obtains volatile hardware configuration
data -- hardware information detected in the computer. On x86-based computers, this is done
by NTDETECT.COM.
Windows Kernel (NTOSKRNL) - During startup, the kernel (NTOSKRNL.EXE) extracts

information from the Registry, including required device drivers and the order in which they
should be loaded. The kernel also provides information (e.g. version number).
Setup Programs - Whenever the Windows Setup program or other setup programs for
applications or hardware run, Setup adds new configuration data to the Registry.
Device Drivers - Device drivers pass data to the Registry and receive load and configuration
parameters from the Registry. A device driver tells the Registry what system resources it uses
and can also report discovered configuration data.
Warning Changing system configurations using the Registry Editor is not supported and could
result in patient injury or death.
Information Center software uses the Registry to:
• Store clinical application configurations for the clinical unit and individual patients,
• Store system configurations for the clinical unit and the system,
• Pass and receive device driver configuration parameters for the SDN interface, and
• Store configuration data during installation.
Clinical Configuration Settings - All editable patient settings are stored in the MS SQL
ServerTM Database. Many of these clinical unit configuration settings can also be stored on
the Archive media for reconfiguration.
System Configuration Settings - Many of these configuration settings can also be stored on
the Archive media for reconfiguration.
SDN Interface Driver - The SDN interface driver passes data to the Registry and receives
load and configuration parameters from the Registry.
3-5
IntelliVue Information Center Application Software
The IntelliVue Information Center Application Software media kit includes the
Information Center application software and Operating System software. Philips provides an
Installation Support Tool (IST) as part of the installation process, and the latest BIOS for
your PC. For Installation instructions, see Chapter 6.
Modes of Application software operates in Monitoring Mode and Non-monitoring Mode.

Operation
Monitoring Monitoring Mode is the principal mode of operation during which application software
Mode provides centralized monitoring, alarms, storage, and review of patient information obtained
from LAN-based bedsides and SDN-connected bedside and telemetry monitors.
Non-monitoring Non-monitoring Mode suspends patient monitoring and provides functions for Information
Mode Center configuration, maintenance, and troubleshooting. A service password is required for
access to non-monitoring mode functionality to prevent ineadvertent change of operational
parameters or disruption of patient monitoring and data collection.
Architectural
Design
Applications Monitoring Mode Applications are primarily clinical applications that provide information
about patients and are visible on the Philips display. Main Screen is the primary clinical
application and is always visible during Monitoring Mode. All other clinical applications are
visible in the Patient Window upon request.
Non-monitoring Mode Applications are primarily service tools to configure the system,
maintain system software, and troubleshoot system problems.
Warning During non-monitoring mode applications, no patients are monitored by the IntelliVue
Information Center system!
Services Services includes collection and storage of patient data, distribution of data to other
applications and devices, recording and printing of data, and annunciation of alarms. These
operate in the background and are not visible on the Information Center display.
Error Handling Additional Error Handling software provides prevention, notification, and recovery of
operator, device, and software errors. The primary purpose of the error handling features is to
ensure the safety of monitored patients.
• Operator errors are addressed by internally-designed prevention mechanisms.
• Peripheral device errors are addressed by detection and notification messages on the
Main Screen.
• Internal software errors are detected by integrity self-checks built into interfaces.
3-6
Block Diagram Figure 3-2 illustrates the relationship of the Application Software, the Windows Operating
System, and the PC Workstation Platform.
IntelliVue Information Center System
Application Software
APPLICATIONS
Applications Library
Sound HIF
Applications Manager
Manager Manager
SERVICES
Database Alarm
Services Physio Services
Data
Server SDN Data
Measurement
Acquisition
Services
Services
Recorder
Documentation
Interface
Services
Services
Audio Display
Driver Driver
File Printer Keyboard

System Registry Driver Driver
Mouse Network
Adapter
Driver Driver
PC Platform
Figure 3-2 Block Diagram of Information Center System
3-7
Applications Philips Intellivue Information Center Applications Software (Figure 3-3) consists of an
Applications Library, which contains:
• Real-time Applications
• Control Applications
• Review Applications
• Support Applications
The software also contains Applications Managers for Philips input devices (keyboard,
mouse) and output devices (display, speaker):
• Applications Manager
• Sound Manager
• Human Interface (HIF) Manager
IntelliVue Information Center Applications
Applications Library
Real-time Control
- Main Screen - Unit Settings
- Patient Window - Individual Patient Settings
Review Support
-Trend - Support Logs
-Alarm - Diagnostic Tools
-Event - Configuration/Install.
- Wave Applications
-ST - Remote Access
- Telemetry Services
- Option Utilities
Display
Driver
Applications Manager Keyboard

Driver
Mouse
Driver
Sound HIF
Manager Manager
Audio
Driver
Physio
Data
Server
Figure 3-3 Block Diagram of the Application Software
3-8
Real Time Real Time Applications control the display of real time patient data from bedside and
Applications telemetry monitors on the Main Screen and Patient Window (Figure 3-4).
The Main Screen application controls the display of real time physiological and alarm
information for each monitored patient on the Main Screen. This information is
obtained from the Physio Data Server and continuously displays in a Patient Sector of
the Main Screen. As patient data or alarm conditions change, the Physio Data Server
receives this information from the SDN/LAN and passes it to the Main Screen.
The Patient Window application controls the display of real time physiological and
alarm information in the Patient Window. It has access to more real time patient data
from the Physio Data Server than are available for the Main Screen application. As for
the Main Screen, patient data and alarm information is continuously updated in the
Patient Window as it changes.
Figure 3-4 Main Screen/Patient Window Applications Example
Control Control Applications permit unit-wide patient monitoring behavior adjustments, as well as
Applications overrides for individual patients. For detailed information about these features, refer to the
Information Center Instructions for Use:
3-9
Unit Settings: Control applications for unit settings provide functionality for the
clinical unit setting buttons in the Unit Settings window accessed from the All
Controls screen (Figure 3-5). Unit Settings is password protected and settings
apply to all patients unless overridden by the individual patient Control Application.
When a patient is discharged, the clinical unit settings automatically replace the
individual patient’s custom settings.
Figure 3-5 Unit Settings Applications Example

Unit Settings include:
Alarms and Arrhyth Alarms, which permit setting various parameters for the alarms
or arrhythmia alarms.
ST, which permits selecting various parameters for the ST alarms and measurement.
QT, which permits selecting various QT Unit Settings.
Record/Store/Page, which permits selecting the alarms you want recorded and
stored.
Trend Groups, which sets the contents of the trend groups.
Event Groups, which sets the contents of the event groups.
Stored Waves, which sets the patient waves that will be stored.
Central Reports, which permits selecting, configuring, and scheduling printed
reports.
General Setup
Volume Control, which sets the sound volume of the Information Center internal and
external speakers.
Paging Devices
Trend Display
Telemetry Freq, which sets the telemetry frequencies for telemetry monitors assigned
to the unit.
Telemetry Setup, which sets telemetry devices assigned to the Information Center.
3-10
Control Applications for individual patients provide functionality for the Patient Management,
Alarm Management, and Setup selections in the All Controls screen. They include:
Admit, which permits admitting a patient.

Discharge, which permits patient discharge, and transfer.
Care Groups, which permits assignment of individual patients to Care Groups.
Sector Setup, which permits changing/modifying the monitoring equipment
associated with a bed.
Stored Waves, which permits selection of an individual patient’s stored waves.
Standby, which allows temporary suspension of monitoring for a patient and the
display of standby messages in the Patient Sector.
Arrhythmia Alarm and ST Alarm, which permits setting limits that control
conditions for triggering, turning on, and turning off certain alarms for individual
patients.
Record/Store/Page, which permits setting whether an individual patient’s alarms are
recorded, stored, or paged. This setting also affects Alarm Review, which provides
review recordings of stored alarms.
ST Setup, which permits enabling/disabling of ST segment measurement and setting
the measurement point for an individual patient.
QT Setup, which permits configuration of QT monitoring settings.
Telemetry Setup, which permits setting telemetry controls for an individual patient.
Review Review applications appear in the Patient Data Review section of the All Controls screen.
Applications Review Applications include:
Trend Review, which provides a history of groupings of physiological parameters

plotted over time.
Alarm Review, which provides a history of alarms, including waves and alarm text.
Event Review, which provides a history of events detected for a patient along with
waveforms stored at the time of the event.
Wave Review, which provides a history of full disclosure waveform data that have
been continuously stored.
ST Review, which displays a history of acquired and derived ST waveforms and
segment values for telemetry monitored patients.
12 Lead-Review, which displays the results of 12-Lead captures performed at an
IntelliVue Patient Monitor. It also displays continuous EASI derived ECG waveforms.
Support Support Applications are used for managing the installation, configuration, and service
Applications aspects of the Information Center system. To access the support applications, a Service
Password is required.
Support software features include:
3-11
• Support Logs
• Diagnostic Tools
• Configuration Applications
• Remote Access
• Telemetry Services
• Option Utilities
For a more detailed description of these features, refer to Services.
Management Application Manager (SDProcess)

Functions
Application Manager (SDProcess) controls when an application is allowed to use the display
area and is responsible for initiation and termination of applications. Applications are modular
and do not interact directly with other applications. They can only communicate with one
another through the Applications Manager.
Sound Manager
Sound Manager is responsible for annunciating the highest level alarm sound for all patients
being monitored by the Information Center system. It has exclusive control of the audio
capability of the PC and there is no external volume control knob. Each patient’s Alarm
Manager provides the Sound Manager with the highest priority alarm condition for its patient,
and the Sound Manager causes the tone corresponding to the most critical condition of all of
the patients to be annunciated.
Human Interface Manager
Human Interface (HIF) Manager is responsible for directing the keyboard strokes and
mouse (or trackball) cursor movements on the display and for displaying the keys (buttons or
other display click area) for selecting applications.
HIF Manager also prevents the operator from accessing any software that is not part of the
Applications Library when in Monitoring Mode. The PC is dedicated to Information Center
software during Monitoring Mode and no other software is allowed to run concurrently. HIF
Manager intercepts and blocks operator attempts to access the operating system directly.
HIF Manager also disables keyboard sequences such as Alt-Tab, Ctrl-Alt-Del, and Ctrl-Esc.
This prevents access to functions such as the Windows Program Manager and Windows
Explorer and makes it impossible to start other programs while patients are being monitored.
Services The Services portion of Monitoring Mode software manages data with the following
functionality.
Physio Data Physio Data Server (PDSService) is the communication hub of the Services software,
Server providing the common interface for receiving and distributing data among Information Center
Applications and other Services.
Patient Patient Database Services (PDSStore) provide for patient data storage to and retrieval from
Database the processing unit disk.
Services
3-12
Patient Database Services receive real time patient data from SDN bedside and telemetry
monitors through the Physio Data Server and transmits them to the hard disk for storage.
Patient Database Services also retrieve the stored data on request from the Physio Data Server
for distribution to Information Center Applications and other Services.
Patient Database Services interface with the OS File System through a Database Interface,
which directs data for storage to either a MS SQL ServerTM Database or the File System. Data
stored are editable unit settings and patient data, such as name, id, demographics, alarms, and
configurations (about 1% of data). All other patient data are stored in the NT File System in
standard NTFS (flatfile) and sequel database format for later retrieval by applications. Up to
96 hours of waveform data can be stored for each patient. As noted earlier, the Registry
maintains configuration data for the application software.
Note Only configuration data from the Registry and editable unit and patient data from the MS SQL
ServerTM Database are archived on the Archive media.
Measurement Measurement Services contains the ST/AR algorithm as well as interfaces between it and the
Services Physio Data Server. The Physio Data Server delivers newly acquired patient monitoring data
for each patient to the ST/AR input interface for analysis. After the ST/AR algorithm has
completed its analysis, results for each patient are available at the ST/AR output interface.
Measurement Services makes this output available to the Physio Data Server for distribution
on request. Measurement Services also provide the control interface to ST/AR that delivers
the specific ST/AR data requested by an Application.
Alarm Services Alarm Services provides alarm monitoring for each patient. Each patient has a separate
Alarm Manager that receives its information from the Physio Data Server. The Alarm
Manager determines which events should be announced as alarms or INOPs and announces
them consistent with the bedside-determined priority. For ST/AR alarms, each Alarm
Manager merges ST/AR and bedside monitor alarms and INOPs, determines the overall
priority, and provides the Sound Manager with its highest priority alarm condition. The Sound
Manager causes the tone corresponding to the most critical condition of all of the patients to
be annunciated. For information on alarm prioritization, see the Information Center
SDN Data SDN Data Acquisition Service is the interface between the Physio Data Server and the SDN
Acquisition Interface Card in the processing unit. It receives patient data from bedside and telemetry
Service monitors connected to the SCC through the SDN Interface Card and transmits them to the
Physio Data Server for distribution. It also receives information from the Physio Data Server
and transmits it in SDN message format for display by bedside monitors.
Recorder Recorder Management Services (RecMgr) provide an interface between the Physio Data
Management Server and Documentation Services. For the Philips Recorders, Recorder Interface Services
Services both transmit data and documentation requests from the processing unit and bedside monitors
to the Recorder and receive status information from the Recorder for distribution to the
processing unit and bedside monitors. Data communication for both the 2-Channel Recorder
3-13
and bedside monitors takes place through the SDN Interface Card, and for the 4-Channel
recorder through the Serial B interface port in the processing unit.
Documentation Documentation Status Services (DocStatusService) provide documentation control services

Status Services to both the Philips Recorder and the LaserJet printer. It receives data from Recorder
Management Services and provides output interfaces to both the Philips Recorder and the
printer through the Windows Print Manager. The data can be either real-time patient data
from bedside or telemetry monitors or stored patient data from Database Services.
Documentation Status Services provide interfaces for data transmission and to initiate and
control printing and recording. A more detailed description of Documentation Status Services
for recording and printing is provided in the following sections.
Recorder Communication between the Applications Manager and the Philips Recorders can either be
Documentation requests to record or requests for recorder status. Requests to record include the name of the
Services patient, time of request, length of recording, and waveform data. Requests for recorder status
include recorder failure, out of paper, door open, and no recorder connected.
Process components of Documentation Status Services for the Philips Recorder follow:
Documentation Status Services receive recorder requests from the Applications Manager
and pass them on to the Recorder Manager. If patient data are to be sent to the Recorder, they
are obtained from the Physio Data Server.
Recorder Manager keeps track of the status and location of Recorder(s) in the Recorder
Rack and assigns recorder information to the next available Recorder.
Shared Memory provides the recorder status messages from its RAM based on status
information received from the Recorder.
Redirector adds a header message to the destination recorder.
SDN Driver moves data back and forth between Recorder Services and the Recorder.
SDN Interface detects the position (L, C, R) of each recorder in the recorder rack, determines
recorder status, and conveys data for recording. In multiple recorder operation, a recorder that
is busy or off-line goes to the bottom of the recorder queue and the next available recorder is
selected.
Printer Documentation Status Services manages the printing process for the Information Center
Documentation system through the Print Manager and Printer Driver of the OS. The Print Manager uses a
Services Graphical Data Interface (GDI), which is a common API for applications that draw things,
either on a display or a printer.
Documentation Status Services also keeps track of each application’s print capability. If the
application is configured for printing, it signals the Applications Manager to activate the print
button in the Patient Window. If the application is not configured for printing, it signals the
Applications Manager to disable the print button so it appears dimmed.
3-14
4
Site Planning and Preparation
Overview
The Information Center is the information hub of a clinical patient monitoring environment. It
displays patient monitoring information from fixed bedside and mobile telemetry monitors
and provides alarm annunciation, arrhythmia and ST analysis, and patient data storage and
review. As the information hub, the Information Center system should be centrally located in
the clinical patient monitoring unit so that users can have ready and convenient access to both
Information Center patient information and patients being monitored.
Planning for the Information Center system is only part of site planning and preparation for
the total patient monitoring environment. Detailed descriptions of site planning for the patient
monitoring environment are provided in the Component Monitoring System Site Preparation
and Installation Manual. Site planning and preparation for the Information Center system will
focus principally on the unique requirements of installing Information Center hardware as the
central station component.
The Database Server is one of the “hidden” components of the Philips Patient Care Network.
The Database Server is generally located in out of the way equipment rooms or wiring closets.
It is rarely seen by clinicians or patients but must be accessible to service personnel.
Significant planning and careful network design is required to assure low cost and effective
network operation.
If you use the Remote PC solution the CPU becomes a “hidden” component that has extended
cable lengths (up to 300 ft) with connection to as many peripheral devices as practical.
Chapter 4 describes site planning and installation of the system in the following sections.
Site Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4-2
Network Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4-6
Site Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4-20
4-1
Site Planning
Site Planning
Considerations Elements of site planning that should be considered in preparing for a Database Server
installation include the following:
Design Selecting appropriate components that best meet the monitoring needs of the
clinical environment
Location Selecting locations for Information Centers and Clients, display(s),
keyboard, mouse, processing unit, UPS, recorders, printers, and the network
components and Server
Network Assuring that proper network cabling, conduit, wall boxes, and faceplates are
provided for connecting devices to the Network
Cabling Selecting proper type and length equipment cabling to interconnect system
components
Web Access Providing hospital intranet connection to Server Web access LAN card
Environment Assuring that the installation meets environmental specifications
recommended for each Clinical Network/Server component
Electrical Assuring that electrical outlets with proper grounding, electrical isolation,
voltage, current, and frequency are available to power the system and
components
Mounting Selecting hardware for mounting system components in their designated
locations
Safety Assuring that all medical safety requirements are met
For a detailed description of the design of the system, including location of Server
components and network considerations, refer to Network Design.
Responsibilities Planning and preparing the site for an installation is a joint responsibility between the
Customer and Philips. To assure that the system is properly designed and that all necessary
preparations are completed when the system is delivered, the Customer should contact a
Philips Sales and Support Representative and develop a schedule for consultation, delivery,
and installation.
Customer The customer must perform the following site preparation:

• Ensure that the site complies with all structural, environmental, network, electrical,
cabling, and safety requirements
• Install all wall channels required for wall mounted devices
• Install all required Information Center Network and Network cables
• Provide a properly configured hospital intranet connection
• Remove old equipment
• Manage frequency
4-2
Site Planning
Note If there are any concerns about the structural, environmental, network, electrical, RF, cabling,
or safety requirements for the installation, the Customer should contact an independent
consulting engineer or the Response Center.
The Customer is also expected to assist the Service Provider during the installation process by
providing personnel with knowledge of the hospital environment and its facilities, resources,
polices, and procedures.
Philips Philips is responsible for assuring shipment of a fully configured product.
• All ordered system hardware, network components, and peripheral equipment are fully
tested and ready for installation.
• Windows operating systems and Philips application software are preloaded with
customer purchased options and factory default configurations.
• LAN cards are pre-installed in the Server.
• All ordered mounting hardware and equipment cabling is included as well as Philips
support and service documentation and shipment inventory Packing List.
The Service Provider is responsible for installation of the system at the Customer site, which
includes:
• removing the products from their shipment containers

• installing the products in their designated locations, including any required mounting
hardware
• connecting the Information Centers, Clients, Printers, and Server to the Network and to
all peripheral equipment
• connecting electrical power to Information Centers, Clients, Printers, Server, and all
Network components
• installing purchased and upgrade options
• starting up the Philips system and configuring it to Customer specifications
• verifying system operation and testing system performance using recommended
Product Assurance Testing procedures
• assuring Customer satisfaction and acceptance of the installation
• removing packaging materials (if necessary)
4-3
Site Planning
Location The location of the Database Server is a critical step in site planning and network design. In
Requirements general, Servers should be located so that they are not accessible to patients and clinicians but
convenient to service and support personnel. Typically this location is a wiring closet or
specifically-designed room for Server equipment. Issues that should be considered when
selecting and planning locations for the Database Server are:
• Wiring Closet Planning

• Network Switch Location
• Server and UPS Location
Wiring Closet Locked wiring closets or equipment rooms are recommended locations for all active Network
Planning components (except access points) because they can be made secure from unauthorized access
and required electrical and environmental conditions can be maintained.
Caution In planning wiring closets, carefully consider the availability of properly grounded
electrical outlets of the correct voltage and frequency for each device and the
environmental control of temperature and humidity. The high density of devices in a
small room can lead to large heat loads in a small space that must be controlled.
Network Switch Network switches are the central communication hubs of the Clinical Network. Therefore,
Location they should be located at a point central to the Information Centers, Clients, and Server. In
selecting switch locations, consideration should be given to the cabling distances between
devices because cabling is a key cost and limitation of Network design. In general, switches
should be in wiring closets centrally located on the Network.
Server Location The Database Server is the network device most accessed by service personnel. Software
installation, system and device configuration, network maintenance and troubleshooting all
take place at the Server. Therefore, it should be located in a closet or room convenient to
service personnel and include typical workstation amenities -- chair, work surface, bookshelf,
equipment storage, lighting.
4-4
Site Planning
UPS Location Active Clinical Network components must be on a UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply) to
assure network operation during short power interruptions.
Warning Do not connect devices other than those approved by Philips to the BATTERY BACKUP
outlets on the UPS. If you connect devices other than what is listed in this section
equipment can fail and possibly interrupt patient monitoring.
The Database Server must be connected to a BATTERY BACKUP outlet of the 1000 VA
UPS.
Connect the following devices to the BATTERY BACKUP outlets on the UPS.
• Core, Edge, and Extension Switches

• PC workstations, Information Centers, and Clients
• 2-Channel and 4-Channel USB Recorders
• 4-Channel Serial Recorder - 24V Power Supply, and
• Media Translators.
Up to 3 Clinical Network components -- switches, repeaters, media translators -- may be
connected to a single, 650VA UPS.
It is recommended that Access Points and Repeaters also be connected to a 650 VA UPS.
The following components may be connected to the ACCESSORY outlets of a 650 VA
UPS or to a separate non-UPS electrical outlet with the same ground.
• video splitters
• paging components
The LaserJet Printer and displays must not be connected to the UPS.
Consider the following when selecting UPS locations:
• Ensuring adequate distance of all devices from electrical equipment that may produce
strong electromagnetic fields which can effect data transmission,
• Protecting devices from exposure to water or excessive moisture, lint, dust, or dirt,
• Providing easy access to all devices by service personnel,
• Providing at least 5 cm (2 in.) clearance around each device for adequate air circulation,
and
• Preventing obstruction of all device ventilation holes.
4-5
Network Design
Network Design
This section describes the methodology for designing a Philips Patient Care Network for a
specific clinical environment. It includes clinical requirements that should be considered,
capabilities of the Information Center components, and design rules that govern Patient Care
Network design.
Reviewing Designing a Patient Care Network requires a full understanding of the monitoring
Clinical requirements of the clinical unit(s) it will serve. The key elements that optimize system design
Requirements are the:
• number of clinical units and beds to be simultaneously monitored
• level of patient monitoring required by each unit
• types of patient monitors to be used -- SDN/PCC connected (hardwired and/or
telemetry), IntelliVue Telemetry connected, M3/M4 connected (wired and/or wireless),
IntelliVue Patient Monitors connected (wired and/or wireless), or mixed
• locations of clinical units, central monitoring stations, and review stations
• type of patient data access required at each location (real-time or stored -- read, write,
or both)
• possible future capability or expansion
Number of Units The number of beds determines the number of patient monitors and Information Centers
and Beds required to monitor patients. The number of clinical units and their locations determines how
the Information Centers should be networked to provide efficient and convenient access to
patient monitoring data.
Patient The level of monitoring required for patients determines the model Information Center
Monitoring Level necessary to serve each clinical unit and its level of clinical application software. The more
intensive the monitoring requirements, the more capability is required of Information Center
hardware and software. Since hardware and software cost increases with capability, it is
important to understand the exact patient monitoring requirements for each clinical unit, both
present and future.
4-6
Network Design
Patient Monitor Another system design consideration is the type of patient monitor that will be used -- SDN/
Type PCC (hardwired and/or telemetry), IntelliVue Telemetry, M3/M4 (wired and/or wireless),
IntelliVue Patient Monitors (wired and/or wireless), or mixed.
For installations dealing with acute patient care where patients remain in their beds, hardwired
bedside monitors (either SDN/PCC or Network connected), are generally required. For less
acute care installations that have ambulatory patients, SDN/PCC telemetry monitors are
generally required. For installations that have patients who may change from bed-restricted to
ambulatory, both hardwired and telemetry monitors should be available. And for installations
where patient monitors may be frequently moved from bed to bed, wireless monitors may be
preferred. The software can accommodate all of these types of installations, providing
continuous collection of monitoring data as patients change beds or from bed restricted to
ambulatory.
Central Monitor The type of central monitor should also be matched to the level of patient monitoring
Type required. For a detailed discussion of each central monitor’s capabilities, see Components
and Options, Chapter 1.
Central Central Monitoring Locations should generally be in clinical units where patient beds are
Monitoring located.
Locations
Patient Data While the Patient Care Network provides extensive access to patient monitoring data both
Review within and across clinical units and at multiple distant locations, there are limitations on the
Locations length of cable runs for each network interconnection. Cable length limitations must be
carefully reviewed in selecting patient data review locations.
Type of Patient The type of access to patient data and monitoring controls at each monitoring location should
Data Access be considered when designing the system. For example, does the clinician need to view both
real-time and stored patient data from a clinical unit and/or other clinical units? Will it be
necessary to silence alarms or change monitoring control settings? The answers to these types
of questions are critical to the selection of monitoring hardware and network design. And they
have great impact on the effectiveness of the Information Center system in meeting the needs
of clinicians, as well as system cost.
Future When designing a Patient Care Network both present and future requirements should be
Requirements considered. While all Patient Care Network components can be upgraded to future capability,
individual component capability can be limited. There are limitations on cable lengths for
each type of component interconnection. Hence, consideration should be given to possible
future growth or requirements in system design. Review this thoroughly with a Service
Provider.
Philips System design requires a full understanding of the capabilities and limitations of network
Hardware components so they can be properly matched to the clinical requirements.
Capability
The Clinical Network can collect and display patient monitoring data from both SDN/PCC
connected monitors (wired and telemetry), M3/M4 monitors (wired and wireless), HeartStart
MRx monitors (wired and wireless), and IntelliVue Patient Monitors and store patient
monitoring data for: up to 128 patients monitored by 8 Information Centers at 8 separate
locations and can also accommodate 8 Clients for viewing data (real-time and stored) at 8
separate locations on the M3154 Database Server and up to 48 patients monitored by 3
4-7
Network Design
Information Centers at 3 separate locations and can also accommodate 3 Clients for viewing
data (real-time and stored) at 3 separate locations on the M3169 Small Database Server and
viewing of stored patient data from any browser equipped PC on the hospital’s intranet. From
this overview of maximum system capability, smaller, more limited systems can be designed.
A Patient Care Network is comprised of the following general components:

• Patient Monitors for collecting patient monitoring data
• CareNet (Serial Distribution Network and Serial Communications Controller) for
transmitting and managing patient data among monitors and central stations
• Wireless Access Points for receiving monitoring data from wireless Patient Monitors
• Central Monitoring Stations for displaying patient monitoring data
• Review Stations for viewing real-time and stored patient data
• Database Server for receiving, storing, and retransmitting monitoring data from
multiple patients
• Clinical Network for interconnecting multiple central monitoring and review stations
and the database server
• Printers for printing patient data and configuration settings
Patient Monitors Patient monitors can be connected to the Clinical Network:
• by means of CareNet (SDN/PCC), either hardwired or telemetry, and

• directly, either wired or wireless.
Each type of monitor can monitor only 1 patient.

CareNet monitors can be:
Wired Philips Component Monitoring System (CMS) Monitors with extensive
monitoring capability, the Philips 24 patient monitor with more limited monitoring
capability, or the older Compact Configured Monitor.
Philips Telemetry System Monitors or the older model Digital UHF Telemetry System
Monitors. Each telemetry mainframe can accommodate up to 8 telemetry monitors (1
per patient).
Network monitors can be:

Wired M3/M4 Monitors that connect directly to a Network switch.
Wireless M3/M4 Monitors that transmit patient monitoring data to a Wireless Access
Point.
Wired IntelliVue Patient Monitors that connect directly to a Network switch.
Wireless IntelliVue Patient Monitors that transmit patient monitoring data to a
Wireless Philips IntelliVue Monitoring Network.
IntelliVue Telemetry Monitors that transmit patient monitoring data to a Wireless
Philips IntelliVue Monitoring Network.
Wired or Wireless HeartStart MRx Monitors that connect to the Philips IntelliVue
Monitoring Network.
4-8
Network Design
CareNet To display data from multiple patient monitors on a central monitoring station, the monitors
can be connected to the CareNet [Serial Distribution Network (SDN) and Philips
Communications Controller (PCC)]. The PCC is the CareNet switch, which receives,
transmits, and manages the flow of data among patient monitors and central stations
connected to the SDN.
Note Each CareNet switch can accommodate a total of 24 patient monitors per PCC (hardwired
and telemetry) and 6 central monitors.
Central The M3140/M3150 Information Center displays data from all types of patient monitors
Monitoring (CareNet and Network connected). The M3140 Information Center can monitor and display
Stations data for up to 16 patients; the M3150 can monitor and display data for up to 32 patients.
The M3145/M3155 Information Center displays data from all types of patient monitors
(CareNet and Network connected). Patient monitoring data are transmitted by means of the
Network to the Server which stores the data. The Information Center can monitor and display
patient data for up to 16 patients.
Review Station M3151 Information Client reviews real-time and stored monitoring data for any patient
connected to the Network. Clients can only be used on Networks with a Database Server.
Documentation M3170 Patient Link provides a central location for bedside recordings and reports initiated
Station from SDN hardwired bedsides, M2/3/4 bedsides, and IntelliVue Patient Monitors for up to 64
patients. The Patient Link also provides support for bed-to-bed overview and alarm reflection
for M3/4 bedsides and IntelliVue Patient Monitors. Patient Link cannot be used with
Telemetry bedsides.
Database Server The M3154 Database Server provides database storage of patient monitoring data for the
Patient Care Network. The Database Server receives and stores patient monitoring data from
all Information Centers on the Network. Up to 96 hours of patient data and 150 events for
up to 128 active patients plus 32 transfer patients can be stored. Any Information Center or
Client on the Network can overview real-time monitoring data from any other Information
Center on the Network and access any patient’s data that is stored in the Database Server.
Small Database The M3169 Small Database Server provides database storage of patient monitoring data for
Server the Patient Care Network. The Database Server receives and stores patient monitoring data
from all Information Centers on the Network. Up to 48 hours of patient data and 150 events
for up to 48 active patients plus 12 transfer patients can be stored. Any Information Center
or Client on the Network can overview real-time monitoring data from any other Information
Center on the Network and access any patient’s data stored in the Database Server.
Printers HP LaserJet printers can be connected to the network for shared printing capability.
4-9
Network Design
Table 4-1 summarizes the design capabilities and limitations of Patient Care Network
components.
Table 4-1 Release M System Capabilities

M3140 M3150 M3155 Large M3169
M3170
Description of Limit Local Local Central Network Small
Patient Link
Database Database Database Database Database
Maximum Number of beds per 16 321 16 16 16 641
Information Center
Maximum Number of monitored 16 321 128 3840 48 641
beds (wired or wireless, non (wired only) (no telemetry)
IntelliVue Telemetry) per system
Maximum Number of monitored 16 32 128 1024 48
beds (IntelliVue Telemetry or CTS
bedsides) per system
Maximum Number of Information 1 1 8 240 3 1
Centers per system
Maximum Number of Clients per 0 3 12 360 3 0
system
Maximum Number of Database 0 0 1 30 1 0
Servers per system without
IntelliVue Telemetry
Maximum Number of Database 0 0 1 22 1
Servers per system with IntelliVue
Telemetry
Maximum Number of networked 02 2 8 240 4 2
printers
Maximum Number of 4-Channel 0 1 4 120 2 1
serial recorders
1
SDN beds are limited to 16.
2
M3140 supports a local, directly-connected printer.
Information This section includes independent Information Center designs only, that is Information Centers
Center (Local that are not connected to a IntelliVue Clinical Network.
Database)
Equipment Requirements must be matched to the following Philips Patient Care Network equipment
Capability capabilities.
• An Information Center can:

display data from up to 16 patient monitors,
store up to 150 alarm records, and
store up to 96 hours of patient data for waves, ST segments, trends, and events.
• Each System Communications Controller (SCC) can manage data for up to 6
Information Centers and from up to 24 patient monitors.
• Patient monitors for both systems can be wired or telemetry.
• Telemetry mainframes can support 8 channels of telemetry monitoring.
4-10
Network Design
Table 4-2 summarizes design capabilities and limitations.
Table 4-2 Philips Patient Care Network Component Capabilities and Limitations
Component Device Capabilities Limitations
Patient Monitors Hardwired monitor 1 per patient
Telemetry monitors 1 per patient
Telemetry Mainframe 8 monitors per Mainframe See Note
SDN/SCC 24 hardwired monitors Total hardwired and
6 telemetry mainframes (24 monitors) telemetry monitors
6 central stations cannot exceed 24 per
SCC
Central monitors IntelliVue Information Center 16 patients, maximum clinical capability independent or LAN
Component Central Monitor 12 patients, limited clinical capability independent only
Note A IntelliVue Information Center can monitor patients from up to 2 telemetry mainframes (16 patients)
without the need for an SCC. In this application, the telemetry mainframes are connected in series and
the series output is connected directly to the Information Center’s SDN Interface Card input.
Designing the Once the patient monitoring requirements of the clinical unit are determined, the Philips
System Patient Care Network can then be optimally designed from the Philips equipment. This
section describes the procedures for network design.
Note Philips recommends that customers consult with a Philips representative when designing a
Philips Patient Care Network for their clinical environment to assure optimum selection of
equipment and system performance.
Steps required in system design are:
• Determine the clinical requirements for the system,

• Select the hardware components that will satisfy the clinical requirements, and
• Determine which Information Center software and hardware options to purchase to
make the system more effective, efficient, and convenient for clinical users
Design Worksheets
IntelliVue Information Center Design Worksheets that can be copied are in
Appendix A. The worksheets accommodate recording clinical, hardware, and software
requirements and options for Information Center system designs.
Drawing the Design

Once the worksheets are complete, you must sketch the Philips Patient Care Network
including all devices, components, and cabling that are on your worksheets. Your final design
should show all relevant information (Device Names, Locations, Cable Types, Lengths,
etc.) as recorded in the worksheets.
4-11
Network Design
Design This section shows schematic designs of typical independent Information Center systems as
Examples examples of how the Philips Patient Care Network can meet the needs of a wide range of
clinical environments.
Small ICU
A simple Philips Patient Care Network is for an 8-bed ICU with intensive patient monitoring
requirements for all patients and the possibility of transferring up to 2 patients to telemetry.
See Figure 4-1.
Equipment required for this installation is the following:
• 8 beds, each with a hardwired bedside patient monitor

• 2 telemetry monitors on one telemetry mainframe
• 1 Information Center with 8 patient and full alarm and wave review capability
• 1 System Communications Controller
With 2 telemetry monitors, any 2 of the 8 patients can be transferred to telemetry monitoring
with no loss of patient monitoring and data storage. This Patient Care Network can be
expanded to 12 beds by adding the 4 patient upgrade option to the Information Center.
Additional telemetry monitoring capability can be obtained by adding telemetry monitors and
mainframes to the SCC.
Figure 4-1 Small, 8-Bed ICU Patient Care Network
4-12
Network Design
Large ICU
Figure 4-2 illustrates a large, 20-bed ICU with intensive monitoring requirements for all
patients and the ability to transfer up to 4 patients to telemetry. Required equipment for this
installation follows.
• 20 beds, each with a hardwired bedside patient monitor

• 4 telemetry monitors on one telemetry mainframe
• 2 Information Centers, each with 12 patient (Option #A12) and full alarm and wave
review capability
The hardwired bedside and telemetry monitors are assigned to specific Information Centers.
In Figure 4-2, 10 bedside and 2 telemetry monitors are assigned to Information Center #1 and
10 bedside and 2 telemetry monitors to Information Center #2, although other combinations
are possible.
This Patient Care Network can be expanded to 32 patients by adding a 4 patient upgrade
Option #C44 to each Information Center. For more than 24 patient monitors (hardwired +
telemetry), however, a second SCC is required. Additional telemetry monitoring capability
can also be obtained by adding telemetry monitors and mainframes to the SCCs.
Figure 4-2 Large, 20-Bed ICU Patient Care Network
Assignment of hardwired monitors to specific Information Centers is recommended because

data for patients are stored on specific Information Centers and patients cannot be transferred
between Information Centers.
4-13
Network Design
Assignment of telemetry monitors to specific Information Centers is recommended because

information that a telemetry monitor is being used by another Information Center is not shared
across the SDN. Therefore, a telemetry monitor used by another Information Center will
appear as available in the Sector Setup window. To eliminate this problem, label telemetry
monitors with information indicating which patient beds the monitor can be used with.
Medium Stepdown Unit with Telemetry Monitoring

In a Stepdown Unit, patients are typically monitored by telemetry monitors and there are
generally more beds than monitors. A Patient Care Network for this example is shown in
Figure 4-3.
Equipment required for this installation is the following:
• 30 beds with no hardwired bedside monitors

• 12 telemetry monitors on two telemetry mainframes
• 1 Information Center with 12 patient capability
In this example, all 30 beds are assigned to one Information Center and any telemetry monitor
not being used on an admitted patient can be assigned to a patient in any of the 30 beds.
Figure 4-3 Medium Stepdown Unit with Telemetry Monitoring
4-14
Network Design
Large Stepdown Unit with Telemetry Monitoring

If the number of telemetry monitors is increased beyond 16, an additional IntelliVue
Information Center is required. See Figure 4-4.
Equipment for this installation is the following:

• 24 telemetry monitors on three telemetry mainframes
• 2 Information Centers, each with 12 patient capability
In this example, 24 beds and 12 telemetry monitors are assigned to each Information Center.
The bedside and telemetry monitor assignments are unique to each Information Center
because Information Centers do not communicate with each other as to which monitors are
currently being used. When selecting a bed for monitoring, only those unused monitors
configured to that Information Center will appear in the Sector Setup window for
assignment to the patient.
Figure 4-4 Large Stepdown Unit with Telemetry Monitoring
4-15
Network Design
Very Large Stepdown Unit with Telemetry Monitoring

When the number of patient monitors in a Stepdown Unit exceeds 24, a second System
Communications Controller is required. This is shown in Figure 4-5.
Equipment for this installation is the following:

• 32 telemetry monitors on 4 telemetry mainframes
• 2 Information Centers each with 16 patient (Option #A16) capability
With 2 System Communications Controllers, the Information Centers and telemetry
mainframes must be assigned to specific SCCs. In this example, 16 telemetry monitors and 1
M3150 Information Centers covering 24 patients are networked to each SCC.
Figure 4-5 Very Large Stepdown Unit with Telemetry Monitoring

In such a large system, clinicians must know which patients are on each SCC network and
which telemetry monitors can be used with each Information Center. Clear labeling of bed
and telemetry assignments will assist clinicians in assigning telemetry monitors to patients.
Unused telemetry monitors for each Information Center will appear in the Setup Display list
as available for patient monitoring.
4-16
Network Design
Telemetry Monitoring Without a SCC

As noted in the description of the SCC in Chapter 2, the Information Center can monitor up
to two telemetry mainframes without an SCC. Therefore, when only telemetry monitoring is
required, the SCC may not be required. This can reduce the cost of some of the Philips Patient
Care Network designs described earlier. The Medium Stepdown Unit with Telemetry
Monitoring, for example, could be more simply redesigned as shown in Figure 4-6.
In these applications, the telemetry mainframe output is connected directly to the Information
Center’s SDN Interface Card input. For two telemetry mainframes, the units are daisy chained
as shown in Figure 4-6. With this connection, the priority wires of the connecting cables are
required. Refer to page 2-47 for pin connections.
Figure 4-6 Telemetry Monitoring Without a SCC

These examples illustrate the issues that should be considered when designing a Philips
Patient Care Network. When designing the network, however, Philips recommends that
clinicians consult with a Philips Customer Representative to assure that their specific patient
monitoring requirements are met in the most cost effective and flexible way.
4-17
Network Design
Database The design of a Database Server (DBS) system depends on the type of patient monitors
Server connected to it -- SDN PCC monitors, Network Patient Monitors, or mixed SDN and Network
Systems monitors.
The design of DBS Server systems involves two major steps. The first is to determine the
switch requirements, that is, the number of switches required, and the devices (PCCs, central
monitors and review stations, M3/M4 monitors, IntelliVue patient monitors, access points)
that will be connected to each switch port. The second is to determine the Cable Plant
requirements -- cabling types and lengths and components (wall boxes, repeaters, media
translators) necessary to interconnect network devices.
Notes This manual does not describe the design and implementation of DBS Server systems in detail
because each clinical environment requires careful analysis by an experienced network
designer. Philips Service Providers are specially trained to assist customers in reviewing their
clinical requirements and designing a Server system that meets those requirements and will be
supported by Philips Healthcare.
The general concepts and capabilities of Server components and systems given here should
only be used as a reference for understanding the final design. Two examples are provided to
illustrate the design process.
Consult a Philips Service Provider for Server system design advice.
Connecting Review the locations of the network devices and select the repeaters, media translators, cable
Devices types and lengths required to interconnect them. The IntelliVue Clinical Network
documentation provides examples, details and connection type diagrams that can assist in the
connection planning.
Drawing the The final step is to draw the Patient Care Network using the devices, components, and
Design cabling. Your final design should show all relevant information (Device Names, Locations,
Cable Types and Lengths, etc.).
4-18
Network Design
Design This section describes the guidelines to be followed when designing a DBS system. Two
Guidelines examples are given: one is a single switch network and the other is a multiple switch network.
These examples describe hardware design only. Hardware installation is described in the
following section, and the application software configuration is described in Chapter 6.
The basic principles in designing the network design are:
• design a network that will minimize the number of devices data needs to flow through
optimizes performance by minimizing traffic on the network
minimizes the impact of a single device failure
• design systems with troubleshooting in mind

combine in as few locations as practical
use host names to easily identify device information (i.e. unit and location)
recognize the trade-offs in using Extension and Edge switches
There are three types of messages that are used in the network. Directed, Broadcast, and
Multicast messaging.
Directed A directed message is a message that is sent from one device to another device using the
Messages receiving device’s IP address. Most network communication is handled by means of directed
messaging. Some examples of this are Wave, Event and Trend Review exchanges between the
Information Center and DBS, print requests between the Information Center and printer, and
physiological data and control messages between a bedside and the Information Center.
Broadcast and Broadcast and Multicast messages are messages that are sent to the entire network, regardless
Multicast of the network design. Some examples of broadcast messages are time synchronization and
Messages bootp requests. Bed-to-Bed Overview is handled by means of a multicast message.
Note The Bed-to-Bed Overview feature is not available on wireless bedsides. Access points block
multicast messages to the wireless bedsides to conserve bandwidth on the wireless network.
4-19
Site Preparation
Site Preparation
Equipment The Information Center system should be centrally located in the clinical environment so that
Location nursing staff have access to the Information Center display, where patient information is
available Typically, the central monitoring station is a flat work surface situated at the hub of
the patient environment. The display is positioned so that the monitoring nurse can view both
the display and the patient areas..
18.5
Components used most frequently by monitoring nurses -- display, keyboard, mouse, speaker,
recorders, printer -- are located so that they can monitor patients most conveniently.
Items used less frequently -- processing unit, UPS, power supplies -- can be located in an out-
of-the-way location that will not interfere with the monitoring process. The locations of these
components should allow access by service personnel without disruption to the clinical
environment.
Notes Each piece of equipment should have at least 2 in. (5 cm) of clearance on all sides for proper
air circulation.
The maximum acceptable cabling distance from a peripheral device to the Information Center
PC is 6 m (19.7 ft.).
Typical Typical worksurface installations are illustrated in Figure 4-7. The space, weight,
Installations environmental, and electrical requirements for these examples are listed in Table 4-3,
Table 4-4, and Table 4-5. Data in these tables comes from Specifications in Chapter 2.
4-20
Site Preparation
Caution Table 4-3, Table 4-4, and Table 4-5 give specifications for units shipped at the time of
this manual’s publication. For specifications of more recent units, consult their
documentation.
Height
Width
Depth
M3140/3150/3145/3155 (display & recorder) M3150/3145/3155 (dual display & recorder)
M3140/3150/3145/3155 (PC, display & recorder)
Figure 4-7 Typical Information Center Installations
Space and Table 4-3 includes space and weight requirements for the systems shown in Figure 4-7. To
Weight determine similar specifications for Information Center systems different from Figure 4-7,
Requirements consult documentation for units in the system.
Table 4-3 Space and Weight Requirements for Information Center Installations
Height Width Depth Weight # Power
System
cm (in.) cm (in.) cm (in.) kg. (lbs.) Outlets*
A 42.2 (16.6) 72 (28) 64 (25) 19.7 (43.3) 2
B 42.2 (16.6) 114 (45) 64 (25) 36.7 (80.7) 3
C 42.2 (16.6) 89 (35) 66 (26) 34.7 (76.3) 2
* Includes PC and UPS
+1 for optional LaserJet printer
4-21
Site Preparation
Environmental The environment where the Information Center system will be used should be reasonably free
Requirements from vibration, dust, and corrosive or explosive gases. The ranges of ambient operating
conditions -- temperature and relative humidity (RH) -- and the maximum heat dissipated for
the Information Center installations shown in Figure 4-7 are listed in Table 4-4. To
determine similar specifications for Information Center installations different from those in
Figure 4-7, consult documentation for units in the system.
Caution If the environmental specifications of the Information Center system are not met,
damage may be caused to the equipment.
Table 4-4 Environmental Requirements for Information Center Installations

Heat (max) Relative
System Temperature Notes
BTU/hr. Humidity
A 2928 15 - 30 oC 20 - 80% Assumes single, medium display, PC,
59 - 86 oF @ 30 oC (86 oF) Recorder, and UPS.
B 3270 15 - 30 oC 20 - 80% Assumes dual, medium displays, PC,
C 2928 15 - 30 oC 20 - 80% Assumes single, medium display, PC,
Electrical Table 4-5 lists electrical requirements for the Information Center installations shown in
Requirements Figure 4-7. To determine similar specifications for Information Center installations different
from those in Figure 4-7, consult documentation for units in the system.
Table 4-5 Electrical Requirements for Information Center Installations

Manual
Input Voltage Input Input Power
System Switching Notes
(VAC) Frequency (Hz) (max) (Watts)
Required?
A 110 - 127 UPS: 50/60 PC & UPS: yes 858 Assumes single,
220 - 240 All others: 50-60 All others: no medium display, PC,
Recorder, and UPS.
B 110 - 127 UPS: 50/60 PC & UPS: yes 958 Assumes dual,
220 - 240 All others: 50-60 All others: no medium displays, PC,
Recorder, and UPS.
C 110 - 127 UPS: 50/60 PC & UPS: yes 858 Assumes single,
220 - 240 All others: 50-60 All others: no medium display, PC,
Recorder, and UPS
4-22
Site Preparation
Network The Information Center computer obtains its information from patient monitors connected to
Connection the Serial Distribution Network (SDN) through the System Communications Controller
(SCC). Therefore, an SDN wall box connection to the SCC should be installed near where the
Information Center computer will be located.
Procedures for installing SDN wall boxes and cabling are described in detail in the CMS Site
Preparation and Installation Manual. Refer to that manual for installing SDN wall box
connections. For available SDN installation material options, see M3199AI Options using
UTP Cable.
Clinical Network cabling, wall boxes, and faceplates are generally the responsibility of a
certified cabling installer. However, the network design should give careful consideration to
the locations of RJ45 wall boxes, both for the clinical equipment -- Information Centers,
Clients, printers -- and for the active Network components that require them. Distances
between wall boxes and the devices that connect to them will depend on the lengths of RJ45
and other types of cable.
Network Card The following features of the Information Center software require a second Network Interface
and TCP/IP Card (NIC).
Settings
• 12-Lead Export
• Holter Export
• HL7 Export
• Web Access
• Patient Data Transfer
The settings required for this NIC are for connection to the hospital network and are site-
specific. These settings will be added during hardware installation. Physical network
connections including cable runs and wall boxes must also be considered. Connection to the
Hospital LAN requires a 100 Mbit connection.
The following settings must be determined before installation:
IP Address . . .
Subnet Mask . . .
Default Gateway . . .
DNS IP Address . . .
(search order) . . .
WINS IP Address primary . . .
secondary . . .
Note Settings for the second NIC are site-specific. These settings should be clearly documented and
available in case you must re-install the Operating System.
Network Card location is system dependent. Refer to Refer to page 2-3, page 2-4,
page 2-8, and page 2-6.
4-23
Site Preparation
Step 1. Go to Start > Settings > Network Connections.

Step 2. Select the icon for Hospital LAN.
Step 3. Right-click and select Properties from the drop-down list.
The Hospital LAN Properties dialog opens.
Step 4. Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) from the connections list, then click
Properties.
The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties Dialog opens.
Figure 4-8 Hospital LAN TCP/IP Settings

Step 5. Enter the TCP/IP properties/settings, including the IP address, Subnet mask,
Default gateway. Then enter the DNS server settings.
4-24
Site Preparation
Step 6. Click Advanced to open the Advanced TCP/IP Settings dialog, and select the
DNS and/or WINS tabs to enter required settings.
Figure 4-9 Hospital LAN TCP/IP Advanced Settings
Equipment When selecting locations for each Information Center components, consideration should be
Cabling given to the lengths of cables required for interconnections. Standard length, interconnection
cables are provided with each component, but other cable lengths are available as options.
For available cable options, see M3181A Cable Options for Philips Systems and 78599AI
Cable Options for Remote Slave Display.
Note For details about extended length cabling that may be required for the Remote Display, refer to
Setting up a Remote Display, page 5-23.
4-25
Site Preparation
Safety
Caution
Medical Device The Information Center is not suitable for installation in the Patient Care Vicinity (Patient
Standards Environment).
All medical devices must comply with international safety requirements for medical electrical
equipment IEC 60601-1, IEC 60601-1-1, and IEC 60601-1-2.
PIIC equipment connected to a medical device must comply with the respective nationally
harmonized IEC standards (i.e. IEC 60950 for data processing equipment, or IEC 60601-1 for
medical equipment, or IEC 61010 for laboratory equipment). Anyone who connects
equipment to a medical device configures a medical system, and is therefore responsible for
the compliance of the system to the Safety Requirements for Medical Electrical Systems of
IEC 60601-1-1.
Enclosure leakage currents for any equipment within the patient environment must be less
than 500µA (U.S. requirement).
Note The leakge current measurements referred to above are relevant a) At the Patient monitor or b)
if the PIIC is in patient environment.
If in doubt, consult the Technical Services Department, or your local representative.
Philips Device Philips workstations, servers, displays, LaserJet printers, and active Network components may
Requirements be connected to bedside monitors through the Clinical Network and SDN provided that they
are located outside the patient environment and the PCC or telemetry mainframe contains a
redundant Protective Earth connection. PCC redundant Protective Earth connections are
described in the equipment Installation and Service Manual. When the PCC and telemetry
mainframe are properly installed, the system complies with IEC 60601-1-1.
Patient None of the Information Center or Database Server equipment is intended for use within the
Environment patient environment. Figure 4-10 shows acceptable distances from the patient environment.
Warning Information Center workstation, server, displays, recorder, LaserJet Printer, and
Clinical Network components are not intended for placement within the patient
environment -- any area within 1.5 meters (4.9 ft.) horizontally and 2.5 m (8.2 ft.)
vertically above the floor from any patient care location in which medical diagnosis,
monitoring, or treatment of the patient is carried out.
4-26
Site Preparation
The dimensions in the figure show minimum extent of the patient environment in a free surrounding.
Figure 4-10 Equipment Location Distances From Patient Environment
4-27
Site Preparation
4-28
5
Hardware Installation
Overview
This Chapter describes site planning and installation of the Information Center system.
Installing System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5-6
Interconnecting the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5-13
Providing Electrical Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5-28
Network Names and IP Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5-29
Cable Plant Philips requires that a customer contracts with a certified CAT 5 (and greater) cable installer
Installation for cable plant installation and that the installer provides test documentation proving that the
cable plant meets required specifications.
Note The hospital cable plant should be completely installed and tested before Philips
Representatives and Information Center and Server equipment arrive.
Installation Philips supplies a variety of UTP Category 5 (and greater) cable and installation materials,
Materials including bulk UTP cable [in 305 m (1000 ft.) rolls], UTP patch panels, UTP and fiber optic
patch cables, and UTP wall boxes. Available options are described in the IntelliVue Clinical
Network documentation.
Note Philips does not supply bulk fiber optic cable.
Noise UTP CAT 5 (and greater) cable has excellent immunity from noise when installed correctly.
Immunity To achieve this quality you must keep all UTP cables and active network components as far
away as possible from all sources of electrical noise. These sources include all RF sources and
AC powered devices and their power cables. Data signals on UTP cables that receive
excessive electrical noise (e.g. line power surges or spikes) can become corrupt and may
produce unpredictable results on the networks they support.
During cable plant installation all UTP cables, patch panels, wall boxes, and active network
components should not be:
• in wiring closets where RF transmission sources are used, and

• within 1 m (3 ft.) of any AC device or AC power cord except where necessary to
connect them to workstations or the server.
Fiber optic cable should be used for any 10 Mbit/s cable-runs over 100 m for which RF or
electrical noise is a potential problem.
5-1
Overview
UTP Cable Plant Figure 5-1 illustrates a typical cable plant installation for UTP CAT 5 (and greater) cables
Installation for Information Centers, Clients, and Clinical Network/Database Server components.
Figure 5-1 Typical UTP CAT 5 (and greater) Cable Plant Installation
The UTP cable plant must adhere to the following criteria.
• Patch panels for all switches should be in the wiring closets where the switches will
be installed.
• RJ45 wall plates or patch panels for repeaters and extension switches should be in
closets where they will be installed. Repeaters and Extension Switches should not be
located above a ceiling.
• RJ45 Wall plates for Information Centers, Clients, Printers, and Server, should
be within patch cable lengths of their devices.
• Cables, patch panels, switches, repeaters, and media translators should be more
than 1 m (3 ft.) from all powered devices (Server, UPS, etc.).
• Labels on all UTP cables and terminations should identify the cable, patch panel,
port number, and wall box termination.
• Test Documentation should demonstrate that the UTP cable plant meets appropriate
standards for NEXT, attenuation, wiremap, and length.
Caution UTP and fiber optic in-wall cables must be terminated at a patch panel or wall plate
and not directly at an active Network device.
5-2
Overview
RJ45 RJ45 connectors should be securely seated in their sockets. You must slide back the rubber
Connections boot over the end of the connector to insure that the connector locks into place. After the
connector locks into place slide the rubber boot over the connector. Tug lightly on the RJ45
connection to verify that the connector is engaged.
Rubber Boot
Figure 5-2 RJ45 Connector
Fiber Optic Fiber optic cable installation, testing procedures, and requirements are similar to those for
Cable Plant UTP CAT 5.
Installation
Unpacking and After the cable plant installation is complete, Information Center and Server hardware and
Inspection software can be installed. Unpack system components from their shipment containers and
thoroughly inspect them. An inventory Packing List is provided with the shipment so you
can verify that all ordered components have been received.
Hardware components, except for the Philips Recorders, are manufactured by equipment
manufacturers other than the Philips Cardiac and Monitoring Solutions Group. With the
exception of the PC workstation processing units, these products are received by Philips
from their manufacturers and reshipped, unopened.
Unopened IntelliVue Information Center hardware components include:
• Display(s)
• 2-Channel Recorder
• UPS
• 4-Channel Recorder (optional)
• LaserJet Printer (optional)
• Video Splitter (optional)
PCs are opened at the Philips factory. Interface cards, operating systems, and application
software is installed and tested. The PCs are then repackaged for shipment to customers
along with other IntelliVue Information Center hardware.
An Accessories Box is included in the shipment that contains the following IntelliVue
Information Center system accessories.
• Keyboard
• Mouse (or optional Trackball)
• Recorder
• Cables
• Information Center Service Documentation Kit
• Software Media Kit
Caution The Information Center Media Kit contains Operating System and Application
software. Be sure to carefully unpack and place in a secure place in case re-installation
is necessary!
5-3
Overview
Unpacking When the shipment is received, it should be moved to the installation area but remain
Components unopened. The Philips Service Provider assigned to the installation will remove the
components from their packaging and assure the integrity of the shipment. The Philips
Service Provider will also remove shipment packaging materials from the customer site if it
is requested.
Checking An inventory Packing List is included with the shipment. Each shipped item should be
Inventory carefully checked against the Packing List. If an item on the Packing List is not included in
the shipment, call the Response Center and report the missing item. It will be shipped
immediately to the customer site.
System Serial Each PC workstation has a System Serial Number label (Figure 5-3). Verify that this
Number information correctly matches the system ordered.
Model # System Serial #
Hardware PC Serial #
Platform Model #
Purchased
Options Date of Manufacture
Figure 5-3 Example of System Serial Number Label
Inspecting The Information Center system has been carefully packaged at the Philips factory so that no
Components damage occurs in shipment. However, Philips has no control over shipping and handling
damage. A thorough inspection of Philips components during removal from packaging is an
essential step to aensuring that no damage has occurred.
Note It may be necessary to document possible shipment damage in case hidden damage becomes
apparent during testing and operation.
Packaging Before removing the components from their packaging, the shipment container should be
inspected for damage. External damage to shipping containers may indicate damage to its
contents. Open the shipping containers and check the cushioning material. Note any signs of
stress for indications of rough handling in transit. Document any damage conditions.
Mechanical Unpack each component from its shipping material. Examine all parts of each component for
Components visible damage -- broken connectors or controls, dents or scratches on instrument surfaces,
or any other unusual appearance. Document any damage conditions.
5-4
Overview
Electrical No detailed internal or electrical inspection is required. The equipment has undergone
Components extensive electrical testing and configuration prior to shipment and all PC boards and
operating software have been pre-installed.
If physical damage is evident during unpacking or if, during initial testing and operation, the
Philips system fails to meet performance specifications in any way, immediately notify the
shipment carrier and the nearest Philips Sales/Support Office. Philips will arrange for
immediate repair or replacement of the equipment without waiting for any claims to be
settled.
Repackaging for If you have to ship your system to a Philips Sales/Support Office, use the original Philips
Shipment packaging materials, if possible, to provide proper protection during shipping. If the original
packaging is not available or re-usable, contact the Philips Sales/Support Office.
Addressing a Shipment
Securely attach a label to the equipment being returned that includes:
• Owner name and address,

• Instrument model and serial number, and
• A detailed description of damage, repair required, or symptoms of faults.
5-5
Installing System Components
This section describes proper installation of the components of the Information Center
system in their intended locations, including the assembly and installation of mounting
hardware. The procedure for a particular installation depends on the planned locations of
individual components developed during site planning and preparation in Chapter 4. Hence,
this section will only give general procedures for locating individual components and must
be adapted for each installation.
Setting up Put all Information Center components to be located on the work surface of the clinical work
Components station on the work surface in their intended locations. As a minimum, these include the
primary display(s), keyboard, and mouse (or trackball), but may also include recorders,
speaker, printer, processing unit, and UPS.
Typical Units placed on the work surface should be positioned in the way that is most convenient
Installations and useful to clinicians. Figure 5-4 shows a typical work surface installation of the
Information Center with dual display, speaker, optional printer, and 4-Channel Recorder.
18.5
Figure 5-4 Typical Information Center Installation
Keyboard Two work surface installation options are available for the computer keyboard -- a table top
Mounting Options garage (M3180A #A09) and an under table drawer (M3180A #A08). These options permit
putting the keyboard out of the way when not being used to provide additional work surface
area. Procedures for installing these units are described in installation notes that come with
the units.
5-6
Mounting A variety of wall mount hardware is available for mounting Information Center devices not
Components located on the central monitoring work surface -- remote displays, processing units, UPS,
power distribution module. Mounting locations and hardware should be identified during site
planning so that mounting brackets and hardware can be ordered as part of the Information
Center system purchase.
Note Philips is responsible for assembling the mounting hardware, attaching it to the display, and
mounting the system to the ceiling or wall mount bracket.
Display Mounts Wall and ceiling mounts are available that permit locating displays on walls or ceilings
where they can be more easily viewed by clinical users. Ceiling and wall mounts are
particularly useful for locating remote displays.
Caution Careful consideration should be given to assure that a surface, wall, or ceiling structure
can hold the weight of the item being mounted. See Specifications, page 2-65.
The Philips Customer Engineer is responsible for assembling the mounting hardware,
securing it to the surface, wall, or ceiling mounts, and attaching the Information Center
component to the mounting hardware.
Installing Wall Installation of wall mount hardware (Figure 5-5) to ceilings and walls requires the secure
Brackets attachment of a wall bracket to a building structural member. This ensures that the
installation can safely and securely support the weight of the mounted hardware.
Caution The customer is responsible for installing ceiling and wall brackets that hold mounting
hardware and for ensuring that the bracket installation can safely support the device
weight. Philips assumes no responsibility for this part of the installation.
Figure 5-5 Wall Mount Hardware Bracket
5-7
CPU and UPS A wall mount can be attached to a vertical surface under or near the IIC workstation.
Mounts Figure 5-6 shows the wall mount option for the PC workstation (M3180A #A18) and the
UPS (M3180A #A11) in vertical and horizontal mounting options.
Figure 5-6 Wall Mounts for PC Workstation and UPS
Installation Notes are included with the following:
• M3180A #A11 UPS Wall Mount Kit

• M3180A #A18 Desktop PC Wall Mount Kit
Caution There should be no obstructions between wall mount enclosures and the wall that can
reduce air flow around mounted components. Inadequate air flow can lead to
overheating and failure of the Information Center components.
5-8
PDM Mount An additional wall mount option (Figure 5-7) is available for the Power Distribution Module
(PDM) which is required for Japanese installations.The PDM is usually mounted next to the
UPS and PC. Installation procedures for the wall mount are described in the Power
Distribution Module Installation Note supplied with the PDM:
Figure 5-7 Power Distribution Module Wall Mount
Information All Information Center connectors that do not have screw-connected plugs must be secured
Center so they do not accidentally unplug (Figure 5-8). Refer to Figure 5-11, Figure 5-13, and
Installation Figure 5-12 for illustrations of Information Center connectors.
Warning Cables with plugs not firmly attached by screw connections must be secured to prevent
accidental unplugging. Be sure that the external speaker connection cannot be
accidentally pulled out. Use the Strain Relief Kit provided and secure the speaker cable
to another cable that has a screw connection. When securing all cables, be sure to
provide strain relief loops and cinch cable ties securely. See Figure 5-8.
Install the UPS with the proper voltage for the PC as follows:
Step 1. Verify UPS batteries are connected and turn on the UPS. Wait for the Battery LED
to change from Amber to Green.
Step 2. Connect the appropriate serial communication cable to the PC to the appropriate
port (APC UPS - Philips gray cable; UPS with Hardware Watchdog - cable shipped
with UPS).
5-9
Installing HP A Power Switch Cover is provided with the HP DC 7700 PC to prevent the PC from being
DC 7700 Power accidentally turned off. The Power Switch Cover is a piece of clear plastic that adheres to
Switch Cover and covers the power button. A small hole in the center of the cover permits use of a paper
clip, or equivalent, to turn the unit ON and OFF.
Step 1. Peel off the protective tape from the self-adhering

surface of the Power Switch Cover.
Step 2. Carefully align the Power Switch Cover over the

PC power button so that the hole in the cover is
centered on the button. Then, press the cover so it
securely attaches to the PC.
Securing Rear Rear panel cables should be secured firmly so they do not accidentally unplug. Figure 5-8
Panel Cables illustrates the use of strain relief loops and cable ties to secure cables without
screw-connected plugs to cables with screw-connected plugs.
Figure 5-8 Example of Rear Panel Cable Strain Relief Method
5-10
Small The Small Database Server and its display, keyboard, and mouse should be installed in the
Database intended location. The display, keyboard, and mouse are intended for a work surface.
Server
Installation After you put the Small Database Server components in their intended location, Install
the 650 VA UPS with the proper voltage for the Server as follows:
Step 1. Turn Off the UPS On/Off switches and connect the battery wire of the 650 VA
UPS.
Step 2. Connect the UPS input power cord to a properly grounded electrical output.
Step 3. Verify PC Voltage select switch setting and connect the PC power cord to a UPS
battery backup outlet.
Step 4. Connect the Philips 9 pin UPS communication cable (gray) to the computer
interface port of the UPS and the Serial A port on the rear of the Server (Figure 5-9).
Philips 9 pin UPS/Server

Commumication Cable
Figure 5-9 Connections to the Small Database Server PC
5-11
Large The Large Database Server should be installed in its intended location. This includes the
Database Server, display, keyboard, and, mouse. The display, keyboard, and mouse are intended for a
Server work surface.
Installation
Step 1. After you put the Database Server components in their intended locations, install
the 1000 VA UPS with the proper voltage for the Net Server as follows:
Step 1. Turn Off the UPS On/Off switches.

Step 2. Connect the battery wire of the 1000 VA UPS.
Step 3. Connect the UPS input power cord to a properly grounded electrical output
Step 4. Connect the Server power cord to a UPS battery backup outlet.
Step 5. Connect the Philips provided 9 pin UPS communication cable (gray) to the
computer interface port of the UPS and the appropriate Serial port of the Server. Refer
to Figure 2-3, Figure 2-4, Figure 2-5, and Figure 2-6 for appropriate equipment
connectors.
Connecting If the Information Center Web is included with your system, connect the Database Server to
the DBS to the Hospital intranet using proper cabling. This is a 100 Mbit/s connection.
Hospital
Intranet
Installing IIC Release M uses the Windows Operating System Print Service to accommodate printer
Printers installation. Refer to page 6-39 to add a BootP Networked printer with Config Wizard,
page 7-100 to add printers that are on the Hospital LAN to the DBS, and page 6-90 to add
monitoring LAN and local printers at the IIC
Device Maximum # of Printers

M3150 Information Center (local database); 2
M3170 Patient Link
M3154 Database Server system (connection to M3155 8
Information Centers)
Large Network M3154 Database System 80
M3169 Small Database Server System 4
Note Use your Printer documentation for setup and unpacking procedures.
Refer to the printer documentation for detailed instructions about the printer menu settings.
5-12
Interconnecting the System
Once the Information Center system components have been positioned in their locations,
they can be interconnected using proper equipment cables. Wiring diagrams for the Database
Server and Information Center systems are given in this section. Diagrams for plug
connections to the processing unit and wiring diagrams for the total system, including
options, are provided. The key to cable numbers is given in Table 2-3. Follow the
appropriate figure to interconnect each unit of the system.
IntelliVue An illustration of the general layout of a typical Information Center installation follows. .
Information
Center Layout
Optional Remote Display
Main Display Optional Second Display
5-13
DC7700
Connections
1 Y-Cable Connector - for Dual 7 Clinical Network (Monitoring LAN) Connector

Display systems (page 2-49)
2 SDN Connector 8 USB Connectors (6)
Use the top (3) left USB Connectors for USB
Recorders. Use either of the top two connectors for
2-Channel Recorders and the third for a 4-Channel
Recorder. Two 2-channel recorders and one
4-channel recorder are supported at each IIC.
3 Optional Hospital LAN NIC 9 Main Display Connector - for single display systems
To add a second NIC refer to
page 2-61.
4 Serial Connector 10 UPS Connector
(Supports 4-Channel Serial
Recorder)
5 Connector for 2-Channel Felp 11 Keyboard Connector
Recorder
6 Amplifier Card (for external speaker) 12 Mouse Connector
Figure 5-10 DC7700 Connections
5-14
HP rp5700
Connections
1 DVD/CD-ROM Drive 11 Keyboard Connector

2 DVD/CD Drive Activity LED 12 UPS Connector
3 DVD/CD Eject Button 13 Parallel Connector
4 Hard Drive Activity LED 14 Main Display Connector
5 Power Button 15 4-Channel Recorder Serial Connector
6 Power LED 16 USB Ports (4)
Use top (2) left ports for 2-Channel Recorder, the top
right for a 4-Channel Recorder, and the bottom right
for first Touch Screen.
7 USB Ports (2) 17 Clinical Network (Monitoring LAN) Connector
Use top port for Memory Stick; use
bottom port for second Touch Screen.
8 Horizontal Upper Slot, Audio Card 18 Horizontal Lower Slot, Optional Hospital LAN NIC
Connector for speaker Connector
The external speaker connection must
be secure so it cannot be accidentally
disconnected.
9 Power Cord Connector 19 Vertical Slot 2, PCI Express SDN Connector
10 Mouse Connector 20 Vertical Slot 1, Second Display Connector for Dual
Display systems
Figure 5-11 HP rp5700 Connections
5-15
ML350 G5 Large
DBS Connections
1 Power Cord Connector 7 iLO2 Connector

2 Keyboard Connector 8 Clinical Network LAN Connector
3 Mouse Connector 9 Second Serial Connector
4 Serial UPS Connector 10 Parallel Connector
5 Display Connector 11 Optional Hospital LAN Connector
6 USB Ports
Figure 5-12 ML350 G5 Connections
5-16
ML350 G6
Connections
1 Power Cord Connector 6 Video Connector

2 LAN Connector 2 7 Keyboard Connector
Hospital LAN (Optional)
3 LAN Connector 1 8 Mouse Connector
Monitoring LAN
4 USB Ports (2) 9 Serial UPS Connector
5 iLO2 Connector
Figure 5-13 ML350 G6 Connections
5-17
DL380 G6
Connections

Optional Hospital LAN NIC Connector
Clinical Network (Monitoring LAN) Connector
7 PCI Slot 5 18 iLO 2 Connector
Figure 5-14 DL380 G6 Rack Connectors
5-18
Touch Display The touch display has the following procedures that must be done at installation time.
Setup
Note When touch screens are used in Dual Display configuration, use of one stylus and holder for
only the right display.
Cable The rear panel of the touch display has connections for the Power cord, the Video cable (see
Connections Mounting the Touch Display Stylus), and for the USB Cable (Figure 5-15). After the
connections are made, the cables can be threaded through the display stand.
Video Cable
Power USB Cable
Figure 5-15 Touch Display Panel Connections
Mounting the The touch display comes with a stylus that can be secured to the display.
Touch Display
Stylus Step 1. Attach the stylus cord to the display as illustrated in Figure 5-16.
Video Cable Connector
Figure 5-16 Stylus Cord Connection
5-19
Step 2. Clean the area below the Control Buttons with alcohol. When the surface is dry
remove the backing from the stylus holder and attach it to the display. Be sure that the
larger opening of the holder is facing up.
Step 3. Place the stylus in the stylus holder.
Calibrating the Step 1. From the Windows desktop open Control Panel and double click the ELO icon.
Touch Display The ELO Touchscreen Properties dialog displays.
Step 2. Press the Video Alignment button .
Step 3. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Step 4. Test the touch alignment.

• If touch is ok, press the Green Check icon.
• If touch is not ok, press the Arrow icon to redo the calibration.
5-20
Step 5. Select the Sound tab and be sure there is no check in the Beep on touch
check box.
Step 6. Press OK to close the ELO Touchscreen Properties dialog.
5-21
Disabling the The touch display has five On-Screen Display (OSD) Control Buttons on the side panel,
Touch Display which must be disabled.
Controls Menu Displays/Exits the OSD menus
Brightness/Plus/Clockwise
Mute/Minus/Counter-Clockwise
Select Select item
Power
Step 1. Press and hold the Menu and Brightness buttons simultaneously until the
message OSD IS LOCKED appears. (If you press the buttons simultaneously again,
the OSD unlocks.)
Step 2. Press the Menu button to confirm that Menus are disabled.
Step 3. Press and hold the Menu and Mute buttons simultaneously until the message
POWER IS LOCKED appears on the screen. (If you press the buttons simultaneously
again, power becomes unlocked).
Step 4. Press the Menu button to confirm that POWER button is disabled.
You can enable these controls for troubleshooting, but you must be sure to disable them
when troubleshooting is complete!
5-22
Setting up a If the remote display is located in a different area than the CPU, extended length coax
Remote cabling may be required (Figure 5-17). This is described in detail in the Installation Note
Display that ships with the remote display option.
Notes The maximum length coax cable supported is 90 m (300 ft.).

Image quality diminishes when cable length is increased.
Coax cable lengths must be cut from the same spool of cable and be equal within + 1 m (3 ft.)
Remote Display
Figure 5-17 Remote Display Installation Diagram
5-23
Setting up a A Keyboard-Video-Mouse (KVM) Switch permits controlling up to four Information

KVM Switch Centers with a single keyboard and mouse. The KVM switch also permits a single display to
serve as the second (Applications) display for all Information Centers.
Figure 5-18 Wiring Diagram for KVM Switch
Note A touch display cannot be used as the second display on the PS/2 based KVM switch.
5-24
Installing and Configuring KaVoom Software

Philips KM Software accommodates keyboard and mouse operation for up to four IICs
using a single keyboard and mouse. You can group up to four M3145/M3155 Information
Centers, M3177 Trend Displays, and M3151 Information Center Clients
Dual display Information Centers and Clients are supported. Switched-second-display

configurations and Touch screen displays are not supported.
Note It is required that a hardware keyboard-video-mouse (KVM) switch is installed. This reduces
the risk if the PC (where the KM switch is connected) or connection to the IntelliVue Clinical
Network is lost.
Supported Up to four displays can be used with the KM Software. These illustrations show four
Layouts displays, but two or three displays are also supported.
2 x 2 Layout 4 x 1 Layout
1 > 3 Layout 3 > 1 Layout
1 x 4 Layout
5-25
Installation Install KM software on every Information Center and Information Center Client PC that is
participating in the use model after you install the IIC software. Before installing the KM
Software on each device, verify that each hostname is correct.
Important—The KM Software must be installed on IICs and Clients after the IIC software is
installed. Although a shortcut appears on the desktop it is not active until after the KM
Software executable runs.
Step 1. At the device desktop go to Start > Run. Then click the Browse button.
Step 2. Locate the following file in the IIC Stardate folder, and double-click it.
The file populates the Open textbox in the Run dialog.
Stardate/bin/KaVoomKMfor Phillips_Setup.exe.
Step 3. Click OK in the Run dialog.
Step 4. Progress through the installation screens by clicking the Next > button until you
reach the final screen. Then click Finish.
Step 5. On the desktop, double-click the SW KM Switch icon.
Step 6. Click Change.

The Other Computers list is blank on the first device. Leave this window open and
repeat steps 1-4 on the other devices connected to the KM Software.
Step 7. As other devices are configured, the Other Computers list populates with the
appropriate hostnames. When all desired hostnames appear in the Change
Configuration screen, click Next > on one of the devices.
Step 8. On the selected device, drag and drop the monitor icons (with their computer names
showing) to the correct location. Click Finish.
Step 9. Restart ALL devices and verify that they resume monitoring.
Step 10. Select the Hide key to close the configuration screens.
Notes Dual Display Information Centers and Clients appear as a single icon.
The Database Server/Information Center archive does not include configuration settings for
the KM Software Switch. If the Operating System or Application software is ever upgraded
or reinstalled, the KM Software must be re-installed and configured.
Troubleshooting Refer to page 7-15 for KM Software troubleshooting solutions.
Removal Step 1. On one of the devices in the group that includes the device you want to disable,
open the KM Software Change Configuration screen.
Step 2. Select the hostname(s) of each device you want to disable, then click Remove.
If disabling multiple devices, repeat this process for each device.
5-26
Upgrade When re-installing or upgrading KM Software, older version filse are automatically
overwritten. You do not have to restart the PC.
Hospital If you have the IIC WEB option, interconnect the Database Server to the Hospital intranet.
Intranet This is a 100 Mbits connection.
Connection
5-27
Providing Electrical Power
Providing Electrical Power
The following IntelliVue Information Center components are provided with 3-wire,
grounded power cables.
• Display(s)
• Processing Unit
• UPS with Hardware Watchdog
• Power Supply for 2-Channel USB Recorder
• Power Supply for 4-Channel Serial Recorder
• LaserJet Printer
• 6-Way Video Splitter
Each 3-wire, power cable must be separately connected to the appropriate 3-wire, grounded
electrical receptacle. See Figures 5-13 and 5-14 for power cables and instrument connection
points
Caution • BEFORE connecting power cables to electrical outlets:

1. Verify that all components of the Information Center system that can be
turned off are turned OFF!
2. Review Safety in Chapter 4 to assure proper electrical grounding and
isolation.
3. If applicable, set the input voltage selection switch on the rear of the PC
workstation to the proper line voltage.
4. If connected to an APC UPS, set 120V UPS rear panel switch settings to
those shown in Figure 2-22.
5. Set Power Distribution Module input and output voltage switch settings to
their proper values. See Table 2-1.
• PC workstation, 60V 2-Channel Recorder Power Supply, 2-Channel USB

Recorder Power Distribution Module or 4-Channel 24V Power Supply connect to
the BATTERY BACKUP outlets on the UPS.
• Displays and video splitters may be connected to ACCESSORY outlets of the
UPS or to a separate non-UPS outlet.
• LaserJet Printers should not be connected to a UPS.
Warning IntelliVue Information Center system components do not comply with IEC 60601-1 and
may not be located within the Patient Environment (page 4-26).
5-28
Network Names and IP Addresses
When all devices have been installed, interconnected, and turned on, you must identify their
names and locations on the Network. The names and addresses for each Network device --
Switch, Information Center, Client, and Printer -- must be unique so the equipment can be
properly located by the Database Server and other Network devices.
IP Address The IP Address is a 32 bit binary number that uniquely identifies the device on the
Network. Part of the IP Address identifies the network and part identifies the device. A range
of IP addresses (Table 5-1) has been set for each type of Network device.
Warning IP Addresses outside the ranges in Table 5-1 have not been tested by Philips and are not
supported by Philips software.
Table 5-1 Range of IP Addresses for Network Devices

Range of IP
Device Default Gateway Subnet Mask
Addresses
Routed Systems
M2/M3/M4/IntelliVue Patient Monitors 172.31.(na+4).0 - 255.255.248.0
172.31.(n+4).255
2.4 GHz Access Point Controllers 172.31.(n+1).0 - 172.31.n.1 255.255.248.0
172.31.(n+1).63
Information Centers 172.31.(n+3).32 - 172.31.n.1 255.255.248.0
172.31.(n+3).63
Information Center Clients 172.31.(n+3).64 - 172.31.n.1 255.255.248.0
172.31.(n+3).95
Database Servers (Monitoring LAN) 172.31.(n+3).0 - (blank)b 255.255.248.0
172.31.(n+3).15
Application Server 172.31.(n+3).16 - (blank)c 255.255.248.0
172.31.(n+3).31
IntelliVue Clinical Network Switches 172.31.(n).10 - 172.31.n.1 255.255.248.0
172.31.(n).102
Monitoring LAN Printers 172.31.(n+3).96 - 255.255.248.0
172.31.(n+3).127
IntelliVue Telemetry System Infrastructure 172.31.240.10 - 172.31.240.1 255.255.240.0
Switches 172.31.240.20
Reserved for Service PC 172.31.240.4 - 172.31.240.1 255.255.240.0
172.31.240.9
Reserved for Future 172.31.240.21 -
172.31.240.255
1.4 GHz Access Point Controllers 172.31.241.0 - 172.31.240.1 255.255.240.0
172.31.241.127
5-29
Table 5-1 Range of IP Addresses for Network Devices

Range of IP
Device Default Gateway Subnet Mask
Addresses
1.4 GHz Wireless Access Points 172.31.242.0 - 172.31.240.1 255.255.240.0
172.31.244.127
Non-Routed Systems
M2/M3/M4/IntelliVue Patient Monitors 172.31.(n+4).0 - 255.255.248.0
172.31.(n+4).255
1.4 and 2.4 GHz Access Point Controllers 172.31.(n+1).0 - IP Address of DBS or 255.255.248.0
172.31.(n+1).63 M3150 Information Center
Information Centers 172.31.(n+3).32 - IP Address of DBS or 255.255.248.0
Information Center Clients 172.31.(n+3).64 - IP Address of DBS or 255.255.248.0
Database Servers (Monitoring LAN) 172.31.(n+3).0 - (blank) 255.255.248.0
172.31.(n+3).15
Application Server 172.31.(n+3).16 - (blank) 255.255.248.0
172.31.(n+3).31
IntelliVue Clinical Network Switches 172.31.(n).10 - IP Address of DBS or 255.255.248.0
172.31.(n).102 M3150 Information Center
Monitoring LAN Printers 172.31.(n+3).96 - 255.255.248.0
172.31.(n+3).127
1.4 GHz Wireless Access Points 172.31.(n+2).0 - IP Address of DBS or 255.255.248.0
a“n” represents the network number and starts at 0 for single Clinical Network systems. It increments by 8
from there for additional IntelliVue Clinical Networks. See the “Worksheets” on page A-1 for examples
of network addresses.
bRoute statements are generated (in instances with a Router and without) at the completion of the Config
Wizard.
cA Route statement must be run if connectivity to devices on the other side of the router is desired. Refer to
the Application Server documentation for details.
Other identifiers given to Network devices include:
5-30
Subnet Mask Almost all IP Address handling applications require the specification of a Subnet Mask. The
Subnet Mask default value of 255.255.248.0 can be used for all Network-connected devices
and will appear in Windows configuration applications. It is not necessary to know the
masked IP Address of a Philips device, although it does appear in the Network category of
the Status Log. In all other applications, the real IP Address for the networked device is
shown.
Default A Default Gateway must be specified in many IP Addressing applications. Its configuration
Gateway depends on the type of network that devices are connecting to.
MAC Address Media Access Control (MAC) Address is a fixed, unique 12 digit HEX number that
identifies a device. Part of the number identifies the device manufacturer. It is hard coded
into the device network interface card and cannot be changed.
Host Name Host Name is an alphanumeric name assigned to each workstation -- Information Centers,
Clients, Database Server. Philips assigns a Host Name to each PC before shipment; but it
should be changed to a name that identifies its function, associated unit, and physical
location.
Device Name Device Name is an identification name assigned to an Information Center, Client, Server,
or Switch when it is configured on the network. Device Name is generally the same as the
Host Name.
To view the Host Name for a device:
Step 1. Go to Start > Settings > Control Panel > System.

The System Properties dialog opens.
Step 2. Select the Computer Name tab.

Computer Name is the Host Name.
5-31
IP Address To view the IP Address for a device:

The System Properties dialog opens.
Step 2. Right-click the Monitoring LAN icon, and select Properties from the option list.
Step 3. Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) in the LAN Properties dialog and click
Properties.
The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog opens. The IP Address tab
shows the IP address of the device. You can also enter or change an IP Address if
necessary. The Subnet mask and Default gateway address for the device are also
shown.
Figure 5-19 IP Address from Control Panel
Setting Host After all Network devices are installed, you must assign Host Names and IP Addresses
Names and IP for the device - Information Centers, Clients, Server, Switches, Printers - before you can
Addresses install and configure Philips software.
Device Naming When assigning a Host Name to a device on the network, be sure that the name:
Rules
is unique so the Server can identify it,
contains no more than 15 characters,
uses alpha-numeric characters only, as no other characters are acceptable (no
spaces, hyphens, underscores, etc.),
does not begin with a number, and
is different from factory settings assigned during device installation.
Note IP Addresses for M3/M4/IntelliVue Patient Monitors are automatically assigned by Philips
software.
5-32
Note Appendix A includes worksheets that you can copy and use to record Host Names, Device
Names, hospital Locations, and IP Addresses. Be sure to complete Network Installation
Worksheets for all devices on the Network.
To set Host Names and IP Addresses for Information Centers, Clients, Small Database
Servers, and Large Database Servers:
Step 1. Go to Start > Settings > Control Panel.
Step 2. Double click the System icon to open the System Properties dialog.
Step 3. Change the Computer Name for the device to a Host Name associated with its
location in the hospital (e.g. ICU or CCU).
Note When selecting a device Host Name, refer to Device Naming Rules, page 5-32.
Step 5. Right-click the Monitoring LAN icon, and select Properties.
Step 6. Select TCP/IP in the Protocols list and click Properties.

The Internet Protocol TCP/IP Properties dialog opens.
Step 7. Enter an IP address for the device using one of the recommended IP addresses
for the device type (Table 5-1).
Step 8. Enter a Default gateway for this device:
For Information Centers and Clients in non-routed topologies with no IntelliVue

Telemetry devices, use the Server IP address.
For Information Centers and Clients in routed topologies with IntelliVue Telemetry
devices, use the router IP address.
For a Server in non-routed topologies, leave blank (0.0.0.0), and

For a Server in routed topologies with IntelliVue Telemetry devices on the connected
Information Centers/Clients, use the router IP address.
Step 9. Click OK to close the TCP/IP Properties dialog.
Step 10. Close the Network and Control Panel windows to return to the Desktop.
Step 11. Shutdown and Restart the device.
Note After all Host Names are changed, you must re-initialize the Database Server and all
connected Information Center/Client software. Refer to Application Software
Re-initialization and Re-installation, page 6-2.
5-33
After you set Host Names and IP Addresses, verify Network Interface Card (NIC)
configurations as follows:
Step 1. Go to Start > Settings > Control Panel.
Step 2. Double-click the Network Connections icon to open the Network

Connections dialog.
Step 3. Right click the Monitoring LAN icon and select Properties.
The Monitoring LAN Properties dialog opens.
Step 4. Click Configure, and select the Advanced tab.
Step 5. Verify the Link Speed & Duplex property (Figure 5-20).
Figure 5-20 Monitoring LAN Speed/Duplex Setting
Step 6. Click OK to close the dialog and return to the Network Connections dialog.
Then close the Network and Control Panel windows.
Testing After you set the IP Addresses of the Server, Workstations, Switches, Access Points, and
Network Printers, you must test the Network to assure the integrity of each connection and to be sure
Connectivity that each device can be identified by the Server. This must be done at the DataBase Server.
Step 1. Go to Start > Run to open the Run window.
5-34
Step 2. Type cmd in the Open: box and click OK.

The command window opens.
Step 3. Type Ping hostname (or Ping IP address) using the hostname or IP address of one
of the Network-connected devices, and press Enter.
If connection is successful (the network connection is complete and the Host Name is
resolved), a reply with the device IP address displays. If no connection/resolution can be
made a failure message appears. If the command fails you must identify the problem, correct
it, and repeat Steps 1 - 3.
Step 4. Repeat Step 3 for each Information Center, Client, Switch, Access Point, and
Printer on the Network.
Step 5. Close the Command window and restart the computer.
Note After the Host Name is changed, Philips software must be re-initialized. Refer to
Application Software Re-initialization and Re-installation on page 6-2.
5-35
Optional Second Network Interface Card Settings
If you are using a second NIC (Network Interface Card) on your system, it must be
configured before you begin to configure software.
Verify that the cards are installed in the correct slots.
• HP DC 7700 (Figure 5-10)

• HP rp5700 (Figure 5-11)
• ML350 G5 (Figure 5-12)
• ML350 G6 (Figure 5-13)
• DL380 G6 ( Figure 5-14 )
Network settings are site-specific and required for the NIC to connect to the hospital
network. The factory default of the second NIC IP address is DHCP. Use the settings defined
in Network Card and TCP/IP Settings on page 4-23 to perform the following:
Step 1. Go to Start > Settings >Control Panel to open the Control Panel.
Step 2. Double-click Network Connections to open that dialog.
Step 3. Right-click the Hospital LAN icon, and select Properties from the drop-down
list.
Step 4. Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) and click Properties.

The Internet Protocol TCP/IP Properties dialog opens.
Step 5. Enter the TCP/IP Properties/settings, including the IP address, Subnet mask,
Default gateway and DNS server information.
5-36
Step 6. Click Advanced to open the Advanced TCP/IP Settings dialog, and select the
DNS and/or WINS tabs to enter in the required settings.
Checking the When the second NIC properties are configured on Database Server and Information Center
Node Type systems, the node configuration type can be Hybrid or Unknown. In most cases when
DHCP is used, the Hospital DHCP service returns Hybrid as the node type. If the Hospital
DHCP service returns Peer or Unknown as the node type, you can request that the
Hospital IT Staff change the node type to Hybrid. If the hospital will not change the node
type from Peer to Hybrid, consult the Philips Customer Response Center.
If the hospital uses static IPs and WINS (NetBios) is configured properly, node type will be
set to Hybrid automatically. If WINS is not configured and static IPs are being used, the
node type Unknown is valid and supported.
You must check the network node configuration during installation to be sure of accurate
network communication in the system. If the node configuration type is not properly set,
network problems can occur.
Application problems from a network node type setting of Peer or Unknown could
include:
• Failure of Patient Data Transfers across Database Servers

• Delay in presentation of Information Center Review Applications at the Application
Server
• Connection problems between Information Center and Database Server (e.g. You
cannot ping by host name but you can ping by IP address.)
Verify network node type setting for the second NIC as follows.
Step 1. From Service mode go to Diagnostic.
5-37
Step 2. Type ipconfig /all.

The Windows IP Configuration displays.
Step 3. If the hospital is using DHCP to resolve the second NIC, request that the hospital IT
professional change the Node Type to Hybrid.
Step 4. If the hospital is not using DHCP to resolve the second NIC, verify proper WINS
configuration then verify that the Node Type is Hybrid according to Step 2. If WINS
is not configured and static IPs are being used, the node type Unknown is valid and
supported.
5-38
6
Software Installation & Configuration
Introduction
This chapter contains instructions for application software re-initialization. These

instructions apply to Information Centers that are shipped from the factory with software
preloaded and require application software re-initialization.
Application Software Re-initialization and Re-installation . page 6-2
Config Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6-7
MiniConfig . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6-98
Label Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6-104
Activating the Network/Server System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6-111
Note This chapter does not describe installation of the Operating System or Application software.
Those procedures are described in the Software Re-Installation Procedure, page 7-133.
All Information Center devices must be running the same software revision.
Stopping If you are reconfiguring or upgrading a Database Server that is connected to an Enhanced Web
the EWS Server (EWS) client or server, the EWS Service must be stopped and the EWS device must be
Service restarted after the configuration changes are made.
6-1
Application Software Re-initialization and Re-installation
Step 1. If necessary modify the device hostname (My Computer > Properties) and/or IP
Address (Control Panel > Network Connections).
Once this is complete, restart the IIC.
Step 2. Open the Windows desktop.
Warning If you intend to restore an archive on a Database Server make sure that you remove all
SCC equipment assigned to any IIC that will NO LONGER HAVE AN SDN CARD.
Remove equipment in Network Configuration and Equipment Setup pages of Config
Wizard.
Important—Before you re-install software be sure that you use the Microsoft Print Migrator
(or equivalent) to save your local printer configuration information, page 6-96. The Config
Wizard Archive feature does not save printer configuration information.
Step 3. Insert the Philips media containing Release M software into the appropriate device
drive.
Table 6-1 Installation Media Description

USB Flash Drive Media Kit 4535 642 01281
Description Part Number
PIC /APS Software USB Flash Drive (UFD) 4535 642 21991
IST CD 4535 642 21981
DVD Media Kit 4535 642 01511

PIC /APS Software M.xx.xx DVD 4535 642 22001
IST CD 4535 642 21981
Step 4. Go to Start > Run from the Windows desktop.

The Run dialog box appears.
Step 5. Click Browse in the Run dialog box and navigate the PIC APS Software (DVD or
USB Flash Drive) for viridia\setup.exe. Double-click the file to select it.
Step 6. Click Ok in the Run dialog box.

The Philips Setup screen opens.
6-2
Step 7. The Welcome To Philips Setup screen opens. Be sure to exit all Windows
programs before continuing the setup program.
Step 8. Click Next > in the Welcome to Philips Setup screen; the Language screen
opens.
6-3
Step 9. Select a language from the list and click Next >. The Install Type screen opens.
The Install Type screen has two installation options:
• Re-install - Use this selection for devices on which installed software is suspected of
being corrupt.
• Re-initialize Only - Use this selection for new devices from Philips for which the Host
Name and IP Address have been changed. If the Database Server is re-initialized, all
devices must be re-initialized.
Note When a device Host Name or IP Address is changed the device must be re-initialized so that it
can communicate with the DataBase Server during the Purchased Options and Support
Information (page 6-16) configuration.
6-4
Step 10. If you want to Re-initialize, do the following.
a. Select the Reinitialize Only option and click Next > to continue. The
Installing Philips Software screen opens.
b. Click Next > in the Installing Philips Software screen to start the re-
initilization process.
Step 11. If you want to Re-install, do the following.
a. Select the Reinstall option and click Next >.
b. In the Select Model Type screen be sure correct model is selected and click
Next >.
6-5
c. When the SDN Simulator (BedSim) screen opens click the No option. Then
and click Next > to continue.
d. Click Next > in the Installing Software screen to begin the Philips Software
installation.
Step 12. On devices connecting to a Database Server, the Connect to Database Server
dialog box appears. Verify that the Database Server is in Monitoring mode and enter the
Database Server name in the dialog box. Click Ok in the dialog box to continue.
Config Wizard runs required configuration screens for the device (page 6-7).
6-6
Config Wizard
Config Wizard
The Config Wizard screen sequence for each device follows. For the Plug and Play model
(M3140), a simplified configuration tool called Mini-Config permits configuration using a
single screen. See page 6-98 for details about Mini-Config.
Config Wizard
M3154 Large M3177 M3170
M3150 M3145/3155 M3151
Screen M3140 M3169 Small Trend Patient
(Local DB) Central DB Client
DB Server Display Link
Sequence
Backup Logs 
Restore From     
Archive
Software Versions       
and Security
Updates
Purchased Options       
and Support
Information
Database Server   
General
Configuration
Local General    
Configuration
Network    
Configuration
Unit Paging  
Settings
Display Setup      
Equipment Setup    
Bed Config      
Report Settings   
Report and      
Recording
Destination
Security Access  
Date and Time    
Setup
Creating an    
Archive
a
At Installation only
6-7
Config Wizard
You can also access the following functions directly from the Service screen Configuration
menu (Figure 6-1) without using Config Wizard.
Figure 6-1 Information Center Service Screen Configuration Menu

The Service screen Configuration > Read Only Config Wizard menu selection provides
read-only display of the configuration screens without forcing all Information Centers and
Clients into local database mode.
Warning Philips does not support running Config Wizard on both the Information Center and
Database Server simultaneously.
6-8
Config Wizard
When you select !Config Wizard from the Configuration menu, a Warning appears.
Warning
If you click Yes all Network Information Centers and Clients restart and go into local
database mode before Config Wizard begins.
Each Config Wizard screen has the following buttons at the bottom of the screen.
Button Function
< Back Saves all entries in the current page and returns to the previous configuration screen
Next > Saves all entries in the current page and advances to the next configuration screen
When you complete each Config Wizard screen, click Next > to open a new
configuration screen.
Exit Saves all entries in the current page and exits Config Wizard
Help Displays descriptive information about the screen
Note When settings/selections in the Config Wizard screens are dimmed they may be read-only
information or may apply only to a specific type of Information Center or Client.
If you are reconfiguring or upgrading a Database Server that is connected to an Enhanced
Web Server (EWS) client or server, you must stop the EWS Service during the upgrade. The
EWS device must be restarted after the configuration changes are complete.
6-9
Config Wizard
Backup Logs The Backup Logs screen (Figure 6-2) is only available on the M3170 Patient Link device.
It permits copying all operating system and Information Center logs to a compressed file so
you can review them later.
Figure 6-2 Backup Logs Screen

You can select the Information Centers/Clients from which to obtain logs and the destination
location. Two files are created, hostname.zip, which contains operating system event logs
and all the Information Center log files, and hostnamejunk.zip, which contains a
password-protected alarm.log file.
Step 1. Select the host name of the device(s) you want to obtain logs from.
Step 2. Verify the Backup Log Path destination. You can use the Browse button if you
want to save the files to a specific location.
Step 3. Click Backup Logs.
Step 4. Click Next > to save changes and continue to the next screen.
6-10
Config Wizard
Restore From Restore From Archive (Figure 6-3) restores configuration settings for a device from
Archive archive media. All clinical Unit Settings, Configuration settings, and Purchased
Options are restored. Patient Admit, Discharge, and Transfer (ADT) settings at the time
of the archive can also be restored.
When a device is being configured for the first time there are no stored configuration settings
for that device, so you can go to the next Config Wizard screen.
Caution In a large network system, verify that you use the Master Database Server archive for
the Master Database Server. If the Master Database Server archive is restored on a non-
master Database Server, will be two master database servers.
Important—When upgrading to Release M, printer configuration is not saved. Refer to

page 6-96 for instructions about saving printer configuration before upgrading your system.
Figure 6-3 Restore from Archive Screen.
Setting/Selection Description
Archive Path: Permits entering the filename of the archive file stored on the Archive media
The software automatically caches the last drive used.
Because archives may contain sensitive information that is not encrypted, the archive media must
be treated with the appropriate level of security.
assigned SDN device to an rp5700 that does not have an SDN card. In order to create
a compatible archive you must remove the SDN devices from the current system,
then create the archive.
6-11
Config Wizard
Browse: Permits browsing the device drives for the archive file
• Click Browse to view archive files.
You can also restore an archive from the Service menu if you go to Configuration >
Archive.
Warning Patient ADT settings should only be restored if the Archive was done very recently
and contains information for patients currently being monitored. Patients admitted
after the archive will not be part of the archive and their settings will not be restored.
Restored ADT settings should be verified and checked for accuracy.
Restore Patient ADT Permits restoring names or ADT data of patients who were admitted when the archive media was
Settings? created
If the checkbox clear no patient names or ADT data are restored.
If the checkbox is checked the patient names are restored and will display on the Main Screen.
Patient ADT settings that are restored for each patient on the Network are:
• Patient Name
• Medical Record Number
• Admit State
• Paced Status
• Patient Type
Start Restoring: Initiates the Restore process once the correct archive file is entered in Archive path
When restoring from an earlier software release, you may see a message describing a
discrepancy between the archive subnet mask and the current configuration. If you
acknowledge the message, the archive continues, but some IP addresses may be blank. If
necessary you can re-enter the required IP Addresses of the devices in the Network
Configuration screen. When the Config Wizard is complete, the device will restart. You
will have to manually enter the IP addresses for each device before continuing.
When restoring from an earlier software release, a dialog box may open requesting
confirmation of the IP Address migration. Click OK if you want to migrate the configuration.
• Be sure to physically change the IP address at each connected device (including
Information Centers, Clients, Switches, etc.) so connection can occur.
• For networked bedsides (IPMs), restart the bedside or disconnect/reconnect the LAN
cable.
After restoration is complete, you must run Config Wizard until all settings are verified in
each screen. Restoration of the settings from earlier releases may not populate all the settings
that are available in Release M. Also, printer configuration is not restored. Refer to
page 6-96 for instructions about saving printer configuration before upgrading your system.
Note If the message, Restore from Archive failed. Error: Error performing inpage operation,
appears, restart the device and try the process again. If error continues, the archive media may
be corrupt. Use a different copy of the archive and retry.
6-12
Config Wizard
Restoring an Step 1. Insert the archive media into the appropriate drive/port.
Archive
Step 2. Enter the correct configuration file name in the Archive path: text box.
or
Click Browse to open a Browse window and select the file on the archive media.
If no files display when you click Browse, type the drive letter or *.* into the text box
and click Browse. Select the correct file name from the list and click OK.
Step 3. If you want to restore the patients’ ADT settings at the time of the archive, click the
Restore Patient ADT Settings check box.
assigned SDN device to an rp5700 that does not have an SDN card. In order to create a
compatible archive you must remove the SDN devices from the current system, then
create the archive.
Note Restored ADT settings for alarms can be either the last known settings for that patient or the
unit settings if the patient was not on the Information Center when it was shut down.
Step 4. Click Start Restoring to begin the archive restore process. A dialog box opens with
the archive details.
If the archive data for the device is correct, click Yes to continue. If the archive data for the
device is incorrect, click No and enter the correct file name. If the archive data was not
archived from the device, the warning, Incompatible setup: different model! Operation
aborted, appears. If you see the warning enter the correct file name and repeat the process.
If you selected Restore Patient ADT Settings, a caution describes the consequences of
restoring old ADT data. You must click Yes in the dialog to continue. If you do not want to
restore patient ADT settings, click No.
When the process is complete the message, Restore program has completed, appears.
Step 5. Remove the archive media and store it in safe place. Then click Next > in the
Restore from Archive screen.
6-13
Config Wizard
Software The Software Versions and Security Updates screen (Figure 6-4) shows read-only
Versions and information about the application software, operating system revisions, and installed security
Security updates.
Updates
Figure 6-4 Software Version and Security Updates Screen Example

On a new, factory-configured system the Security Platform Tool has been run. But if you
install new software or upgrade your system you must run the Security Platform Tool on
each upgraded system before Config Wizard permits progress to the next screen.
Important—If you try to progress to the next screen without running the Security Platform
Tool an error dialog opens. You must press OK in the dialog.
Step 1. Click the Run Security Platform tool button.

The Open dialog appears.
Step 2. Put the IIC Security Platform Tool media in the appropriate drive.
Step 3. Browse the media for Philips Security.exe, then double-click the file to run it.
6-14
Config Wizard
The Software Update Installation Wizard opens, then the Certification Dialog reviews
possible security vulnerabilities on the current IIC/DBS System.
When the Certification Dialog completes an IIC Security Platform entry appears in the
Software Version section of the Screen.
Step 4. Click Next > in the Software Versions and Security Updates screen to
continue.
6-15
Config Wizard
Purchased Purchased Options and Support Information (Figure 6-5) shows information
Options and identifying hardware, software, and purchased options. This screen also permits entry of
Support support contact information. With Release M all purchased options are enabled in the factory
Information prior to shipment. A Philips provided purchased option password may be required for
upgrades, depending on how the upgrade was ordered.
Figure 6-5 Purchased Options and Support Information Screen Example
Screen Selections and settings are slightly different depending on the Information Center device type.
Description A description of all possible settings on the Purchased Options and Support
Information screen follows.
Device Name and Monitoring LAN IP Address fields require entries. Settings that have
an asterisk (*) are optional information and do not require an entry.
Server Host Name Shows read-only Database Server host name (or its own name if the device is a server)
This Device
Shows read-only device description
• M3150 Information Center Local Database
• M3155 Information Center Network Database
• M3151 Information Center Client
• M3154 Large Database Server
• M3169 Small Database Server
• M3170 Patient Link
• M3177 Trend Display
• M3140 Information Center
Host Name Shows read-only Host Name of the device (assigned at installation)
6-16
Config Wizard
Device Name Shows clinical name for the device (12 character limit)
Generally, Device Name is the same as Host Name.
If the Restore From Archive data has a Device Name exceeding 12 characters, an
error message appears. You must fix the Device Name to continue.
Monitoring LAN IP Address Shows the IP Address for the LAN connection set for the device when it was installed or a
selection drop-down list of IP Addresses. You must select an IP Address to continue. For
a server that has more than one LAN card installed (e.g. for Web Access), select the IP
Address for the LAN connection rather than the Hospital LAN connection.
Each device must have a unique IP Address.
• Click the down-arrow to show the list of available IP addresses and click the desired
selection.
*System Serial Number Permits entry of the Server System serial number, which is on the label on top of the
Server
*Device Serial Number Permits entry of the Server Product serial number, which is on the label on the top of the
Server
Software Release Shows read-only identifier of the installed software revision
*Contact Permits entry of Service contact information for users
(e.g. name and contact numbers of assigned support person or contractor, service contract
number, etc.)
• Enter contact information in the text box (255 character limit).
Purchased Options
Note Changes in Purchased Options can only be made by an authorized Philips Representative.
# of Displays Shows the number of displays or permits selection of 1 or 2 system displays

If configuring a Dual Display system, both displays must be physically connected during
Operating System installation in order to select 2 in this field.
If a display is disconnected or fails on a system configured for dual display, the resting
display comes up in an unusable state. If this happens and a second display replacement is
not available, you must change the number of displays to 1 for the system to work
properly.
Possible selections for devices:
• Networked Information Center: 1 (default) or 2 (Option C01)
• Trend Display: 1 (default) or 2 (Option C01)
• Database Server: 1 (read-only)
• Local Database Information Center: 1 (default) or 2 (Option C01)
• Information Center Client: 1 (default) or 2 (Option C01)
• Patient Link: disabled
You must have two displays to support 24 or 32 patients.
This selection interacts with the Trend Display purchased option (TRD) and the Dual
Display Options selection on the BedConfig screen (Figure 6-17).
Visible Display Width Shows the size of the display
This setting is initialized to 306 mm (17 in). The minimum is 270 mm (15 in); the
maximum is 1188 mm (27 in).
6-17
Config Wizard
# of ICs Sets number of Information Centers that can be connected to the device
• Networked Information Center: not applicable
• M3154 Database Server: 2 (Option A02), 4 (Option A04), 6 (Option A06), or 8
(Option A08)
• M3169 Database Server: 1 (Option A01), 2 (Option A02), or 3 (Option A03)
• M3150 Local Database Information Center: not applicable
• Information Center Client: not applicable
• Patient Link: not applicable
This setting is configurable on the Server only. It is not initialized and must be selected to
continue. The default setting is 1.
# of Patients Shows number of patients whose data can be stored by the device
• M3154 Database Server: Number is not displayed; it is determined by # of ICs
selected.
• M3140: 16 (Option A16)
• Networked Information Center: 4 (Option A04), 6 (Option A06), 8 (Option A08), 12
(Option A12), or 16 (Option A16)
• Information Center Client: 4 (Option A04), 6 (Option A06), 8 (Option A08), 12
(Option A12), or 16 (Option A16)
• M3150 Local Database Information Center: 4 (Option A04), 6 (Option A06), 8
(Option A08), 12 (Option A12), 16 (Option A16), 24 (Option A24), or 32 (Option
A32)
• M3170 Patient Link: 4 (Option A04), 6 (Option A06), 8 (Option A08), 12 (Option
A12), or 16 (Option A16), 24 (Option A24), 32 (Option A32), or 64 (Option A64)
Wave Storage Sets hours of patient waves stored by the Server
This setting is configurable on the Server and standalone devices only. It is read-only on
Information Centers and Clients.
• Database Server: 24 hours, 48 hours, 72 hours, or 96 hours
• Local Database Information Center: 24 hours, 48 hours, 72 hours, or 96 hours
• M3140: hard coded 24
Alarm Storage Sets number of 30 second alarm events stored by the Server
• Database Server: 150
• Local Database Information Center: 50 or 150 (Option C03)
• M3140: hard coded 50
EASI Wave Storage (E01) Enables/disables EASI Wave storage (Disable is the default.)
• Database Server: Enable or Disable
• Local Database Information Center: Enable or Disable
• M3140: Disable
Web Serving (C70, C74) Enables/disables access to patient data through the hospital web (Disable is the default.)
This option is only visible on an M3150 or M3169 Database Server that has the second
Network Interface Card
(Option C70 on M3169; C74 on M3150)
6-18
Config Wizard
Web Serving/Patient Data Enables/disables ability to transfer patients across monitoring domains
Transfer (C71) (Disable is the default.)
This option is only available on an M3154 Large Database Server that has the second
Network Interface Card and installed Web software.
Alert Data Integration (C67) Enables/disables ability to interface with the external paging system
(Disable is the default.)
This option is only visible on an M3150, M3145, or M3155 that has the second Network
Interface Card.
When upgrading from an earlier release, the Alert Data Integration Client must be
restarted to refresh connection status.
Master Server Permits entry of Master Server name
This setting is always enabled and used to support Device Pooling.
If the Patient Data Transfer/Web options are enabled on the Database Server, the Master
Server name must be provided.
The Master Server must be installed and configured first. If a non-master server is in
Config Wizard and the Master Server is down, Config Wizard cannot enable the
Patient Data Transfer/Web option and enter the Master server name. In this case you can
enter the host name of the non-master server and continue Config Wizard.
When the Master Server comes back online, (both Servers remain in monitoring mode):
1. On the non-master server, open the Service screen.
2. Go to Configuration > Add/Remove Database Server.
3. Select the host name of the non-master server (that was previously entered as the
master) and click Remove. (The Patient Data Transfer/Web option is still enabled.)
4. On the Master Server, open the Service screen.
5. Go to Configuration > Server Config.
6. Enter the non-master host name that was removed and click Add.
7. Follow the screen prompts and verify that language and software compatibility are
correct.
If any Database Server is in Configuration Mode, off-line, or has failed, it can take up to
30 seconds per Database Server for the session to time out and for the configuration
process to continue.
12-Lead Analysis/Export Enables/disables diagnostic 12-lead export capability
(C17) The default is Disable.
• Networked Information Center: Enable or Disable
• Database Server: not applicable
• Information Center Client: Enable or Disable
HL7 Export (C14) Enables/disables HL7 export capability
The default is Disable.
• Patient Link: Enable or Disable
If you disable the HL7 Export option you must also remove the HL7 Export Interface
from the List of Network Devices on the Network Configuration page.
6-19
Config Wizard
Holter Export (C23) Enables/disables data export of ECG waveforms to a Zymed Holter Scanner for Windows.
It is available on an M3150 with a second NIC, M3145, or M3155.
Research Data Export (C76) Enables/disables export of waveform, parameter, and alarm data from the Information
Center to one or more hospital-supplied research PCs
It is enabled on an M3150, M3145, and M3155 on systems where DBS has a second NIC.
Up to ten RDE Viewer clients can be configured.
Trend Display (TRD) Enables/disables Trend Display capability
It is active on M3150, M3145, M3151 and M3155 and requires dual display. It is disabled,
but checked for an M3177.
This selection is described in further detail in Table 6-2.
MP40/MP50 Bedside Enables/disables Low Acuity bed support for MP40/50
Compatibility (MPX) The default is Enable.
It is active on M3140.
Device Location (WLD) Allows you to remotely locate IntelliVue Telemetry devices (TRx and TRx+)
6-20
Config Wizard
Table 6-2 Interaction of Number of Displays, Trend Review Station, and BedConfig Dual Display
Number Trend
BedConfig Dual
Model Type of Display Behavior
Display Option
Displays Option
M3150, M3155, M3151, 1 • Single Resting Trend Display is not an option.
M3145 Information Centers with a single
display can only be configured to
have Single Resting display.
M3150, M3155, M3151, 2s Available, • Single Resting Dual Resting display if selected, or
M3145 but not (default) you can have a dedicated Patient
checked • Dual Resting Window in second display
M3150, M3155, M3151, 2 Enabled • Single Trend Display When Trend Display option is
M3145 (default) enabled the Dual Resting display is
disabled
M3177 1 • Single Trend Display Single Resting Display
M3177 2 • Single Trend Display Depends on the selection
(default) • Single Trend Display, or
• Dual Trend Display • Dual Trend Display
(Selection is enabled for 12
or 16 patients).
6-21
Config Wizard
Database Database Server General Configuration (Figure 6-6) permits setting several Domain-
Server Wide clinical configuration settings that apply to Database Servers and M3150 Information
General Centers (local databases).
Configuration
Figure 6-6 Database Server General Configuration Screen
Screen Description of the Database Server General Configuration screen settings follow.
Description
Multi-lead ECG Layout
Permits selection of ECG format
• International
• Cabrera
Layout Permits selection for display layout of the 12-lead waveforms
• 3 X 4 - 3 rows by 4 columns
• 6 X 6 - 6 rows by 2 columns
• 12 X 1 - 12 rows by 1 column
Speed Permits selection of chart speed used in presenting the waveforms
• 25 mm/sec
• 50 mm/sec
Web
Patient Name in Overview • check - The patient name for all overviewed beds displays in the alarm reflector,
overview bed list, overview window, and alarm overview window.
• clear - Patient name does not display.
This setting is for IntelliVue patient monitors monitored by the Information Centers
connected to this Database Server/M3150 Information Center.
This setting does not apply to SDN beds.
6-22
Config Wizard
Web
Allow patient navigation Enabled only if the Patient Data/Transfer parameter is enabled in the Purchased Options
for Web screen.
This option must be disabled if you are using automated web access.
Web Overview Port Identifies port of the TCP/IP socket connection for web access
Default is 9000.
Wave Strip Export
Number of Waves in Strip Defines the number of waves in the strip to be exported
• None
• 1
• 2
• 3
• 4
Warning The height, weight, and gas units of measure configured on the Information Center must
match the units of measure at the bedside. Inaccuracies may result in incorrect
hemodynamic calculations in patient documentation.
Hemodynamic Pressures • mmHg (millimeters mercury)

Gas Pressures • kPa (kilo Pascals)
Weight Units • Lbs (pounds)

• Kg (kilograms)
Height Units • inches
• cm (centimeters)
Temp • C
• F
SDN and CMS beds only support Centigrade temperature, so in mixed systems of
IntelliVue and SDN beds you must select C.
Institution Name Permits entry of Institution Name
(227 character max).
Institution Name appears in the footer of some printed reports, and is also sent as Facility
ID in the outbound HL7 data if the receiving client is adequately configured.
12-Lead Export
Language Read-Only display of the language used in the display text
Language is selected during Windows Operating System installation. To change the
language, the Operating System must be re-installed and the desired language must be
selected during the re-installation.
Institution id This setting is required for systems with 12-Lead ECG Management export configured.
(Only required for 12-Lead This is a 32 character alpha-numeric string that represents the Institution ID.
export) If the 12-Lead ECG Management option is not configured, you must use the default value
of 000.
TraceMaster supports Institution ID: 001-998.
Reasons for 12-Lead Order Shows a configurable list of default Reasons for 12-Lead Order
Load Defaults Permits selection of a default list of Reasons for 12-Lead Order
Click Load Defaults to use the default list.
6-23
Config Wizard
Load Custom To customize the Reasons for 12-Lead Order list on the screen:
1. Click a category or item in the list box.
2. Right-click and select the appropriate action (Add Category, Add Reason, Delete,
Rename).
3. Make the necessary edits.
To change the configuration by editing the source xml page:
1. Open Windows Explorer.
2. Browse to Stardate\bin\ECGTestReasons.xml. Then copy the file to removable
media, which you can open and edit at another PC.
3. Remove the media and insert it into another PC. Open the file and update the file as
desired. Be sure the content follows the proper syntax; if formatting is not correct, the
list will not load successfully.
4. When editing is complete, save the file to removable media. Insert the media into the
appropriate Database Server drive, and rerun Config Wizard to the Database
Server General Configuration screen.
5. Click Load Custom and open the file.
12-Lead Analysis
12-Lead Brady Setting This setting defines where the 12-lead algorithm identifies sinus Brady. 50 is the default.
Algorithm Select desired algorithm for 12-lead analysis:
• PH090A - original Pyramid algorithm to be used with IIC systems running Release M
or below.
• PH100B - new Sedici algorithm available for use with IIC systems running Release
N.
Note—You must select the desired algorithm at the time of initial installation. After initial
installation, the options become disabled (grayed out). To change the algorithm after initial
installation, you must do so by running Config Wizard from the desktop.
If you select the PH100B algorithm you must ensure all DB Servers have this option
selected. If DB Server algorithms do not match, loss of 12-leads on a patient data transfer
occurs; causing the 12-lead transfer to fail. The following note displays in the System
Status.
In addition to the failed status note shown above, if the DB Server algorithms do not match,
the IIC system targeted to receive the patient transfer displays the following message during
patient re-admit.
6-24
Config Wizard
Warning If you change Hemodynamic Pressures and/or Gas Pressures, the entire patient
database for the Server -- Alarms, Waves, Trends, and Parameters -- are erased.
6-25
Config Wizard
Local General The Local General Configuration Settings screen (Figure 6-7) is applicable to M3140,
Configuration M3145, M3150, M3151, and M3155 Information Centers and clients. The settings are only
applicable to the particular device. HL7 Export Configuration settings are applicable only
to Information Centers.
Figure 6-7 Local General Configuration Screen Example
Patient Type Permits selection of the monitored patient type default setting
• Adult
• Pediatric
• Neonate (not supported for telemetry patients)
Patient Type can be changed for specific patients in the Admit screen.
All Arrhythmia Alarms Permits enabling/disabling arrhythmia alarms from telemetry monitors in the Arrhythmia
Off (Tele Only) Alarms Setup menu
• Enabled - telemetry arrhythmia alarms can be turned off at the bed
• Disabled - telemetry arrhythmia alarms cannot be turned off at the bed
No Data From Bed Permits enabling/disabling of INOP alert tone when there is a NoDataFromBed INOP
INOP - alerting • No Sound - disables alert tone
• Sound - enables alert tone
Arrhythmia Capability Permits selection of arrhythmia monitoring mode
(For SDN Bedsides and (Always Basic for M3140)
ITS only) • Enhanced - 22 arrhythmia alarms
• Basic - 10 arrhythmia alarms
Note The Arrhythmia Capability selection (Enhanced or Basic) must be the same as the
equivalent setting at the Patient Monitor (if arrhythmia is on).
Screen Notes Permits enabling/disabling Main Screen display of Screen Notes made in the patient Admit
screen
• Yes - Screen Notes appear
• No - Screen Notes do not appear
6-26
Config Wizard
Alarm Sounds Permits selection of alarm sound type
• CareNet (default)
• IEC
IEC alarm sounds are only supported on IntelliVue and TeleMon Patient Monitors. V24 and
CMS monitors only support CareNet alarm sounds. If the Information Center has a mix of these
monitor types, configure the Information Center to use CareNet so that the stent alarm sounds
are consistent. Verify that all the patient monitor Alarm Sounds setting is CareNet.
Alarm Text Sets compliance format of alarm text, softkeys, and icons
• IEC
Record Button Permits selection of waveform Record/Store buttons that will appear on the Main Screen
• Record - displays button for recording waveforms
• Store - displays button for storing waveforms
• Both - displays buttons for recording and storing waveforms
Silence Bed at Central Enables/disables Patient Sector display of bedside monitor alarms silencing button
• Yes - silencing button appears in Patient Sectors (default)
• No - silencing button does not appear in Patient Sectors and alarms can only be silenced
at the bedside monitor
Standby Messages Permits creation of up to 12 Standby Messages that can be selected in the Patient Window
when monitoring is in Standby
Each message that you type into a text box has a 15 character limit.
Factory Defaults:
• Cathlab
• Hemodialysis
• Orthopedics
• Pulmonary
• X-Ray
• Other
Laboratory Data Permits selection of Lab Data entry at IIC
Web Access Portal Permits assignment of Web Address
If enabled, the Browser button is present on the All Controls window. The Browser
button opens a Web browser for viewing browser-based applications when an Application
Server is connected. This feature is not applicable for the M3140.
Data Export Settings Determines if standard or EASI leads are exported with Research Data Export
Export Standard Leads (default)
Export EASI Leads - enabled if EASI storage is enabled in the domain.
If you export data to Research Data Export you must select Export Standard Leads.
Click Sector for If checked (selected), activates the ability to generate a delayed recording when you left-click
Recording the mouse anywhere in the Patient Sector (other than over the Patient Window button).
It is recommended that you deselect this feature on touch screen systems.
6-27
Config Wizard
HL7 Export Permits selection of HL7 output type
Configuration Selection is active if HL7 Export option is enabled on Purchased Options and Support
Information.
When selected, the HL7 Configuration dialog opens with the settings:
• LAN Based Monitors Only: Data originating from LAN monitors (IntelliVue Patient
Monitors) is HL7 output.
• Send Alert Messages: Alert, INOP, and parameter data is HL7 output.
• Send Aperiodic Data: Aperiodic measurements (e.g. noninvasive blood pressure) is
included in HL7 output.
• Send Patient Name: Patient Name is included in the HL7 output. Be sure that hospital
policy permits this feature.
• Target: Database Server host name
SRR Channel Opens dialog that permits setting Short Range Radio (SRR) Channel preference
Configuration Available Channels for SRR are Channel 11 through Channel 26. Available settings are:
• Off
• Low
• Medium
• High
The following applies to Revision D.00 (or greater) telemetry transceivers using the SRR to
communicate with IntelliVue Cableless Measurements.
An internal algorhythm permits the telemetry transceiver to select the SRR channel on which it
will perform best. Philips recommends that you select four clean (-80 dBM or lower) SRR
channels, set them to High, and set the remaining channels to Off. If you leave all SRR channels
active, the discovery time between telemetry and the device it is trying to communicate with
increases. Philips does not recommend this practice. Medium or Low settings are currently not
used by the algorithm, and should not be selected.
It is recommended that you select the same channels on the IIC as those configured at the
bedside.
Warnings Do not select Date of Birth as the only required selection. You must have one other required
selection in addition to Date of Birth.
Lifetime Id Label and Encounter Id Label must be consistent across the entire enterprise.
Admit Required Fields Permits selection of required ADT information for an admitted patient
Last Name (default) - can only be clear if you check another selection
Lifetime Id
Encounter Id
Date of Birth
6-28
Config Wizard
Admit Demographic Permits selection of Label type
Labelsa Lifetime Id Label
Possible settings are MRN (default), Record Id, Lifetime Id, Patient Id, Serial Number,
SSN, Not Used.
Encounter Id Label
Possible settings are Encounter Id (default), Account Number, Charge Number, Visit
Id, Case ID, Subject Number, Not Used.
If you select the setting, Not Used, no output for the label is sent by HL7.
Use Alternative Id Permits selection of alternative patient identification
aAlthough these labels are English in service mode, the language-specific translation appears in the applica-
tion.
6-29
Config Wizard
Unit Paging The Unit Paging Settings screen (Figure 6-8) configures paging options for the selected
Settings device. It is only available on M3145, M3155, and M3150 Information Centers that have the
Alert Data Integration feature enabled.
Figure 6-8 Unit Paging Settings Screen Example
Enable Philips Paging Permits enabling/disabling of Information Center paging assignment applications --
Assignments Paging Setup, Paging View, Unit-Device Assignments, Manual Page, and Unassign
Paging checkbox on the Discharge screen.
• Click the Enable Philips Paging Assignments checkbox to enable.
The default is enabled (checked). If the checkbox is clear, you must use Emergin
Staff Assignments to configure paging devices to receive alarms.
Include Patient Name in Paging Permits enabling/disabling patient name display with the page alarm text
Red Alarm Paging Lockout • Click the adjacent checkbox to enable.
The default is disabled (no check). If the checkbox is checked, the Page column for
Red Alarms is disabled in the Information Center Record/Store/Page screen
(All Controls), which prevents users from deselecting Red Alarm pages.
Auto Alarm Paging
Enable Auto Alarm Paging Permits enabling/disabling of automatic transmission of alarm pages
Unsilenced Alarms/Inops Permits selection of the time interval for unsilenced alarm reminders
reminder time interval The range is 15 - 120 seconds; the default is 60 seconds.
Soft Inops do not send reminders. Refer to specific device documentation for information
about Soft Inops.
Image Resolution
6-30
Config Wizard
Warning If you have both Low and High Resolution devices on your system, you must set Image
Resolution to Low Resolution.
High Resolution Permits sending a high resolution alert image in a graphics-enabled device to the alert
interface.
Low Resolution Permits sending a low resolution alert image to the alert interface.
If you use both low and high resolution paging devices, you must select Low
Resolution for the Waveform Resolution setting. An example of the page image on
a high resolution device with this setting follows.
Image Event Focus

Pre Event/Post Event (seconds) The paging settings page in config wizard hosts this control. It affects the pager controls
that display waveforms. The up down control for Pre-Event time sets the number of
seconds of waveform data to display before the event time. Values extend from 1 to 5.
Post-Event time is 6-precontext time. Post-Event time is displayed in a read-only control.
Add logic in alert pager class to use these values. The initial default values are the current
hardwired values and may vary depending on upgrade path.
6-31
Config Wizard
Inops
Send All Inops Permits selection of sending all Inops to paging devices
Send Inops for the following Permits selection of INOP categories for pages
If any Inop within the category occurs, the specific Inop text is paged.
See Paging INOP Messages for possible alarm messages associated with selected
Inop categories.
Inop Delay Permits selection of time (in seconds) that an Inop condition must persist before a page is
generated
The range is 0 - 300 seconds; the default is 30 seconds.
6-32
Config Wizard
Paging INOP
Messages
If you select. . . Possible alarm messages are . . .
Battery Weak BATT LO
BATTERY LOW T
BATT1 LOW
BATT2 LOW
VENT LOW BATTERY
FIO2 BATTERY
CANNOT ANALYZE ECG
Cannot Analyze ECG CANNOT ANALYZE QT
Device Location OUT OF AREA
ALL ARRH ALARMS OFF
ALL ECG ALARMS OFF
ECG Alarms Off SOME ECG ALARMS OFF
!! ECG/AR ALARM OFF
PULSE NO ALARMING
ECG Leads Off ECG LEADS OFF
ECG LEAD OFF
LEADS OFF
PADS OFF
PADDLES OFF
POOR PADS CONTACT
ECG Leads Off (IND) ECG LEADS OFF I
ECG LEADS OFF II
ECG LEADS OFF III
ECG LEADS OFF AVR
ECG LEADS OFF AVF
ECG LEADS OFF AVL
ECG LEADS OFF V
ECG LEADS OFF MCL
C LEADS OFF
LL LEADS OFF
LA LEADS OFF
RA LEADS OFF
RL LEADS OFF
A LEADS OFF
I LEADS OFF
E LEADS OFF
S LEADS OFF
V1 LEADS OFF
V2 LEADS OFF
V3 LEADS OFF
V4 LEADS OFF
V5 LEADS OFF
V6 LEADS OFF
V7 LEADS OFF
V8 LEADS OFF
V9 LEADS OFF
V3R LEADS OFF
V4R LEADS OFF
V5R LEADS OFF
C1 LEADS OFF
C2 LEADS OFF
C3 LEADS OFF
C4 LEADS OFF
C5 LEADS OFF
C6 LEADS OFF
C7 LEADS OFF
C8 LEADS OFF
C9 LEADS OFF
C3R LEADS OFF
C4R LEADS OFF
C5R LEADS OFF
LEADS OFF EI.A (SDN bedside)
LEADS OFF EI.I
LEADS OFF EI.S
LEADS OFF EI.E
6-33
Config Wizard

ECG Leads Off (IND) INVALID LEADSET
!! C LEAD OFF
(Continued) !!! C LEAD OFF
!! RA LEAD OFF
!!! RA LEAD OFF
!! LA LEAD OFF
!!! LA LEAD OFF
!! LL LEAD OFF
!!! LL LEAD OFF
!! RL LEAD OFF
!!! RL LEAD OFF
!! C1 LEAD OFF (V1)
!!! C1 LEAD OFF (V1)
!! C2 LEAD OFF (V2)
!! C3 LEAD OFF (V3)
!! C4 LEAD OFF (V4)
!! C5 LEAD OFF (V5)
!! C6 LEAD OFF (V6)
!! A LEAD OFF
!!! A LEAD OFF
!! S LEAD OFF
!!! S LEAD OFF
!! I LEAD OFF
!!! I LEAD OFF
!! E LEAD OFF
!!! E LEAD OFF
ECG Leads Unplugged LEADSET UNPLUGGED
ECG Pairing NO ECG SOURCE
CHECK ECG SOURCE
CHECK PAIRING
CHECK ECG SETTINGS
CHK SPO2T SETTINGS
TELE DISCONNECT
NO CENTRAL MONIT.
CENTRAL TELE ONLY
!! TELE DISCONNECT
!!! TELE DISCONNECT
NO ECG AT CENTRAL
TAAP DISABLED
TELE INCOMPATIBLE
SRR INTERFERENCE
SRR INVALID CHAN
SRR MALFUNCTION
cl NBP Disconnect
cl NBP Batt Low
cl NBP Batt Empty
cl NBP Serv Batt
cl NBP Check Batt
cl NBP Batt Incomp
cl NBP Batt Malf
cl NBP Batt Temp
cl NBP No Cradle
cl NBP Remove
cl SpO2 Disconnect
cl SpO2 Batt Low
cl SpO2 Batt Empty
cl SpO2 Serv Batt
cl SpO2 Check Batt
cl SpO2 Batt Incomp
cl SpO2 Batt Malf
cl SpO2 Batt Temp
cl SpO2 Remove
6-34
Config Wizard

Equipment Disconnect VENTILATOR DISCONNECT
ABP XDUCR DISCONN
CO2 DISCONNECT
UVP DISCONNECT
UAP DISCONNECT
BIS SENSOR DISCONN
ICP XDUCR DISCONN
BIS ENGINE DISCONNECT
BIS DSC DISCONN
SpO2 XDUCR DISCONN
P1 XDUCR DISCONN
ART XDUCR DISCONN
AORT XDUCR DISCONN
PAP XDUCR DISCONN
CVP XDUCR DISCONN
RAP XDUCR DISCONN
LAP XDUCR DISCONN
UAP XDUCR DISCONN
UVP XDUCR DISCONN
P1 DISCONNECT
P2 DISCONNECT
P3 DISCONNECT
P4 DISCONNECT
CVP DISCONNECT
RAP DISCONNECT
LAP DISCONNECT
PAP DISCONNECT
ICP DISCONNECT
IUP DISCONNECT
NBP DISCONNECT
ART DISCONNECT
AOP DISCONNECT
P5 DISCONNECT
ABP DISCONNECT
BAP DISCONNECT
FAP DISCONNECT
6-35
Config Wizard

Equipment Malfunction VENTILATOR FAILURE
FIO2 EQUIP MAL
PLETH EQUIP MAL
CO EQUIP MAL
CO2 SIDESTRM MALF
P1 MALF
SVR MALF
SPO2 EQUIP MALF
SPO2 SENSOR MALF
NBP EQUIP MALF
TEMP1 MALF
TRECT MALF
TCORE MALF
TESOPH MALF
TNASO MALF
TART MALF
P1 XDUCR MALF
ABP MALF
ART MALF
ART XDUCR MALF
AORT MALF
AORT XDUCR MALF
PAP MALF
PAP XDUCR MALF
CVP MALF
CVP XDUCR MALF
RAP MALF
RAP XDUCR MALF
LAP MALF
LAP XDUCR MALF
TSKIN MALF
UAP MALF
UAP XDUCR MALF
UVP MALF
UVP XDUCR MALF
CO2 OCCLUSION
6-36
Config Wizard

Equipment Malfunction CO2 EQUIP MALF
SVO2 EQUIP MALF
(Continued) TC EQUIP MALF
VUELNK X EQU MALF
ICP XDUCR MALF
BIS EQUIP MALF
BIS ENGINE MALF
BIS DSC MALF
BIS SENSOR MALF
ICP MALF
ABP XDUCR MALF
ECG EQUIP MAL I
ECG EQUIP MAL II
ECG EQUIP MAL III
ECG EQUIP MAL AVR
ECG EQUIP MAL AVF
ECG EQUIP MAL AVL
ECG EQUIP MAL V
ECG EQUIP MAL MCL
EQUIP MALFUNCTION
SPK MALF
CHG MALF
VENT COMMUNIC FAIL
VENT COMMUNIC LOST
VENT EQUIP MALF
CO2 CHK EXHAUST
CO2 SVC REQ
DEFIB MAL
ECG CABLE MAL
PADS CABLE MAL
PADDLES CABLE MAL
PADS ECG MAL
NBP CALIB REQ
NBP SVC REQ
CHECK DEVICE
CPR SENSOR MALF
INCOMPAT RADIO BD
MMS EXT MALF
!! CO2 OCCLUSION
!!! CO2 OCCLUSION
IntelliBridge DEVICE CHECK SETUP
DEVICE CHECK CONF.
X EQUIP MALF
NO DEVICE DATA
!! NO DEVICE DATA
!!! NO DEVICE DATA
X UNPLUGGED
DEVICE UNSUPPORTED
HeartStart MRx DEFIB SHUTDOWN
PACING STOP
PACE ON BATT
PADS ECG MAL
PADDLES CABLE MAL
PADS CABLE MAL
DEFIB MAL
CHECK SETTINGS
!!PACER OUTPUT LOW
More Bed Alarms !!!MORE BED ALARMS
!!MORE BED ALARMS
MORE BED ALARMS
NBP NBP CUFF OVER PRESSURE
NBP CUFF NOT DEFLATED
NBP MEAS FAILED
No Data From Bed NO DATA FROM BED
6-37
Config Wizard

No Signal NO SIGNAL
TRANSMITTER MALF
NO RECEIVER
RECEIVER MALF
Pressure Non-Pulsatile P1 NON PULSATILE
ABP NON PULSATILE
ART NON PULSATILE
AORT NON PULSATILE
PAP NON PULSATILE
CVP NON PULSATILE
RAP NON PULSATILE
LAP NON PULSATILE
UAP NON PULSATILE
UVP NON PULSATILE
ICP NON PULSATILE
P NON PULSATILE
BAP NON PULSATILE
FAP NON PULSATILE
P2 NON PULSATILE
P3 NON PULSATILE
P4 NON PULSATILE
Protocol Watch !!PW:ACTION REQD
PW:ACTION REQUIRED
Replace Battery !!!INSERT BATTERY
REPLACE BATTERY
BATT MALF
BATT EMPTY
BATT1 MALF
BATT1 EMPTY
BATT2 MALF
BATT2 EMPTY
REPLACE BATTERY T
BATT1 MISSING
BATT2 MISSING
SpO2 SPO2 LOW PERF
SPO2 NON PULSATILE
NO PULSE SOURCE
PLETH NON PULSATILE
SPO2 POOR SIGNAL
SPO2 MSMT INTERF
SPOT SIG NOISY
SPO2 SENSOR OFF
Standby MONITOR STANDBY
TELE STANDBY
Transmitter Off TRANSMITTER OFF
6-38
Config Wizard
Network The Network Configuration screen (Figure 6-9) helps the Server identify devices on the
Configuration LAN.
Figure 6-9 Network Configuration Screen Example
Screen Layout The Network Configuration screen is divided into sections.
• Clinical Units - Permits adding and editing Clinical Unit Name and Monitoring mode
or removing a Clinical Unit from the list
For a description of the buttons in this section see Table 6-3.
• SCCs - Lists the Serial Communications Controllers) connected to Information Centers
on the Network if SDN bedsides are connected
If there are only IntelliVue Patient Monitors or M3/M4 monitors on the Network or if
there is no SDN card installed, this screen section is not applicable.
For a description of the buttons in this section see Table 6-4.
• List of networked centrals and hallways - Lists the names of the Information Centers
and Clients (with an identifying icon) on the Network of the Server.
For a a more detailed description of this section see page 6-42.
• List of networked devices - lists the network devices connected to the system
This section is accessed by Network Statistics to provide status information on
network switches and access points.
For a more detailed description of this section see page 6-48.
6-39
Config Wizard
Configuring
Clinical Units
Table 6-3 Network Configuration Screen - Clinical Units Section Buttons

Button/
Description Action/Steps
Selection
New Adds a Clinical Unit to the list 1. Click New to open the Add/Edit Unit screen.
The maximum number of Clinical Units is 8.
There is no default Clinical Unit created at

installation.
2. Enter the Clinical Unit name in the Type new name

or label text box (12 character limit).
3. Select the monitoring mode in the Monitoring section.
Fixed monitoring is for systems where dynamic
movement of equipment is not expected (e.g. Patient
Link). Flex monitoring allows you to make appropriate
equipment changes in a unit that has Telemetry
equipment, IPMs, or M3/M4 bedsides.
An M3170 Patient Link device must be configured for
Fixed monitoring
4. Add a Department Id (only required for systems with
12-Lead ECG Management configured). The
Department Id must match the ID configured in the
ECG Management system (32 character limit). The
default Department Id is 00.
5. Click OK.
Note Large network systems do not automatically check for duplicate clinical unit names or duplicate
bed labels. If you are configuring a large network, be sure not to enter any duplicate names.
When transferring patient data across database servers the clinical units are not listed under their
database server. If duplicate bed labels exist, you will not know which database server the bed is
associated with.
Edit Changes the name of a Clinical Units in the 1. Click the Clinical Unit name that you want to change.
list 2. Click Edit to open the Add/Edit Unit window.
3. Edit/change the Clinical Unit name in the Type new
name or label text box (12 character limit).
4. Change the Monitoring mode for the unit in the
monitoring field if needed.
If IPM beds are already assigned and the monitoring mode is
changed, all Monitors and beds assigned to that unit must be
deleted before the monitoring mode can be changed.
5. Click OK.
6-40
Config Wizard
Table 6-3 Network Configuration Screen - Clinical Units Section Buttons

Button/
Selection
Remove Removes a name from the Clinical Units 1. Click the Clinical Unit you want to delete.
list 2. Click Remove.
At least one Clinical Unit must be If beds are mapped to the unit, those associations must be
entered in the field. A new name must be removed so you can remove the Clinical Unit.
added before an unwanted name can be
removed.
Configuring If the Information Center will be monitoring SDN beds, the SCCs section lists the Serial
SCCs Communications Controllers the Information Center is connected to. If there are only IPMs
on the network, this section is not applicable.
Table 6-4 Network Configuration Screen - SCCs Section Buttons

Button/
Selection
New Adds an SCC to the list 1. Click New to open the Add/Edit SCC screen.
The maximum number of SCCs is 8. 2. Enter the SCC name in the Type new name text box
There is no default SCC created at (12 character limit).
installation. 3. Click OK.
For standalone system, once one SCC is
created the New button is disabled.
If no SCCs are added, no SDN beds can be
configured in the system.
Edit Changes the name of an SCC in the list 1. Click the SCC name to change.
2. Click Edit to open the Add/Edit SCC screen.
3. Edit/change the SCC name in the Type new name or
label text box (12 character limit).
4. Click OK.
Remove Removes a name from the SCC list 1. Click the SCC you want to delete.
At least one SCC must be entered in the 2. Click Remove.
field. A new name must be added before an If an Information Center is mapped to the unit, the
unwanted name can be removed. association must be removed so you can remove the SCC.
6-41
Config Wizard
Configuring the The List of networked centrals and hallways section of the Network Configuration
List of screen displays a table that lists the Information Centers and Clients (with identifying icons)
Networked on the Network of this Server. Description of the columns in the List of network centrals
Centrals and and hallways section follows.
Hallways
Device Name Lists the names of the Information Centers and Clients (with an identifying
icon) on the Network of this Server
New device names are added to this list when you add them to the network by
means of the Add to network domain screen (Table 6-6).
On the M3170 Patient Link, only the Patient Link device can be configured.
Model # Model Number of the device -- M3155 Information Center, M3151

Information Center Client, or M3177 Trend Display
Host Name Name given to the device when it was installed

Generally, Host Name is the same as Device Name. The Host Name for
each device must be unique so that the Server can properly identify it.
IP Address IP Address that identifies the device on the Network

It is read from the device when it connects to the Server for the first time. If no
IP Address appears, the device has not connected to the Server.
Unit Clinical Unit in the Clinical Units list served by the device
Location Optional field for identifying the location of the device
SCC (SDN system) Name of the SCC that Information Center is connected to
If no SDN card is installed do not add an SCC label or the Information Center
will reboot.
CS# (SDN system) Central Station number that Information Center uses to
connect to the SCC
Monitoring Monitoring mode of the Clinical Unit, either Fixed or Flex
6-42
Config Wizard
Table 6-5 describes the List of networked centrals and hallways buttons.
Table 6-5 List of Networked Centrals and Hallways Buttons

Setting/Selection Description/Action
New Permits adding a new Information Center or Client on the Network to the Server
• Click New to open the Add to network domain screen (Table 6-6).
Note If the number of Information Centers selected on the Purchased Options and Support
Information screen are installed, you cannot add a new Information Center.
Edit Changes the information for a device in the List of networked centrals and hallways
Edit is allowed on standalone systems.
1. Click the device name you want to change.
2. Click Edit to open the Add to network domain screen (Table 6-6).
3. Edit/change the device information.
4. Change the Monitoring mode for the device in the monitoring field if needed.
If IntelliVue Patient Monitors beds are already assigned and the monitoring mode is changed, all
IntelliVue Patient Monitors and beds assigned to that unit must be deleted before the monitoring mode
can be changed.
5. Click OK.
Remove Removes a device from the List of networked centrals and hallways
1. Click the device you want to delete.
2. Click Remove.
If beds are mapped to the unit, those associations must be removed so you can remove the device.
Remove All Removes all devices from the List of networked centrals and hallways
• Click Remove All.
CSCN Routed Permits selection of configuration option for a Philips Bedside monitor that is on a Customer Supplied
Bed Clinical Network (CSCN)
A Routed Bedside Monitor (RBM) will synchronize its time setting to that of its associated ICN by
listening for and receiving timecast messages sent from the ICN DBS/Standalone IIC across the
multicast-enabled network. Therefore, each ICN DBS/Standalone IIC requires a unique Timecast
Address setting. To ensure consistent time settings across your clinical network, make sure that you
configure each master DBS and each standalone IIC on your network to receive its time setting from
an external Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) time source.
• Click CSCN Routed Bed checkbox.
6-43
Config Wizard
Table 6-5 List of Networked Centrals and Hallways Buttons

Warning All monitor equipment labels must be unique on the network. All ICN Database
Domain (DBSD) multicast address ranges must be unique on the network. Failure to
create unique equipment labels for patient monitoring devices or assign unique
multicast address ranges to ICN DBSDs may cause invalid network communications
resulting in the delay, corruption, or loss of critical patient data or alarms without
warning, which can delay diagnosis or treatment and result in patient death.
CSCN Routed Permits configuration of CSCN RBM

Bed Refer to the Customer Supplied Clinical Network Specification for Topology information and
Configuration supported Philips devices.
1. Click the CSCN Routed Bed Configuration button. The CSCN Routed Bed
Configuration dialog box opens.
2. Configure the Timecast Address.

The default Timecast Address is 224.0.23.61. You must configure a unique Timecast
Address for each DBS or standalone IIC on your network. The entered Timecast Address
cannot be in the range of IP addresses specified for the Multicast Address Start and Multicast
Address End.
Caution Do not set the Timecast Address to 224.0.23.63; this address is reserved
for monitor Connection Indication (CI) messages.
3. Enter the first multicast IP address for the range of addresses associated with the ICN DBSD in
the Multicast Address Start text box. Refer to Table 6-7 for designated IP address ranges.
Multicast Address End box automatically populates.
4. In a CSCN network, there is often a DHCP or BOOTp server that is routed into the monitoring
network. If this checkbox is not selected, the Bootp Service is operational. In this situation, a
bedside monitor can receive an IP address from the CGS server or the hospital server. Selecting
this checkbox disables the Bootp Service.
5. Click OK.
After completing all Configuration Wizard pages you must manually add a route statement for the
remote RBM subnet(s) to the DBS/Standalone IIC (page 6-47)
6-44
Config Wizard
Editing or Adding New IICs or Clients on the Network to the Server

The Add to network domain screen opens when you click New or Edit buttons in the
List of networked centrals and hallways section.
Table 6-6 Add to Network Domain Screen Selections

Device Identification
Model # Permits selection of a network device model number
1. Click the down arrow next to the text box.
A drop-down list of selectable model numbers appears.
2. Click the desired Model # to select it.
Host Name Permits text entry of device Host Name
• Enter the name assigned to the device when it was installed.
Note When you enter a Host Name in this screen, it will appear as read-only in Purchased
Options and Support Information of the device being added.
Host Name and Device Name must be identical to the names in the Purchased Options
and Support Information screen for accurate Server identification.
Device Name Permits text entry of Device Name

• Enter a name for the device.
Generally, the Host Name and Device Name are the same. Device names are case sensitive.
Location Identifies hospital location for the network device being added
• Enter the hospital location text. (optional)
Associations
Specifies the Clinical Unit and SCC (for SDN systems) for the device being added
Connected to List of SCCs available for assignment to the device
SCC • Click the SCC that the device being added is connected to.
Not all Information Centers have an SCC. If no SDN beds are to be monitored by an Information
Center, this selection is disabled.
Belongs to unit Displays the list of Clinical Units for assigning to the device
• Click the Clinical Unit that the device being added is associated with.
6-45
Config Wizard
Table 6-6 Add to Network Domain Screen Selections

Central Station 1. Click the down arrow next to the text box.
A drop-down list of selectable Central Station numbers for the selected SCC appears.
2. Click the desired Central Station # to select it.
An SCC can support up to 6 Central Stations, and each must have a unique Central Station #. This
selection is only applicable when an SCC is selected.
Central Station numbers that are already been assigned are disabled.
Hard-coded to CS #1 for M3140.
Recorders
2-Channela 1. Click the check box if a 2-Channel Recorder is connected to the device.
Attached 2. Click the option button that identifies the 2-Channel Recorder type.
• USB Recorder(s)
• SDN Recorder(s)
Mixed USB and SDN recorders are not supported.
SDN recorders are not supported on the M3140.
4-Channel 1. Click the check box if a 4-Channel Recorder is connected to the device.
Attached 2. Click the option button that identifies the 4-Channel Recorder type.
• USB Recorder(s)
• Serial Recorder(s)
3. Click the check box if a 4-Channel Recorder is connected to this device.
• Click Ok in the Add to network domain screen to store/save entered information; or click Cancel to close the Add
to network domain screen with no changes.
a A maximum of two 2-channel and one 4-channel USB recorders can be connected to the same M3150,
M3145, or M3155.
Routed Bedside Monitor Multicast Address Ranges
Table 6-7 Designated ICN DBSD IP Multicast Address Range
ICN DBSD VLAN ID IP Multicast Address Range

ICN 1 101 239.255.101.0 - 239.255.101.255
ICN 2 102 239.255.102.0 - 239.255.102.255
ICN 3 103 239.255.103.0 - 239.255.103 255
ICN 4 104 239.255.104.0 - 239.255.104.255
ICN 5 105 239.255.105.0 - 239.255.105.255
ICN 6 106 239.255.106.0 - 239.255.106.255
ICN 7 107 239.255.107.0 - 239.255.107.255
ICN 8 108 239.255.108.0 - 239.255.108.255
ICN 9 109 239.255.109.0 - 239.255.109.255
ICN 10 110 239.255.110.0 - 239.255.110.255
ICN yy 1yy 239.255.1yy.0 - 239.255.1yy.255
ICN 22 122 239.255.122.0 - 239.255.122.255
6-46
Config Wizard
Configuring the Philips ICN DBS/Standalone IIC to Support RBM

Your Network Infrastructure must be accurately configured to support Multicasting; refer to
Customer Supplied Clinical Network Specification.
Once the DBS/Standalone IIC configuration as required for your installation is complete you
must manually add a route statement for the remote RBM subnet(s) to the DBS/Standalone
IIC.
Step 1. To add a manual route statement to the RBM subnet, open a command window on
the DBS/Standalone IIC. Then enter a persistent route statement at the prompt in the
format of the examples shown.
Examples:
For the DBS on ICN 9 (Table 6-7), you may enter the following manual route statements to
reach Routed Bedside Monitors residing on the 10.0.201.0, 10.0.202.0, 10.0.203.0, and
10.0.204.0 remote subnets:
route add -p 10.0.201.0 mask 255.255.255.0 172.31.64.1
route add -p 10.0.202.0 mask 255.255.255.0 172.31.64.1

route add -p 10.0.203.0 mask 255.255.255.0 172.31.64.1
route add -p 10.0.204.0 mask 255.255.255.0 172.31.64.1
Step 2. At the command prompt enter Route Print to verify that Persistent Routes section
has accurate information that you entered in the route statement.
Step 3. I f the route is not correct or you need to change this information you can delete it by
entering the following command and include the actual IP of the route you want to
delete.
Route Delete xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
Step 4. Close the command window.
Caution If you re-install the ICN DBS or Standalone IIC, you must manually re-enter the route
statements for the remote RBM subnet(s) to the DBS/Standalone IIC.
6-47
Config Wizard
Configuring the The List of network devices section permits configuration of the network devices
List of Network connected to the system. This information is accessed by Network Statistics to provide
Devices status information on applicable network devices.
Column headings in the List of network devices are:.
Device Name Lists the names given to supported devices on the Server network. There are unique
icons associated with each device type.
Device Names appear on the List of network devices section of the Network
Configuration screen (page 6-39) when the device is added to the network.
Host Name Host name of device being added

Host Name is required for Holter, Application Server, 12-Lead ECG Management,
SNTP Time Source, Hospital ADT Interface, Alert Data Integration Client, and HL7
Interface.
The SNTP Time Source must be a separate host name from the other configured
host names.
Device Type Type of device being added

12-Lead ECG Management, 802.11 Access Point, 802.11 Wireless Switch, Access
Point Controller, Alert Data Integration Client, BootP for Networked Printer, HL7
Export Interface, Holter, Hospital ADT Interface, Network Switch, Research Data
Export, Router, Smart Hopping Access Point, SNTP Time Source, M2387A
Application Server
IP Address IP Address of the device that identifies its location on the Network
IP Addresses for switches, wireless access points, and application server
must be entered so that Network Statistics can identify their
performance.
Printer MAC The Printer Media Access Control (MAC) Address is the 12 digit HEX number that
Address uniquely identifies the printer. This number must be obtained from a printout of the
printer’s configuration.
To find the MAC Address for a BootP Monitoring LAN printer:
• Verify that the printer is disconnected from the Monitoring LAN and turn on
the Printer.
• Generate a Configuration Page at the Printer.
• Record the Hardware Address from the JetDirect section of the Configuration
Pages. Hardware Address is the MAC Address.
• Reconnect the printer to the Monitoring LAN.
Port Number Identifies the port number
Unit Identifies the unit
Remote Subnet Identifies the remote subnet
Remote Mask Identifies the remote mask
Boundary Limit Identifies the access point designated as a boundary for associated ITS devices
Filter before (Applies to 12-Lead ECG Management) Shows status of feature (enabled/disabled)
Export
Primary (Applies to Alert Data Integration Client) Identifies Primary ADI client(s)
6-48
Config Wizard
Adding Network Table 6-8 describes the List of Network Devices buttons. In addition to adding the
Devices network devices to the Database Server/Information Center system, the network devices must
also be configured to communicate with the system.
Notes If no switches are entered, the Equipment Setup screen will not allow any of the
Mx/IntelliVue Patient Monitor installation options.
IntelliVue Telemetry System (ITS) network devices can be added through Config Wizard to
more than one Database Server in a large network system so that statistics can be viewed.
However, only one server can be configured to receive alerts from these components
(configured as part of the IntelliVue Telemetry System).
Adding Devices to the IIC Configuration Wizard for a Star Topology

If you are using a Star Topology with IIC Release L and later you must continue to add Core
Switches/Routers to the List of Network Devices manually, and you must manually add
each network switch. Refer to IntelliVue Clinical Network Installation Guidelines and
Topologies for more information about the supported network topologies of the IntelliVue
Information Center.
After manually adding Core Switches/Routers and physically installing the ITS devices, you
can use Scan Device to locate and identify the ITS devices on a Star Topology. But,
because the IIC does not recognize the Network Switch Management VLAN IP addresses in
the Star Topology Management VLAN, IIC System Validation will fail unless you manually
add a route statement for the Management VLAN.
Add a Manual Route Statement for the Management VLAN as Follows:

Step 1. Go to Start > Run and enter cmd in the Open text box.
A command window opens.
Step 2. Enter the following command.
Route add -p 172.31.200.0 mask 255.255.255.0 172.31.n.1 metric 3
Step 3. Enter the following command to check the accuracy of the entry.
Route Print
The Persistent Routes section will show the new route information.
Step 4. I f the route is not correct or you need to change this information you can delete it by
entering the following command and include the actual IP of the route you want to
delete.
Route Delete xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
With IIC Release L and later when you run System Validation a warning will appear in the
log stating that the IP Addresses of Star Topology devices are not in the ITS or ICN range. No
action is required when you see this warning.
6-49
Config Wizard
Table 6-8 List of Network Devices Section Buttons

Button/
Selection
New Adds a new network device to the list by • Click New to open the Network Devices screen
means of the Network Devices screen. (Table 6-10).
Edit Changes the information for a device in the 1. Select the device name you want to change in the List of
List of network devices section of the Network Devices.
Network Configuration screen 2. Click Edit to open the device type Network Devices
screen (Table 6-10).
3. Edit/change the required information, then click OK.
Remove Removes a device from the List of network 1. Click the device name you want to remove.
devices section of the Network 2. Click Remove.
Configuration screen 3. Click OK.
If you try to remove a network printer that has
configured reports to be printed, a warning
message appears. The reports must be
removed before you can remove the printer.
If you try to remove a device that is mapped to
a bed label a warning appears and removal
fails.
Scan Generates an automatic search for network 1. Click Scan Device.
Devicea devices that respond to an SNMP A dialog box opens and requests the Access Point
identification request or a specific http request Controller (APC) IP Address.
Not All devices must be turned on and properly 2. Enter the APC IP Address and click OK.
applicable for connected to the network. Once the APC is found, a Network Devices Scanned
routers screen lists all responsive network devices.
See Table 6-12 for compatible devices. 3. If you do not want to associate the devices with
You must clinical units click one or more of the desired wireless
enter all Devices can always be added manually to the Access Points (APs) and click Add Selected.
Routers configuration. All network devices in a Star
manually. Topology must be entered manually 4. If you do want to associate the device with a clinical
(page 6-49). unit select the desired device in the list and click
Associate Unit.
A Unit popup lists all currently defined clinical
units.
5. Select a unit from the Associate with Unit list and
click OK in the Assign Unit popup.
The unit association for all chosen access points displays
in the Network Devices Scanned screen.
6. If you want to set an AP as a boundary access point
select the desired device in the list and click Set
Boundary.
If selected this AP is designated as a boundary access
point; any Smart-hopping ITS devices that are associated
with this AP are considered out-of-bounds.
Note If a device does not have a unique name and IP address a message appears, and you must correct the
duplication.
6-50
Config Wizard
Table 6-8 List of Network Devices Section Buttons

Button/
Selection
Caution The Scan Device function is not applicable to Star Topology Network devices. All devices for Star
Topology must be entered manually. Refer to IntelliVue Clinical Network Installation and
Service Guide for applicable IP addresses of Star Topology network devices.
Monitor IP Permits review and edit of the acceptable 1. Click Monitor IP Address Range to open the IP
Address range of IP Addresses that can be used by Address Range for Mx screen
Range IPMs (IntelliVue Patient Monitors) 2. Verify that the IP Address range is sufficient, and
increase the range if necessary.
Acceptable range is 172.31.4.0 - 172.31.4.255
(see Appendix A).
• IP Address Range Starting Value - Enter or edit the
first IP Address in the range of IP Addresses that can be
assigned to Mx/IntelliVue patient monitors.
• IP Address Range Ending Value - Enter or edit the
last IP Address in the range of IP Addresses that can be
assigned to Mx/IntelliVue patient monitors.
• Last IP Address Used
3. Click OK to save the changes and close the screen.
a
The Scan Device function is not applicable to Star Topology equipment.
Table 6-9 includes Network Devices Requirements.
Table 6-9 Networked Devices Requirements

Device Type Systems Supported on Requirements
12-Lead ECG Management Database Servers The Database Server/Information Center must be
M3150 Information Center configured with the 12-Lead ECG Management system
host name. The ECG Management system must be
configured to receive Information Center data
(PMDExport folder must be created). User name
(Table 6-11) and Password are required for client
devices.
802.11 Access Point Database Servers Device name is required. A unique IP Address must be
M3150 Information Center defined for each 802.11 Access Point.
801.11 Wireless Switch Database Servers The Device Name and IP address are required.
M3150 Information Center
Access Point Controller Database Servers Device name is required. A unique IP Address must be
M3150 Information Center defined for each APC. All configured units are listed in
Associated with Unit, but it is an optional field. If only
one APC is configured, enter the IP address for the device.
If more than one device is configured at once, enter the IP
address for the first APC. The IP addresses of the rest of
the devices are assigned incrementally.
6-51
Config Wizard

Alert Data Integration Database Servers Device Name, IP Address/Host Name, and Port
Client M3145, M3150, M3155 Number are required. It is recommended that you use the
Information Centers IP Address for IP Address/Host Name. This reduces the
number of NetBIOS name resolution broadcasts, which
could degrade performance.
Default Port Number is 5260.
HL7 Export Interface Database Servers Up to six HL7 Interface target client devices can be
M3150 Information Center configured. Configuration is described in Equipment
Setup. HL7 client Device Name and IP Address/Host
Name are required.
If you disable the HL7 Export purchased option
(page 6-19) you must also remove the HL7 Export
Interface from the List of Network Devices
Holter Database Servers Device name and host name of Holter device is required.
M3150 Information Center Holter device must be configured to receive Information
Center data. (PMDExport folder must be created). Only
one Holter device is supported per system. Settings are not
restored from earlier releases. Username and Password
are needed for each device.
Note Only one Holter device is allowed. An additional device will not appear if there is already one Holter
device configured.
Hospital ADT Interface Database Server Hostname, Device Name, Port Number, User Name and
Password are required to add the Hospital ADT Interface
device. Only one per Database Server system is permitted.
Default Port Number is 8051.
Application Server Database Servers Application Server must be configured with the Database
M3150 Information Center Server or Information Center hostname and Clinical
Network IP Address. The Database Server or Information
Center must be configured with the Application Server
hostname (for IP Address/Host Name) and IP Address.
Network Switch Database Servers The Device Name and IP address are required. The switch
M3150 Information Center must be configured using the Network Config Tool. On
Database Server systems, a 24 Port Switch
configuration is required before you can continue to
the next configuration screen.
6-52
Config Wizard
Important If you have Bedside Monitors that are configured to send reports to a particular Printer Name, be sure that you
use that name for your newly configured printers, or change/update your bedside monitors’ destination printer
name.
BootP for Networked Database Servers Enter the MAC Address for a Monitoring LAN printer
Printer M3150 Information Center that needs to acquire an IP Address. You do not have to
create an entry if you can manually enter the IP at the
printer. IP Addresses for BootP Monitoring LAN Printers
are:
172.31.3.961
172.31.3.97
172.31.3.98
172.31.3.99
172.31.3.100
172.31.3.101
172.31.3.102
172.31.3.103
1 This IP Address range is applicable for ICN #1.
The IP Addresses increment on each Network. See

Appendix A for details.
Research Data Export Database Servers Up to ten Research Data export devices can be configured.
M3150 Information Center Device Name, User Name, Password, and Host Name\
Folder are required.
(For example, remoteMachineName\folderName, where
folderName is the actual folder name that data is being
sent to, must be shared and Read/Write enabled.)
Philips provides a Research Data Export Viewer

application. For detailed information about use the RDE
Viewer software, refer to the Research Data Export
Viewer User Guide.
Router Database Servers Remote Client: Device Name and IP address are required.
M3150 Information Center (Requires manual route statements)
Wireless Subnet Router: the Primary Router IP address
is 172.31.n.2 and the Secondary Router IP address is
172.31.n.3 (page 5-29). The Remote Subnet is
172.31.240.0 and the Remote Subnet Mask is
255.255.240.0
Smart-hopping Access Database Servers Device name is required. A unique IP Address must be
Point (1.4 or 2.4 GHz) M3150 Information Center defined for each Smart-hopping Access Point. To
configure more than one Access Point IP address, enter an
IP address for the first Access Point. The IP addresses of
the rest of the Access Points are assigned incrementally.
6-53
Config Wizard

SNTP Time Source Master Database Server SNTP Time source must be provided by the hospital, and
M3150 Information Center must not be part of the IntelliVue Clinical Network. It is
defined as a separate PC and must be an SNTP Master
Time Server that is running the W32TIME service as
defined for Windows NT/2003/XP/ME. The host name
can either be a DNS hostname, URL, or IP Address. The
time source can reside geographically in any time zone
without any requirements for “Automatically adjusting
clock for Daylight saving changes”. If the time source is
behind the hospital firewall, the hospital must open the
appropriate port (123) for the NTP protocol.
The Network Devices screen opens when you add a new network device and includes
selections that are applicable to the chosen device. All possible selections are described in
Table 6-10.
Important The Network Devices screen only supports adding or removing BootP Printers on the
Monitoring LAN.
On a DBS you must use the Windows Control Panel to add and share Printers that are
not on the Monitoring LAN (page 7-100).
Table 6-10 Network Devices Screen Selections

Button/Selection Description/Action
Device Type Permits selecting a device
• Click the arrow to see the available selections.
• Click the desired device type (Table 6-9).
Device Name Permits entering (or selecting) a Device Name
• Enter (15 character limit) or select a device name.
For APs use a name that describes the AP location, because if you are using Device Location
the AP name appears in the Patient Window, Patient Sector, Fast Alarm Review, Telemetry
Setup, and in the alarm text sent to the paging device (if Paging is enabled).
IP Address Permits entering or selecting the device IP Address
• Enter or select the IP Address of the new device.
You must enter IP Addresses for switches and access points in this screen in order to view their
performance status in Network Statistics.
If no switches are entered, then the Equipment Setup screen will not allow any of the Mx installation
options.
IP Address/ Permits entering or selecting the added device IP Address or Hostname
Hostname • Enter the IP Address of the device being added, or
• Enter a DNS hostname, URL, or IP Address for an SNTP Time Source.
Number of Ports Permits entry of number of ports for switches
• Enter the number of ports.
24 (default)
6-54
Config Wizard
Table 6-10 Network Devices Screen Selections

Button/Selection Description/Action
User Name Permits entering a valid User Name
• Enter User Name in the text box.
Password
Permits entering a valid Password
• Enter Password in the text box.
Confirm Establish authentication on the target export device
Password
Note Clients for 12-Lead ECG Management, Research Data Export, and Holter require a User Name and Password.
User Name and Password are site-defined, and must be correctly assigned at the Information Center and at the
external system PC or Server. User Name must be a fully qualified name (TargetHost\UserName, for
example, depending on the share settings at the target device).
MAC Address Permits entering the 12 digit HEX MAC Address of the device to be added
• Enter the MAC Address of the BootP printer on the Monitoring LAN that you want to add.
This selection is available if BootP for Networked Printer is selected as the Device Type.
See page 6-48 for instructions to obtain your printer MAC Address.
Number of Allows assignment of multiple devices in sequential order from the starting IP address
devices • Click the desired selection.
Applies to Access Point Controllers and Smart-Hopping Access Points only
Start with Permits selection of a starting IP Address for devices that allow incremental IP addresses to be
configured
• Enter the IP Address that you want to assign to the first device being added.
If the last octet of an assigned or incriminated IP Address exceeds 255, an error message appears and the
operation fails.
Associated with Permits association of Access Point Controllers and Smart-Hopping Access Points with a Clinical Unit
Unit • Click the desired selection.
If an access point controller or access point is associated with a clinical unit, then any alert conditions
detected for the device appears in the system message area of the Information Centers assigned to that
unit. Otherwise the alert condition displays on all Information Centers.
Boundary Limit Permits designation of a boundary Access Point
• Click the checkbox to select the device as the Boundary AP.
This selection is applicable to Smart-Hopping Access Points. If selected this AP is designated as a
boundary access point. Any ITS devices associated with it are considered out-of-bounds.
Remote Permits configuration of Remote Antenna when you are configuring Multiple Smart Hopping APs.
Antenna 1 / 1. Click the checkbox to select Remote Antenna 1 (port 1) or Remote Antenna 2 (port 2).
Remote The Remote Antenna Name displays in the text box.
Antenna 2 2. Click Boundary Limit 1 or Boundary Limit 2 checkbox to select antenna as a boundary.
Remote Antennas inherit cluster AP unit association.
Remote Antennas do not display in the List of Network Devices once configured; they appear in the
Network Devices section of the Configuration Report.
Primary Permits assignment of Primary Alert Data Integration Client when more than one ADI client is present
• Click the option button next to Primary for the Alert Data Integration Client that you want to be
the Primary.
Any other ADI client in the system is a secondary ADI client. Up to two ADI clients can be configured.
Filter Before Determines if filter is applied to 12-lead data at time of export
Export (Applies to 12-Lead ECG Management)
It is recommended that this setting is No if exporting to TraceMasterVue.
Default: No
• Click the checkbox.
• Click Ok in the Network Devices screen to store/save changes, or Cancel to close the screen with no changes.
6-55
Config Wizard
Table 6-11 User Names for Export Devices

Release Export User Name Share
M.0 Holter User Configurable PMDExport
12-Lead User Configurable PMDExport
HL7
Hospital ADT User Configurable
Wave Snippet PMDExport PMDExport
Data Export User Configurable User Configurable
ADI User Configurable
Table 6-12 Compatible Devices for Scanning

Device category Specific devices covered Automatically identified
Routers Cisco 3550 No
Managed switches supported in IntelliVue Cisco 2950 Yes
Clinical Network Cisco 2960
Cisco 3560
Cisco 3570
HP 2524
HP 2510
Additional switches/routers supported in Cisco 2955 No
customer VLAN configurations Cisco 2970
Cisco 3512
Cisco 3524
Cisco 4500
Cisco WS-C6509
Access Point Controllers (APCs) Philips Smart-hopping Yes
After you enter one device manually,
the rest can be found automatically.
Access Points (AP) Philips Smart-hopping Yes, once APC IP address is entered
Cluster AP Philips Smart-hopping Yes, once APC IP address is entered
Access Points (AP) Proxim RangeLAN2 No
Access Points (AP) Symbol Harmony No
Access Points (AP) Symbol 802.11 No
External devices 12-lead ECG Management, No
Application Server, Holter, Research
Data Export, SNTP Time Source, Alert
Data, Hospital ADT, HL7
6-56
Config Wizard
Device Device Pool Configuration (Figure 6-10) is used to define equipment pools. The list of
Pooling units provided for sharing the equipment includes all units across the entire large monitoring
Configuration network. This information is replicated to all database servers participating in the pool. The
configuration can be performed from any database server, but requires that all database
servers participating in the equipment pool are configured and in monitoring mode.
The Device Pool Configuration screen is also available in the Service Menus of the Large
and Small Database Servers.
Figure 6-10 Device Pooling Configuration Screen
Notes Device Pooling is only permitted on IntelliVue Telemetry System (ITS) devices.
If Device Pooling is to be used with multiple Database Server systems, configure the Device
Pool on the last Database Server configured (when all other Database Servers are in
monitoring mode). This enables the replication of the Clinical Unit names across all
participating Database Servers.
Description The Device Pool Configuration screen includes the following:
Device Pool Name Name of device pool

Pool/Units List of valid pool names and clinical units from the database servers in this large network
Available Units List of all valid clinical units from all database servers in the large network that are not
assigned to a pool
6-57
Config Wizard
Table 6-13 describes buttons in the Device Pool Configuration screen.
Table 6-13 Device Pool Configuration Screen Buttons

Button Description
Add Permits adding a new Pool and clinical unit assignments
A device pool name must be unique within the network and can not be duplicated with any clinical unit or other
device pool name on any server in the network.
Make sure that the name you choose does not exist on another server that is not running.
Delete Permits deletion of the selected Pool and all of its clinical unit assignments
All units assigned to a device pool must be unassigned before a device pool can be deleted.
Rename Permits renaming the selected Pool
1. Click the name of the pool you want to change.
A popup displays.
2. Enter the new device pool name in the popup.
3. Click OK.
The name change is automatically replicated.
Device Pools
Assign To assign a Unit to a Pool:
1. Select a pool name from the Pool/Units list.
2. Select a Unit (configured as Flex) from the Available Units list.
Fixed units may be listed as available but are not supported in Device Pooling.
3. Click Assign to move the Unit to the Pool.
• A Unit can participate in only one Pool. All ITS devices within the Unit will be assigned to the Pool.
• A Unit that already has ITS labels configured cannot be assigned to a pool.
• A Unit cannot be renamed once it is assigned to a pool.
Unassign To remove a Pool or Unit assignment from the list:
1. Select a Pool or Unit from the list.
• You can only unassign a unit from a pool if it's server is accessible and there is no shared ITS equipment
mapped on the server. If the server of the unit is not accessible, a message appears.
• Unassignment from a pool should occur only in the initial configuration if a mistake was made. This is a
hospital structural configuration and should not change.
• When you unassign the last unit in a pool for a server, the pool and pool/unit configuration and ITS labels
in the pool are removed on that server. A warning appears which requires confirmation.
Replicate • Assignment and unassignment are replicated automatically to all database servers in the Config Wizard
when you click Next, Back, or Exit, or manually when you click the Replicate button in the Service
Menu. Replication includes the pools list and ITS equipment labels within those pools.
• If the automatic replication fails, or if configuration changes are made, you can do the replication
manually.
• Replicate is available only in Service mode (unavailable in Config Wizard).
• Click to push device pool and associated pool labels from the server to other pooling servers.
When you access the Device Pool Configuration screen from the Service Menu of a
Database Server that is in Monitoring Mode:
• Add, Rename, Assign, and Replicate buttons are enabled.
• Delete and Unassign buttons are disabled.
• Changes made during monitoring mode must be replicated to other server(s).
Add a device pool and Assign a unit to device pool. Replicate changes manually
to take effect on other server(s).
Rename a device pool. Changes are replicated automatically across servers; there
is no need to manually Replicate.
6-58
Config Wizard
Display Setup Use the Display Setup screen (Figure 6-11) to configure the display of patient data on the
Main Screen and in the Patient Sectors.
Figure 6-11 Display Setup Screen
Description Table 6-14 describes the Display Setup screen selections.
Table 6-14 Display Setup Screen Selections

Patient Name • Click the check box next to Display Patient Name to display the Patient Name in the
Patient Sector. Uncheck the box if you do not want to show the Patient Name.
• Click the down-arrow next to the text box to show the option list for displaying the Patient
Name. Click the preferred option to select it.
Sweep Speed, mm/sec Permits selection of sweep speed for displayed waveforms
• Click the option button next to the desired waveform sweep speed - 25 mm/sec or
12.5 mm/sec.
Second Lead ECG Permits selection of a second ECG lead for display
On EASI CMS and V24 bedsides, if Second Lead ECG is enabled, the secondary wave on the
Information Center is always the second channel of ECG regardless of the secondary wave
selected at the CMS or V24 bedside.
Color Scheme Provides color options for patient data. Click the option button next to the desired option to
select it.
• Standard sets all data parameters to white on a black background.
• By Parameter permits setting data parameters to different colors.
Physiological Waves Lists physiological waves that can be displayed for each patient on the Main Screen
The number of waves can be 3 for up to 4 Patient Sectors, 2 for 5 - 12 Patient Sectors, and 1 for
16 Patient Sectors.
Physiological Lists physiological parameters that can be displayed for each patient on the Main Screen.
Parameters Each Wave and Parameter has an adjacent color box indicating its color on the Main Screen.
Scroll bars next to each list permit viewing the entire list.
6-59
Config Wizard
Table 6-14 Display Setup Screen Selections

MOVE Permits changing the priority order of the display Parameter
1. Click the parameter to be changed.
UP 2. Click UP or DOWN MOVE to change the parameter’s list position.
or
DOWN 1. Click and hold on the parameter to be changed.
2. Drag the parameter to its new location in the list.
Choose New Color Permits changing the color of Waves and Parameters
1. Click the Wave or Parameter to be changed.
2. Click the desired color for the Wave or Parameter from the options in the Choose New
Color field. Changing the color of a Wave automatically changes the color of its
Parameter.
3. View the changed color in the Preview field.
Warning If the correct primary display is not selected, the display sweep speed will not be correct
and Philips application software will not meet its specifications.
Notes The number of waves on the Main Screen can be 3 for 4-Patient Sectors, 2 for 5-Patient
through 12-Patient Sectors, and 2 for 16-Patient Sectors.
The order of the Waves or Parameters specifies their priority for display. The priority order of
Waves is fixed, but the order of Parameters can be changed.
6-60
Config Wizard
Equipment The Equipment Setup screen is used to select the patient monitors and telemetry devices
Setup that will be available to each Information Center for patient monitoring.
Note For Database Server systems Equipment Setup runs on the Database Server; for M3150
Information Centers Equipment Setup runs on the device.
The Equipment Setup screen (Figure 6-12) permits creating labels for beds, telemetry
equipment, and bedside monitors and associating each label with a specific Clinical Unit.
Once a label is assigned to a device, the device can be assigned to a bed and Information
Center that will receive the bed's monitoring data.
Figure 6-12 Equipment Setup Screen for Beds
1 When the Equipment Setup screen opens the top-most device is highlighted. On the Database Server, all the units added
to the domain in the Network Configuration screen appear; on a Standalone device there is one unit.
• Click the desired unit to select it.
2 Icons available for mapping bed labels to equipment
The icons that display depend on the Monitoring Type of the Unit selected and types of devices.
3 Equipment list section
The list is unique to the equipment type.
SCC (Figure 6-13), Monitor Labels (Figure 6-14), ITS (Figure 6-15), or Switch (Figure 6-16)
4 Buttons to configure monitors/telemetry devices in the equipment list
SCC (Table 6-19), Monitor Labels (Table 6-21), ITS (page 6-72), Selected Switch (Table 6-23)
5 Permits configuration of HL7 Settings (Table 6-24) and 802.11 Wireless Profiles (Table 6-25)
6 Permits selection of label types
The list is unique to the label selection (Table 6-15)
6-61
Config Wizard
Table 6-15 describes the Label Types of the Equipment Setup screen.
Table 6-15 Label Types

Label Type
Permits selection of monitoring device type
Each selection displays a list specific to the monitoring device.
Bed - permits adding monitoring location label.
Telemetry - permits adding Telemetry equipment label.
Monitor - permits adding Monitor equipment label.
Bed 1. Click the Bed option.

A table that permits adding and removing Bed labels appears. The headings include Bed Label
and Unit.
2. To remove a label, select it from the list and click Remove.
3. To add a label, click Add.
The Add Bed Label(s) screen opens (Table 6-16).
Telemetry 1. Click the Telemetry option
A table that permits adding and removing telemetry Equipment Labels appears. The headings
include Equipment Label, Type, Unit, and Access Code.
2. To remove an equipment label, select it from the list and click Remove.
3. To add an equipment label, click Add.
The Add Equipment Label(s) screen opens (Table 6-17).
If you want to Pair an MP5 or X2 IntelliVue Patient Monitor it must have a Telemetry Equipment
Label and monitoring must be in flex mode.
Monitor 1. Click the Monitor option.
A table that permits adding and removing Monitor labels appears. The headings include
Monitor, Access Code, and 802.11 Profile.
2. To remove an equipment label, select it from the list and click Remove.
3. To add an equipment label, click Add.
The Add Monitor Label(s) screen opens (Table 6-18).
Note For Database Server networks and Local Database Information Centers all the beds that are
added to the system display. The bed labels are unique across all units.
6-62
Config Wizard
Table 6-16 Adding Bed Labels

The Add Bed Label(s) screen permits adding a Bed Label to the list.
When assigning a bed label, be sure that the name:

• is unique so the Server can identify it,
• contains no more than 6 characters,
• uses alpha-numeric characters only (no other characters are acceptable--
spaces, hyphens, underscores, for example), and
• does not begin with a number.
Prefix • Enter a prefix (up to 4 characters) for the label.
For example, you could use the prefix SDU for Step Down Unit or CCU for Coronary
Care Unit. The illustration example uses the prefix, BED. Be consistent with your prefix
case so that labels sort properly.
It is mandatory that you add a numeric value in the Start with Index field and that the value
has no leading zeroes. As a Philips preferred practice do not exceed 100 devices for Number
of Labels.
Note Some non-alpha numeric characters are not compatible with the SDN. If you enter an invalid
character, the message appears:
An invalid character has been entered in the label prefix field. Only SDN compatible
characters are allowed. Please re-enter the label.
Start with Index • Type the first number in the list (1, for example).
You must enter a numeric value in this field, and this value cannot have leading zeros.
Software will permit an incorrect entry in this field, so be sure to enter correct data.
Number of Labels • Type the number of labels for the specified Prefix.
As a Philips preferred practice do not exceed 100 devices for the Number of Labels
of each selected Prefix. For example, if you use:
Prefix CCU
Start with Index 1
Number of Labels 100
Labels will be CCU1 through CCU100.

Associated with Unit Permits association of the equipment with the Clinical Unit where it is located
• Click the desired association in the list.
• Click Ok to store/save changes, or click Cancel to close the Add Bed Label(s) screen with no changes.
6-63
Config Wizard
Table 6-17 Adding Telemetry Equipment

The Add Equipment Label(s) screen permits adding a Telemetry Equipment Label to the list.
Equipment Type • SDN (default)

• ITS
Prefix • Type a label prefix with up to 4 characters.
For example, you could use the prefix TELE for Telemetry devices. Be consistent with
your prefix case so that labels sort properly.
It is mandatory that you add a numeric value in the Start with Index field and
that the value has no leading zeroes. As a Philips preferred practice do not exceed 100
devices for Number of Labels.
Note Some non-alpha numeric characters are not compatible with the SDN. If you enter an invalid character,
the following message appears:
An invalid character(s) has been entered in the label prefix field. Only SDN compatible
characters are allowed. Please re-enter the label.
You must enter a numeric value in this field, and this value cannot have leading zeroes. The
software will permit an incorrect entry, so be careful to enter correct data.
Note Do not exceed 16 characters for an equipment label. If the equipment label has more than 16 characters, a
warning appears:
One or more equipment labels exceed 16 characters.
Number of Labels • Type the number of labels for the selected Prefix.
As a Philips preferred practice do not exceed 100 devices for the Number of Labels of
each selected Prefix. For example, if you use:
Prefix Tele
Start with Index 1
Equipment Labels will be Tele1 through Tele100.
6-64
Config Wizard
Table 6-17 Adding Telemetry Equipment

RF Access Code For ITS devices only
Specifies which RF Access code domain the device is associated with
Range: 1 - 255; Default: 1.
Once an RF access code is configured for the unit ITS labels, all subsequent new ITS equipment
labels must have the same code. If you select a different access code, an error message displays
and the operation fails. The equipment list includes unit and access code information.
• Click the desired RF Access code in the list.
Associate unit/pool Permits associating equipment with a clinical Unit (or pooled units)
If a Clinical Unit within a DBS does not wish to share equipment with other units, its owned
equipment and Clinical Unit name should be associated so that during flexible monitoring
operations the Sector setup application will only list equipment belonging to that unit.
Units that wish to share equipment with other units (cockpit model) should use Equipment Pool
configuration.
• Click the desired association in the list.
• Click Ok to store/save changes; or click Cancel to close the Add Equipment Label(s) screen with no changes.
Table 6-18 Adding Monitor Labels

The Add Monitor Label(s) screen permits adding a Monitor Equipment Label to the list.
When assigning a monitor label to a device, be sure that the name:

• is unique so the Server can identify it,
• contains no more than 16 characters,
• uses alpha-numeric characters only (no other characters are acceptable -
spaces, hyphens, underscores, and so on)
• does not begin with a number.
Prefix • Enter a prefix for the label.
For example, you could use the prefix MON for IntelliVue Patient Monitors or XMON
for X2 Monitors. Be consistent with your prefix case so that labels sort properly.
It is mandatory that you add a numeric value in the Start with Index field and
that the value has no leading zeroes. As a Philips preferred practice do not exceed
100 devices for Number of Labels.
6-65
Config Wizard
Table 6-18 Adding Monitor Labels

You must enter a numeric value for this field, and this value cannot have leading zeroes.
The software will permit an incorrect entry, so be careful to enter data correctly.
Note The total number of characters for an equipment label can not exceed 16. If the label has more
than 16 characters, a warning appears.
Number of Labels • Type the number of labels for the selected Prefix.
As a Philips preferred practice do not exceed 100 devices for the Number of Labels
of each selected Prefix. For example, if you use:
Prefix MON
Start with Index 1
Equipment Labels will be MON1 through MON100.

Association • Click the option button next to the desired association.
– None
– RF Access Code (For ITS Devices only - Range: 1 - 255; Default: 1)
– 802.11 Profile (Permits association with 802.11 Wireless Network Profile, enabling
the Equipment Label Assignment function for 802.11 IntelliVue wireless bedsides)
If you configure this setting Equipment Label, RF Access Code, 802.11 Profile, and height/
weight units are copied into each 802.11 wireless IntelliVue bedside.
• Click Ok to store/save changes, or click Cancel to close the Add Monitor Label(s) screen with no changes.
Note A message displays if you try to Add a duplicate label:

One or more new labels are already in use. Cannot create duplicate labels.
.If you try to Remove a device that is currently configured to a Label, a message displays:
• For Bed Labels: Cannot remove the beds selected (or selected labels) because
equipment is connected to some or all of them.
• For other Labels: Cannot remove the selected labels because beds are mapped
to some or all of them.
6-66
Config Wizard
Setting Up Icons in the Equipment List section of the Equipment Setup screen identify and permit
Equipment setup of specific types of equipment.
The SCC equipment list permits mapping either a hardwired or telemetry

SDN-based bed to a bed label. Only SCCs associated with the selected unit appear.
The Monitor Label equipment list permits mapping bed labels to IntelliVue Patient
Monitors in a unit using flex Monitoring, where the bedside monitors have been
configured with a Monitor Label. To assign a monitor label to a bedside monitor refer
to the monitor Instructions for Use.
The ITS equipment list permits mapping a telemetry device to a bed label.
The Switch equipment list permits mapping bed labels to MRx/IntelliVue Patient
Monitors in a unit using fixed Monitoring where the MRx/IntelliVue is mapped to a
specific port in the switch.
• Click the desired icon to display its equipment list.
Figure 6-13 Example Equipment List for a Selected SCC

Table 6-19 describes the SCC equipment list.
Table 6-19 SCC Configuration

Heading/
Description
Button
Column Headings
LBN Logical Branch Numbers (1-24) of the SDN branches on the SCC for patient monitors
Bed Label Label assigned to the patient bed for the monitoring equipment attached to that LBN
If an entry has an equipment Label but no Bed Label, then it has been entered as unassigned for monitoring
equipment that can be assigned during monitoring with the Sector Setup application
Equipment Label assigned to the monitoring equipment attached to that LBN
Note For hardwired monitors, Bed Label and Equipment are the same. For telemetry monitors, Bed Label
and Equipment are different because telemetry monitors can be re-assigned to different beds.
6-67
Config Wizard
Table 6-19 SCC Configuration

Column Headings (Continued)
Type • Hardwired
• Telemetry
Monitored Host name of the Information Center that monitors the equipment connected to the selected SCC
by Host names display in Purchased Options and Support Information.
# of Clients Number of Information Center Clients that have selected the Monitored by Information Center for
overviewing patent data
Paired Shows equipment that device is paired with
Equipment Bedside monitor (IntelliVue only) can be paired with a telemetry device (SDN or ITS telemetry) so that both
pieces of equipment are monitoring the same patient.
Pairing is not supported in Fixed monitoring mode.
Buttons
Setup Assigns monitoring equipment on each SCC logical branch number to an Information Center for monitoring
1. Click an LBN # to select it for assignment.
2. Click the Setup button.
The Map Monitor to LBN #X screen displays (Table 6-20).
Remove Removes monitoring equipment from an LBN
1. Click a number in the LBN column to select the associated equipment for removal.
2. Click Remove.
If the equipment is mapped, a message displays, This will remove all selected beds. Are you sure?
You must confirm before the equipment is removed.
Pair Pairs a Telemetry device to an IntelliVue Patient Monitor for using Own Bed Overview (for SDN telemetry
only)
1. Verify Unit is configured for Flex mode.
IntelliVue beds must be configured without mapping a bed label - use Setup only.
IntelliVue Telemetry beds must be configured with a bed label and appropriate Telemetry Equipment label.
2. Select an IntelliVue Telemetry label and click the Pair button. Map the Telemetry bed to the appropriate
IntelliVue Patient Monitor label to create the pair.
To pair equipment that is being monitored you must first unassign the equipment from the sector at the Bed
Config screen.
UnPair Unpairs the selection (for SDN telemetry equipment only)
1. Click the desired bed in the equipment list to select it.
2. Click the Unpair button.
A confirmation message displays. If you click Remove in the popup, the equipment is unpaired first and then
removed.
6-68
Config Wizard
Table 6-20 Map Monitor to LBN #x Selections

Equipment Type Specifies the monitoring equipment type

• Click the option button next to the desired option. (Hardwired or Telemetry)
Equipment Label Permits entering an Equipment Label for Telemetry equipment
Because a telemetry monitor is not associated with a specific bed, its Equipment Label
should be different from its Bed Label. This field is disabled for Hardwired equipment.
• Select an Equipment Label from the drop-down list.
Setup equipment only Permits assigning monitoring equipment to a branch number without giving it a Bed Label
This allows a telemetry monitor with no Bed Label or Patient Sector assignment to be
available in Sector setup. When this option is selected, the Located at bed list is disabled.
• Click the checkbox to select it.
Located at bed Permits assignment of Bed Label to the monitoring equipment
• Click the desired Bed Label in the list to assign it to the monitoring equipment.
Only the labels that are associated with the selected Unit are on the list.
• Click Ok to store/save changes or click Cancel to close the Map Monitor to LBN #x screen with no changes.
6-69
Config Wizard
Figure 6-14 illustrates an example equipment list for selected IPM labels.
Figure 6-14 Example Equipment List for Monitor Labels
Table 6-21 IntelliVue Patient Monitor Labels Configuration

Column Headings
Label # Identifies the order of the IntelliVue Patient Monitors in the list
Monitor Label Shows the Label assigned to the IntelliVue Patient Monitor Label
Bed Label Shows the Bed Label of the bed that the IntelliVue Patient Monitor Label is assigned to
If an entry has a Monitor Label but no Bed Label, it can be assigned to an Information Center and a
specific sector with Sector Setup.
Monitored by Identifies the Host Name of the Information Center that displays patient data from the IntelliVue Patient
Monitor.
# of Clients Shows the number of Information Center Clients that have selected the Monitored by Information
Center for overviewing patient data
Buttons
Setup Assigns IntelliVue Patient Monitors to patient beds for monitoring
1. Click a Label # to select it for assignment.
The Information Center displaying patient data from the selected Monitor Labels icon appears in
the Monitored by column.
The Map Monitor to Monitor label # screen displays (Table 6-22).
Remove Removes IntelliVue Patient Monitors from patient beds
1. Click a label in the Label # column to select the associated equipment for removal.
2. Click Remove.
Monitoring equipment for the selected Label # is removed from the list.
If the equipment is mapped, a message displays, This will remove all selected beds. Are you sure?
You must confirm before the equipment is removed.
6-70
Config Wizard
Table 6-22 Map Monitor to Monitor Label #x Selections

Equipment Type Disabled for IntelliVue Patient monitors

Equipment Label Permits selecting a Monitor Label to assign to a Bed Label
Because a telemetry monitor is not associated with a specific bed, its Equipment Label
should be different from its Bed Label. This field is disabled for Hardwired equipment.
• Select an Equipment Label from the drop-down list.
Setup equipment only Permits assigning IntelliVue Patient monitoring equipment without giving it a Bed Label
This allows an IntelliVue Patient monitor with no Bed Label or Patient Sector assignment to
be available in Sector Setup. When this option is selected, the Located at bed field is
disabled.
• Click the checkbox to select it.
• Click Ok to store/save changes or click Cancel to close the Map Monitor to Monitor Label #x screen with no
changes.
6-71
Config Wizard
Figure 6-16 illustrates an example Equipment List for ITS equipment. It permits assignment
of Telemetry Labels to ITS monitoring equipment and X2/MP5 patient monitors to be
paired with other patient monitors.
Figure 6-15 Example Equipment List for ITS equipment
Column Headings
Label # Identifies the order of the ITS equipment in the list
Bed Label Shows the Bed Label of the bed for the monitoring equipment attached to that the Label #
Entries have a Monitor Label but no Bed Label when the Setup equipment only option is
checked during setup. This allows a telemetry monitor with no Bed Label or Patient Sector
assignment to be available in Sector Setup.
Telemetry Label Shows Telemetry Label assigned to the monitoring equipment attached to that Label #
The Telemetry Label must match that of the respective ITS transceiver through the
ITS Configuration Tool.
Monitored by Identifies the Host Name of the Information Center that displays patient data from the equipment
connected to the ITS device
Paired Permits pairing a bedside monitor (IntelliVue only) with a telemetry device (SDN or ITS telemetry) so
Equipment that both pieces of equipment are monitoring the same patient
Pairing is not supported in Fixed monitoring mode.
Buttons
Setup Assigns equipment on each Label # to a Telemetry Label
1. Click a Label # to select it for assignment.
The Map Monitor to Telemetry Label # screen opens (Table 6-20).
Remove Removes monitoring equipment from an ITS Label #
1. Click a label in the Label # column to select the associated equipment for removal.
2. Click Remove.
6-72
Config Wizard
Pair Permits coupling of IntelliVue Telemetry beds to IntelliVue Patient Monitors for using Own Bed
Overview
1. Verify Unit is configured for Flex mode.
IntelliVue beds must be configured without mapping a bed label - use Setup only.
IntelliVue Telemetry beds must be configured with a bed label and appropriate Telemetry
Equipment label.
2. Select an IntelliVue Telemetry Label and click Pair.
The Couple Equipment dialog box opens.
3. Select an Equipment Label from the list and click Ok.
To pair equipment that is being monitored you must unassign the equipment from the sector, then return
to this screen.
UnPair Permits upairing the selection
1. Click the desired device in the equipment list to select it.
2. Click the Unpair button.
A confirmation appears. If you click Remove in the message dialog box, the equipment is unpaired and
then removed.
HL7 Settings Permits configuration of message format that is sent to an external HL7-compliant receiver
• Click HL7 Settings.
The HL7 Configuration screen opens (Table 6-24).
6-73
Config Wizard
Figure 6-16 illustrates an example equipment list when assigning IntelliVue Patient monitors
to a port of the Switch.
Figure 6-16 Example Equipment List for Assigning Monitors to Switches
Column Headings
Port Identifies the port of the selected switch
Bed Label Shows the Bed Label of the bed that the/IntelliVue Patient Monitor label is assigned to
Monitored by Identifies the Host Name of the Information Center that displays patient data from the IntelliVue Patient
monitor
Buttons
Setup Assigns monitoring equipment on each Switch Port number to an Information Center for monitoring
1. Click an Port to select it for assignment.
The Map Monitor to Port # screen displays (Table 6-23).
Remove Removes IntelliVue Patient monitors from patient beds
1. Click a label in the Port column to select the associated equipment for removal.
2. Click Remove.
Monitoring equipment for the selected Port is removed from the list.
HL7 Settings Permits configuration of message format that is sent to an external HL7-compliant receiver
• Click HL7 Settings button.
The HL7 Configuration screen opens (Table 6-24).
6-74
Config Wizard
Table 6-23 Map Monitor to Port #x Screen Selections

.

• Click Ok to store/save changes, or click Cancel to close the Map Monitor to Port #x screen with no changes.
6-75
Config Wizard
Table 6-24 HL7 Configuration Screen
HL7 Target Client Permits selection of the target client from a drop-down list
Sending Options
Periodic Parameter Type • Current - sends the last actual parameter value received from the monitor.
• Averaged - sends the average of measurement since the last data time values were sent.
Message Type Depending on the option, a numeric code is shown for parameter identification. Not all IntelliVue
Clinical Network numerics are supported with EMFC encoding.
• EMFC Coding (Default) - Extended Medical Function Codes
• MDIL Coding - Medical Device Interface Language
PDS Compatible - Permits selection of Patient Data Server compatible output
• Click the check box to select the option.
VistA Compatible - Permits selection of Vista-compatible output
When you select VistA Compatible, Middle Name and MDIL Coding are automatically
selected.
Enhanced Fields Processing ID
• Production
• Debugging
• Test
Middle Name - Permits including patient middle name in message
Encounter Number - Permits including encounter number in message
Alternative ID - Permits selecting alternative patient identification
6-76
Config Wizard

Send Time Messages Specifies whether a Network Management (NMD) message with the current date/time should be
sent periodically every 60 seconds
When the connection is established, the message is sent to the client.
Send Facility ID Specifies whether the Facility ID should be sent with the data
Post HL7 Disconnect Determines if the HL7 Disconnect message appears on the Resting Display
Message • Click the check box to show the HL7 Disconnect message on the Resting Display; clear the
check box to suppress the message.
Unsolicited
Auto Unsolicited Launches an HL7 Auto Unsolicited Setting dialog box which permits automatic sending of
HL7 unsolicited data without a request from the client
Off (Default)
You must notify appropriate Hospital IT staff before you enable this setting.
Sending Interval Permits selection of the interval that triggers the HL7 unsolicited data export for periodic
parameter
• Click the drop down arrow to show the available settings and click the desired selection.
5, 10, 30 (Default), 60
IP Port for Unsolicited Specifies the socket port number through which clients connect to the HL7 unsolicited message
interface
This is the port the client connects to that determines whether it will be treated as an unsolicited or
a query client.
1 to 65536
8000 (Default)
Solicited
IP Port for Query Specifies the socket port number through which clients connect to the HL7 polling message
interface
1 to 65536
9010 (Default)
Bed Assignment
Determines the Available Bed - Target Client host name association
Only clients whose host names are found in the list are allowed to connect to the HL7 export
interface.
Up to 6 clients of either unsolicited or query types can be associated with a bed label. If a bed is
associated with more than one client, the same bed information will be sent to each client.
Target Client Lists possible host names
If the Target Client is a CareVue server in duplex mode configuration, use the secondary server
name as the target client.
• Click a bed in the Target Client(s) list to select it.
Available Beds Lists available beds
• Click a bed label in the Available Beds list to select it.
6-77
Config Wizard

Assign 1. Select the host name from the Target Client(s) list.
Unassign 2. Select the beds from the Available Beds list.
3. Click Assign (or Unassign) button to associate (or disassociate) the client to the bed label.
Edit IDs
Opens an Edit IDs dialog box that permits configuring the SDN ID and the LBN ID
If exporting HL7 output to CareVue, you must configure Network ID (Id/SDN) and
Bed ID (Lbn) settings so that they are an exact match to those of the CareVue system.
For existing CareVue systems with CMS beds upgrading to IntelliVue Monitors, document the
existing CareVue Unit SDN Bed Map page. Enter the documented settings for each bed label.
For new CareVue systems with IntelliVue Patient Monitors, continue to assign SDN settings for
IPMs (id/SDN & Lbn) in the Unit SDN Bed map page.
1. Enter Network ID (Id/SDN) and Bed ID (Lbn) in adjacent text box.
2. Click OK to save changes or Cancel.
Bed Label Displays read-only bed label
Network ID (Id/SDN) Permits entering the target client bed Network ID value (either 1 or 2) or the target client bed ID
Bed ID (Lbn) from 0- 24. The default for each is 0.
1. Enter Network ID (Id/SDN) in adjacent text box.
2. Enter Bed ID (Lbn) in adjacent text box.
3. Click OK in the Edit IDs screen to save changes or Cancel.
• Click Apply in the HL7 Configuration screen to save changes without exiting the screen.
• Click OK in the HL7 Configuration screen to save changes and open the next screen, or Cancel.
6-78
Config Wizard
Adding Profile
Settings for
802.11 Network
Infrastructure
Table 6-25 Configuring 802.11 Wireless Network Profiles

When you select 802.11 Profiles from the Equipment Setup Screen, the Wireless Network Profiles Screen displays.
Buttons
Remove • Select Remove to delete profile settings for the 802.11 network infrastructure.
Edit • Select an item from the list, then click Edit to modify profile settings for the 802.11
network infrastructure.
Close • Select Close to return to the Equipment Setup screen.
Add • When you select Add, the 802.11 Wireless Network Profiles Setting screen
displays.
Settings
Display Name System name - desired name of infrastructure system
Default = WS2000
SSID Service Set Identifier - security setting that must be changed from default of SSID to a site
defined value
(32 character max)
IEEE Mode RF Protocol - radio modality (A = 802.11a, G = 802.11g)
802.11a is recommended.
Password WPA/AWSCI Passphrase - security setting, must be changed from the default to a
user-defined value (8 character max)
• Click Ok to store/save changes; or click Cancel to close the screen with no changes.
6-79
Config Wizard
Bed Config Bed Config (Figure 6-17) permits formatting patient sectors and assigning patient
monitors to Patient Sectors on the Information Center Main Screen.
Figure 6-17 Bed Config Screen
Screen Table 6-26 describes the Bed Config screen fields and settings.
Description
Table 6-26 Bed Config Screen Fields/Settings

Fast Alarm Display
Permits configuring Fast Alarm strip display in the Patient Window when an alarm is silenced
• Click the option button next to the desired option to select it.
Disabled Fast alarm strip will not display in the Patient Window when an alarm is silenced.
Red and Yellow Fast alarm strip will display for Red and Yellow alarms.
Red Only Fast alarm strip will display only for Red alarms.
Sector Setup Layout
Permits formatting Patient Sectors on the Main Screen.
# Sectors Sets the number of Patient Sectors displayed on the Main Screen of the device
• Click the down arrow to show the list of available settings and click the desired selection.
4, 6, 8, 12, or 16.
The selected setting cannot exceed the value in # of Patients on the Purchased Options and
Support Information screen.
1 Column Sets the number of Patient Sector columns on the Main Screen
2 Column • Click the option button next to the desired option to select it.
You can only select 1 Column for 8 patients or less.
6-80
Config Wizard

Sector Setup Layout (continued)
Waves per Sector Sets the number of monitoring waveforms that appear in Patient Sectors
• Click the down arrow to show the list of available settings and click the desired selection.
3 for 4 Patient Sectors
2 for 6 to 12 Patient Sectors
1 for 16 Patient Sectors on a single display
2 for 16 Patient Sectors with Dual Resting Display enabled
Show Alarm Limits Enables/disables display of Heart Rate Alarm Limits (set in Alarm Management and Setup) in
Patient Sectors
Display Options
Single Resting Determines if patient sectors are displayed on the primary display only
Display
Dual Resting Permits display of patient sectors on two displays
Display
Single Trend Determines if the device is used for Trend Display on a single display
Display (For M3177 with one display or IIC with dual display and TRD Option)
Dual Trend Display Permits viewing the Trend Display is on both displays (M3177 only)
Associations
Central Station Permits selecting a number for the Information Center
• Click a number in the list to select it.
(1 - 6)
SCC Identifies the SCC supplying patient monitoring data to this device (Read Only)
Monitoring Identifies monitoring mode
Fixed - Assignment of a patient monitor (bedside or telemetry) to a Bed Label is fixed and cannot be
changed by the user. (Default)
Flex - Patient monitors (bedside and telemetry) can be assigned to different Bed Labels by the user;
these re-assignments are made in Sector Setup.
Unit Identifies the name of the clinical Unit where the patient monitors for the device selected in Central
Station are located (Read Only)
Monitor/Overview Beds
Bed Label Label assigned to the patient bed where the monitoring equipment is located. An icon to the left of the
number indicates whether the monitor is a hardwired, telemetry or wireless unit.
Unit Name of the clinical Unit where the patient monitor is located.
Branch #/Port # Logical Branch Number (LBN) of the SDN branch on the SCC that the patient monitor is connected
to or the port number of a switch that IntelliVue Patient Monitors are mapped to.
Equipment / Label assigned to the monitoring equipment
Monitor Label
Notes For hardwired monitors, Bed Label and Equipment Label are the same.
For telemetry monitors, Bed Label and Equipment Label are different.
For IntelliVue Patient monitors, Bed Label and Monitor Label are different.
6-81
Config Wizard

Monitor/Overview Beds (continued
Equipment Type Specifies the monitoring equipment type
• Hardwired patient monitor fixed to a bed location
• Telemetry monitor that can be assigned to patients from different beds
• IntelliVue patient monitor
Monitored by Identifies the Information Center that is monitoring the device
Sector Number of the Patient Sector on the Main Screen where the patient monitoring data is displayed.
Warning If the number of Sectors is decreased while beds are assigned to them, a ? appears in the
Sector column for the displaced beds. A warning states that the displaced beds will not be
monitored or overviewed unless you re-assign them to valid Patient Sectors.
Paired Equipment Shows paired equipment (for SDN telemetry only)

Assign Permits assignment of Bed to Information Center Patient Sector
• Click the Assign button.
The Resting Display screen appears (Figure 6-18).
Unassign Permits removal of Bed assignment from Information Center Patient Sector
1. Click the desired Bed Label in the Monitor/Overview Beds section of the screen.
2. Click the Unassign button.
Notes Central Station and SCC are disabled for M3151 Clients and Information Centers without
SDN monitors. SCC and clinical Unit assignments are made in Network Configuration.
Show Alarm Limit checkbox is automatically cleared if you select 8 rows and 1 Column.
Show Alarm Limits checkbox is automatically cleared if you select 8 rows and more than 1
Wave per Sector because there is not sufficient display space for Heart Rate alarm limits.
Show Alarm Limits is disabled for M3/M4 patient monitors because these monitors do not
display alarm limits.
6-82
Config Wizard
Assigning beds The Resting Display screen permits assignment of beds to the Information Center Patient
to Patient Sectors. When you click the Assign button on the Bed Config screen, the Resting
Sectors Display screen opens.
Figure 6-18 Resting Display Screen
Note If the Dual Resting Display option is selected, the Resting Display screen shows the
Patient Sectors for Display 1 and Display 2.
Display 1 Patient Sectors are green.
Display 2 Patient Sectors are magenta.
Available beds Lists the Beds and clinical Units that are associated with patient monitors, but are not
assigned to a Patient Sector.
• For Information Centers that monitor M3/M4/IntelliVue bedsides, Available beds are
those associated with these monitors in Equipment Setup, but that are not presently
monitored by any Information Center.
• For Information Centers that monitor SDN bedsides, Available beds are those
associated with SDN monitors in Equipment Setup that share the same SCC as this
device, but are not being monitored by any Information Center.
• For Information Centers that monitor M3/M4/IntelliVue and SDN bedsides, Available
beds are those associated with both X2/MP5/M3/M4/IntelliVue and SDN bedsides (that
share the same SCC) in Equipment Setup, but that are not being monitored by any
Information Center.
• For Clients, Available beds are those being monitored by an Information Center but are
not assigned to a Patient Sector on this Client.
• For Patient Link: If there are 12 or less beds configured, only one default CareGroup (#1
Olive) is created, and all Available beds are assigned to this CareGroup. If there are 16
beds configured, two CareGroups (#1 Olive and #2 Teal) are created. In this configuration,
beds assigned to sectors 1 - 8 are assigned to CareGroup #1 and beds assigned to sectors
9 - 16 are assigned to CareGroup #2. The default attributes of the CareGroup(s) are auto-
alarm notification = Red Alarms and Overview prompt sound = enabled.
6-83
Config Wizard
Notes If you try to change a sector assignment when all Patient Sectors are assigned, a message
displays:
There are no unassigned sectors left. Please increase the number of sectors if
possible, or unassign a sector.
When you move the cursor over a Patient Sector with no bed assigned, the cursor displays as a
single bed icon. When you move the cursor over a Patient Sector with a bed already assigned,
the cursor displays as a 2-bed icon.
If a Bed label is replaced it will re-appear in the Available beds list.
To assign a bed to a Patient Sector:

1. Click a Bed label in the Available beds list.
2. Move the cursor to the desired Patient Sector and click.
The Bed label will display in that Sector.
To remove a bed from a Patient Sector:
1. Click the Unassign icon.
2. Move the cursor to the Patient Sector where the Bed is to be removed and click.
The Bed label is removed from the Patient Sector and appears in the Available beds list.
When the Unassign cursor moves over a Patient Sector with no bed, it shows a circle with a
slash. When the Unassign cursor moves over a Patient Sector with a bed assigned to it, the
Unassign icon displays.
OK When you click OK in the Resting Display screen, bed assignment changes are stored and the
Bed Config screen shows the new Sector assignments in the Monitor/Overview Beds
section.
Cancel When you click Cancel, the Bed Config screen returns with no changes.
6-84
Config Wizard
Report The Report Settings screen (Figure 6-19) permits configuring printed report layout.
Settings
Figure 6-19 Report Settings Screen
Screen
Description
General Settings
Hospital Logo Permits defining the location of the bitmap (.bmp) file that identifies the hospital and can appear on
reports.
Enter Location (*.bmp only):
Browse
Addressograph Permits defining the dimensions of the bitmap. There are no maximum/minimum limits; the typical
size of an addressograph is 30 mm x 70 mm.
Height: (mm)
Width: (mm)
Report Settings
Report Type Lists the names of each of the report types
You can uniquely configure each report type. The report types are:
• Alarm Report
• Custom Report
• Event Report
• Event Summary Report
• Fast Alarm Report
• ST Report
• Trend Report
• Twelve Lead Report
• Unit Report
• Wave Report
Defaults Assigns default values to settings
6-85
Config Wizard
Customize Fields Permits defining additional customized text fields that can be printed in the Report header or footer
When you click Configure, the Field Setup screen opens.
• New Field opens Field Properties dialog that permits entering Field Name and Field
Entry.
• Delete Field permits removing a field.
• Edit Field permits changing the field properties.
• Close
Page Layout • Portrait
• Landscape
Adjust Margins Permits setting Top, Bottom, Left, and Right margins
There are no maximum or minimum limits. The margins are measured from the printer defined area,
not the paper edges. The printer defined area is printed on the test page.
If you are using 3-hole punched paper, use 25 mm for the Left margin.
Header Permits selecting the information that is printed in the Report header and footer.
Footer • -None-
• Addressograph
• Bitmap
• Patient Name (header default)a
• Lifetime Id
• Bed Label (header default)
• Page Number (footer default)
• Unit Name (footer default)
• Hospital Name (footer default, 30 character max)
• Report Name
• Print Date & Time
• Encounter Id
• Alternative Id
Store Settings Permits storing configured settings
Test Print Permits printing a test page if a default printer is configured
a
Patient Name format is Last Name, First Name, Middle Name.
6-86
Config Wizard
Security Security Access permits setting read/write access to patient data and control settings on
Access Information Centers by other Information Centers and Clients on the network.
View access rights to the patient data and Permits selecting the device you want to see the access right of from
patient settings of: the drop-down list
• Click the arrow, then select a device from the list.
Local Device Name Identifies the Information Center that is being viewed
Set Access To
No Access Prevents other Information Centers or Clients from viewing or
changing patient data or monitoring settings.
Read Only Permits other Information Centers or Clients to view patient data
but not change monitoring settings
(Default for Information Centers in different unit)
Full Control Permits another Information Center or Client to view patient data,
change monitoring settings, and silence alarms
(Default for Information Centers in same unit)
Note Access rights to patient data and control settings can be changed only on the Information Center that
monitors the patient.
Caution Any Information Center or Client whose Security Access rights have been changed must be
restarted in order for the new access rights to take effect.
6-87
Config Wizard
Report and The Report and Recording Destination screen permits a networked Information Center
Recording or Client to configure a set of reports to be printed at a selected printer. It also permits
Destination connection with an IIC-attached 2-Channel Recorder or 4-Channel Recorder. You can access
the Report and Recording Destination screen through the Service menu
Figure 6-20 Report/Recording Destination Screen

Important—Sharing of recorders is only available for Information Centers and Clients on the
Clinical Network. Four Information Centers or Clients (maximum) can use the same
Recorder/Rack.
Settings and
Selections
Report Destination
Report Type Lists the possible report types that can be assigned to a printer
• Click a report in the list to select it.
Print Manager Opens Windows Print Manager dialog and permits adding and configuring local, shared, or network
printers
Print Manager uses the Windows Print Service to accommodate adding and sharing monitoring
network and locally connected printers (page 6-90).
Refresh Printers Updates Printer list
Printer Permits selection of the configured and shared printers
Default Permits selecting a default printer
• To set a printer as the default, select it from the Printer list and click the Default check box.
Add All => Permits adding all the reports listed in the Report Type section to the list that will print out at the
selected printer
The button is dimmed if there are no reports to be configured.
Add-> Permits adding the reports selected in the Report Type section to the list that will print out at the
selected printer
The button is dimmed if there are no reports to be configured.
6-88
Config Wizard
<-Remove Permits removing reports selected from the list that will print at the selected printer
The button is dimmed if there are no reports in the printer list.
<=Remove All Permits removing all reports listed
The button is dimmed if there are no reports in the list.
Recording Destination
2-Channel Recorder
Recorder Permits selecting a local 2-Channel Recorder
Attacheda,b If the 2-Channel Recorder was previously checked and is now clear, the USB and SDN Recorder
buttons are dimmed. The recorder destination will only clear if the destination is set to the current
device.
If the 2-Channel Recorder was previously clear and is now checked, the USB and SDN Recorder
buttons are enabled. The recorder destination is not changed if set to another device. If no destination
is selected, the default destination is the current device.
USB Recorderb Specifies type of 2-Channel Recorder connected
SDN Recorderb USB and SDN recorders can exist on the same network, but cannot exist on the same IIC.
Destination Permits selecting the Information Center that the recorder is attached to from a list
Recorder Speed Permits selecting the recorder speed
(mm/s) 6.25
25 (Default)
50
Pre-Event (seconds) Specifies how many seconds of wave data to print before the recording is initiated
4 - 20 (Default is 10)
Post-Event Specifies how many seconds of wave data to print after the recording is initiated
(seconds) 2 - 20 (Default is 2)
4-Channel Recorder
Recorder Permits selecting a local 4-Channel Recorder
Attacheda,b If you select a new Recorder type from what was previously configured, you must also select a new
Destination. If you do not select any Destination, the default destination is the current device.
USB Recorderb Specifies type of 4-Channel Recorder connected
Serial Recorderb
Destination Permits selecting the Information Center that the recorder is attached to from a list
Recorder Speed Permits selecting the recorder speed
(mm/s) 12.5
25 (default)
50
a
If you attempt to change the type of Recorder Attached and other Information Centers/Clients have this
system selected as the recording destination, a warning appears. These systems must select another
recording destination before you can make the change.
b
This setting is only active on the Config Wizard Report and Recording Destination page.
Important— If you want to change the 2- or 4-Channel recording destination in a network

environment, click the Recorder Attached check box next to the desired selection. You
must also select a new Destination Information Center.
6-89
Config Wizard
Adding Step 1. On the Information Center Config Wizard Report and Recording Destination
Monitoring LAN page, click the Print manager button to open the Printers and Faxes dialog.
Printers at the
IIC Step 2. Double-click the Add Printer icon.
Step 3. In the Add Printer Wizard Welcome page click Next >.
Step 4. Select Local Printer attached to this computer on the Local or Network
Printer screen. Do not check Automatically detect and install my Plug and
Play printer. Then click Next >.
Step 5. In the Select a Printer Port screen select the Create a new port option, and
select Standard TCP/IP Port in the Type of port drop-down list. Then click
Next >.
Step 6. In the Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard Welcome screen click
Next >.
Important - Before you enter the Printer Name or IP Address the desired printer
must be connected to the network switch and configured with a TCP/IP Address for
the Monitoring LAN. If necessary refer to Printer Manufacturer documentation for
setting an IP Address at the printer.
Step 7. Enter the printer IP Address in the Printer Name or IP Address text box. The
Port Name text box automatically populates. Then Click Next >.
If you see the Additional Port Information Required screen, the printer is offline
or not configured correctly.
Step 8. In the Install Printer Software screen, select HP as the printer Manufacturer,
and HP Universal Printing PCL 5 on the Printers list. Then click Next >.
Note—All Philips-supplied printers are compatible with the HP Universal Printing
PCL 5 Driver.
Step 9. In the Use Existing Driver screen, do not select Replace Existing Driver. Then
click Next >.
Step 10. In the Name Your Printer screen enter the desired name in the text box. Then
select the desired option (Yes or No) for the Do you want to use this printer as
the default printer setting. Click Next > to continue.
Step 11. In the Printer Sharing screen, do not share the printer. Then click Next > to
continue.
Step 12. In the Location and Comment screen, enter descriptive information in the
Location and Comment text boxes. Then click Next >.
Step 13. In the Print Test Page screen, click Yes if you want to print a test page. Then
click Next >.
Step 14. Review the printer information in the Completing the Add Printer Wizard
screen and click Finish.
If you chose to print a test page, a dialog opens. If the page printed correctly, click Yes
in the dialog. If the page did not print correctly, click Troubleshoot.
Step 15. Refer to Setting Printer Attributes to configure printer settings.
6-90
Config Wizard
Adding a Shared Step 1. On the Information Center Config Wizard Report and Recording Destination
Network Printer page, click the Print manager button to open the Printers and Faxes dialog.
at the IIC
Step 2. Double-click the Add Printer icon.
Step 3. In the Add Printer Wizard Welcome page click Next >.
Step 4. Select Local printer attached to this computer on the Local or Network
Printer screen. Then click Next >.
Step 5. In the Select a Printer Port screen select the Create a new port option, and
select Local Port in the drop-down list.
Then click Next >.
Step 6. In the Port Name dialog enter the desired text in the following format.
\\DBServerName\PrinterName
Then click OK.
Step 7. In the Install Printer Software screen, select HP as the printer Manufacturer,
and HP Universal Printing PCL 5 on the Printers list. Then click Next >.
Note—All Philips-supplied printers are compatible with the HP Universal Printing
PCL 5 Driver.
Step 8. In the Use Existing Driver screen, do not select Replace Existing Driver. Then
click Next >.
Step 9. In the Name Your Printer screen enter the name that will be visible to applications
on the IIC. Then click Next > to continue.
6-91
Config Wizard
Step 10. Follow on-screen instructions and click Next > to progress through Add Printer
Wizard screens.
Step 11. Review the printer information in the Completing the Add Printer Wizard
screen and click Finish.
If you chose to print a test page, a dialog opens. If the page printed correctly, click Yes
in the dialog. If the page did not print correctly, click Troubleshoot.
Step 12. Refer to Setting Printer Attributes to configure printer settings. Be sure that the
Printer Status Notification setting is Disabled (page 6-94).
Adding a Local Step 1. While printer power is off, connect the printer USB cable to the appropriate port on
Printer attached your IIC. Then turn on the printer.
to a IIC Be sure to use the correct USB Ports for your hardware (page 2-3 and page 2-4).
Step 2. On the Information Center Config Wizard Report and Recording Destination
page, click the Refresh Printers button.
The new local printer appears in the Printer list.
Step 3. Click the Print manager button to open the Printers and Faxes window.
The local printer icon appears in the window.
Step 4. Refer to Setting Printer Attributes to configure the printer settings.
Setting Printer Step 1. Right-click the printer icon and select Properties from the list.
Attributes
Step 2. In the Properties dialog open the Advanced tab and check the following settings.
a. Be sure the that HP Universal Printing PCL 5 driver appears in the Driver
text box.
6-92
Config Wizard
b. Select the Start printer after last page is spooled option..
Step 3. If desired, change the printer name by opening the General tab and entering the new
name in the text box. Then click OK.
Step 4. Go to the Properties sheet Sharing tab to share the printer.

Select the Share this printer option then enter the desired name in the Share name
text box.
6-93
Config Wizard
Step 5. In the Properties dialog open the Device Settings tab. In the Installable
Options section be sure that the Printer Status Notification setting is Disabled.
Click Apply, then click OK.
Step 6. Click OK to close the Properties sheet.
Step 7. Close the Printers and Faxes window.
Step 8. Click Next > on the Report and Recording Destination screen, then click
Finish on the final Config Wizard screen.
6-94
Config Wizard
Date and Figure 6-21 shows an example of the Date and Time Setup screen.
Time Setup Important—If you want to set time and date on SDN patient monitors, you must connect one
Information Center to Branch 0 of each SCC.
Figure 6-21 Time and Date Setup Screen
Screen Table 6-27 describes the Date and Time Setup screen settings.
Description
Table 6-27 Time and Date Setup Screen Selections

Date: (MDY) Sets the current Month, Date, and Year
• Click the selection box click the arrows to increase or decrease the value.
Time:(H:mm) Sets the current Hour (HH) and minute (mm)
• Click the selection box click the arrows to increase or decrease the value.
Time Zone Information
Time Zone Permits setting the correct Time Zone for the system location
• Click the down arrow to show the list of Time Zones.
• Select the desired Time Zone from the list.
Automatically Adjust Determines if time will automatically adjust for changes to or from Daylight Savings
For Daylight Savings • Click the check box to activate automatic Daylight Savings Time change.
Time
Store Settings Activated only if the Date and Time Setup screen is accessed from the Service screen
Configuration menu (Set Time/Date)
When you open the Date and Time Setup screen from the Service screen
Configuration menu, you must click the Store Settings button to store the new
settings.
Important—In some languages, Time Zone will not automatically adjust for daylight savings
correctly. If this is the case you can manually reset the Time Zone.
6-95
Config Wizard
Creating an The Archive screen permits saving an archive file to removable media. Printer configuration
Archive cannot be archived, however. You can save your local printer configuration with the
Microsoft Print Migrator utility (or equivalent). The Microsoft Print Migrator is available at
the following WEB site.
http://www.microsoft.com/WindowsServer2003/techinfo/overview/printmigrator3.1.mspx
Step 1. Put the archive media in the appropriate device drive/port.
Step 2. Click the Browse button to open a file window, then select the location at which you
want to save the archive.
Step 3. Click Start Archiving.
Step 4. Store the Archive in a safe place.
Finishing The last Config Wizard screen for the Information Center type (page 6-7) has a Finish
Config button.
Wizard
• When the final Config Wizard screen appears, click Finish.
A message appears,
Important!
Always run System Validation tool after configuring the system to verify system
operation. Navigate to Service Menu and select Other Services > System
Validation.
Set up and configuration of the Information or Center or Client additionally requires that you
conduct Overview procedures in Network-connected and local mode.
6-96
Report Configuration File
Report Configuration File
When Config Wizard is complete, the current configuration is saved in an html file in the
\Logs directory. For Database Server systems, the file is saved on the Database Server only.
The name of file is begins with server's host name on a network system or with the standalone
system host name, e.g. DBSICUConfiguration.html. The Database server's configuration
displays first and is followed by each Information Center and Information Center Client
configuration. The Report Configuration File function is disabled in Local Mode.
You can view and print the configuration file with Windows Explorer or Internet Explorer;
you can also save it to another location. If you want to view and print the configuration file
from the Information Center from the Service screen, go to Configuration > Save/View
Configuration. All service settings are included; Unit Settings are not included.
6-97
MiniConfig
MiniConfig
The M3140 Intellivue Information Center is shipped with necessary Operating System and
Application software installed and configured. At start up the system presents the Information
Center Resting Display.
MiniConfig permits on-site configuration of items that cannot be automatically set with plug
and play. MiniConfig uses known system information to populate required fields. It is
password protected (requiring Biomed Password or Philips Service User Password) and runs
in Non-monitoring mode only.
To open the MiniConfig screen:
• Go to Configuration > !MiniConfig from the Service screen.

The MiniConfig screen opens.
6-98
MiniConfig
Table 6-28 describes the MiniConfig screen settings.
Table 6-28 MiniConfig Screen Selections
Button/Selection Permitted Setting Default Action/Notes
Display Size 270 - 1188 mm 306 mm • Enter the desired setting.

(15 - 27 in)
Institution Name Permits text entry of Blank

Hospital name
(30 character max) • Enter the desired text.
Clinical Unit Permits text entry of Clinical Unit
Clinical Unit
Bed Label • Add bed1 - bed50 To remove a Bed Label:

• Remove 1. Select the desired Bed Label from
the list.
2. Click the Remove button.
The bed label disappears from the
list.
To add a Bed Label:
1. Click the Add button.
The Add Bed Label(s) dialog box
opens.
2. Enter the new Prefix, Start with

Index, Number of Labels, and
click OK.
The new Bed labels appear in the
list. There is a 50-bed maximum.
6-99
MiniConfig
Table 6-28 MiniConfig Screen Selections
Button/Selection Permitted Setting Default Action/Notes
Hemodynamic Pressure • mmHg mmHg

• KpA
Gas Pressures • mmHg mmHg

• KpA
Weight Units • Kg Kg
• Lbs
• Click the option button next to the
Height Units • Cm Cm desired selection.
• Ins
Patient Type • Adult Adult

• Pediatric
• Neonate
Alarm Sounds • Carenet Carenet

• IEC
Sector Design
Display Patient Name Enable/Disable Enabled • Click the checkbox to enable.

• To disable, click the checkbox again
to remove the check.
Patient Name Permits entering /not entering patient name • Click the down arrow next to the
• Last Name, First Name text box to show the patient name
• Blank display formats and select the
desired format.
802.11 Wireless
IEEE Mode • A (5 GHz) A • Click the down arrow next to the

• G (2.4 GHz) text box to display the selections.
• Click the desired selection.
Changes to this selection require the

Wireless Password.
Password Permits entering password • Enter the Wireless Password.
• Click Save Changes and Exit to accept the changes or Cancel.
6-100
MiniConfig
Table 6-29 shows the automatic settings that populate the Config Wizard pages for the
M3140.
Table 6-29 M3140 Config Wizard Screen Settings

CONFIG WIZARD Screen/Settings Default Notes /Selections
Restore From Archive
Permits restoration of Archive data
Software Versions and Security Updates
Screen also available in Service mode
Purchased Options
HostName PC machine name Default name PhillipsIIC
Device Name assigned in Manufacturing
LAN IP address 172.31.3.0
Subnet Mask 255.255.248.0
Gateway 172.31.0.1
System Serial Number Pre-assigned Unique factory -assigned
Device Serial Number number
# of Displays 1 Supports single display only
Visible Display Width 306 mm 270 - 1188 mm
(15 - 27 in)
# of ICs 1
# of Patients 16 16 maximum (can be less)
Wave Storage 72
Alarm Storage 50 50 maximum supported
EASI Wave Storage Unavailable
Web Serving, ADI, 12-Lead, Holter, Device Unavailable
Location
HL-7 Disabled If HL7 is required, enable
Purchased Option and con-
figure HL7 in Config Wizard.
Database General Configuration Settings
Multi Lead ECG Layout International
Layout 3x4
Speed 25 mm/sec
Web Section Unavailable
Wave Strip Export Unavailable
Hemodynamic Pressure mmHg • mmHg
Gas Pressures • KpA
Weight Units Kg • Kg
• Lbs
Height Units Cm • Cm
• Ins
12 Lead Export Section Unavailable
6-101
MiniConfig

Local General Config Settings
Patient Type Adult • Adult
• Pediatric
• Neonate
All Arrhythmia Alarms Off (Tele Only) Disabled
No Data From Bed Inop - Alerting No Sound
Arrhythmia Capability (SDN & ITS Only) Basic Enhanced not supported
Screen Notes Yes • Yes
• No
Record Button Record • Record
• Save
• Both
Alarm Sounds / Alarm Text Carenet • Carenet
• IEC
Silence Bed At Central Yes • Yes
• No
Standby Messages • Cathlab Default List
• Hemodialysis
• Orthopedics
• Pulmonary
• X-Ray
• Other
Click Sector For Recording Enabled
Network Configuration
Clinical Units Clinical Unit
SCCs Unavailable SDN not supported
List of Networked Centrals and Clients Unavailable Does not support clients
List of network Devices
Single IntelliVue 802.11 thick AP 172.31.1.128 Fixed IP Address
Network Scan Tool
Smart-hopping 1.4 or 2.4GHz AP 172.31.2.128 through Configurable on site
172.31.2.255
AP1, AP2, AP3, AP4, AP5 IP Addresses Network Scan Tool supports
DHCP assignment of IP
Addresses.
APC (Single) 172.31.1.1 Specify default IP Address.
M3140 does not limit to a
single APC.
RF Access Code 1 Configured in the APC as
Default
HL-7 Requires enabling of HL7
Purchased Option and con-
figuration of second NIC
TCP/IP setting
Network Switch 172.31.0.10
6-102
MiniConfig

SNTP Time Source Yes Requires configuration of
SNTP Host Name and
second NIC TCP/IP setting
Monitor IP Address Range Start 172.31.4.0 Sequential assignment
End: 172.31.4.255
Display Setup
Display Patient Name Enabled
Sweep Speed 25
Color Schema List Controls As defaulted
Sector Layout (Dual Column) 16 beds = 8 x 2 Layout depends on number
12 beds = 6 x 2 of beds purchased
8 beds = 8 x 1
6 beds = 6 x 1
4 beds = 4 x 1
Equipment Setup
Bed Labels bed1 - bed50 Default text can be edited
with Mini config Wizard or
Config wizard.
Monitor Labels 101 - 116 Defaults can only be edited
with Config Wizard.
Tele Labels 01 - 16 Defaults can only be edited
with Config Wizard.
HL-7 Button Selectable HL-7 ready
In order to be operational,
added services must be
purchased.
Pairing / Un-pairing Unavailable
Bed Config
Fast Alarm Display Disabled
#Sectors 16 Max Derived from Purchase
Options
Show Alarm Limits Enabled
Monitored Beds list control Derived from Purchase
Options
Report and Recording Destination
Printer Selection Pull-down Lists shared printers
Report Destination Section Disabled Report Types not supported
2-Channel Recorders USB
SDN Recorders Unavailable
4-Channel Recorders Unavailable
Archive
Permits auto archive before exiting configuration
6-103
Label Assignment
Label Assignment
The Label Assignment feature is password protected. It permits you to automatically or

manually assign equipment labels to patient monitors and manually assign equipment labels
to telemetry devices. The network switch must be installed and operating in order to use the
Label Assignment feature. The Label Assignment feature is available in all Information
Center models. For details about using the Label Assignment feature with an M3140
Information Center, refer to the M3140 IIC IntelliVue Clinical Network Quick Installation
Guide.
Access the Label Assignment screen as follows:
1. From the Resting Display click the Patient Window button at the bottom of a patient sector.
As you move the mouse cursor across the patient sector, the button appears.
2. Go to All Controls > Label Assignment.
The Label Assignment password dialog box opens prompting you for a password.
3. Type the Label Assignment Password (tele) in the text entry box.
The Label Assignment screen opens.
The Label Assignment controls are available in English only.
Important—HeartStart MRx monitor/defibrillators do not support the Label Assignment

feature.
6-104
Label Assignment
Re-assigning Equipment labels already assigned to devices appear in the Label Assignment screen
an Assigned Equipment Labels section under Assigned Labels. If a monitoring device is removed
Label from service for any reason, the equipment label can be re-assigned to a new device. If you
want to use a pre-assigned label for a new device, select the MAC Address of the new
device, then select an equipment label from the Assigned Labels list.
Table 6-30 Label Assignment Screen Selections
Section/Selection Description
New Devices Lists MAC Addresses of new devices that are powered on
Equipment Labels Lists Unassigned and Assigned Labels
Labeled Devices Lists MAC Address and Equipment Label for Assigned Labels
Options Permits selection of device type
• Telemetry
• Monitor
Refresh Updates the screen
Assign Label Permits assignment of Equipment Label to device
Reset Label Permits removal of Equipment Label from device
Auto Assign Permits automatic assignment of equipment labels to patient monitors
Status Displays the status of the most recent operation

The status displays for 3 seconds.
6-105
Label Assignment
Manually For Bedside Monitors

Assigning a
Step 1. Power on the bedside monitor.
Monitor
Equipment Step 2. At the Information Center Resting Display select Patient Window or Sector Setup.
Label
Step 3. Select All Controls > Label Assignment.
The Label Assignment password dialog box opens.
Step 4. Enter the password in the dialog box and press Enter.
The Label Assignment screen displays.
Step 5. Select Monitor in the Options section of the Label Assignment screen by
clicking the adjacent option button.
Step 6. Select a device in the New Devices list, and click a label (that is Unassigned) from
the Equipment Labels list. Then select the MAC Address of the device in the New
Devices list
Step 7. Click Assign Label to map the new Equipment Label to the device.
When the label assignment is complete, the assignment is verified in the Status field
and the device MAC Address and Equipment Label appears in the Labeled
Devices list.
Manually Step 1. Power on the bedside monitor.

Removing a
Monitor Step 2. At the Information Center Resting Display select Patient Window or Sector Setup.
Equipment Step 3. Select All Controls > Label Assignment.
Label The Label Assignment password dialog box opens.
Step 4. Enter the password in the dialog box and press Enter.
Step 5. Select Monitor in the Options section of the Label Assignment screen by
Step 6. From the Information Center Resting Display, verify that the monitoring device
waveforms display in the appropriate Patient Sector.
Step 7. If you want to clear the monitor label from an existing labeled bedside, select the
desired device in the Labeled Devices list. Then click Reset Label.
The device is removed from the Labeled Devices list and its MAC Address
displays in the New Devices list.
If you try to clear the monitor label from a monitor that is currently being monitored by
an Information Center, a message reports it and requests confirmation to continue.
Step 8. If you want to rename the default bed label for a specific sector see details in the
Equipment Setup screen (page 6-61).
6-106
Label Assignment
Manually For Telemetry Devices

Assigning a Refer to Philips IntelliVue Telemetry System Installation and Service Manual for detailed
Telemetry instructions about transceiver configuration.
Equipment
Label Step 1. At the Information Center Resting Display select Patient Window or Sector Setup.
Step 3. Enter the password in the Label Assignment password dialog box and press
Enter.
Step 4. Select Telemetry in the Options section of the Label Assignment screen by
Step 5. Remove lead set from the telemetry device and insert batteries.
The device LEDs flash and the New Device sound beeps continuously.
Step 6. When the MAC Address of the detected telemetry device displays in the New
Devices list, verify that it matches the address in the transceiver battery compartment.
Step 7. Select the MAC Address in the New Devices list, then click a label (that is
Unassigned) from the Equipment Labels list.
Step 8. Click Assign Label to initiate programming of the Equipment Label into the
telemetry device. Then, within 10 seconds press the transceiver Check button.
The transceiver resets. When the label assignment is complete, the assignment is
verified in the Status field and the device MAC Address and Equipment Label
appear in the Labeled Devices list.
Important—If more than 10 seconds pass before you press the transceiver Check button, you
must repeat the process.
Manually Step 1. At the Information Center Resting Display select Patient Window or Sector Setup.
Removing a
Telemetry Step 2. Select All Controls > Label Assignment.
Equipment The Label Assignment password dialog box opens.
Label Step 3. Enter the password in the dialog box and press Enter.
Step 4. Select Telemetry in the Options section of the Label Assignment screen by
Step 5. Remove lead set from the telemetry device and insert batteries.
The device LEDs flash and the New Device sound beeps continuously.
Step 6. If you want to clear the equipment label from an existing labeled telemetry device, be
sure that the device is not assigned for monitoring. Then remove the device lead set.
Step 7. Select the desired device in the Labeled Devices list. Then click Reset Label.
The device is removed from the Labeled Devices list and its MAC Address
displays in the New Devices list.
If you try to clear the monitor label from a monitor that is being monitored by an
Information Center currently, a message reports it and requests confirmation to
continue.
6-107
Label Assignment
Automatically If you want to control which sector a bedside monitor displays in, you must be sure to shut off
Assigning an all the monitors before you begin the Automatic label assignment process. Otherwise labels
Equipment will be assigned on a first come, first serve basis. Telemetry bedsides are assigned first,
Label followed by bedside monitors.
(Alternative)
Step 1. Be sure the bedside monitors are powered off.
Step 2. At the Information Center Resting Display select Patient Window or Sector
Setup.

The Label Assignment password dialog box opens.
Step 4. Enter the password and press Enter.

Step 5. Click the option button next to Monitor in the Options section of the screen.
Step 6. Click Auto Assign.
Step 7. The bedside monitor is automatically assigned the first Unassigned Equipment
Label. The new label replaces the bedside monitor label in the upper right hand corner
of the bedside display.
Step 8. Record the monitor label on all required hospital documentation.
Step 9. Repeat Step 7 and Step 8 for each patient monitor in the order that you want the
equipment labels assigned.
From the Information Center Resting Display, verify that the monitoring device waveforms
display in the appropriate Patient Sector.
6-108
Activating the Database Server
When all Server configuration settings are complete you must shut down and restart the
Server.
Important—The Server must be in Operating Mode in order to configure Network-connected

Information Centers and Clients.
Step 1. From the Database Server Windows task bar go to Start > Shut Down to open the
Shut Down screen.
Step 2. Select Restart the Computer from the list and click Yes.
If the system has the Web Access option, hospital IT broadcast messages may appear on the
Server’s Main Screen. These messages do not affect system operation.
When the Server restarts, the Service Password screen (Figure 6-22) appears.
If the Service screen does not appear after two minutes and the IICs and clients are in
Monitoring Mode, go to Start > Run > Servershell from the Windows task bar to
manually open the Service Password screen.
Figure 6-22 Service Password Screen

Step 3. Enter the Philips provided Service Password in the Enter Service Password text
box or use the screen Keyboard.
You can change the password from the Service screen using Configuration > Change
Service User Password. Your service password should only be released to support
personnel assigned to service the Philips system.
6-109
Description of the Database Server Service screen selections follows.
Main Screen Returns to the Service Password screen
Enter Config Mode Opens a WARNING (page 6-9)
If you click Yes in the warning dialog box all Information Centers and Clients on the Network
restart and go into Local Mode and the Server stops storing patient data.
Network Information Centers and Clients - Status Indicators
OFF-LINE Device is off, in Desktop, Start-up, or has a faulty network connection.
When the Server is being configured, all devices are shown as OFF-LINE
MONITORING Device is connected to the Server and in Monitoring Mode.
SERVICE Device is connected to the Server and in Service mode.
LOCAL MON Device is in Monitoring Mode and storing a limited set of data locally, not on the Server.
LOCAL SVC Device is not accessing the Server and is in Service mode.
6-110
Activating the When all Information Centers and Clients are configured, the complete system can be
Network/ activated.
Server
System Step 1. Reconnect the Network cables of all Information Centers and Clients on the Network.
Step 2. Configure Unit Settings for all Information Centers and Clients on the Network.
Unit Settings must be configured after the Network connection is made. If clinical Unit
Settings are configured when the Information Center or Client is in Local Database Mode,
they will be lost when the device reconnects to the Network.
Step 3. When Product Assurance Tests are complete, open the Database Server Service
screen.
Step 4. Go to Configuration > Archive and archive system configuration settings.
Step 5. Return to the Service screen, and go to Configuration > Save/View

Configuration.
Step 6. Print the configuration settings for all devices on the Network.
When the Database Server restarts, the Network/Server system will be in operating mode.
Step 7. If three or more Database Servers are connected, each Database Server must restart
the IIS Service.
Open the Service screen, and go to Maintenance > Restart IIS Service.
If you choose to skip this step patient data may not be visible across all Database
Servers using the Web Access feature.
or
If two or more Database Servers are connected and participating in the Device Pool,
replicate the equipment labels across all servers.
Open the Service screen, and go to
Configuration > Device Pool Configuration > Replicate.
Step 8. After you enter and/or change configuration settings, run the System Validation
program (page 7-74) to ensure that all configuration parameters are set properly.
Restart IIS Admin Service must be run after all Database Servers are configured and in
monitoring mode. Running this utility does not cause the Database Servers and connected
Information Centers and Clients to go into Local Database Mode.
Once the software installation and configuration process is complete the Network/Server
system can be used for patient monitoring by all patient monitors connected to the Network.
Patient data is stored on the Database Server and all patient data review applications are fully
operational.
6-111
6-112
7
Maintenance, Troubleshooting, and Repair
Overview
The Database Server system is designed to provide a robust and reliable central
monitoring network, needing minimal maintenance and having few failures requiring
troubleshooting or repair. As with all complex multi-device systems, problems can
occur. The failure of any one of the system’s components can cause down time and
disruption to patient monitoring.
Chapter 7 describes maintenance, troubleshooting, and repair procedures for the

Information Center system. These procedures are described in the following sections.
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7-2

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7-9
HL7 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7-81
ST/AR Configuration Reporting Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7-83
LED Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7-90
Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7-94
Updating the BIOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7-102
Configuring BIOS Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7-107
Software Re-Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7-133
Updating Firmware on Information Centers and DataBase Servers. page 7-140
Using the Japanese Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7-144
Using Antivirus Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7-145
Note For complete description of the maintenance, troubleshooting, and repair of a

particular device, refer the equipment documentation.
7-1
Maintenance
Maintenance
The Information Center system equipment should be kept clean and dry, and
maintained within environmental specifications. There are also several routine
maintenance procedures that should be followed at regular intervals.
Surface Cleaning The exterior surfaces of Information Center system components should be free of
Information Center dust, lint, and dirt. To clean equipment surfaces, use a lint-free cloth or sponge
Components moistened with soap and water or dilute, non-caustic, detergent solution.
For comprehensive details about cleaning agents and their efficacy, refer to:
Guidelines for Prevention of Transmission of Human Immunodeficiency

Virus and Hepatitis B Virus to Health-Care and Public-Safety Workers.
(June 23, 1989)
issued by:
U.S. Department of Health and Human Services
Public Health Service
Centers for Disease Control
Atlanta, Georgia 30303
Caution To avoid damage to the equipment:

• Do NOT use abrasive material, such as steel wool or silver polish.
• Do NOT use Povodine, Sagrotan, or Mucocit cleaning agents or strong
solvents, such as acetone.
• Do NOT submerge any part of the equipment in water or other liquid.
• Do NOT pour liquid onto the system during cleaning.
• Do NOT allow liquid to enter the equipment case.
• Do NOT allow any cleaner to remain on any of the equipment surfaces,
wipe it off immediately.
Cleaning the If your system includes a touch screen display, clean the screen as follows.
Touch Screen
Step 1. Disable touch by pressing then releasing the Alt and F5 keys
simultaneously.
Verify that touch is off by touching the screen.
7-2
Maintenance
Step 2. Use window or glass cleaner applied to a soft, clean cloth and wipe the
screen surface. Never apply the cleaner directly to the screen. The active area
of the touch screen is resistant to all chemicals that do not affect glass.
Do not use alcohol (methyl, ethyl or isopropyl) or any strong dissolvent.

Do not use thinner, benzene, abrasive cleaners, or compressed air.
Avoid getting liquids inside your touch monitor. If liquid does get inside
the display you must take the equipment out of service and have a
qualified service technician check it.
Do not wipe the screen with an abrasive cloth or sponge that could
scratch the glass surface.
Step 3. When you are finished cleaning the screen re-enable touch by pressing and
releasing the Alt and F5 keys simultaneously.
Verify that touch is enabled by touching the screen.
Performing For most components, recommended maintenance is described in User’s Manuals

Routine provided with the equipment. Refer to those documents for maintenance procedures
Maintenance and frequencies to assure reliable, trouble-free operation of the equipment.
Note All Preventive Maintenance is the responsibility of the user.

Recommended frequency is every 6 months, or less in harsh environments.
Clearing Fans used to cool electronic devices can develop dust build-up in air intake areas.
Workstation and This build-up must be removed to assure proper cooling and circuit operation.
Server Air Intakes Workstation and server air intakes should be checked regularly and dust buildup
removed.
Replacing UPS The UPS contains no serviceable parts except the battery and should not be opened
Batteries by hospital personnel because it contains potentially hazardous voltages that can be
dangerous to unskilled persons.
Warning Do not attempt to disassemble the UPS. It contains no serviceable parts except
the battery, and interior voltages can be hazardous. Repair should be performed
by factory trained service personnel only.
To assure dependable UPS performance, regular replacement of UPS batteries is

recommended.
• For ambient temperature normally below 25oC (77oF), UPS batteries should
be replaced every 3 years.
• For ambient temperatures regularly above 25oC (77oF), UPS batteries should
be replaced every 2 years.
7-3
Maintenance
Purchase of spare batteries is Not Recommended since they need to be recharged

at least every 6 months to maintain their capacity. Instead, batteries should be
purchased a few weeks before they must be used.
You can purchase a spare, charged UPS if you need backup emergency power.
Order information and Philips Part Numbers are included in the Replaceable
Parts List on the Service Documentation CD of the media kit.
For complete battery replacement instructions, refer to the UPS documentation.
Warning UPS batteries are lead-acid and must be handled carefully and disposed of
properly.
Cleaning the USB The USB 2-Channel Recorder has mechanical and optical components that require
2-Channel regular cleaning for dependable operation. This includes cleaning of the paper roller
Recorder to prevent paper slippage and keep recordings clear and clean.
Cleaning the Philips Recorder Paper Roller Compartment
Step 1. Open the Philips Recorder door and remove the paper roll.
Step 2. Lightly moisten a lint-free cloth with isopropyl alcohol and clean the paper
roller.
Step 3. Use compressed air to clean all dirt and debris from the recorder paper roller
compartment. Be sure that the surface of the paper roller is completely clean.
Loading Recorder Paper
A message appears at the top of the screen when the recorder is out of paper. The
M3176C USB 2-channel recorder requires M4816/17A paper to operate properly.
Note The only paper that can be used with the USB 2-Channel Recorder is M4816/17A. If
the wrong paper installed, recordings will not print.
Step 1. Insert a new roll with paper feeding from the bottom.
7-4
Maintenance
Step 2. Pull the paper so it extends beyond the edge of the door and close the
recorder door.
You can test to see if the recorder paper is loaded correctly by selecting the Record
button in any Patient Sector that has waves. If no printing appears on the strip, the
paper is loaded backwards. If necessary remove the paper roll and reload it correctly.
When removing a printed recording from the recorder be sure to tear the paper in an
upward or downward motion. If you pull the paper forward aggressively and tear at
an angle the recorder may generate an ‘out of paper’ message at the Information
Center.
Cleaning the The 4-Channel Serial Recorder has mechanical and optical components that require
4-Channel Serial regular cleaning for dependable operation. This includes cleaning of the paper-out
Recorder tray and the paper roller to prevent paper slippage and keep recordings clear and
clean.
• Be careful not to drop or bump the recorder.

• Use a soft, lint free cloth dampened with diluted soap and water to clean
recorder exterior surfaces.
• Do not use alcohol or other solvent.
• Do not disassemble, repair, or remodel the recorder.
• Do not use an AC adapter other than what is specified.
• Do not pull on the paper if it jams. Refer to Clearing Paper Jams.
Caution Do not ship the Recorder with the paper roll installed; cut off the end of paper
and remove the roll.
7-5
Maintenance
Handling Thermal Paper
• Store thermal paper in a cool, dry, and dark place.

• Do not rub the paper with hard objects.
• Do not leave the paper near organic solvents.
• Do not allow plastic film, erasers, or adhesive tape to touch the paper for long
periods.
• Do not use chemical glues.
• Always use specified thermal paper (p/n PSE11268 package of 24 rolls)
Loading Recorder Paper
Step 1. Lift the clear plastic cover on the top of the recorder.
Step 2. Remove the empty spool from the recorder by pushing up and out on the
two plastic tabs that hold the spool in place.
Step 3. Place the new spool in the recorder by pushing down and in on the two
plastic tabs. Be sure that the paper feeds from the top of the roll.
Step 4. Trim the end of the paper to make a clean edge and insert the paper near the
feed slot. The recorder automatically feeds the paper.
Step 5. Close the plastic cover on the top of the recorder.
Clearing Paper Jams
Step 1. Open the printer cover and rotate the thermal printhead release lever toward
the back of the recorder.
Step 2. Open the paper cover and remove the jammed paper.
7-6
Maintenance
Step 3. Rotate the thermal print head release toward the front of the recorder and
shut the printer cover.
Step 4. Make sure that the end of the paper has been cut straight and insert the edge
of the paper into the insertion slot. The PAPER EMPTY indicator goes off, and
the paper automatically feeds through the paper exit slot. If the end of the
paper does not exit the slot, press the FEED switch until it does.
Step 5. Close the paper cover.
Cleaning the USB The USB 4-Channel Recorder has mechanical and optical components that require
4-Channel regular cleaning for dependable operation. This includes cleaning of the paper roller
Recorder to prevent paper from slipping and to keep recordings clear.
Cleaning the Recorder Paper Roller Compartment
Step 1. Open the recorder door and remove the paper roll.
Step 2. Lightly moisten a lint-free cloth with isopropyl alcohol and clean the paper
roller.
Step 3. Use compressed air to clean all dirt and debris from the recorder paper roller
compartment. Be sure that the surface of the paper roller is completely clean.
Changing the Step 1. Insert a new roll with paper feeding from the bottom.
4-Channel USB
Recorder Paper
7-7
Maintenance
Step 2. Pull the paper so it extends beyond the edge of the recorder door.
Step 3. Close door.
You can test to see if the recorder paper is loaded correctly by selecting the Record
button in any Patient Sector that has waves. If no printing appears on the strip, the
paper is loaded backwards. If necessary remove the roll and reload.
Checking Display To assure full compliance with Information Center specifications, the sweep speed of
Sweep Speed the main display can be checked and adjusted to assure 25 mm/s +10%. The
procedure for adjusting a display to achieve this sweep speed is described in
Chapter 8, Setting Display Sweep Speed.
7-8
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
This section is divided into the following topics:
Troubleshooting Strategy
Troubleshooting Symptoms
Troubleshooting Tables for applications
• Alert Data Integration

• Patient Data Transfer/Web Access
• HL7 Export
• Web Based Applications
• 12-Lead Export/Holter Export
• KM Software
First level support User Troubleshooting tools:
• Error and Status Messages

• Status Log
• Purchased Options and Support Information
More advanced resources available for Service Personnel Troubleshooting

from the Information Center Service screen.
• Event Logs for identifying system events and errors

• Service Logs for reviewing past service performed on the system
• Status Logs (All Data Categories) for identifying the operational status of all
Philips hardware
• Network Statistics for information about network switches
• Telemetry Services for information from Telemetry Mainframes. Note that
this does not include the M484x IntelliVue Telemetry System devices.
• !Diagnostics for troubleshooting Philips and OS devices
• !Config Wizard tools to reconfigure the system
• Remote Access Admin. (RAS) for remote troubleshooting by Philips service
personnel
• !Shutdown and restart for restarting system software.
LED Diagnostics tables list symptoms displayed by LEDs on nonfunctioning

hardware, possible causes, and corrective actions that can be taken to restore
functionality.
7-9
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting In the Information Center system, there can be more than one cause that contributes
Symptoms to a problem. The following tables list possible symptoms, causes, and actions that
can possibly resolve the problem.
Alert Data Integration
Symptom Possible Cause Action

Alarm Paging not Available TCP/IP connection to Alert Data Ping the hostname of the Alert Data Integration
displayed in Information Center Integration device is no longer device. Verify proper host name and/or IP address
status text area valid in Network Configuration screen of the Config
Wizard (page 6-39).
Device is not configured Configure correct host name and/or IP address in
Network Configuration screen of the Config
Wizard (page 6-39).
Alerts not received by Emergin® Go to Paging.log in log directory (page 7-28) and
Wireless Office verify alerts are logged with bed label, text
information, and time/date information.
If alerts are in paging.log file, alerts have been

sent to the Emergin Alarm Wireless Office. Notify
customer to contact Emergin for further
troubleshooting within the Emergin system,
wireless infrastructure, and/or end user devices
Alert Data Integration interface Verify status of Alert Data Integration by
is not running checking the Status Log and verify status of Alert
Data Integration interface. Check paging.log for
more detailed information.
7-10
Troubleshooting
Patient Data Transfer/

Web Access

Web Access Not Available The Master Database Server is Verify the Master Database Server is online and
off-line working
Web Access is accessible from the Network properties (for second Verify the second NIC TCP/IP settings include IP
Information Center but not from a NIC) are not configured Address, subnet, default gateway, DNS and/or
PC Client on the Hospital LAN correctly. WINS according to hospital requirements
(page 4-23).
Clinical Units cannot accept patient Database Server associated with Verify the Database Server is online, and click
transfer; units are not on the clinical those Units is off-line. the Update button in the Discharge screen.
unit transfer list
Browser button is not available on Web Access Portal Enable the Web Access Portal configuration
the Information Center All Controls configuration setting was not parameter in the Network Configuration screen of
window. enabled. the Config Wizard (page 4-23).
Patient Data Transfer has • Check Export Log Files for messages
intermittent failures. • Hospital Bandwidth utilization may be
affecting transfers. This utilization can be
modified with the tools provided. Refer to
Patient Data Transfer - Bandwidth
Utilization, page 7-68.
Decreasing the bandwidth utilization for the
hospital LAN increases the time required to
complete the transfer of patient data.
7-11
Troubleshooting
HL7 Export

HL7 Output to If CareVue is set up as a • Bring CareVue server back online. If it cannot be brought back
CareVue is not redundant server system, and up, remove it from the HL7 target client list.
working the primary server fails, the
HL7 export does not work
CareVue client and hostnames • Correct the HL7 configuration parameters that are set in Config
are incorrect in the HL7 Wizard > Network Configuration > HL7 Configuration
configuration Screen (page 6-76).
Information Center is running • Reconnect the Information Center to the Database Server by
in local database mode pressing the Press Restart Network button on the Information
Center.
CareVue client SDN/Id and • Verify settings and reconfigure if necessary (page 6-61).
LBN values do not match
across products
CareVue Network errors • Restart DBServ on the monitoring DBS.
Integration Engine A stale connection to CIE due
(CIE) ADT to restarting CIE services (for
interface fails to example)
return names or
fails when user
clicks Retrieve
HL7 Output is not Configuration settings are not • Check configuration of network card, switches, and TCP/IP
working set properly settings. Verify the Information Centers are configured with the
appropriate default gateway. (IP Address of DBS when no
IntelliVue Telemetry devices connected, and IP Address of router
when IntelliVue Telemetry devices are connected).
No communication between • Ping by IP and hostname the device from the other device.
devices
Network errors • Check the Network Statistics for network errors
• Check System Error logs on Information Center and Database
Server for indications of unexpected network conditions or errors
Export errors • Check the Export log file on Information Centers originating HL7
data and on the Database Server. Pay careful attention to all
“Connection accepted from...” and “Connection from...
rejected” messages. There should be one accepted message each
time an HL7 target system makes a connection. A disconnect
message with error 0 means the HL7 target system performed a
normal close of its socket connections. A rejected message means
the Database Server configuration is incorrect. Socket errors other
than 0 are abnormal, meaning the connected system disappeared
without closing the socket connection. Review these abnormal
errors with a HL7 receiving system technical expert.
No patients are After system upgrade CIE 1. On the CIE PC go to go to Start > Settings > Control Panel
populating the processes may need to be > Administrative Tools > Component Services.
Admit list (from the restarted. 2. Double-click the Services icon.
HIS system) 3. Right-click each of the following services and select Restart
from the list.
Philips CIS CDS MessageMappingService
Philips CIS CDS PatientIndexService
Philips CIS MachineManagement
4. Close open windows after services restart.
7-12
Troubleshooting
Web Based
Applications

Application served web Application Server IP Address is not Verify the Application Server has been added
applications are not working on configured/correct as a network device with the correct settings.
the Information Center patient See Adding Network Devices
window when the Browser Database Server/Information Center Verify the Database Server/Information Center
button is selected IP address is not configured in the IP address is configured on the Application
Application Server Server
Incorrect network connection Verify the Application Server is connected to
the Clinical Network on a 100 Mbps, Full
Duplex connection
Application Server applications are Publish the applications at the Application
not published Server
Internet Information Services (IIS) is Restart the IIS Service. See Restart IIS Admin
not running Service
Cannot view beds on “other servers” Restart the IIS Service. See Restart IIS Admin
Service
Second NIC on Database Server/ Verify the Second NIC is configured with the
Information Center is not configured appropriate settings. See Network Card and
correctly. TCP/IP Settings
Application Server and Database Ping the Application Server using its hostname
Server/Information Center are not from the Database Server/Information Center
connected
Verify the Status Log of the Database Server
shows the Application Server as Active
Verify the NetServices.log file on the
Application Server has an entry of
“<DeviceData>: Post OnHostUp, device =
DBSName (DBS MLAN IP)”
Application served review Hosts file may not include DBS Edit the hosts file on the Application Server by
applications take longer than 30 hostname and IP address. adding the DBS host name and IP Address.
seconds to display.
7-13
Troubleshooting
12-Lead Export/Holter
Export

12-Lead Data/Holter export data Device IP address is not assigned Verify 12-Lead/Holter devices are correctly
is not arriving at destination configured by means of the Network Configuration
device screen in Config Wizard. See Network
Configuration, page 6-39.
System is offline Ping the hostname of the 12-Lead or Holter Export
device
Shared folders on receiving device Verify the PMDExport folders on the 12-Lead/
are not setup/shared properly Holter device are setup properly. See Appendix E
Second NIC on Database Server/ Verify the Second NIC is configured with the
Information Center is not appropriate settings. See Network Card and
configured correctly. TCP/IP Settings, page 4-23.
Hospital ID/Department ID Verify the configurations settings in the Purchased
configuration settings do not Options and Support Information Page and the
match those of the receiving Equipment Setup (clinical unit setup) window
device match. See Purchased Options and Support
Information and Equipment Setup in Chapter 6
7-14
Troubleshooting
KM Software

Mouse does not switch over to KaVoom! KM may not be Restart KaVoom! KM switching software.
another computer configured so that it can connect 1. Access the Windows Desktop.
to all centrals. 2. Go to Start > Programs> KaVoom! KM.
The KaVoom! KM for Philips dialog
displays.
3. If the dialog displays the message, The
computer is grouped with [central-xx] and
[central-yy], click Hide.
KM switching software restarts. Computer
mouse and keyboard are set to navigate across
all configured central stations.
4. If the dialog displays the messages, The
computer is grouped with [central-xx] and
[central-yy]. Unable to connect to [central-xx].
The software is not running or is configured for
a different TCP/IP port., restart KaVoom! KM
software (Step 1 - Step 3) at each listed central
in the grouping until the error disappears.
5. Lock the desktop keyboard.
Keyboard cannot type upper Reset and restart KaVoom! KM switching
case software.
1. Access the Windows Desktop.
2. Go to Start > Programs > KaVoom! KM.
The KaVoom! KM for Philips dialog opens.
3. Go to Application > Exit in the
KaVoom! KM for Philips dialog.
4. Restart KaVoom! KM for Philips.
5. Lock the desktop keyboard.
7-15
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting The flow of information in Information Center systems can be divided into the
Strategy following major connectivity components (Figure 7-1):
• SDN connectivity - flow of real-time patient monitoring data from patient

monitors through the SDN to Information Centers for display
• Wireless connectivity - flow of real-time patient monitoring data from
wireless Patient monitors
• Network connectivity - flow of real-time patient data from bedside monitors
to Network connected Information Centers and Clients for overviewing
• Server connectivity - flow of stored patient monitoring data to the Server for
storage and out to Information Centers and Clients for review
Note SDN and Server Connectivity are covered in this manual. for wireless and Network
Connectivity troubleshooting, refer to the Clinical Network Service Manual.
Figure 7-1 Network/Server Connectivity Components
7-16
Troubleshooting
Each connectivity component should be evaluated separately to identify the source of

a problem. Ask the questions:
• What devices and functions are working?

• What devices and functions are not working?
• What tools can be used to diagnose devices or functions not working?
• What troubleshooting actions will minimize intrusion on the user?
• What actions will be the quickest to implement?
SDN Connectivity Check that real-time patient monitoring data is flowing from patient monitors
connected to the SDN to Information Centers. Each SDN/Information Center
connection should be checked to determine if patient monitoring data are correctly
being received and displayed.
Table 7-1 provides investigation suggestions for identifying sources of SDN

connectivity problems.
Table 7-1 SDN Connectivity Troubleshooting
Assessment Investigation
Are patient data (waveforms and parameters) from the - Check Patient Sectors for each connected patient.
SCC being properly displayed on the Information
Center?
Are all devices operational? - Check status LEDs on each device.
Are all devices connected? - Check Status Log.
Is the SDN interface operating correctly? - Check IC SDN interface card LEDs.
Is the SDN configured correctly? - Check !Bed Config application.
Caution Status Log information on a device that is disconnected from the network (e.g.
gone into local database mode) may not reflect the current status of other
devices on the Network.
7-17
Troubleshooting
Server Connectivity Be sure that patient monitoring data are correctly stored by the Server and accessible
from the Server by Information Centers and Clients. Each Server/device connection
should be checked to determine if stored patient monitoring data can be reviewed.
Table 7-2 provides investigation suggestions for identifying sources of Server

connectivity problems.
Table 7-2 Server Connectivity Troubleshooting
Assessment Investigation
Are patient data (waveforms and parameters) • Check that Information Centers are not in Local Database
being received by the Server? Mode.
Are patient data (waveforms and parameters) • Check Review Applications for each connected patient and
being stored correctly by the Server? verify that patient data have been correctly stored.
Are all Network devices operational? • Check Status LEDs on each Network device - switch,
repeaters, media translators.
Are all devices connected? • Check Status Log.
• Ping each device from the Server.
• Check Link LEDs.
What is the current status of connected • Check the connected Information Centers/Clients from the
devices? Service Menu.
Black - monitoring
Yellow - Local Mode, DBS not available
Green - Local Mode, DBS available
7-18
Troubleshooting
System Table 7-3, Table 7-4, and Table 7-5 provide symptoms, possible causes,
Troubleshooting verifications, and corrective actions for problems identified in Information Centers,
Clients, and the Network/Server System.
Table 7-3 Troubleshooting Information Centers

Symptom Possible Cause(s) Verification Corrective Action(s)
Information Center Information Center has lost Determine if problem is on the device Test UTP and fiber optic cable
connection to network or or the network by observing connections
- applications shut down Server due to: functionality. Re-establish Information Center
- bad connection to Switch, connection to the network
- workstation goes to desktop
including cabling - Check whether Clients are receiving
for 10-20 seconds
- failed component between data from Information Center. Restart the Information Center PC if
- restarts to local database mode Information Center and - Determine if other Information necessary
Switch Centers are in local database mode.
- locks up
- loss of Server connection to - Look at Link LEDs on device ports When connection is re-established,
network of Network interfaces. Information Centers display “Press
Restart Network” at top of display. Use
If only Information Center is Restart button to restart the Information
affected, problem is likely its network Center.
connection.
For network problems, see Table 7-5,
If other Information Centers or Troubleshooting the Network/
Clients are affected, problem is likely Server System.
a network or Server connection.
Review Event Log and Application

Log. An “SDProcess” error message
is logged, i.e.
- Warning 3257 “System restarted

using the local database mode
because the server is not available”
- Warning 4208 “Restarting

applications because the database
server connection is unavailable.
System will come up in Local DB.”
7-19
Troubleshooting
Table 7-4 Troubleshooting M3151 Information Center Clients

M3151 Client Client has lost connection to Isolate problem by observing Reestablish Server connection to
- waveforms drop out for 15-60 Server, but still has active functionality on rest of network. network
seconds network connection to Determine if other Information
- applications shut down Information Center sourcing data Centers can receive data from Server Restart Clients if necessary (Clients
- PC goes to Desktop for 10-20 to it. If Server’s network connection is lost, may restart automatically once
seconds Problem probably also affects then other devices (Information connection to the Database Server is
- restarts to local database mode other devices on the network. Centers and Clients) should not be restored)
- displays patient waveforms in Possible causes: able to retrieve stored data and should
sectors where patients were - bad connection between be in local database mode.
assigned Switch and Server--may Review Event Viewer, and
- locks up include in-wall and patch Application Log. An “SDProcess”
cables error message is logged, i.e.
- failed component between - Warning 3257 “System restarted
Server and Switch using the local database mode
- Server down because the server is not available”
- Server in Config mode or
Look at Link LEDs on device ports of
LAN interfaces to identify the failed
connection
Test UTP and fiber optic cable
connections
M3151 Client Client has lost connection to Isolate problem by observing Re-establish Client connection to
- waveforms dropout for 15-120 network due to: functionality present on rest of network
seconds - bad connection between Client network.
- applications shut down and Switch including in-wall Determine if Information Centers are Restart Client if necessary (Client may
- PC goes to Desktop for 10-20 and patch cables operational and can receive data from restart automatically once connection to
seconds - failed component between Server the Database Server is restored)
- restarts to local database mode Client and Switch Review Event Log, Application Log.
- displays “Monitoring lost for - network Switch down An “SDProcess” error message is
this patient” in sectors where logged, either
patients were assigned - Warning 3257 “System restarted
using the local database mode
because the server is not available”
or
If problem is isolated to Client
connection, then other devices (ICs
and Clients) should all be operating
normally
Look at Link LEDs on device ports of
LAN interfaces to identify the failed
connection
Test UTP and fiber optic cable
connections
7-20
Troubleshooting
Table 7-5 Troubleshooting the Network/Server System

All M3145/M3155 Information Connection between Switch All Information Centers and Clients are in Identify failed link or device.
Centers and M3151 Clients and Server is lost. local database mode, and
restart and go into local database Information Centers do not show “Restart Correct failed link or device.
mode Network” message with button.
Review Event Log and Application Log Reestablish Server connection to
on Information Centers and Clients. An Switch.
“SDProcess” error message is logged, i.e.
- Warning 3257 “System restarted using Restart Information Centers and
the local database mode because the server Clients if necessary. (Clients may
is not available” or restart automatically.)
- Warning 4208 “Restarting applications
because the database server connection is
unavailable. System will come up in
Local DB.”
If Server connection is lost, Information
Centers and Clients will still show Server
“offline/idle” in their Status Logs.
Ping connections between devices and
Server to test connectivity.
Switch down Inspect the Switch front panel LEDs for Identify failed link or Switch
indications of
- power loss, Correct failed link or Switch
- device failure, or
- Link LEDs off. Reestablish Server connection to
Review Event Log and Application Log Switch
on Information Centers and Clients. An
“SDProcess” error message is logged, i.e. Restart Information Centers and
- Warning 3257 “System restarted using Clients if necessary. (Clients may
the local database mode because the restart automatically.)
server is not available” or
- Warning 4208 “Restarting applications
because the database server connection is
unavailable. System will come up in
Local DB.”
Ping connections between devices and
Server to test connectivity.
Ping Switch by its IP Address.
Clients start up to operating Information Centers Server connectivity must be operational or Complete all configurations of data
mode but display “Data Lost for sourcing data is in Local Client will start up to local database mode. sourcing Information Center.
this Patient” Database Mode (common Restart data sourcing Information
during system startup) Center.
Client configuration wrong Review Client’s configuration in Server’s Correct Client’s configuration on
on Server, e.g. it could be Bed Configuration-Read Only Server.
looking for a non-existent application to confirm. Restart all Information Centers
SDN source and Clients.
Some or all Information Centers Intermittent network This condition is difficult to verify. Call Philips Service Representative
and Clients restart and return to interruption If the network problem is transient, the or Response Center.
normal operating mode problem may have cleared after devices
restart.
Information Centers and Clients Device not connected as 100 Inspect switch port speed and duplex. Connect Information Center and/
have sluggish Wave Review Mb FULL duplex Check for CRC errors on switch port. or Client to 100 MB FULL duplex
behavior port.
7-21
Troubleshooting
User In many cases users can identify errors or potential problems in the Information
Troubleshooting Center system without disrupting patient monitoring. Error and status messages
appear on the Main Screen to alert users to minor problems or status conditions,
while other problems can be reviewed in the Status Log. Once a problem has been
identified, the user can also access Support Information to determine who to
contact to resolve the problem.
Note Service support staff should periodically review User Troubleshooting tools with
users to assist them in self-diagnosing minor problems, to identify who to call when
unable to resolve a problem, and so they can provide useful information to service
personnel about a problem.
Error and Status There are a number of system conditions that will be identified by Philips software
Messages during routine system assessments. These conditions immediately show the
appropriate error and status message on the Main Screen.
Table 7-6 describes possible error and status Messages that can appear on the
Main Screen.
Table 7-6 Error and Status Messages on Main Screen

Message Possible Cause(s) Corrective Action(s)
Recorder Error Messages
XXX recorder out of paper Recorder is out of paper Replace paper roll
(XXX = Left, Center, or Right)
XXX recorder door is open Recorder door is open - Close Recorder door
- Replace Recorder
No recorder connected - No Recorder is in Recorder Rack - Insert Recorder in Recorder Rack
- Recorder is in Recorder Rack - Reseat Recorder in Recorder Rack
- Replace Recorder or Rack
XXX recorder hardware fault Recorder is inoperable Replace Recorder.
Recorder Rack There is a fault in the Recorder Rack or - Reseat Recorder in Recorder Rack
Power Supply Fault Recorder Rack Power Supply - Check Recorder Rack and Power
No Recorder Supply
4-Channel Recorder Not Ready 4-Channel Recorder is out of paper, has - Replace Paper roll
no power, and the serial recorder cable is - Check Recorder Power
not connected or the recorder has some - Check cable connections
internal failure causing it to be offline.
Printer Status Messages
Appxx print job
- in progress - print job is being sent to the printer - None
- sent to printer - printer has received the job, printing - None
- waiting for printer is in process
- failed - print job is spooled and waiting for - None, If problem persists, check
where Appxx is the name of the printer to become available printer or printer spooler
application (e.g. Trend Review) - print job has failed - Resend print job
Check printer for problems - printer has a paper jam - remove paper jam
- out of paper - add paper to printer
- printer off line - consult printer documentation
7-22
Troubleshooting
Table 7-6 Error and Status Messages on Main Screen

Message Possible Cause(s) Corrective Action(s)
Printer is busy - printer is presently printing - None
Printer needs attention - printer problem exists - see steps above
No printer connected System does not recognize any connected - check printer connection
printer - check printer configuration
Other Messages
Move mouse over blue sector to silence No mouse movement within 30 seconds Use the mouse to silence the alarms
alarms following an alarm
To Restore Normal Operation - Press Connectivity to Server has been restored Press Restart Network in Patient
“Restart Network” in Patient Window after a power failure Window.
System restarts and monitoring will be
unavailable for about 5 minutes
Operating in Local DB -- See User’s Check User’s Guide to review limited
Guide for Details; Check Patient and Connectivity to Server has failed operations
Unit settings Check Patient and Unit settings
System problem -- contact service.
Some functions disabled Check Network/Server connectivity
Patient Database Server Disk Failure -- Server has detected a failure on one of its Replace failed disk
contact service disks
Alarm Paging not available connectivity between an Information Re-establish connection to the external
Center and the configured external alert alert data device
data paging device is not available
Excessive wireless data loss Excessive occurrence of dropped
messages has occurred between one or
more wireless M3/M4 bedsides and an
access point.
Excessive wireless interference Excessive occurrence of dropped Remove any potential causes of
messages and acknowledge errors have interference (i.e. microwaves, etc.)
occurred between one or more wireless
M3/M4 bedsides and an access point.
Router Failure - Call Service Router is not functioning Check Router LED and configuration.
Refer to the Router Installation and
Service Manual for details.
Wireless Monitoring loss Intermittent disruption or failures in Review the Wireless Status Log for
communication between one or more indication of error.
patient monitoring wireless devices and
the Information Center.
Status Log If the system does not seem to be operating properly or some unusual hardware or
software event occurs, users should access the Status Log to determine the
operational status of devices on the system. The Status Log can be accessed by
users from the All Controls window and is the first place users should look to
identify a problem with a Philips hardware device.
Users can quickly review the Status column of this Log to identify devices that are
not in proper operational condition, e.g. “Offline”, or are not listed, meaning they are
no longer connected to the SDN. These device conditions can then be reported to
service personnel for corrective action.
7-23
Troubleshooting
Purchased Options A Support Info button on the Service screen permits viewing a “Read Only”
and Support Purchased Options and Support Information screen that has information that
Information may be useful to service personnel.
Step 1. Go to ALL Controls > Service from the Information Center Patient
Window.
The Service screen (Figure 7-2) opens.
Figure 7-2 Service Password Screen
Step 2. Click the Support Info button to open the Read Only Config Wizard
screen (Figure 7-3).
Step 3. Click the Purchased Options and Support Information tab to select
the screen.
Figure 7-3 Purchased Options and Support Information Screen

Example
7-24
Troubleshooting
Service Personnel If you cannot resolve a problem notify service personnel. The service user can access
Troubleshooting the extensive troubleshooting applications available in the Service menus.
Tools
M3155 M3151
Menu Selection M3154 M3169 M3150 M3140 Notes
M3145 M3177
Support Logs (page 7-28)
Event Log X X X X X X
Service Log X X X X X X
(Edit, View)
Status Log X X X X X X
Network Statistics X X X X X X
Telemetry Services X X X
Diagnostics (page 7-61)
!SDN/Recorder Diagnos- X X X
tics
Recording/Printing X X X X Available if either

Diagnostics 2-Channel or
4-Channel recorder is
configured
System Diagnostics X X X X X X
Performance Monitor X X X X X X
Windows Explorer X X X X X X
Command Prompt X X X X X X
Backup Error Logs X X X X X X
USB Recorder Logs X X X X Available if USB

recorder is configured
Redirect HL7 X X X X
Configurationa (page 7-67)
!Config Wizard X X X X X X M3140: Mini-Config
Read Only Config Wizard X X X X X X M3140: Mini-Config
Archive X X X X
Set Time/Date X X X X If no external time

source configured
Report Configuration X X X
Report/Recording Desti- X X X
nation
7-25
Troubleshooting
M3155 M3151
M3145 M3177
Add/Remove Database X (Master Only)

Servers
Patient Data Transfer - X Available if Patient

Bandwidth Utilization Transfer option is
enabled
Equipment Label X X
Assignment
Save/View Configuration X X X X X X
Security (page 7-70)
Change Clinical Units X X X X X X

Password
Change Service X X X X X X
Password
Research Export X X X X X
Options
Remote Access Admin. X X
User Manager X X X X Available if Web option

is enabled
EWS/Device Location X X X
Compatibility
Other Services (page 7-72)
Control Panel X X X X X X
!Services X X X X X X
Software Versions X X X X X X
Internet Service Manager X X X Available if Web option

is enabled
Refer to the Windows
documentation for
more information
System Validation X X X X
Shutdown (page 7-75)
!Shutdown - Normal X X X X X X
!Desktop Tools X X X X X X
7-26
Troubleshooting
M3155 M3151
M3145 M3177
Maintenance (page 7-77)
Restart IIS Admin X X X Does not cause Infor-

Service mation Centers to oper-
ate in local mode
Restart DBServ X X
Restart NetworkService X X
Synchronize Large X
Network Server List
Reset Database Log X X
Reset Recorder Logs X X X X Available if USB

recorder is configured
!Upgrade NLS Catalogs X X Available on DataBase

Servers only
WMTS Data Collection X X X X

a
For more information about the Configuration menu selections refer to Chapter 6.
7-27
Troubleshooting
Support Logs Support Logs provide information on the operational condition of the Philips
system and devices connected to it. They are the following.
Note If using a remote PC to view the Logs, the specific Information Center PC platform
driver must be installed on that remote machine.
Event Log The Event Log records all events and errors that occur in the Philips system when it
starts and as it operates. It uses the standard Windows Event Viewer application. The
Event Log is the first place service personnel should look for system problems. It
cannot be printed. An “event” is any significant occurrence in the system, security, or
applications for which users should be notified. Clicking on Event Log in the
Service menu brings up the following Event Viewer window.
Figure 7-8 Event Viewer (Log) Window
• Click on an Event Viewer category to display the Events recorded in that

category.
System records events logged by Windows system components, services, and

SDN interfaces; for example, the failure of a driver or other system component
to load during startup.
Security records events related to system security.
Note The Security Log is not used in present Philips releases.
Application records events in Information Center applications.
7-28
Troubleshooting
Each event includes:
Date
Time
Source (the software that logged the event)
Category (the type of event as defined by the source)
Event (number assigned to the event for identification)
User
Computer (name of the computer where the logged event occurred)
Type:
Error - Significant problem, such as a loss of data or loss of function; for

example, an application or Windows service was not loaded during startup.
Warning - Events that are not necessarily significant but indicate possible
future problems; for example, when disk space is low.
Information - Infrequent significant events that describe successful

operations of major server services; for example when a database program
loads successfully.
Success Audit - Audited security access attempts that were successful;

for example, a user’s successful attempt to log on to the system.
Failure Audit - Audited security access attempts that failed; for example,
if a user tried to access a network driver and failed.
Note Error coded events are the only type of events that relate to Philips applications and
are the only codes described in this document. For descriptions of other types of
events, refer to Windows documentation.
Event Log menu selections do the following:
View provides features for filtering, ordering, and finding events.
Options permits a low speed connection, saves settings on exit, and changes
character fonts.
Help provides detailed descriptions of the Event Viewer features.
Note Windows Help screens may cover part of patient waveforms, but do not effect
monitoring or alarms. To see patient data, resize and move the Help screen
The Event Log cannot be printed.
7-29
Troubleshooting
Table 7-7 describes Application Events that can appear in the Event Log; Table
7-8 describes System Events.
Application Events To access Application events designated Error and Warning :
Step 1. Go to Support Logs > Event Logs from the Service screen.
The Even Viewer screen displays.
Step 2. Select Application.

All application events display.
Step 3. Go to View > Filter Events.

The Application Properties screen displays.
Step 4. Click check boxes for Event types: Error and Warning.
Step 5. Click the down arrow in the Event Source text box and select (All).
Step 6. Click the down arrow in the Category text box and select (All).
Step 7. Click the down arrow in the From text box and select First Event.
Step 8. Click the down arrow in the To text box and select Last Event.
Step 9. Click OK in the Application Properties screen.

The events display in the Event Viewer screen.
Note The error, WMIADapter Error (Open of Service Failed), may display, but has no
effect on the Information Center performance.
7-30
Troubleshooting
Table 7-7 Application Events

Description
Source Explanation Corrective Action
(Event Code)
Dataserver Error: 2000 Monitoring conflict or Central Station Correct SDN branch assignments in SDN
number conflict Config and Display Setup to assure that
A bed is being monitored by more than each monitor is assigned to only one
one Information Center. Central Station
Error: 2001 Patient Data Store told Data Contact Response Center
Acquisition to tune more than 16 beds
simultaneously.
Error: 2002 Network error - Check SCC cable and SDN interface
SCC probably disconnected or turned connection
off. - Check that SCC is turned on.
Error: 2004 Length of message block received from Contact Response Center
Redirector does not equal the first word
of the buffer.
Error: 2005 Invalid link to next SDN message Contact Response Center
Corrupt incoming data
Error: 2006 SDN message is too small. Contact Response Center
Error: 2007 HRC check failed. Contact Response Center
Error: 2008 Invalid link to next SDN message Contact Response Center
Error: 2009 Invalid high order bits in SDN message Contact Response Center.
Error: 200B Virtual Terminal Protocol could not Contact Response Center.
connect to arrhythmia controls object.
Error: 200C Virtual Terminal Protocol could not Contact Response Center.
connect to database alarms object.
Error: 200D Virtual Terminal Protocol error in Contact Response Center.
GetAlarmWave
Error: 200E, 200F, Low level Data Control Protocol error No action required.
2010, 2011, 2106,
2017, 2018, 2019
Error: 201A Data Acquisition Receive thread is Not an error, no action required.
shutting down.
Error: 201B Low level Data Control Protocol error No action required.
Error: 2021 Branch number changed - Check SCC cabling.
User altered SCC configuration while - Shut down Information Center and restart.
system was running. System should recognize new
branch and start normally.
Error: 2022 SDN Interface Card reset Shut down Information Center and restart.
Error: 2023 Data Link Control header incorrectly Reseat or replace SDN Interface Card.
terminated.
Error: 2024 SDN Data block incorrectly Reseat or replace SDN Interface Card.
terminated.
7-31
Troubleshooting

Description
(Event Code)
dataserver Error: Unhandled Fatal error Restart system to clear. Contact Response
redirector Exception Filter is System will automatically restart to Center if error occurs often.
kicking in clear error state
recmgr
sdprocess
pdsstore
docstatusserver
EMSMainMenu Winsock connection failed. Restart system. If error persists, reinstall OS
software.
Mode of operation could not be read from registry. Therefore, No action is required.
the mode was defaulted to monitoring mode.
The user logon flag could not be read from the registry. Restart system.
Therefore, the user logon was defaulted to the System
Manager account
Could not open the specified event to send to the Shell Restart system.
application
Could not start application because Error = XX Restart system. If error persists, reinstall
Philips software.
Could not open HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE Registry Restart system. If error persists, reinstall OS
because Error = XX and Philips software.
Could not write value to Registry because Error = XX Restart system. If error persists, reinstall
Philips software.
Install Could not open HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE Registry Restart system.
because Error = XX
Could not write value to Registry because Error = %d Restart system. If error persists, contact
Response Center.
OpenProcessToken failed. Contact Response Center.
AdjustTokenPrivileges enable failed. Contact Response Center.
Auto Reboot failed. Restart system or recycle power.
NetCfgLib Auto Reboot failed. Restart system, If error persists, reinstall
Philips software.
OpenProcessToken failed. Restart system. If error persists, reinstall
Philips software.
AdjustTokenPriveleges enable failed. Restart system. If error persists, reinstall
Philips software.
Could not open HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE Registry Restart system. If error persists, reinstall OS
because Error = XX and Philips software.
Could not write value to Registry because Error = XX Restart system. If this persists, reinstall
Philips software.
Could not read value from Registry because Error = %d Restart system. If this persists, reinstall
Philips software.
Could not write to Error File No action is required.
OrbPlus Error: all No action is required.
7-32
Troubleshooting

Description
(Event Code)
ProductConfig Could not open HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE Registry Restart system. If this persists, reinstall OS
because Error = XX and Philips software
Could not write value to Registry because Error = XX Restart system. If this persists, reinstall
Philips software
Philips software
WinSock connection failed Restart system. If this persists, reinstall OS
software
Could not read which configuration applications to run from Reinstall Philips software
the Registry.
Could not start application because Error = XX Restart system.
PswdScrDlg Could not start EMS Main Menu application Restart system. If this persists, reinstall
Philips software
... Application could not be started. Restart system. If this persists, reinstall
Philips software
Logon User does not have the privilege to access EMS Restart system. If this persists, reinstall
applications. Need to update the access rights of the Philips software
SystemManager User.
WinSock connection failed Restart system. If this persists, reinstall OS
software
System manager password entered Verify proper user access
Philips Private password entered Verify proper user access
RecMgr Error: 2504, The default case on a switch was reached. Report to Response Center and restart
system.
Error: 2510, No primary wave was found in the pds. Using the Restart system. If this persists, reinstall
first two waves. Philips software.
Error: 2511, No data was found in the pds. This could be a If this occurs around a patient
temporary startup condition. discharge or transfer or when a
bedside monitor module is pulled
out, no action required.
If occurs at other times, restart system.
Error: 2512, A pds collector could not be created for the If this occurs around a patient
specified patient. discharge or transfer or when a
Error: 2513, A patient could not be found from the If this occurs around a patient
information supplied. discharge or transfer or when a
Error: 2514, This unmarshall routine does not support the Restart system. If problem persists, reinstall
version of data that was marshalled. Philips software. If problem still exists,
contact Response Center.
7-33
Troubleshooting

Description
(Event Code)
RecMgr Error: 2515, One of the waves needed for the recording is no If this occurs around a patient
longer available. discharge or transfer or when a
Error: 2516, The requested memory could not be allocated. Restart system. If this persists, reload
Philips software.
Error: 2517, Data from the pds has not arrived yet. Indicates a If this occurs around a patient
long time delay in retrieving data from the pds. discharge or transfer or when a
Error: 2518, One or more threads in this process failed to start. Restart system. If this persists, reload
Problem is likely due to a system wide failure and may require Philips software.
a restart of the machine.
Error 250C, The recorder corba id key was missing or could Reinstall Philips software.
not be read or written to.
Error: 250D, A corba call failed Restart system. If this persists, reinstall
Philips software
Error: 250E, Programmer error. Please submit a bug report Report text in Event Log to Response
with the text from this message. Center.
Restart system.
SDNConfig The database service has not started. The application must be Restart system.
terminated
sdprocess Clinical password Clinical password was used in Unit Verify proper user access
entered Settings password screen
ServiceLog Winsock connection failed Restart system. If this persists, reinstall OS
EntryApp software
Could not initialize and/or update the application. The Reinstall Philips software
application was terminated
All devices on the network are unavailable. Application Check SDN cable and connections, test
terminated. SCC
Cannot connect to database. Application terminated. Restart system. If this persists, reinstall
Philips software
EMS Service Log Database is corrupt. Shut down the Service Log and Contact
the Response Center
Application could not be started. Restart system. If this persists, reinstall
Philips software
ServiceLog Winsock connection failed Restart system. If this persists, reinstall OS
ViewerApp software
Could not initialize and/or update the application. The Reinstall Philips software
application was terminated
All devices on the network are unavailable. Application Check SDN cable and connections. Test
terminated. SCC
Cannot connect to database. Application terminated. If this persists, reinstall Philips software
7-34
Troubleshooting

Description
(Event Code)
Stardateshell Started application c:\stardate\bin\SDProcess.exe System restarted from a normal restart or a
crash. If normal startup, no action required.
If system crash, contact Response Center.
Entering non-monitoring mode No action required
Could not star-t- +application:.... Restart system. If this persists, reinstall
Philips software
The following service did not start:.... Restart system. If this persists, reinstall
Philips software
Unable to run the Display Setup Application Restart system. If this persists, reinstall
Philips software
Unable to run the Product Configuration Application Restart system. If this persists, reinstall
Philips software
Keyboard filter is not running, or its state cannot be verified. Check keyboard connection, reinstall
Exiting to operating system Philips software
SDN access card or sound driver not started, exiting to Restart system. If this persists, reinstall OS
operating system. and Philips software
Unable to start all Stardate services, exiting to operating Restart system. If this persists, reinstall OS
system. and Philips software
Failed to set Video Mode Access Display Setup, and set number of
displays to 1
Unable to start SDProcess, exiting to operating system. Restart system. If this persists, reinstall
Philips software
Unable to shutdown BootService, exiting to operating system Restart system
The sound driver is not running or its state could not be Restart system. If this persists, reinstall OS
verified. software
Support Info Winsock connection failed Restart system. If this persists, reinstall OS
software
Could not open HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE Registry Restart system. If this persists, reinstall OS
Philips software
TimeSetApp Winsock connection failed Restart system. If this persists, reinstall OS
software
Could not open HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE Registry Restart system. If this persists, reinstall OS
Philips software
Unable to set time on this device. It is not configured. Restart system. If this persists, reinstall
Philips software
TimeSetApp Unable to set system wide time. Check SDN cable and connections.
Test SCC
Unable to set time zone information! Restart system. If this persists, reinstall OS
software
Unable to set the local time! Restart system. If this persists, reinstall OS
software
7-35
Troubleshooting
System Error Log Some software errors that are significant to system operation (unexpected error
Files events), and can help the Response Center or factory personnel resolve problems, are
logged into System Error Log text files. Examples of these errors are Open failed,
socked bind failed, and registry read/write failed. To access these files:
Step 1. Go to Diagnostics > Windows Explorer from the Service screen.

Step 2. Select c:\stardate\log.
The SystemErrors.log appears.
Step 3. To print the file go to File > Print.
or
To view the file go to c:\stardate\bin and double-click LogViewer.exe

The Log Viewer application opens.
Step 4. Go to File > Open and select the log files.

More than one log file can appear.
System Info Log Files Some software errors are not significant to system operation (unexpected cod/data-
logic errors), are logged into System Error Log text files that are different from
the System Error Log. Examples of these errors are: shutdown, startup local mode,
and user went to service mode. These files can be accessed as follows.

Step 2. Select the path c:\stardate\logs.
The SystemInfo.log appears.
or
Step 4. Go to File >Open and select the log files.

More than one log file can appear
Export Log Files Software errors that are related to the export features (HL7, paging, 12-Lead ECG
Management, Holter, Patient Data Transfer) are logged into Export Log text files.
The file can be accessed as follows.

Step 2. Select the path c:\stardate\logs.
Export.log appears.
or

The Log Viewer application opens.
7-36
Troubleshooting
Step 4. Go to File > Open and select the log files.

More than one log file can appear.
Exception Error Log If the system crashes or “exceptions” occur, the state of the system when it crashed is
Files stored in special Exception Error Log files. These files can be useful to the
Response Center or factory personnel in determining the state of the system at the
time of the crash. These files can be accessed as follows.

Step 2. Select the path c:\stardate\logs. and double-click drwtsn32.log to open
the log file.
The drwtsn32.log file can keep track of exceptions. When capacity is reached, the
original file is renamed drwtsn32_old.log, and a new drwtsn32.log file begins.
Backup Error Logs The Backup Error Logs tool copies all Event Logs and Information Center logs from
selected host names to a compressed file on removable media or hard drive. The logs
are copied and compressed for one Information Center, Client, or Database Server at
a time.
Step 1. Go to Diagnostics > Backup Error Logs.

Step 2. Select the device host name.
Step 3. Verify the location of the backup log path. If you want to choose another
location, use the Browse button to navigate.
Step 4. Click Backup Logs.
7-37
Troubleshooting
System Events To access System events that are designated Error and Warning, follow the steps
for Application Events on page 7-30, except check System in Step 2. Table 7-8
includes typical System events.
Table 7-8 System Events

Source Description (Event Code) Corrective Action
SDN Error: 513, SDN RAM error Replace SDN Interface Card
Error: 514, SDN signature RAM error Replace SDN Interface Card
Error: 515, SDN autopoll error Replace SDN Interface Card
Error: 516, SDN TB2 error Replace SDN Interface Card
Error: 517, SDN chip access not in dead time at start of dead Check SDN cable connection to the Philips PC
time. [(No SYNC TAP, (i.e., no SDN connection to IC)]
Error: 519, Background not complete Restart Philips system. If problem persists,
replace SDN Interface Card
Error: 769, Host not responding to interrupt from SDN card. Restart Philips system. If problem persists,
Error: 770, Write to host did not complete - DATA LOST. Restart Philips system. If problem persists,
Error 771, Read from host did not complete. Restart Philips system. If problem persists,
Error: 896, The card was told to read 0 bytes from the SDN Restart Philips system. If problem persists, reload
driver Philips software. If problems still persists, reload
OS and then Philips software.
Error: 897 The driver is trying to send too much data to the Restart Philips system. If problem persists, reload
card. The transfer did not complete. Philips software. If problems still persists, reload
Error: 898, The amount of data read by the card from the driver Restart Philips system. If problem persists,
does not agree with the expected count. The transfer did not replace SDN Interface Card
complete.
Error: 899, The transfer count indicating the amount of data that Restart Philips system. If problem persists,
the driver wants the card to read exceeds the amount that can be replace SDN Interface Card
read by the AMCC chip. The transfer did not complete.
Error: 900, The transfer count indicating the amount of data that Restart Philips system. If problem persists,
the driver wants the card to read is old. The transfer did not replace SDN Interface Card
complete.
Error: 901 The message header contained in the driver to card Restart Philips system. If problem persists,
data is not a valid header. Transfer did not complete. replace SDN Interface Card
Error: 902, The size of the recorder message from the driver to Restart Philips system. If problem persists,
the card is incorrect. The transfer did not complete. replace SDN Interface Card
Error: 903, The driver to card read appeared to be successful but Restart Philips system. If problem persists,
the transfer count to read did not agree with the amount read. replace SDN Interface Card
The transfer did not complete.
Error: 904, The recorder ID in the driver to card recorder Restart Philips system. If problem persists,
message is not a valid ID. Data not sent to the recorder. replace SDN Interface Card
7-38
Troubleshooting

SDN Error: 905, Overflow of one of the driver to card recorder Restart Philips system. If problem persists,
queues (i.e., too much data sent to a recorder). Data not sent to replace SDN Interface Card
the recorder.
Error: 906, Underflow of one of driver to card recorder queues No action required. The Philips system will
(i.e., not enough data sent to the recorder). automatically correct the situation.
Error: 907, Unexpected state of the software for one of the Restart Philips system. If problem persists,
recorders. The software logic for the recorder will be replace SDN Interface Card
reinitialized and the driver to card recorder connection will be
reestablished. Some recording data may be lost
recorders, The software logic for the recorder will be replace SDN Interface Card
reestablished. Some recording data may be lost.
recorders, The software logic for the recorder will be replace SDN Interface Card
Error: 911, All SDN and recorder message packets were Restart Philips system. If problem persists,
transferred from the driver to the card correctly but there was no replace SDN Interface Card
end of message header. Transfer did not complete.
recorders. The software logic for the recorder will be replace SDN Interface Card
Error: 913, Have reached the end of the driver to card transfer Restart Philips system. If problem persists,
count while reading an sdn message packet and there was no replace SDN Interface Card
Error: 914, Have reached the end of the driver to card transfer Restart Philips system. If problem persists,
count while reading a recorder message packet and there was no replace SDN Interface Card
Error: 917, The card did not have enough time to transfer the Restart Philips system. If problem persists,
data to the driver across the PCI bus (i.e., some device may be replace SDN Interface Card
holding onto the PCI bus for too long). Transfer did not
complete.
Error: 918, Card to driver message queue overflow. The card Restart Philips system. If problem persists,
was not able to push data to the driver fast enough. One 32ms replace SDN Interface Card
frame of data lost.
Error: 919, The driver interrupted the card indicating that the Restart Philips system. If problem persists,
next card to driver transfer could be started but the transfer replace SDN Interface Card
count indicates that the driver did not finish reading data from
the last transfer from the card. Data from the card to the driver
may be lost.
Error: 920, Unexpected state in the card to driver data transfer Restart Philips system. If problem persists,
software. replace SDN Interface Card
Error: 928, Device id list is too small Restart Philips system. If problem persists,
7-39
Troubleshooting

SDN Error: 930, Plugged devices table does not match number of Restart Philips system. If problem persists,
devices marked as plugged in replace SDN Interface Card
Error: 931, Invalid rack interface number or rack slot number Connect correct or new rack to the Philips system
Error: 935, A device other than a Morgana recorder is plugged Remove incorrect plug-in module
in
Error: 938, Can’t find a device status entry that should be there Restart Philips system. If problem persists,
Error: 1553, SDN adapter incompatible hardware and firmware Replace SDN Interface Card. If problem persists,
reinstall Philips software.
Error: 1554, SDN adapter missing hardware Replace SDN Interface Card.
Error: 1793, Adapter never responded to reset command within Restart Philips system. If problem persists,
time-out period. Adapter has been declared dead. replace SDN Interface Card
Error: 1794, Firmware data file janus.afc is not accessible. Reinstall Philips software.
Error: 1795, Invalid firmware found on adapter -- Loading new No action required, normal operation when the
firmware from local firmware file Philips system is started.
Error: 1796, Unable to create the symbolic link for janus.afc. Restart Philips system. If problem persists, reload
Philips software. If problems still persists, reload
Error: 1797, No SDN adapter interrupts have occurred within Restart Philips system. If problem persists,
time-out period - Scheduling an adapter reset. replace SDN Interface Card
Error: 1798, Performing driver initiated adapter reset. No action required, normal operation when the
Philips system is started.
Error: 1799, The SDN adapter is running. No action required, normal operation when the
Philips system is started.
Error: 1800, A user requested an adapter reset via the No action required, normal operation when the
SdnMonitor utility. Philips system is started.
Error: 1801, The driver was not called back to perform an Restart Philips system. If problem persists, reload
adapter reset within the predetermined amount of time. The Philips software. If problems still persists, reload
driver and adapter have been made inactive. OS and then Philips software.
Error: 1802, Timeout while waiting for the OS kernel to call the Restart Philips system. If problem persists, reload
driver back to perform an adapter reset - retrying kernel call- Philips software. If problems still persists, reload
back request. OS and then Philips software.
Error: 1803, The previous error has repeated. To avoid filling No action required, normal operation when the
the event log with the same error, this error will not be logged Philips system is started.
until a different error, or no error, is encountered.
Error: 1804, The adapter’s boot strap code (DBOOT) has been No action required, normal operation when the
started. The driver will attempt to restart the SDN adapter. Philips system is started.
7-40
Troubleshooting
Service Log The Service Log permits logging of service performed on equipment connected to
the Network/Server system. Each time the system or a device is changed, moved,
repaired, or upgraded an entry should be made to the Service Log to track system
status and history. The Service Log can store up to 500 entries.
New entries are made in the Edit Service Log option of the Service Log.
Equipment status and history can be reviewed in the View Service Log option.
Edit Service Log The Edit Service Log screen (Figure 7-9) permits adding information to the
Service Log on devices that have been serviced.
Figure 7-9 Edit Service Log
The following fields are used to Enter the device information.
Device Name is for entering the name of the device being serviced, e.g. Central1,
Bed1.
Service Person’s Name is for entering the name of the person who made the
change or is entering the information.
Description of the Repair/Upgrade is for entering a brief description of the

change that was made. It has a 255 character limit.
Date (MDY) is for setting the date (Month / Day / Year) the change was made
using the up/down buttons to change the values in the boxes.
Time (h:mm) is for setting the time (hour:minutes) the change was made using the
up/down buttons to change the values in the boxes.
Note You must click the ADD button after entering information in order for the system to
record the information.
The Service Log can have up to 500 entries. When the log is nearly full (490 - 500
entries), a message to archive the Service Log appears. If you choose to archive the
7-41
Troubleshooting
Service Log, a Save As dialog appears. The Service Log displays the last 500
entries even if it has been archived.
If you decide not to archive the Service Log, the system deletes the oldest entry
each time a new entry is added. Be sure to archive Service Log information
regularly since it may be lost if the drive crashes.
Note On Network/Server systems, Service Log information is stored on the Server. If

information is stored when a device is in Local Database mode, it will be lost when
the device reconnects to the Server.
View Service Log The View Service Log window (Figure 7-10) permits review of the system
service history.
Figure 7-10 Service Log View
The service history of individual devices can be viewed.
Device Name, e.g. Central1, Bed1,...

Date of the entry
Time of the entry
Service Person who performed the service
Description of Service that was performed
Note You can click on and hold the field separator lines to change the column widths.
Scroll bars are included to navigate through the logs.
7-42
Troubleshooting
Archiving the Service Step 1. Click Save in the View Service Log dialog. A message prompts you to
Log insert archive media.
Step 2. Put the Archive disk into the appropriate device drive and click OK.
The Save As dialog opens.
Step 3. Select the desired drive in the Save in: pull-down list.
Step 4. Type in a File name for the Service Log.
Step 5. Click the Save as type pull-down arrow and select a file type.
Text Files (*.TXT) saves the data in ASCII type format for viewing
applications, such as Notepad.
dB Export file (*.DAT) saves the data to a disk for importing to a database
for operational applications, such as spreadsheets. The file consists of rows
corresponding to the data columns in the Service Log. Column items are
surrounded by quotes (“) and separated by commas (,).
Step 6. Click Save.

When the archive is complete, an SDProcessed message appears.
Step 7. Click OK to continue.
Step 8. If a file overwrite is required, a Yes/No verification dialog appears.

Click Yes to overwrite the existing file.
If the file cannot be saved, an error message appears. Replace the Archive
media and repeat the process.
Step 9. When the Save process is complete remove the Archive media and store it in
a safe place.
Service Log data for the first 200 entries are stored on the disk. If the file was saved
as a dB Export file, the data can be imported to another data base.
Status Log The Status Log provides information on the operational status of all devices
connected to the same Network as an Information Center or Client.
Note If the Information Center or Client is in Local Database Mode, data on other Network
connected devices will not be current and may be incorrect.
You can access the Quick Unit Status and All Data Categories logs using All
Controls or the Service menu.
7-43
Troubleshooting
Quick Unit Status The Quick Unit Status Log (Figure 7-11) provides summary information for
identification and reporting of problems with devices in a clinical unit.
Figure 7-11 Quick Unit Status Log
The log contains:
Domain Name is a read-only field that displays the Host Name of the Database
Server on the Network of the device. For local database Information Centers, it is
blank.
Status Category has a pull down list for selecting the desired version of the
Status Log.
Quick Unit Status provides information on Devices only and is the version
accessed by users directly from the Configuration and Support menu of the
All Controls window.
All Data Categories is for service personnel and provides information on

Devices, Network, Hardware, Software, Product Options, and the
Recorder Destination for each Information Center and Client.
7-44
Troubleshooting
Details: includes the following:
Device Name is the name assigned to the device when it was added to the
network in !Network Configuration.
Device Category is the type of device.
Model is the specific model or model number of the device (e.g. M3150,
CMx Bedside)
Host Name/MAC Address is the Host Name or MAC Address of the

Information Center the device is connected to.
IP Branch is the IP Address or SDN branch number (0 - 31) of the device (if
applicable).
Status is the operational status of the device (e.g. Online, Offline)
Operating Mode is the device operating mode, if defined (e.g. Monitoring,

Demo, Unknown)
Software Revision is the identifying number of the Philips software release

(e.g. L.xx.xx for current software)
Central Assign. is the name of the central station to which the device is
assigned (if applicable).
CS#/Location is the number of the central station to which the device is

assigned (if applicable) or the Port location of the device.
System Serial # is the serial number of the Information Center system.
Device Serial # is the serial number of the Information Center to which the
device is connected.
Firmware Addr. is the radio firmware revision of wireless monitors.
Notes The column width of the Details field can be changed by clicking and holding on the
vertical line separating the field titles and moving the line left or right.
Arrows in the corners of the field scroll the field left/right and up/down.
The Status Log can only be accessed from Monitoring Mode.
Print opens a dialog for printing the Status Log to the default printer.
Save permits saving the log to removable media. The archive procedure is the
same as that for the Service Log (page 7-43).
Refresh gives an immediate update of recent events.
7-45
Troubleshooting
All Data Categories The All Data Categories Status Log (Figure 7-12) includes the same Device
information as the Quick Unit Status Log and includes Philips system information.
Figure 7-12 All Data Categories Status Log Example
Network: The following information is provided in the Status Log for each device
on the network.
Device Name: e.g. CCU1, Central1, etc.

IP Address #: e.g. 172.31.xxx.x
Subnet Mask: i.e. 255.255.248.0
MAC Address: of the device PC
Hardware: Information on the following hardware components of each device on

the network is provided:
Processing Unit: Processor, System BIOS, Video BIOS

Hard Disk Drive: (information may only be model #)
CD-ROM drive:
SDN Interface Card: firmware Revision # and hardware Serial #
Sound card: model type only
Serial Ports: COM1, COM2
Parallel Port:
Network Adapter:
Keyboard:
Pointer Device:
Printer:
The following information is provided for each of these hardware components, if

available:
Device Name: Device Name given to the networked device (e.g. ICU1,
Central1, etc.)
Hardware Name: name of the hardware component contained in the Device

(e.g. as listed in the previous Hardware component list)
Hardware Model: (not available for all hardware components)
7-46
Troubleshooting
Version (of Firmware or driver): (not available for all hardware

components)
Serial #: (not available for all hardware components)
Software: The following information is provided for Information Center software

for each networked device:
Device Name: e.g. ICU1, Central1, etc.
Revision:
Network Version:
Product Version:
Product Options: The following information is provided for the options that have
been purchased for each Philips system on the network:
Model Type: M3150 IIC Local DB, M3155 IIC Network DB, M3151 IIC
Client, M3154 Large DBS, M3169 Small DBS, M3170 Patient Link
Number of Patients: 4, 6, 8, 12, 16 for Information Centers and Clients;

up to 48 for the M3169 Small Database Server; up to 128 for the M3154
Database Server
Number of Displays: 1 or 2
Host Name: Host Name given to the device when it was installed
Recorder Destination: Identification of the recorder where each device’s

recordings are sent, as configured in !Set Recording Destination for each device:
Device Name: Device Name for each Information Center or Client
Is Recorder Connected: whether a recorder is connected to the Device,

Yes or No
Recorder Destination Host Name: Host Name of the Device whose

recorder will print recordings from this Device
Recorder Destination Device Name: Device Name of the Device

whose recorder will print recordings from this Device
Wireless Status The Wireless Status tab opens the Wireless Status log. Each log entry includes
Urgency, Time (dd/mm/yyyy), Condition, Flag, Scope, and Response.
Transfer Status The Transfer Status log shows all transfer transactions indicating whether the
transactions completed successfully or not.
7-47
Troubleshooting
Lab Results Status Lab Results Status tab in Status Logs provides a chronological history log of
labs entered into the system. It is intended as a troubleshooting aid and is not a
clinical decision support application.
Each log entry includes Bed Label, Lab Source, Lab Time, Code,
Description, Value, and Units. The log contains up to 1000 entries with the
newest entry at the top of the list.
Network Statistics The Network Statistics tool provides access to operational information from
switches on the Clinical Network. This information allows service personnel to
determine if network switches are operating within normal bounds, troubleshoot
network component failures, and correlate observed application events to network
communication problems. Network Statistics runs in monitoring mode and is
available on the Server and all Network connected Information Centers and Clients.
Note If you purchased a new Database Server system, the Network Statistics screen is the
HP 2524 which is illustrated. If upgrading from an earlier release, the Cisco Switch
may be shown. For detailed information refer to Cisco Switch.
Warnings Verify that clinical users are not using the Information Center Web when
opening Network statistics on the Database Server. When the Network Statistics
web page opens, the Information Center Web Access loses communication.
Do Not Load HP TopTools or any other network management software on the

system; it will adversely affect system performance and may result in loss of
monitoring.
7-48
Troubleshooting
• From the Service screen, go to Support Logs > Network Statistics. The
Network Statistics screen opens (Figure 7-13).
Figure 7-13 Network Statistics Screen Menus
Switches HP 2524 Switch
When you select a configured switch from the Switches pull-down list of
configured switches the Network Statistics screen shows the Status tab for the
selected switch (Figure 7-14).
Figure 7-14 Network Statistics for HP 2524 Switch
The Status tab screen provides:

Status: severity level of the event generated.
Alert: specific event identification.
Date/Time: date and time event was received by the Web browser interface
Data appears in the format: DD-MM-YY HH:MM:SS AM/PM
(for example, 19-04-01 09:15:26 AM).
Description
• For information on network traffic quality, go to the Status tab and select
Port Counters.
The Identity tab screen provides:

System Name: name of the selected switch
7-49
Troubleshooting
System Location: selected switch location

System Contact: person to contact if the system experiences trouble
System Up-Time: how long the system has been active
Product: displays the Switch information
Version: firmware version installed
IP Address: IP Address assigned to switch
Management Server: Web site URL to go to for help
Caution Do not use the Configuration screens to make modifications to the Switch
configuration. Use the Network Configuration Tool described in the Clinical
Network documentation to ensure that all parameters are set properly.
:
From the Configuration tab you can get additional information about the switch
port status if you click Device View (Figure 7-15).
Figure 7-15 Device View - HP 2524 Switch
7-50
Troubleshooting
If you click System Info (Figure 7-16) in the Configuration screen you can view
the switch location and add a contact name to be added to the Identity screen. After
you enter new information click Apply Changes.
Figure 7-16 System Info - HP 2524 Switch
7-51
Troubleshooting
From the Diagnostics tab you can ping network devices.
1. Select Ping/Link Test (Figure 7-17).

2. Type the IP address of the desired device in the text box.
3. Click Start.
Figure 7-17 Ping/Test Window - HP 2524 Switch
If you want to see the switch configuration settings, click Configuration Report.
Table 7-9 compares the HP2524 default settings and Recommended (Configured)
switch settings:
Table 7-9 Configuration Parameters

Setting Factory Default Recommended (Configured)
System Name HP ProCurve Switch 2524 Name given to switch
Inactivity Timeout (min) 0 10
Port/Trunk settings (Ports 1-26)
Type All set to 10/100TX All set to 10/100TX
Enabled All set to Yes All set to Yes
Mode All set to Auto Ports configured to specific mode through the
ConfigTool. 10HDx for 10 Mbps Half Duplex devices or
100FDx for 100 Mbps Full Duplex devices
Example: For a system with a Tier Switch, DBS and two

Information Centers, one port (24) must be set to 100FDx
for switches, and 3 ports (21-23) must be set to 100FDx
for devices since the DBS and Information Center/Client
requires a 100 Mbit Full Duplex connection.
Flow Ctrl All set to Disable All set to Disable
IP Address IP Default 172.31.0.0 through 172.31.0.Subnet Mask
255.255.248.0
Console/Serial Link
Inbound Telnet Enabled Yes Yes
Web Agent Enabled Yes Yes
Terminal Type VT100 ANSI
Screen Refresh Interval (sec) 3 3
7-52
Troubleshooting
Table 7-9 Configuration Parameters

Setting Factory Default Recommended (Configured)
Displayed Events All All
Baud Rate speed-sense speed-sense
Flow Control XON/XOFF XON/XOFF
Session Inactivity Time (min) 0 10
Spanning Tree Operation*
* The Spanning Tree Operation values are not shown in this window. To see the
Spanning Tree values, you must use a Hyper Terminal connection. The PC must
meet the following requirements.
• MicroSoft Operating System software (Windows 98 or Windows NT)

• 200 MHz or faster
• RS 232 serial interface port (9-Pin D type connector)
If the PC is the Database Server using Hyper terminal from Port A, the UPS
connection must be temporarily removed and disabled.
Step 1. Plug one end of the 9-pin D female - 9-pin D female cable into the RS 232
connector of the configuring PC
Step 2. Plug the other end of the cable into the CONSOLE port on the front of the
HP ProCurve 2524 switch.
Step 3. Turn On the PC and Switch.
If the Server’s UPS service detects that the UPS is not connected to Serial Port A, a
message indicating At least one service failed to initialize... may appear.
Step 4. If the message appears click OK and go to Step 11.

Step 5. If the message does not appear, from the Windows Main Menu go to Start
> Settings > Control Panel and double click the Services icon to open
the Services window.
Step 6. Highlight UPS in the Services list.
Step 7. Click Stop to disable the UPS connection.
A confirmation message appears.
Step 8. Click Yes in the message dialog.
A momentary Attempting to stop... message appears.
Step 9. When the UPS connection is disabled, close the Services window and
Control Panel.
Step 10. Go to Start > Programs > Accessories > Hyperterminal to open the
New Connection - HyperTerminal window.
Note If a Connection Description window appears, click Cancel to close it.
Step 11. Click File in the New Connection - HyperTerminal window.
7-53
Troubleshooting
Step 12. Click Properties to open the New Connection Properties window.
Step 13. Click the Connect to tab.
Step 14. Click the Connect Using pull-down arrow to display its list.
Step 15. Click COM1.
Step 16. Click Configure to display the COM1 Properties window.
Step 17. Configure the COM1 port to the following RS 232 settings:
Bits per second: 9600
Data bits: 8
Parity: None
Stop bits: 1
Flow control: Xon/Xoff
Step 18. Press Enter twice to get to the command line. If the command line does
not appear, recycle power on the switch (disconnect and connect power cable).
Step 19. At the command line prompt, enter the following:
Type 2 for Switch Config
Type 4 for Spanning Tree operation
The first 8 ports are displayed. To view the other ports, go to Edit and
press Enter. Use the down arrow navigate.
The ports configured for 10 Mb/s Half Duplex devices and 100 Mb/s
Full Duplex devices (e.g. Database Servers, Information Centers, etc.)
should be set to FAST mode, and the Auto and 100 Mb/s Full Duplex
Switch/Router ports should be set to NORM.
When done, press Enter, then Press Cancel.
Cisco Switch
If you select Switch in the Network Statistics screen the list of configured
switches (and IP Address) appears. When you select a switch in the list a Switch
Manager screen similar to Figure 7-18 opens. If a Username and Password is
required, enter the Console Password.
Caution Verify that clinical users are not using the Information Center Web when
opening Network Statistics on the DataBase Server. When the Network
Statistics page opens, the Information Center Web Access loses communication.
7-54
Troubleshooting
Figure 7-18 Network Statistics Window for Cisco Switch
The Switch Manager screen provides the following information about the switch
and a switch image:
Host Name of the Server the switch is connected to.

Name of Switch: Device Name assigned to the switch in Network
Configuration.
Switch IP Address: IP Address of the switch on the network.
Physical Location: location of the switch entered in Network
Configuration
Help provides access to additional information. Help screens may cause temporary
color changes to Philips monitoring screens but do not otherwise effect patient
monitoring display or storage.
Caution This application allows the user to change switch settings. To ensure that all
parameters are set properly, switch settings should only be changed with the
Network Configuration Tool described in the Clinical Network documentation.
7-55
Troubleshooting
The Switch Manager also provides an image of the selected switch. If you click on a
port in the switch, a Ports Table opens which has statistical information about each
port on the switch. Figure 7-19 shows an example 100 Base T Ports Table for
ports used by switch (0/26) and the Server (0/27).
Figure 7-19 100 Base T Ports Table Example
Click on Stats... in the Statistics column of a port to open a Detailed Port

Statistics Report for the port. Figure 7-20 illustrates the Detailed Port
Statistics Report for port FastEthernet 0/27. Report statistics are cumulative from
the time the device starts or from when the Report was last cleared.
Figure 7-20 Detailed Port Statistics Report Example
7-56
Troubleshooting
Access Point Access Point Controller provides a list of the networked access points
Controller configured in Network Configuration; this is described in the Clinical Network
documentation.
Access Points Access Points provides a list of the networked access points configured in
Network Configuration; this is described in the Clinical Network documentation.
Search by IP Search by IP opens a dialog that permits selecting a Switch by IP Address:
1. Type the desired IP Address in the text box.
2. Click OK.
Stop Stop terminates a search.
Print Print opens the Print Manager dialog.
7-57
Troubleshooting
Telemetry The Information Center uses the Telemetry Services tool to access information
Services from Telemetry Mainframes. Go to Support Logs > Telemetry Services from
the Service screen to open the Telemetry Mainframe Services screen
(Figure 7-21). It is available in monitoring mode only.
Figure 7-21 Telemetry Mainframe Services Screen
Notes Telemetry Mainframe Services screens are read only and cannot be edited.
To change telemetry settings, use the Telemetry Service Tool.
To change frequency settings for telemetry receivers, use the Telem Freq.
application in the Unit Settings menu.
For more detailed information on telemetry mainframes and transmitters, refer to the
Telemetry Service Manuals.
The Telemetry Mainframe Services screen includes the following:
Telemetry Mainframes permits selecting a telemetry mainframe.
Record RF History generates a recording strip of all receiver RF histories

for the selected telemetry mainframe.
Refresh updates the screen information.
Note If Telemetry Mainframe configurations are changed, both the Telemetry Mainframe
and the Information Center must be restarted to see the changes in the Telemetry
Mainframe Services screen. The Refresh button will not update the screen if
configurations change.
7-58
Troubleshooting
Revision The Revision screen displays the following:
Mainframe Serial Number

EEPROM Part Number
Software Part Number
Revision Number
Slot Number
Boards in the Mainframe: Slot, Type, Hardware Part Number, Firmware
Revision
Receivers for the Mainframe: Slot, Type, Hardware Part Number,
Firmware Revision
Configuration The Configuration screen includes the following:
SDN Unit Number

SDN Branch Numbers
Language
Transmitter Button
Auto Self Test (on/off)
Self Test Strip (on/off)
GENERAL ALARM PARAMETERS: Alarm Suspend Time, Alarm
Reminder
GENERAL ECG PARAMETERS: HR Alarm Limits, Lead Fallback,
Extended Monitoring
Transmitters The Transmitters screen shows the following information:
M1400X series transmitters: Bandwidth, Lead Selection, Lead Label,

Lead Swap (on/off)
M26xxx series transmitters: Bandwidth, Lead Selection, Lead Label,
SpO2 Alarm Limits
ST Parameters The ST Parameters screen shows the following:
General ST Parameters: ST Module (Enabled/Disabled), ST Alarm

Limits
Measurements (ms): ST Module (Enabled/Disabled), ST Alarm Limits
Error Log The Error Log screen shows the following current Error Log information:
Error Log Information: Card ID, Device ID, Slot, Error Code, Fatal
(Yes/No), Time, Date
A Clear Error Log button is also provided for erasing Error Log information
for the currently selected telemetry mainframe.
7-59
Troubleshooting
NBP Alarm The NBP Alarm screen shows the following Teleframe Settings:
NBP Parameter: NBP Param (Enabled/Disabled), Diastolic Alarm

(Enabled/Disabled), Systolic alarm (Enabled/Disabled)
Diastolic Alarm Limits (High, Low)
Systolic Alarm Limits (High, Low)
SpO2 Alarm Limits (High, Low)
If the telemetry mainframe is not configured for NBP parameters, the NBP
Parameters fields (NBP Parameter, Diastolic Alarm Limits, Systolic Alarm
Limits) are disabled and settings will be those configured in the telemetry
mainframe.
When telemetry beds are monitored by an Information Center, some telemetry

mainframe parameter settings are ignored while others are overridden.
The following telemetry mainframe settings are ignored by the Information Center
and Unit Settings are used instead. To change these settings, use the Information
Center’s Unit Settings application.
- ECG HR Alarm limits

- ST Alarm Limits
- ST Measurement points
The following telemetry mainframe settings are overridden by the Information

Center and cannot be changed.
- ST processing in the telemetry mainframe is disabled since ST

monitoring is done by Information Center Software
- ECG Bandwidth will always be ST, if ST monitoring is on, or Monitor,
if ST monitoring is off.
7-60
Troubleshooting
Diagnostics The Diagnostics menu provides tools for determining status and diagnostic
information on networked printers, recorders, and Serial Distribution Network
(SDN) interfaces.
!SDN/Recorder The !SDN/Recorder Diagnostics tool tests the Serial Distribution Network
Diagnostics (SDN) interface cards in Information Center and Client PCs and the Philips
Recorder. It runs in non-monitoring mode, as indicated by the exclamation mark (!).
Go to Diagnostics > !SDN/Recorder to open the SDN/Recorder Diagnostics
screen.
Figure 7-22 SDN/Recorder Diagnostics Screen
The diagnostic tests provided in the SDN/Recorder Diagnostics screen follow.

RECORDER SELF TEST
Step 1. Select the Recorder to be tested by clicking on its location in the rack -- Left
Recorder, Center Recorder, Right Recorder.
Step 2. Click Start Test. The Recorder generates a print out of operational status
codes. Description of codes are in the Recorder Service Manual.
Stop Test stops the print test before completion.
Recorder Test Status reports the self-test status and the Recorder
condition.
SDN CARD initiates a SDN Card self-test in the Information Center or Client PC
and its branch connections.
Step 1. Click Start Test.
Stop Test stops the SDN card tests before completion.

A progress bar shows the status of the test.
If the SDN Card self-tests pass, the message SDN Card Testing PASSED appears.
Click OK to continue.
If there is an SDN card self-test failure, the message SDN Card Failure appears.
7-61
Troubleshooting
Recording/Printing The Recording/Printing Diagnostics tool tests the connectivity of LaserJet

Diagnostics printers and Philips Recorders connected to the Information Center or Client. It
requires a connected printer or recorder and a source of patient data. Clicking
Recording/Printing Diagnostics in the Diagnostics menu opens the Printer &
Recorder Diagnostics screen.
The Printer & Recorder Diagnostics screen includes:
Recording Test
Recording type provides the data source options -- Live (an actively
monitored patient) and Test (an internal test recording).
• Live activates the Available Beds field from which a live recording from
a specific bed can be selected. A 20 second delayed recording of the
primary and secondary waves from the patient in that bed serves as the
recording test.
• Test selects internal test data for the recording test.
Start initiates the selected test recordings. The Recording Test output is
sent to one of the recorders in the Recorder Rack.
Stop terminates a test in process.
Continue produces a continuous recording.
Status from last job indicates the status of the test (e.g. active, done,
error).
Notes If there is more than one recorder in the Recorder Rack and the recording test fails,
repeat the test with only one recorder in the Rack at a time to determine which
recorder is failing the test.
This window does not provide diagnostics for the 4-Channel Recorder.
7-62
Troubleshooting
Printing Test
Start initiates the test and sends a print test page to the default printer set in
Print Manager.
Stop terminates a test in process.
Status from last job indicates the status of the test.
Note Printer problem troubleshooting for Philips-supplied printers is described in the

Manufacturer Documentation.
System Diagnostics System Diagnostics provides access to tools that help determining status and
diagnostic information about the Windows Operating System, hardware, drivers, and
BIOS. They are available for both Information Centers and Clients and for the
Server. These tools are accessed from the Diagnostics application of the Service
menu.
Diagnostics tools can run on the Server while the Network is in Monitoring Mode.
More detailed descriptions of these tools are provided in Windows Help windows
accessed by clicking on Help in the menu bar of each application.
Note Although Windows Help screens may cover part of patient waveforms, they do not
effect Philips system monitoring or alarms. To see patient data, resize or move the
Help screen.
Performance Monitor Performance Monitor is a graphical tool for measuring the performance of the
computers on the network. See Windows documentation for more detailed
information.
Warning Windows Explorer and the Windows Command Prompt provides read/write
access to all Information Center and Operating System files.
Windows Explorer Windows Explorer is the standard Window tool for organizing and managing files
and directories.
Command Prompt MS DOS Command Prompt is a character-based interface to Windows and its
subsystems.
Backup Error Logs Backup Error Logs copies all Event Logs and Information Center logs from
selected host names to a compressed file.The logs are copied and compressed for one
Information Center, Client, or Database Server at a time.
7-63
Troubleshooting
USB Recorder Logs USB Recorder Logs allows the entire recorder data stream to be captured for
advanced troubleshooting.
Redirect HL7 The Redirect HL7 allows for easier troubleshooting of HL7 data export problems.
This diagnostic tool redirects the HL7 target system output data configured for one
target system to a different host system and allows the Client.exe tool to run on the
Database Server. The original target system will not receive the HL7 data while this
tool is running.
This can be run while in Monitoring mode, however there is a possibility that a
restart may be required. To redirect the HL7 output data:
Step 1. From the Database Server service screen, go to
Diagnostics > Redirect HL7.
Figure 7-23 Redirect HL7 Dialog
Step 2. Select the IP Address of the Target system you want the HL7 output data
redirected from that is in the From drop-down list.
Step 3. Enter the IP Address of the Target system you want the HL7 output data
redirected to in the To text box.
Step 4. Click Redirect.
If successful, a message confirms that the HL7 output has been redirected. If
not successful, a message displays.
Step 5. After the data has been collected, the target system must be returned to the
original configuration. Follow steps 2 through 4, but swap the From and To
IP Addresses.
Note The Redirect HL7 menu must be used to return the target system setting to the
original configuration.
Service Portal Support The Diagnostics menu of the Database Server has a Service Portal Support
application that provides direct access to most of the Support Logs for all devices on
the network -- Information Centers, Clients, Switches and Access Points.
Note The Event Log and its Application and System log files are not available when
using Service Portal Support.
Step 1. Go to Diagnostics > Windows Explorer from the Service screen of

the Database Server.
7-64
Troubleshooting
Step 2. In the Windows Explorer window go to Stardate > Logs and open
NetDeviceLink.html. The RAS Link to Network Devices dialog opens
(Figure 7-24).
Note Service Portal Support capability is also available to a remote PC accessing the
Server through Remote Access Services. Refer to Appendix D.
Figure 7-24 Link to Network Devices Window
When you click the Link next to each device a menu of available Logs for that
device appears. For example, if you click the Link \\172.31.0.70\Logs next to the
Device Type M3155 Information Center, the Logs screen appears. Icons for
each of the logs available through Service Portal Support display.
When you click a Switch Link or Access Point Link the Network Statistics
screens for that device appear (page 7-48).
7-65
Troubleshooting
Raid Utilities You can view RAID settings with the Array Configuration Utility. The utility is
slightly different for each hardware platform.
ML350 G5 - Array Configuration Utility
The Array Configuration Utility provides direct access to status and
configuration settings of the Server RAID software. The M3169 Database Server
does not support RAID. If you want to access the Utility setup:
Step 1. Go to Shutdown > Desktop Tools from the Service screen.
From the Windows Task bar go to Start > Programs > HP System
Tools > Setup HP Array Configuration Utility.
The Array Configuration Utility Setup screen appears.
Step 2. Select Local Application Mode or Remote Service Mode.

a. Local Application Mode (Default) permits running the utility on the
local machine only.
b. Remote Service Mode permits running the utility as a Windows

service, which automatically runs in the background at all times.
Step 3. Click OK.
Step 4. Select Start > Programs > HP System Tools > HP Array
Configuration Utility.
The Array Configuration Utility screen displays (Figure 7-25).
Figure 7-25 ML350 G5 Array Information
Step 5. Select the Show Physical View to view the Array Settings.
If the RAID configuration must be restored, refer to Restoring Large DataBase

Server RAID Configurations.
7-66
Troubleshooting
Configuration The Configuration menu selections provide tools for configuring Network devices,
the Server, Information Centers, and Clients. These tools are typically used during
initial configuration. If you want to view the device configuration settings without
putting the device into local database mode, you can use the Read Only Config
Wizard selection.
Config Wizard The Config Wizard selection permits configuration of Information Centers,
Clients, Network Devices, and the Database Server (refer to Chapter 6). When you
select this option all connected Information Centers and Clients drop into Config
Mode.
Read Only Config Read Only Config Wizard displays the current configuration settings. It does not
Wizard cause all devices to restart into local database mode. To select a configuration page,
click the associated tab.
Archive Archive creates an archive of the existing configuration settings.
Set Time/Date Set Time/Date sets and synchronizes the date and time on all devices on the
Clinical Network and all patient monitors on the SDN Network.
Report Configuration Report Configuration configures and creates the layout of the configured report
types. Settings include header and footer, print date/time stamp, Patient Name,
Medical Record Number, Bed label, page number, Unit name, and Hospital name.
Report/Recording Report/Recording Destination is used by Information Centers and Clients that

Destination have no recorder connected to select another device with a recorder to print its
recordings. This is only available in non-monitoring mode. Adding a 2-Channel and
4-Channel recorder can only be changed by running the Config Wizard on a M3155
Information Center/M3151 Client and updating the Report and Recording
Destination page; and on a M3150 Information Center/Database Server Network
Configuration page.
7-67
Troubleshooting
Add/Remove Database Add/Remove Database Servers is used by the Master Database Server for
Servers adding and removing non-master Database Servers. This list is used in the Web
Access and Patient Data Transfer options.
If a Master Database Server adds a non-master server to its list, verify that the non-
master does not already have a Master Database Server associated with it. If the non-
master has another Master Database Server name configured, it will not accept the
new Master Database Server.
When the Web Access/Large Network system option is enabled, and a new Master/
non-master relationship is configured, note that all the clinician data (Usernames and
Passwords) on the non-master server will be lost. These must be re-entered using the
Web User Access Config Tool, page B-9.
Note If you want to remove a slave server, the slave Database Server must be in monitoring
mode and it must be network-connected to the other servers on the Hospital LAN.
Patient Data Transfer - Patient Data Transfer has submenus for selecting Low, Medium and High
Bandwidth Utilization Bandwidth utilization. These settings control the hospital LAN bandwidth utilization
during patient data transfer. Medium is the factory default and provides the overall
best transfer duration. At the same time, it minimizes hospital LAN bandwidth
utilization for both 10 and 100 Mbit LANs.
Patient Data Transfer times vary depending on the number of network switches and
routers the connection must go through. Table 7-10 provides time estimates and
bandwidth utilizations that the Patient Data Transfer can use on these networks.
If transfer time is too long, adjust the Bandwidth Utilization setting to shorten the
transfer time. The change takes 3-5 seconds and can be done while monitoring.
When you decrease the data transfer time, however, the bandwidth utilization of the
hospital LAN will increase.
Table 7-10 Patient Data Transfer - Bandwidth Utilization
Hospital Infrastructure Peak Bandwidth Patient Data Transfer Bandwidth Utilization
Topology Utilization (Average) Duration Setting
Pure 100 Mbit Hospital LAN 72 Mbps 1-2 minutes High
32 Mbps (avg)
56 Mbps 3-5 minutes Medium
30 Mbps (avg)
32 Mbps 10-15 minutes Low
8 Mbps (avg)
Mixed 10/100 Mbit Hospital LAN 8 Mbps 6-8 minutes High
8 Mbps (avg)
8 Mbps 10-12 minutes Medium
6 Mbps (avg)
8 Mbps 15-20 minutes Low
4 Mbps (avg)
Note Patient Data Transfer durations are estimates. Actual time on a hospital network will
vary depending on the design of the network and the level of network bandwidth that
is available.
7-68
Troubleshooting
Equipment Label Used by the Information Centers/Clients/Database Server to assign equipment labels
Assignment to IntelliVue Telemetry System transceivers (refer to the IntelliVue Telemetry
System documentation for details on the transceiver LEDs/functionality).
Step 1. Insert the batteries into the telemetry device. The device responds with
flashing LEDs and continuous beeps.
Step 2. When the new Device MAC address displays in the New Devices list, verify
it matches the MAC address found in the battery compartment of the
transceiver. If it matches, select the desired equipment label from the
Unassigned labels.
Step 3. Select Assign Label button to initiate the programming of the label into the
telemetry device, then select the Check button on the telemetry device within
10 seconds. The transceiver responds by resetting. A “Assignment Complete”
message appears on the Information Center, and moves that device to the
Assigned column.
Step 4. To clear a monitor label from an existing labeled transceiver, select the
Reset key, and the device is now listed in the New Device list.
Device Pool The Device Pool Configuration tool is used to define and edit equipment pools. The
Configuration list of units provided for sharing the equipment encompasses all units across the
entire large monitoring network. This information is replicated to all database servers
participating in the pool. Refer to Device Pooling Configuration for details.
When the Device Pool window is accessed from the Service Menus (server in
monitoring mode) on a database server, the following operating conditions apply:
• Add, Rename, Assign, and Replicate buttons are enabled.
• Delete and Unassign buttons are disabled.
• Changes made during monitoring mode must be replicated to other server(s).
Add device pool, and Assign unit to device pool - Replicate changes
manually to take effect on other server(s).
Rename device pool - Changes are replicated automatically across
servers. There is no need to manually replicate.
If multiple servers are being added over time and Device Pooling will be used, the
existing servers in the large network must be in monitoring mode when the new
server is added in order for the information to be replicated properly.
Save/View Save/View Configuration permits screen viewing of a configuration report and

Configuration saving of the report to file.
7-69
Troubleshooting
Security
Change Clinical Units Change Clinical Units Password opens the Change Clinical Units
Password Password dialog which permits changing the Unit Settings Password.
Change Service Change Service Password opens the Change Service Password screen
Password which permits changing the Service User password.
Research Export Research Export Options permits sending identified or de-identified Research Data
Options Export files to the selected target destination clients.
EWS/Device Location EWS/Device Location Compatibility opens a dialog that can permit an earlier
Compatibility software release EWS workstation to connect to the Server.
Remote Access Remote Access Admin. opens a Routing and Remote Access dialog.
Admin.
Remote Access Admin provides connection and configuration tools for remote
access to:
• Windows Explorer
• Registry Editor
• Performance Monitor
• Event Viewer (Event Log)
To open the RAS Administrator:
Step 1. From the Service screen go to Security > Remote Access Admin.
The Routing and Remote Access window opens.
Step 2. Click the Server Name and right-click.
7-70
Troubleshooting
Step 3. Go to All Tasks > Start.
Step 4. Verify that the Server Status is Started (Figure 7-26).
Figure 7-26 RAS Started
Note To prevent unauthorized access the Server, permission and a Philips Password are
required.
Once RAS is started, the Response Center can access the Server. When you do not
need remote access service any longer, you should stop the status.
Warning User Manager provides read/write access to all Internet configurations.
User Manager User Manager opens a dialog to view, set, or change logon account configurations
that permit access to patient data on the Server from the hospital web.
7-71
Troubleshooting
Other Services
Control Panel The Control Panel selection permits using Windows tools for Philips systems
installation and configuration settings.
Warning During Philips software installation, the Philips CD and Installation Support
Tool automatically set Operating System parameters to the proper values.
Therefore, the following tools should only be used to validate settings and not to
change or modify them.
Figure 7-27 Control Panel
Note More detailed descriptions of the Windows Control Panel tools are included in
Windows Help.
The service applications, when opened, may display over the Main Screen. If this
happens, you can use the mouse to move the window. If an application is open, but
not maximized, press Alt + Tab keys simultaneously to view and select from the
active applications.
7-72
Troubleshooting
!Services Displays the status of Windows and OS software applications and provides for
stopping and starting them without having to restart the software. Clicking on
!Services, brings up the Services window (Figure 7-28).
Figure 7-28 Services Window
If the Status of an application is Stopped, you can restart it.

Step 1. Select the desired serviced from the Services screen.
Step 2. Right-click and select Start from the drop-down menu.
If the Status of a service is Started, but the application does not seem to work
properly, you can stop the service and restart it.
Warning Internet Service Manager provides read/write access to all Internet

configurations.
Software Versions Software Version displays the current versions of the Product, Application, Network,
and Operating software currently installed on the system.
Internet Service Internet Service Manager is used to configure settings that control hospital
Manager network PC access to patient data on the Server.
7-73
Troubleshooting
System Validation System Validation checks system level settings for configuration components and
networking. It is available on Database Servers and M3150 Information Centers. The
selected items are checked and labeled with one of the following symbols:
Information - No action necessary
Warning - Steps may be taken to correct the problem or understand why the
warning message is logged.
Error - Steps must be taken to correct problem.
Double click an item for information about how to resolve it.
Figure 7-29 Software Validation
7-74
Troubleshooting
Shutdown In some cases, software problems can be resolved by shutting down and restarting
equipment.
In some cases, a dialog box will open when the operating system cannot shut down a
process. If this dialog box appears, select End Task to continue the shutdown
process.
Shutdown - Normal Shutdown - Normal permits a controlled software shutdown while saving all data
and configuration settings.
Caution Shutdown Normal is the only recommended way to shut down the Philips
system. If you use the Reset or power Off buttons or remove the power plug to
shut down the Philips system, you can corrupt the NTFS.
Step 1. Go to Shutdown > Shutdown-Normal in the Service screen. The

Shutdown Server screen displays a warning (Figure 7-30).
Figure 7-30 Shutdown Server Window
The Shutdown Server warning shows the shutdown mode options:

Shutdown - The Philips system shuts down normally. Windows
messages follow describing the process.
Shutdown and Restart - The Philips system shuts down normally and
automatically restarts system software and opens all Philips applications.
Desktop Tools - The Philips system shuts down and the Windows
Desktop displays. A complete restart is required to open Philips
application software and return to central monitoring.
Desktop Tools is disabled unless you are in Configuration Mode. To
properly drop IICs into local database mode during an upgrade, for
example, always use Configuration Mode.
Step 2. Click the option button next the desired option to select it.
Step 3. Click OK.
7-75
Troubleshooting
Desktop Tools Desktop Tools shuts down Philips application software and returns the Server to
the Operating System mode.
When you select Desktop Tools a warning displays.
If you select Yes the Philips software shuts down and all Information Centers and
Clients to go into local database mode. The Windows Desktop displays with a
Config Wizard icon.
Note Desktop Tools is disabled unless you are in Config Mode. To properly drop IICs
into local database mode during an upgrade, for example, always use Config Mode.
7-76
Troubleshooting
Maintenance
Restart IIS Admin Restart IIS Admin Service restarts the Internet Information Server used in the
Service Web Access and Paging functions. Use this tool when:
• The Web Access feature persistently fails from various locations,
• The Server busy message appears, or
• There are persistent failures notifying you to Contact System Administrator.
Restart DBServ Restart DBServ stops and restarts the DBServ process with no interruptions to
monitoring. This should only be run when all of the following services are
persistently failing:
• Patient Data storage and retrieval
• 12 Lead Analysis/Export
• Patient Data Transfer
• Holter Export
• Web Overview
• HL7 Export
• SNTP Time Source
• Bed-to-bed overview
• Care Groups
Contact the Response Center or factory for recommendations if this condition
persists.
Restart Restart NetworkService restarts the network related services. It does not cause
NetworkService loss of patient data and will not cause the information centers to transition to local
mode. This option is available on large and small Database servers. This process is
responsible for the following engines:
• Network Infrastructure Status

• Bootp
• Bedside/Telemetry Monitoring Connections
• Bedside Remote Printing
• Alarm Reflector/overview
• WMTS/BEAR8 Statistics
• RAID Checker Service
Synchronize Large Synchronize Large Network Server List manually synchronizes the server list
Network Server List on each server in a Large network system configuration only available on the M3154
Database Server). This is a rare condition which occurs during configuration and
startup on the non-master Database Server when it cannot locate the Master Database
Server.
• When the dialog opens that requests the Master Database Server name, enter
the name and click Synchronize.
Reset Recorder Logs Reset Recorder Logs resets the USB Recorder log files.
7-77
Troubleshooting
Reset Database Log Reset Database Log resets the SQL server transaction log files. When using this
utility, all Information Centers and Clients will restart into local database mode. This
should only be run when all of the patient-related operations fail:
• Admit/Discharge
• Transfer
• changing alarm limits
• Arrhythmia settings
• Care Groups
A failure message is logged into the System Error Log Files
[Microsoft][ODBC SQL Server Driver][SQL Server] The log file for Database
‘viridia’ is full. Back up the transaction log for the database to free up some log
space
Contact the Response Center or factory for recommendations.
!Upgrade NLS Upgrade NLS Catalogs permits upgrading the NLS text catalog on all devices
Catalogs when new bedside releases are available. When you select this option all connected
Information Center and Clients go into Config Mode.
Upgrade NLS Catalogs - Automatic Process
You must get the NLS text catalog files from the patient monitor Support Tool CD.
Step 1. Insert the media containing the NLS text catalog files into the appropriate
drive of the Database Server.
Step 2. Select !Upgrade NLS Files from the Maintenance menu on the Database
Server service shell window.
A dialog opens.
Step 3. Click Browse to open the Browse for Folder dialog.
Step 4. Select the drive containing the NLS text catalogs and click OK in the
Browse for Folder dialog.
7-78
Troubleshooting
Step 5. Select the appropriate NLS version from the New Version of NLS
Catalog list, then click Begin File Transfer. The Transfer Status text
box shows success or error messages.
If a device continues to fail you can skip the device, then use the manual process to
upgrade it (Upgrade NLS Catalogs - Manual Process).
Step 6. When complete, restart the connected M3155 Information Centers and
Clients. They automatically return to monitoring.
Upgrade NLS Catalogs - Manual Process
The patient monitor Support Tool CD-ROM contains NLS text catalog files that are
required for the NLS Catalog upgrade process.
You cannot have two folders with the same major revision number in the nls
directory. If the device has an earlier version of the major revision NLS catalog you
must delete it before you copy the new NLS catalog in the directory. Different major
revision folders (i.e. 5_12, 6_45) can reside in the nls directory.
Major Revision Version
All devices go into Non-monitoring Mode during the upgrade process.
Step 1. Insert the media containing the NLS text catalog files into the appropriate
device drive.
Step 2. Using Windows Explorer browse the CD for the folder that contains the
desired NLS text catalog file.
[CD drive]:Stardate\PicoNetDa\nls.
7-79
Troubleshooting
Step 3. Copy the folder, then paste it in the appropriate device location.
C:\Stardate\PicoNetDa\nls
Step 4. Verify that all language folders are in the new NLS text catalog directory
(e.g. 6_45) and that there is a file in each language folder.
Step 5. Restart the device. It will restart automatically in Monitoring Mode.
Step 6. Repeat Steps 1 - 5 for each Information Center, Client, and Database Server
in the system.
WMTS Data Collection WMTS Data Collection permits data collection for the wireless medical telemetry
system (IntelliVue Telemetry System).
7-80
HL7 Tools
HL7 Tools
The tools available to assist in troubleshooting HL7 problems are:

• the client.exe tool for the Unsolicited Message Interface (UMI) and
• the qryclnt.exe tool for the Query Message Interface.
These tools are located on the Application software CD-ROM and can be run on the
M3154 Database Server or on a PC on the hospital LAN.
The Export.log file located in the Stardate\Log directory contains HL7 interface and
external receiving system messages that can be useful in the troubleshooting process.
Client.exe tool The Client.exe tool is to be used for troubleshooting UMI messages.
To run this tool on the Database Server, the Database Server HL7 settings must
reflect the target host name and the IP Address of the second NIC. If this is done
when the tool is run, all connected Information Centers and Clients will restart into
local database mode. If this is unacceptable, run the tool on a PC connected to the
hospital LAN.
Step 1. Insert the Application Software CD-ROM in the appropriate drive. Copy the
client.exe tool located in the Viridia\Tools\HL7 directory to the C:\Temp
directory.
Step 2. Open an MSDOS® command prompt window and change the directory to
C:\Temp
Figure 7-31 MS-DOS Command Prompt Window
Step 3. Type CLIENT xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (IP Address of second NIC or DBS

hostname) > test.txt (e.g. CLIENT 192.35.0.55 > test.txt or CLIENT
DBSSVR1 > test.txt). Press Enter.
HL7 output is saved as ASCII text in a file in the C:\Temp directory. Let the
data collection continue for 5 minutes.
Step 4. Press Ctrl + C keys simultaneously to end the program.
Step 5. After you review the file save it to removable media.
Step 6. Delete test.txt from the C:\Temp directory.
Step 7. If the tool was used on the Database Server, the HL7 target client name must
be changed back to the original hostname using Config Wizard.
7-81
HL7 Tools
Qryclnt.exe Tool The Qryclnt.exe tool is for troubleshooting the Query Message Interface. It is to be
used by the third party that programs the HL7 Query message interface for the
hospital. This tool can be run on the hospital HL7 target client (Windows based) to
troubleshoot HL7 problems configured for the solicited message interface.
Syntax:
QRYCLNT <server> [/CONTINUOUS] [query1. queryn]
where:
<server> is the host name or IP address of the target client
/CONTINUOUS if used, repeats the query continuously
query1 .. queryn lists with bed labels or CareNet branch* specifications
CareNet branch specification: *<CareNet number><branch number>

Example:
ICU1 ICU2 “Bed12” *1-17 *2-22
*MDIL message type format does not include CareNet branch data
If the list with bed labels/CareNet branch specifications is empty, then a query for all
beds is generated.
7-82
ST/AR Configuration Reporting Tools
This section provides a list of the 7-character encoded ST/AR configuration

parameters that display as part of the alarm information on alarm strip recordings.
This information can be used to interpret results obtained by the ST/AR arrhythmia
analysis algorithm. The information is encoded with a [ ] after the time stamp.
Note The ST/AR diagnostic tool encoding scheme is only available on SDN and Telemetry
beds.
Character Position Identifies...

First IIC Release
Second Patient category, pacing mode, and analysis level
Third and Fourth • Classification mode (single or multi-lead)
• Detection mode (auto or manual)
• User-specified lead label (manual detection mode only)
• User-specified minimum threshold (150-350uV) (manual detection
mode only)
• Algorithm minimum detection threshold (150-350uV)
(manual detection mode only)
Fifth Number of active classification and detection channels
EASI mode/EASI coefficient set
Sixth ECG hardware source and lead set in use (3-wire, EASI, etc.)
Seventh Source of Asystole, Pause, Missed Beat, PNP or PNC alarm (detection or
beat interval)
First Character Codes The first character identifies the software version on the IntelliVue Information
Center.
IIC Release Version First Character
K D
L/M/N E
7-83
Second Character The second character identifies the patient category, pacing mode, and analysis level.
Codes Patient Type Paced Mode Arrhythmia Level Second Character
Neo True Cardiotach 0
Basic 1
Enhanced 2
False Cardiotach 3
Basic 4
Enhanced 5
Ped True Cardiotach 6
Basic 7
Enhanced 8
False Cardiotach 9
Basic B
Enhanced C
Adult True Cardiotach D
Basic F
Enhanced G
False Cardiotach H
Basic J
Enhanced K
7-84
Third and Fourth The third and fourth character identifies the:
Character Codes • Classification mode (single or multi-lead)
• Detection mode (auto or manual)
• User specified lead label (manual detection mode only)
• User specified minimum threshold (150-350uV) (manual detection mode only)
• Algorithm minimum detection threshold (150-350uV) (manual detection mode
only)
Use the Multi/Manual/Lead I entries as a guideline in determining the appropriate
expanded values for each Lead listed.
Algorithm
User-Specified
Classification Detection User Specified Minimum Third & Fourth
Detection
Mode Mode Detection Lead Detection Character
Threshold
Threshold
Multi Auto N/A N/A 150 00
Manual Lead I 150 150 10
350 11a
200 200 12
350 131
250 250 14
350 151
300 300 16
350 171
350 350 18
350 191
Lead II 150 - 350 150 - 350 20 - 29
Lead III 150 - 350 150 - 350 30 - 39
Lead AVR 150 - 350 150 - 350 40 - 49
Lead AVL 150 - 350 150 - 350 50 - 59
Lead AVF 150 - 350 150 - 350 60 - 69
Lead V1 150 - 350 150 - 350 70 - 79
Lead V2 150 - 350 150 - 350 80 - 89
Lead V3 150 - 350 150 - 350 90 - 99
Lead V4 150 - 350 150 - 350 B0 - B9
Lead V5 150 - 350 150 - 350 C0 - C9
Lead V6 150 - 350 150 - 350 D0 - D9
Lead V 150 - 350 150 - 350 F0 - F9
Lead V7 150 - 350 150 - 350 G0 - G9
Lead V8 150 - 350 150 - 350 H0 - H9
Lead V9 150 - 350 150 - 350 J0 - J9
Lead V3R 150 - 350 150 - 350 K0 - K9
Lead V4R 150 - 350 150 - 350 L0 - L9
Lead V5R 150 - 350 150 - 350 M0 - M9
Lead V6R 150 - 350 150 - 350 w0 - w9
Lead MCL 150 - 350 150 - 350 N0 - N9
7-85
Algorithm
User-Specified
Classification Detection User Specified Minimum Third & Fourth
Detection
Mode Mode Detection Lead Detection Character
Threshold
Threshold
Single Auto N/A N/A 150 01
Manual Lead I 150 - 350 150 - 350 P0 - P9
Lead II 150 - 350 150 - 350 R0 - R9
Lead III 150 - 350 150 - 350 S0 - S9
Lead AVR 150 - 350 150 - 350 T0 - T9
Lead AVL 150 - 350 150 - 350 V0 - V9
Lead AVF 150 - 350 150 - 350 W0 - W9
Lead V1 150 - 350 150 - 350 X0 - X9
Lead V2 150 - 350 150 - 350 Y0 - Y9
Lead V3 150 - 350 150 - 350 Z0 - Z9
Lead V4 150 - 350 150 - 350 b0 - b9
Lead V5 150 - 350 150 - 350 c0 - c9
Lead V6 150 - 350 150 - 350 d0 - d9
Lead V 150 - 350 150 - 350 f0 - f9
Lead V7 150 - 350 150 - 350 g0 - g9
Lead V8 150 - 350 150 - 350 h0 - h9
Lead V9 150 - 350 150 - 350 j0 - j9
Lead V3R 150 - 350 150 - 350 k0 - k9
Lead V4R 150 - 350 150 - 350 m0 - m9
Lead V5R 150 - 350 150 - 350 n0 - n9
Lead V6R 150 - 350 150 - 350 x0 - x9
Lead MCL 150 - 350 150 - 350 p0 - p9
aUser
specified lead is not active
7-86
Fifth Character Codes The fifth character identifies the number of active classification and detection
channels and EASI mode/EASI coefficient set.
EASI Mode Active Classification Channels Active Detection Channels Fifth Character
Standard (non- 0 0 0
EASI) electrode 1 1
placement
2 2
1 0 3
1 4
2 5
2 0 6
1 7
2 8
EASI placement for 0 0 9
conventional 12- 1 B
Lead derivation
2 C
1 0 D
1 F
2 G
2 0 H
1 J
2 K
Sixth Character Codes The sixth character identifies the ECG hardware source and lead set in use (3-wire,
EASI, etc.).
ECG HW Source Lead Set Sixth Character
unknown unknown 0 or z
3w 1
4w 2
5w 3
6w 4
10w 5
M1400 A/B Telemetry unknown 6
3w 7
4w 8
5w 9
M1001A ECG Module unknown B
3w C
5w D
7-87
ECG HW Source Lead Set Sixth Character

M1002A unknown F
ECG/Resp Module 3w G
5w H
M1001B unknown J
ECG Module 3w K
5w L
M1002B unknown M
ECG/Resp Module 3w N
5w P
M3000A Measurement Server unknown R
3w S
5w T
M2601 A/B unknown V
3w W
5w X
M2601 A/B as unknown Y
M1400A/B 3w Z
5w b
M3001A Measurement Server unknown c
3w d
5w f
10w g
M353xA unknown h
3w j
5w k
10w m
M4841A unknown n
3w p
5w r
6w s
7-88
Seventh Character The seventh character identifies the Source of Asystole, Pause, Missed Beat, PNP or
Code PNC alarm (detection or beat interval).
Event Source Asystole Pause Seventh Character
N/A N/A N/A 0
g_look_ahead 2.5 1.5 1
3.0 1.5 2
3.5 1.5 3
4.0 1.5 4
2.5 1.75 5
3.0 1.75 6
3.5 1.75 7
4.0 1.75 8
2.5 2.0 9
3.0 2.0 B
3.5 2.0 C
4.0 2.0 D
2.5 2.25 F
3.0 2.25 G
3.5 2.25 H
4.0 2.25 J
2.5 2.5 K
3.0 2.5 L
3.5 2.5 M
4.0 2.5 N
g_look_back 2.5 1.5 P
3.0 1.5 R
3.5 1.5 S
4.0 1.5 T
2.5 1.75 V
3.0 1.75 W
3.5 1.75 X
4.0 1.75 Y
2.5 2.0 Z
3.0 2.0 b
3.5 2.0 c
4.0 2.0 d
2.5 2.25 f
3.0 2.25 g
3.5 2.25 h
4.0 2.25 j
2.5 2.5 k
3.0 2.5 m
3.5 2.5 n
4.0 2.5 p
g_look_ahead_beat_ rejection 2.5 N/A r
3.0 N/A s
3.5 N/A t
4.0 N/A v
7-89
LED Diagnostics
LED Diagnostics
When investigating signal flow, many hardware components have diagnostic LEDs
that can be used to determine whether they are functioning properly and are
receiving and passing data. These include:
• LAN Interface Card
• Access Point*
• Switch*
• Repeater*
• 10 Mbit/s Media Translator Transceiver*
• 100 Mbit/s Media Translator*
* The LED descriptions for these components are in the Clinical Network
documentation.
Brief description of these LED diagnostic tools and the meaning of their lighting
codes are presented in this section as a guide for determining operational status,
identifying hardware problems, and tracing signal continuity in the Patient Care
Network. For more detailed discussions of the use of these LEDs in troubleshooting,
consult manufacturer documentation.
SDN Card LED • The HP DC7700 use a PCI Signal Distribution Network (SDN) card.
Diagnostics
• The HP rp5700 PC uses a PCI Express Signal Distribution Network (SDN)
card that is not backward compatible.
Carefully observe the SDN Card LEDs during software start up and SDN Diagnostic
testing and compare the lighting sequence to Table 7-11 or Table 7-12. Possible
errors in SDN operation may include:
Condition Description
SDN Card Test does not pass Replace the card and rerun the test.
Code-to-card stage does not occur The firmware code on the SDN Card was not
reprogrammed. For a Philips system that has been
operating normally, this stage should not occur.
SDN Driver Installation stage does The SDN driver did not establish contact with the SDN Card.
not occur
Normal Operation stage pattern Normal operation has not been established.
does not occur
SDN Problem pattern occurs during There is an SDN connection problem. Check the SDN
normal operation interconnections and restart the Philips system.
Refer to the IntelliVue Information Center Replaceable Parts List for the correct SDN card
to use with your system.
7-90
LED Diagnostics
HP DC7700 PCI SDN Card Diagnostics

If you want to view the PCI SDN Card LEDs, you must remove the workstation
cover. Table 7-11 describes correct LED behavior.
Table 7-11 SDN Card LED Sequence During Software Restart

Test Stage LED Condition Description
LED Lighted LED Blinking LED Off

Power Off Before power is turned on, all LEDs are off.
SDN Card Test Begins When power is turned on, the SDN Interface Card Self-Test is initiated
Card Reset and all LEDs are lighted.
SDN Card Test Passes Any other pattern indicates that some self-test error occurred and the
Card should be replaced. If all three LEDs remain on, it is possible that
the ROM was never programmed.
POST and OS software During POST and OS software start up, only the center LED is on
start up
Code-to-card option When the SDN driver starts, it checks that the code version is correct. If
not, it downloads the correct code. This operation is indicated by the
LED closest to the card end turning on and the middle LED rapidly
flashing. After programming is complete (1-2 seconds) the normal
sequence above occurs.
SDN Driver Installation The SDN driver starts near the end of the OS boot sequence. When it
starts, it sets all 3 LEDs on, flashes the 2 outside LEDs off and then on,
and then extinguishes all 3 LEDs one by one. Normal operation then
begins.
Normal Operation The LED furthest from the card end flashes at a one second rate
indicating that communication with the computer is occurring.
SDN Problem If the LED nearest the card end comes on during normal operation, an
SDN problem has occurred. Generally, this means that the Card is not
connected properly to a functioning SDN.
7-91
LED Diagnostics
HP rp5700 PCI Express SDN Card Diagnostics

In order to examine the yellow PCI Express SDN Card LEDs, you must remove the
workstation cover and locate the LEDs on the top edge of the SDN Card.
SDN LEDs
0189
0189
0189
A specific LED lighting sequence should occur during start up, software restart, and
SDN Interface Diagnostics test.
Table 7-12 PCI Express SDN Card LED Behavior Description
LED Condition Description
LED On LED Blinking LED Off

Power Off When power is off all LEDs are off.
Power On Sequence 1. When PC power is turned on all LEDs light for 1 - 2 seconds. The
pattern continues until the processor exits Reset.
2. Pattern continues for 1 second while boot loader performs SDN
card Integrated Circuit (reSIC) POST.
3. Pattern occurs briefly (< 1 second) when POST is complete.
4. Pattern continues until Operating System (OS) loads.
5. Pattern continues for 1 second while boot loader starts executing.

The center LED could be Off or On.
6. Pattern continues for 15 - 20 seconds during firmware download.
7. Pattern continues for 2 - 3 seconds while boot loader transfers

control to downloaded firmware.
8. Pattern continues indefinitely indicating that communication is
occurring.
Normal Operation Right end LED rapid blinking pattern is apparent during successful
communication.
Non-fatal Error If the left end LED flashes briefly during Normal Operation, a non-fatal
error has occurred. Successful communication continues.
SDN Problem Condition persists indefinitely indicating that the firmware has
encountered a fatal error and has stopped executing.
7-92
LED Diagnostics
LAN Card LED Continuity of signal flow in LAN cards can be determined by the Link LEDs
Diagnostics (Figure 7-32).
Figure 7-32 LAN Card Link LEDs
Table 7-13 describes the Link LED behavior.

Table 7-13 LAN Card LED Diagnostics
LED Condition Description Possible Cause
Off No Link • no connection
• device at other end of cable is Off
• faulty cable
• inverted TX/RX
Solid Green Operational • proper operation with or without activity
Flashing Green
7-93
Repair
Repair
Once a problem is localized to a specific hardware device or software application,

causes of the problem can be identified and corrective actions taken.
For most Philips system hardware the documentation provided with the unit is the
primary source of repair information. Refer to specific hardware documentation for
proper troubleshooting, maintenance, and repair procedures.
Clearing Tripp Lite The Tripp Lite UPS with Hardware Watchdog ensures that if a monitored service
UPS Watchdog stops responding the Watchdog will restart it. If the service cannot be restarted the
Events system is restarted. A repeating series of triple beeps suggests a Watchdog event.
The tones continue until you manually silence them or until the Operating System
successfully restarts.
The Tripp Lite UPS with Hardware Watchdog has Power Alert Software that can
confirm, disable, or enable the Watchdog status.
Confirming Watchdog Confirm the Watchdog status in the Power Alert Software as follows.
Status
Step 1. Go to Start > Programs > Tripp Lite > PowerAlert > PowerAlert
Console.
The Power Alert Console displays.
Step 2. Click the Detail icon and use the scroll bar to view the Device Details.
Step 3. Scroll to Watchdog Information and verify that Watchdog Status is

Enabled.
Step 4. Close the Power Alert Console window
7-94
Repair
Enabling/Disabling If you need to enable or disable the Watchdog, do the following.

Watchdog
Step 1. Go to Start > Programs > Tripp Lite > PowerAlert > PowerAlert
Console.
Step 2. Click the Actions icon in the Power Alert Console screen.
The Device Control Commands display.
Step 3. In the Control Comment drop down menu, select Disable Watchdog or
Enable Watchdog.
Step 4. Click the Execute Command button.
Step 5. Confirm the Watchdog status (page 7-94) and close the Power Alert
Console screen.
Updating the If your UPS shipped with a software release before G.0017 and H.00.05 and you
Tripp-Lite UPS must replace a Tripp Lite UPS to a more current model, you will have to update the
Driver UPS driver. The Tripp Lite UPS Utility (PN 4535 640 41231) contains the required
drivers to update your system.
Step 1. Insert the Tripp Lite UPS Utility disk into the appropriate PC drive.
Step 2. From the Windows desktop use the Windows Explorer to open
swapUPSa.bat on the utility disk.
A list of possible UPS selections appears. Each UPS is identified by SKU
Number.
Step 3. Select your UPS model from the list by typing the number beside it.
7-95
Repair
Correcting APC Table 7-14 describes Symptoms, Possible Causes, and Corrective Actions for
UPS Problems problems with the APC UPS. Corrective actions described in this table take
precedence over those described in the APC UPS User’s Manual.
The most common problem encountered is a tripped UPS circuit breaker due to
excessive loads.
• If the UPS circuit breaker is tripped, remove excess loads and reset the circuit
breaker.
Table 7-14 Troubleshooting the APC UPS

Symptom Possible Cause Corrective Action
UPS will not turn on (lamp within Rear panel circuit breaker is tripped. Unplug excessive loads and press button to
power switch is not illuminated), (Circuit breaker is tripped when button is reset breaker.
but beeps when power switch is on. extended.)
Line cord plug is not properly connected. Check line cord plug and engage it properly.
There is no power at wall socket. Check power at wall socket and establish
proper power.
UPS operates normally, but SITE Building wiring error, such as a missing A qualified electrician should be called to
WIRING FAULT indicator is ground, hot and neutral polarity reversed, correct the building wiring problem. The
illuminated. or overloaded neutral wiring. UPS will not provide rated noise and surge
suppression with incorrect building wiring.
Ground not connected, e.g. “cheater” plug Plug the UPS into a proper 3 wire grounded
or adapter installed on line cord plug. outlet only.
UPS occasionally emits a beep, but The UPS is briefly transferring the This operation is normal. The UPS is
connected equipment operates equipment to its alternate power source protecting connected equipment from
normally. due to incoming power spikes or sags. abnormal line voltages. If the audible alarm
becomes annoying, set option switch #1 to
its up position.
UPS emits a beep very often (more Utility voltage is distorted or branch Have the line power checked by an
than once or twice an hour), but circuits are too heavily loaded. electrician and corrected if not adequate.
connected equipment operates Operate UPS from an outlet on a different
normally. branch fuse or circuit breaker with adequate
power.
UPS emits loud tone. UPS has shut down due to severe Turn off the UPS and unplug excessive
Power I/O switch is on, but overload. loads. Laser printers will overload the UPS
connected equipment is not and should not be connected to the UPS.
powered. When overload is removed, press the button
UPS rear panel circuit breaker is to reset the circuit breaker.
tripped (button extended). Normal
utility voltages are known to be
supplied.
UPS emits loud tone during utility UPS has shut down due to overload. Turn off UPS and unplug excessive loads.
failure. UPS may be turned on when line power is
Power I/O switch is on, but restored.
connected equipment is not
powered.
Rear panel circuit breaker is not
tripped.
7-96
Repair
Table 7-14 Troubleshooting the APC UPS

UPS does not provide expected run Excessive loads connected to UPS. Unplug excessive loads from UPS.
time. Low battery warning is Battery is weak due to wear or recent Recharge battery by leaving UPS plugged in
sounded prematurely. operation during utility power outage. for 12 hours without use.
Test control during recharge. If UPS sounds
low battery warning prematurely when
retested, replace battery or UPS.
UPS beeps continuously. Circuit breaker is tripped Unplug excessive loads and press button to
Lamp within I/O power switch is reset circuit breaker.
illuminated. Line cord plug is not properly connected Check line cord plug and engage it properly.
Line power has not failed.
UPS does not shut down when RS- Signal is not applied during line power UPS responds to this signal only during
232 HI level is applied to computer failure. utility failures (load is operating from the
interface port pin 1. UPS’s internal power source).
Signal is not referenced to the UPS Signal must be referenced to the UPS
common. common at pins 4 or 9.
Low battery warning interval is Excessive loads connected to the UPS. Excessive loading may shorten run time to
shorter than 2 or 5 minutes, less than the 2 or 5 minute low battery
according to rear panel option warning interval. Remove excessive loads.
switch #4 setting: Battery capacity is low due to wear or Consecutive line power failures may not
down = 2 minutes consecutive line power failures. allow time for the battery to recharge,
up = 5 minutes thereby causing shortened run time.
Recharge battery by leaving UPS plugged in
for 12 hours without use.
Low battery warning interval is UPS is loaded to less than 10% of rated This operation is normal. The low battery
much longer than 2 or 5 minutes, capacity. warning interval is adjusted at the factory
according to rear panel option for consistent operation at loads above 10%
switch #4 setting: of rated capacity.
down = 2 minutes
up = 5 minutes
If an APC UPS problem cannot be resolved, record the UPS model, serial number,
and date of purchase. Report the problem and the recorded information to the UPS
Customer Service Department at the phone number listed in the UPS User’s
Manual. Replace the UPS on the Philips system to ensure continuous patient
monitoring.
7-97
Repair
Reconfiguring the Philips PCs and Servers are preconfigured for proper UPS operation when shipped
APC UPS from Philips. If you must reset lost configurations, do the following.
Step 1. Click Start > Settings > Control Panel to open the Control Panel
window.
Step 2. Click the Power Options icon.

The Power Options Property window displays.
Step 3. Select the UPS tab in the Power Options Property window and click the
Configure button in the Details section of the window.
The UPS Configuration dialog displays (Figure 7-33).
Figure 7-33 UPS Configuration Dialog
Step 4. Verify the UPS configuration settings (Figure 7-33) and click OK to close
the UPS Configuration dialog.
Step 5. Close the Power Options Property window and Control Panel to
return to the Windows desktop.
7-98
Repair
Correcting SDN Table 7-15 describes problem Symptoms, Possible Causes, and Corrective
Interface Card Actions for the SDN Interface Card.
Problems
Table 7-15 Troubleshooting the SDN Interface Card
“No data from bed” error Faulty SDN cable Check all SDN cables.
message on Main Screen. SDN Interface Card malfunction • Run SDN Card Diagnostic.
• Check Event Log for causes.
• Shut down system and restart.
Software malfunction • Shut down system and restart.
• Re-install Philips application software.
• Re-install Windows Operating System
software.
SDN data-source malfunction Faulty bedside monitor Troubleshoot bedside monitor.
Faulty telemetry monitor Troubleshoot telemetry monitor.
Philips system malfunction System configuration An Information Center system must be on
Branch 0 of the SCC.
Correcting Philips Table 7-16 describes problem Symptoms, Possible Causes, and Corrective
Recorder Actions for the Philips Recorder.
Problems
Table 7-16 Troubleshooting the Recorder
Symptom/Message Possible Cause(s) Corrective Action(s)
XXX recorder out of paper Recorder is out of paper. Replace paper roll.
Paper-out sensor is dirty. Clean paper-out sensor.
Recorder is faulty. Replace Recorder.
(XXX = Left, Center, or Right)
XXX recorder door is open Recorder door is open. Close Recorder door.
Door switch is dirty. Clean door switch.
Door switch is defective. Replace door switch.
No recorders available No Recorder is in the Recorder Rack. Insert Recorder in Recorder Rack.
Recorder Rack or Rack Power Supply Connect or replace cable.
cable is disconnected or faulty.
XXX recorder hardware fault Poor Recorder connection to the Rack. Unplug the Recorder from the Rack and
plug it in again (watch for LED to flash).
Power supply cable is faulty. Check Rack and Recorder power supply
cables.
Recorder Rack or Power Supply
Fault or No Recorder
Recorder Rack is faulty. Replace Rack.
4 Channel Recorder Not Ready 4-channel recorder is out of paper, has no Check and/or replace paper, if necessary.
power, the serial recorder cable is not Check the power to the recorder.
connected, or the recorder has some Check the recorder cable connections.
internal failure causing it to be off line.
7-99
Restoring Printer Configurations
Restoring Printer Configurations
With IIC Release M and later you must use the Microsoft Print Migrator (or
equivalent) to save local printer information. An Archive will not automatically save
the printer configuration. Before preparing your archive you must run the Print
Migrator so you can save your system local printer configuration. Paste the following
in your Browser Address text box to access the Print Migrator.
http://www.microsoft.com/WindowsServer2003/techinfo/overview/
printmigrator3.1.mspx
Adding DBS Printers
IIC Release N uses the standard Windows Operating System Printer Service to
configure printers other than BootP Monitoring LAN printers which must be added
with Config Wizard (page 6-39). Compatible printers are those that use the HP
Universal Printer Driver (HP Universal Printing PCL 5).
Adding Printers at If you want to print the DBS configuration file or share a printer that resides on the
the Database Hospital LAN you must configure the printer on the DBS.
Server
Step 1. From the Service screen, go to Other Services > Control Panel and
double-click the Printers and Faxes icon.
Step 2. In the Printers and Faxes dialog, double-click the Add Printer icon to
open the Add Printer Wizard.
Step 3. In the Welcome to the Add Printer Wizard screen click Next >.
Step 4. In the Local or Network Printer screen, select Local Printer attached
to this computer. Do not check Automatically detect and install my
Plug and Play printer.
Step 5. In the Select a Printer Port screen select the Create a new port option,
and select Standard TCP/IP Port in the Type of port drop-down list. Click
Next >.
Step 6. In the Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard Welcome screen
click Next >.
Important - Before you enter the Printer IP Address the desired printer must be
configured and turned on.
Step 7. Enter the IP Address text box. The Port Name text box automatically
populates. Click Next >.
If you see the Additional Port Information Required screen, the printer is
offline or not configured correctly.
7-100
Adding DBS Printers
Step 8. In the Install Printer Software screen, select HP as the printer

Manufacturer and HP Universal Printing PCL 5 on the Printers list.
Then click Next >.
Note—All Philips-supplied printers are compatible with the HP Universal

Printing PCL 5 Driver.
Step 9. In the Use Existing Driver screen, do not select Replace Existing
Driver.
Step 10. Click the No option in the Do you want to use this printer as the
default printer section if this is not the default printer. Then click Next >.
Step 11. In the Printer Sharing screen, you can share the printer in the domain if
you click the Share name option and enter a name for the shared
printer.Click Next > to continue.
Step 12. In the Location and Comment screen, enter descriptive information in
the Location and Comment text boxes. Then click Next >.
Step 13. In the Print Test Page screen, click Yes if you want to print a test page.
Then click Next >.
Step 14. Review the printer information in the Completing the Add Printer
Wizard screen and click Finish.
If you choose to print a test page, a dialog opens. If the page printed correctly, click
Yes in the dialog. If the page did not print correctly, click Troubleshoot.
Step 15. Set the new printer properties. Refer to page 6-92.
The DBS Network Configuration screen in Config Wizard permits

configuration of BootP for Networked Printers on the Monitoring LAN. See
Adding Network Devices on page 6-49.
7-101
Repairing Philips Software
Repairing Philips Software
Restarting the If you are experiencing software problems restart the system (page 7-75) to see if the
System problem corrects itself.
If the system does not respond to the keyboard or mouse so that software shutdown
and restart procedures can be followed, try the following:
Step 1. Shut down and restart the Server or PC.
Step 2. Remove the power cord for at least 20 seconds and then reconnect it. When
you turn the computer On the system should restart properly.
Re-installing If a system restart does not resolve the problem, refer to Software Re-Installation
Software Procedure (page 7-133).
Updating the BIOS
Sometimes resolution of product problems requires that you reprogram or

reconfigure the Basic Input/Output System (BIOS). This would only be required if
the BIOS is corrupted. The procedure for updating the Server BIOS is different from
the procedure for updating PC BIOS and settings vary for different hardware.
Flashing BIOS A CD which can be used for flashing BIOS and microcode on several different PCs
is available as a support part. An ISO image of this CD is also available on the
InCenter System. BIOS and microcode update procedures using this CD are
described in a separate Addendum. Once you flash the BIOS you must change some
of the default settings. These changes vary depending of the hardware. For changes
to BIOS default settings, refer to page 7-107.
7-102
Configuring the ILO Setting for the Large Database Server
Configuring the ILO Setting for the Large Database Server
The integrated Lights-Out (ILO) configuration is required for a new Server that has
not been previously configured, or if the server mother board has been replaced.
If one of the following messages appears during startup, ILO is properly configured.
– For ML350 G5/G6 or DL380 G6 Integrated Lights-Out 2 is disabled

– For DL380 G7 Integrated Lights-Out 3 is disabled
If ILO configuration is required, do the following.
Step 1. During the Boot sequence of an ML350 G5/G6 or DL380 G6, watch for the
message, Integrated Lights-Out 2 Standard press <F8> to configure.
When you see the message press the F8 key.
During the Boot sequence of an DL380 G7, watch for the message,
Integrated Lights-Out 3 Standard press <F8> to configure. When you
see the message press the F8 key.
Step 2. From the Settings menu in the iLO menu select Configure and press
Enter.
Step 3. Press the Space Bar twice to change the setting for Lights-Out
Functionality to Disabled.
Step 4. Verify the following settings:
Selection Setting
ML350 G5, ML350 G6, DL380 G6
Lights-Out Functionality: Disabled
ILO 2 ROM-Based Setup Utility: Disabled
Require iLO2 RBSU Login: Disabled
Show iLO2 IP during Post: Enabled
(Default setting)
Two-Factor Authentication Disabled
DL380 G7
Lights-Out Functionality: Disabled
ILO3 ROM-Based Setup Utility: Disabled
Required iLO3 RBSU Login: Disabled
Show iLO3 IP during Post: Enabled
(Default setting)
Step 5. Press F10 to Save.

Step 6. From the File menu select Exit and press Enter twice to confirm.
The Server continues the boot sequence.
7-103
Restoring Large DataBase Server RAID Configurations

If the RAID Configuration on the Large DataBase Server is lost or accidentally
deleted, it must be restored. After you restore the RAID configurations, the Windows
Operating System and Philips software must be re-installed. Restore the RAID
configuration as follows.
ML350 G5 Step 1. During the Boot sequence, watch for the message Press <F8> key to run
the Option ROM Configuration for Arrays Utility. When the message
appears, press the F8 key to display the Main Menu window.
Step 2. Select Create Logical Drive using the arrow key and press Enter to
display its menu.
If the message There are no available physical drives appears, either the
drives are already configured or there are no hot swap drives installed.
To determine if the drives are already configured, press Esc to return to the
Create Logical Drive menu, select View Logical Drive, and press Enter.
If the logical drives are configured, you are ready to set the BIOS
(page 7-107). If the logical drives must be configured, continue.
Step 3. Select Available Physical Drives and press Enter.
Step 4. Verify that the 3 available drives are selected (an X should appear in the
brackets next to each drive) and press Esc to return to the Available
Physical Drives menu.
Step 5. Select Raid Configuration in the Create Logical Drive menu and press
Enter.
Verify that Raid 5 is selected.
Step 6. In the Spare window, verify that Use one drive as a spare is not
selected and press Esc to return to the Available Physical Drives menu.
Step 7. In the Maximum Boot Partition window verify that Disabled (4Gb
Maximum) is selected.
Step 8. Press Enter to create the Logical Drive.
Step 9. When prompted to save the configuration, press the keyboard F8 key to save
the configuration.
Step 10. When Configuration Saved appears, press Enter to continue.
Step 11. Press the Esc key to exit Raid Configuration.
The system will restart.
If the RAID drive failure error message persists after successful RAID recovery, do
the following.
Step 1. Open the event log and clear out the applications log.
Step 2. Restart the RAID service.
To configure BIOS settings, see page 7-107.
7-104
ML 350 G6
DL 380 G6
DL 380 G7
Important The HP DL380 G6 Server is configured with RAID 1 Array.
The HP ML 350 G6 and the HP DL 380 G7 Servers are configured with RAID 1 + 0
Array.
If the RAID configuration is lost or accidentally deleted, it must be restored. After

you restore the RAID configurations, the Windows Operating System and Philips
software must be re-installed. Refer to the IIC System Installation and Service Manual
for software installation instructions.
Note During boot sequence watch for the message, Press any key to view option ROM
Messages. When you see the message, press any key. This allows you to see
additional ROM Messages needed for ILO 3, RAID Configuration, and BIOS
Settings.
Restore the server RAID configuration as follows.
Step 1. During the Boot sequence, watch for the message Press <F8> key to run
the Option ROM Configuration for Arrays Utility. When you see the
message,
press F8.
Step 2. Use the arrow key to select Create Logical Drive from the Option ROM
Configuration for Arrays (ORCA) Main Menu and press Enter.
Step 3. If you see the message There are no available physical drives, the drives may
be configured already or there are no hot swap drives installed.
a. To determine if the drives are already configured, press Esc to return to
the Create Logical Drive menu.
b. Select View Logical Drive, then press Enter.
If the logical drives are configured, you are ready to update BIOS
(page 7-102); if the logical drives must be configured, return to the
Create Logical Drive menu and continue.
Step 4. In the Available Physical Drives section verify that the two available drives
are selected (an X should appear in the brackets next to each drive).
Step 5. In the Raid Configuration section verify that RAID 1 + 0 is selected. If not,
select it.
7-105
Step 6. In the Spare section verify that Use one drive as a spare is not selected.
Step 7. In the Maximum Boot Partition section verify that Disabled (4Gb)
maximum is selected.
Step 8. Press Enter to create the Logical Drive.

Step 9. When prompted to save the configuration, press F8. Then when
Configuration Saved appears press Enter.
Step 10. Press Esc to exit Raid Configuration.
Step 11. If necessary, configure BIOS (page 7-107)
If error persists after RAID recovery
If you get a RAID drive failure message after successful RAID recovery, open Event
Viewer and clear the Applications log, then restart RAID service.
7-106
Configuring BIOS Settings
The Basic Input/Output System (BIOS) is set correctly prior to product shipment.
But, the BIOS may require reconfiguration if the equipment BIOS has been updated
or if equipment is replaced or repaired. Some BIOS settings require changes from the
defaults in order to support the specific Information Center hardware. Follow the
procedure for the particular hardware you must update.
M3154 Database If the server mother board is replaced, use the BIOS that is pre-installed on the board.
Server BIOS Then make changes to the default BIOS settings described in Table 7-17,
Settings Table 7-18, or Table 7-19, Table 7-21, Table 7-21. All possible BIOS settings are
not described; only BIOS settings that require changes from default settings are
described.
Table 7-17 ML350 G5 BIOS Setting Changes

Setup Utility Menus Selection Setting
Advanced Options Restore Default System Settings
Virtual Install Disk Disabled
System Options Optional Serial Port COM2
Virtual Serial Port Disabled
NUMLOCK Power-On State Enabled
Embedded NIC Port (PXE) Support Disabled
Standard Boot Order (IPL) IPL:4 Hard Drive C: 3
Date and Time Use number keys to enter desired values.
Server Availability ASR Timeout 5 Min
Wake-On LAN Disabled
POST Speed Up
POST F1 Prompt Enabled
Automatic Power On
BIOS Serial Console & EMS BIOS Serial Console Port Disabled

Advanced Options Erase Non-volatile Memory
System Options Optional Serial Port COM2
NUMLOCK Power-On State Enabled
Embedded NIC Port PXE Support Disabled
7-107

PCI Devices PCI Embedded HP 64-Bit/133MHz Disabled
PCI-X Dual Channel U320 HBA Port 1
PCI Embedded HP 64-Bit/133MHz
PCI-X Dual Channel U320 HBA Port 2
Standard Boot Order (IPL) IPL:4 Hard Drive C: 3
Boot Controller Order CTLR: 4 PCI Slot 5 HP Smart Array Controller Order 1
641 Controller
POST Speed Up
Automatic Power On

System Default Options Restore Default System Settings
System Options Serial Port Options
Embedded NICs
NIC1 Boot Options Disabled
NUMLOCK Power-On State On
PCI Device Enable/Disable PCI Embedded HP NC382i PCIe Disabled
DP multifunction 1Gb Adapter
Port 3&4
Automatic Power On
7-108

Advanced Options Advanced System ROM Options
NMI Debug Button Disabled
Video Options Embedded Video
Primary, Optional
Video Secondary
System Default Options User Default Options Save User Defaults
Table 7-20 DL380 G6 BIOS Setting Changes

Embedded NICs
PCI Device Enable/Disable PCI Embedded HP NC382i PCIe DP Disabled
multifunction 1 Gb Adapter Port 3&4
Automatic Power On
Server Asset Text Server Info Text
Server Asset Tag Philips HC
(case sensitive)
Primary, Optional
Video Secondary
Asset Tag Protection Locked
System Default Options User Default Options Save User
Defaults
7-109
Table 7-21 DL380 G7 BIOS Setting Changes

Embedded NICs
PCI Device Enable/Disable PCI Embedded HP NC382i PCIe DP Disabled
multifunction 1Gb Adapter Port 3&4
Automatic Power On
Primary, Optional
Video Secondary
System Default Options User Default Options Save User
Defaults
7-110
Navigating the Setup Utility
Table 7-22 Setup Utility Control Keys

Right/left Arrow keys select menus (move the cursor left or
right). Up/down Arrow keys select menu items and change
settings (move the cursor up or down).
The Enter key executes a command or opens a submenu.
The Escape key exits the menu or exits the Setup Utility
without saving.
ML350 G5 Step 1. Turn on the Server.

Server
During the server Boot sequence watch for the message, Press <F9> Key for ROM-Based
Setup Utility (Two beeps may sound just before this message appears).
Step 2. When you see the message, Press <F9> Key for ROM-Based Setup Utility, press F9
to display the ROM-Based Setup Utility (RBSU).
Note You must press F9 immediately after the message, Press <F9> Key for ROM-Based Setup
Utility, appears or the Server will continue the boot sequence. If you miss the F9 prompt,
restart the Server by pressing the Ctrl-Alt-Delete keys simultaneously.
Advanced Options
Step 1. From the Setup Utility Advanced Options menu select Restore Default
System Settings and press Enter twice.
The server restarts.
Step 2. When you see the message, Press <F9> Key for ROM-Based Setup Utility, press F9
to access the setup menu again.
7-111
System Options
Step 1. From the Setup Utility select System Options and press Enter. Then
change the following System Options settings.
a. Select Optional Serial Port and press Enter.

Change its setting to COM 2 and press Enter.
b. Select Virtual Serial Port and press Enter.
Change its setting to Disabled and press Enter.
c. Select NUMLOCK Power-On State and press Enter.
Change its setting to On and press Enter.
d. Select Embedded NICs and press Enter three times and select
Disabled. Then and press Enter.
Step 2. Press the Esc key twice to return to the ROM Based Setup Utility
window.
Standard Boot Order (IPL)
Step 1. Select Standard Boot Order (IPL) and press Enter to display its menu.
Then change the following Standard Boot Order (IPL) settings
a. Select IPL:4 Hard Drive C: and press Enter. Then select Set the IPL
Device Boot Order to 3 and press Enter.
b. Select Set the IPL Device Boot Order to 3 and press Enter.
Step 2. Press the Esc key to return to the ROM Based Setup Utility window.
Date and Time

Step 1. Select Date and Time and press Enter.
Step 2. Set the Date and Time to desired values using the number keys and press
Enter.
Server Availability
Step 1. Select Server Availability and press Enter to display its menu. Then
change the Server Availability settings as follows.
a. Select ASR Timeout and press Enter. Change its setting to 5 Min and
press Enter.
b. Select Wake-On LAN and press Enter twice to change its setting to
Disabled and press Enter.
c. Select POST F1 Prompt and press Enter. Change its setting to
Enabled and press Enter
d. Select Automatic Power On and press Enter. Change its setting to
Enabled and press Enter.
7-112
BIOS Serial Console Port

Step 1. Select BIOS Serial Console & EMS and press Enter to display its menu.
Then change the BIOS Serial Console & EMS settings as follows.
a. Select BIOS Serial Console Port and press Enter.

b. Select Disabled and press Enter.
Advanced Options
Step 1. Select Advanced Options for the setup window and press Enter. Select
Virtual Install Disk and change the setting to Disabled.
Step 2. Press Esc to return to the ROM Based Setup Utility window.
Confirm Settings and Exit

Step 3. Press the Esc key to display <F10> to Confirm Exit Utility. Then press
the F10 key to confirm the BIOS settings and exit the ROM Based Setup
Utility. This saves the BIOS setting changes.
The system will restart to the Windows 2003 Main Menu.
7-113
ML350 G6 Server Step 1. Turn on the Server.

During the server Boot sequence watch for the message, Press <F9> Key for ROM-
Based Setup Utility (Two beeps may sound just before this message appears).
Step 2. When you see the message, Press <F9> Key for ROM-Based Setup Utility,
press the F9 key to display the ROM-Based Setup Utility (RBSU).
Note You must press the F9 immediately after the message, Press <F9> Key for ROM-
Based Setup Utility, appears or the Server will continue the boot sequence. If you
miss the F9 prompt, restart the Server by pressing the Ctrl-Alt-Delete keys
simultaneously.
Advanced Options
Step 1. From the Setup Utility Advanced Options menu select Erase Non-
volatile Memory and press Enter twice.
Step 2. Select Yes, Select to Erase and press Enter.

The server restarts.
press the F9 key to access the setup menu again.
System Options
Step 1. From the Setup Utility select System Options and press Enter.
Step 2. Select Optional Serial Port and press Enter.

Change its setting to COM 2 and press Enter.
Step 3. Select Virtual Serial Port and press Enter.
Step 4. Select NUMLOCK Power-On State and press Enter.

Change its setting to Enabled and press Enter.
Step 5. Select Embedded NIC Port PXE Support and press Enter twice to
display its options. Change its setting to Disabled and press Enter.
Step 6. Press the Esc key to return to the ROM Based Setup Utility.
PCI Devices
Step 1. Select PCI Devices and press Enter to display its menu.
Step 2. Select PCI Embedded HP 64-Bit/133MHz PCI-X Dual Channel U320

HBA Port 1 and press Enter to display its options:
Step 3. Select PCI Embedded HP 64-Bit/133MHz PCI-X Dual Channel U320
HBA Port 2 and press Enter to display its options:
7-114
Standard Boot Order (IPL)
Step 1. Select Standard Boot Order (IPL) and press Enter to display its menu.
Step 2. Select IPL:4 Hard Drive C: and press Enter. Then select Set the IPL
Device Boot Order to 3 and press Enter.
Boot Controller Order

Step 4. Select Boot Controller Order and press Enter to display its menu.
Step 5. Select CTLR: 4 PCI Slot 5 HP Smart Array 641 Controller and press
Enter. Then select Controller Order 1 and press Enter.
Date and Time

Step 1. Select Date and Time and press Enter.
Enter.
Server Availability
Step 1. Select Server Availability and press Enter to display its menu.
Step 2. Select ASR Timeout and press Enter. Change its setting to 5 Min and
press Enter.
Step 3. Select Wake-On LAN and press Enter twice to change its setting to
Step 4. Select POST Speed Up and press Enter. Change its setting to Disabled
and press Enter.
Step 5. Select POST F1 Prompt and press Enter. Change its setting to Enabled
and press Enter.
Step 6. Select Automatic Power On and press Enter. Change its setting to
Step 7. Press Esc to return to the ROM Based Setup Utility.
BIOS Serial Console & EMS

Step 1. Select BIOS Serial Console & EMS and press Enter to display its menu.
Step 2. Select BIOS Serial Console Port and press Enter. Select Disabled and
press Enter.
7-115
Step 3. Press Esc to return to the ROM Based Setup Utility.
• Press the Esc key to display <F10> to Confirm Exit Utility. Press the F10
key to confirm the BIOS settings and exit the ROM Based Setup Utility.
This saves the BIOS setting changes.
The system will restart to the Windows 2003 Main Menu.
DL380 G6 Server Step 1. Turn on the Server.

Based Setup Utility.
press F9 to display the ROM-Based Setup Utility (RBSU).
Note You must press F9 immediately after the message, Press <F9> Key for ROM-Based
Setup Utility, appears or the Server will continue the boot sequence. If you miss the
F9 prompt, restart the Server by pressing the Ctrl-Alt-Delete keys simultaneously.
Figure 7-34 RBSU Main Menu Example
7-116
System Default Options
Step 1. From the ROM-Based Setup Utility menu use the keyboard down arrow to
select System Default Options and press Enter to open its submenu.
Step 2. Delete User Defaults and press Enter.
Step 3. Select Restore Default System Settings and press Enter twice. Then select
Yes, Select to Restore and press Enter.
Default settings are restored and the server restarts.
press F9 to access the setup menu again.
System Options
Step 1. In the ROM-Based Setup Utility Main Menu select System Options and
press Enter. Then change the following System Options settings.
a. Select Serial Port Options and press Enter, select Virtual Serial
Port and press Enter, then change its setting to Disabled and press
Enter. Press Esc to return to the previous menu.
b. Select Embedded NICs and press Enter, then select NIC1 Boot
Options and press Enter twice.
Change its setting to Disabled and press Enter, then press Esc to return
to the previous menu.
Step 2. Press the Esc key to return to the ROM-Based Setup Utility Main
screen.
PCI Device Enable/Disable

Step 1. Select PCI Device Enable/Disable and press Enter to open its menu.
Step 2. Select PCI Embedded HP NC382i PCIe DP Multifunction 1Gb

Adapter Port 3&4 and press Enter to show its options:
Step 3. Press the Esc key to return to the ROM Based Setup Utility Main Menu.
Date and Time

Step 1. Use the down arrow key to select Date and Time and press Enter.
Enter.
7-117
Server Availability
Step 1. In the ROM-Based Setup Utility Main Menu select Server Availability
and press Enter to open its menu. Then change the Server Availability
settings as follows.
press Enter.
b. Select Wake-On LAN and press Enter twice. Change its setting to
c. Select Automatic Power On and press Enter. Change its setting to
Step 2. Press the Esc key to return to the ROM-Based Setup Utility Main Menu.

Step 1. In the ROM-Based Setup Utility Main Menu select BIOS Serial Console
& EMS and press Enter to open its menu. Then change the BIOS Serial
Console & EMS settings as follows.

Advanced Options
Step 1. In the ROM-Based Setup Utility menu select Advanced Options and
press Enter. Select Advanced System ROM Options and press Enter,
then change the following settings.
a. Select NMI Debug Button and press Enter. Then change its setting to
b. Select Virtual Install Disk and press Enter. Then change its setting to
Step 2. Press Esc to return to the previous menu selections.
a. Select Video Options and press Enter.
b. Select Embedded Video Primary, Optional Video Secondary, then

press Enter.
Step 3. Press Esc to return to the ROM Based Setup Utility Main Menu.
Step 2. Select User Default Options and press Enter.

Step 3. Select Save User Defaults and press Enter. Then select Yes, Save and
press Enter.
7-118

• Press the Esc key three times, then press the F10 key to confirm and save
new BIOS settings and exit the ROM Based Setup Utility.
DL380 G7 Server
Note During the Boot sequence, watch for the message Press any key to see option
ROM messages. When you see the message, press any key This allows you to see
additional ROM Messages needed for ILO 3, RAID Configuration, and BIOS
Settings.
Step 1. Shut down and restart the Server.

Based Setup Utility.
press F9 to display the ROM-Based Setup Utility (RBSU).
Note You must press F9 immediately after the message, Press <F9> Key for ROM-Based
Setup Utility, appears or the Server will continue the boot sequence. If you miss the
F9 prompt, restart the Server by pressing the Ctrl-Alt-Delete keys simultaneously.
7-119
Figure 7-35 RBSU Main Menu Example
7-120
Step 2. Select Restore Default System Settings and press Enter twice. Then select
Yes, Select to Restore and press Enter.
Default settings are restored and the server restarts.
press F9 to access the setup menu again.
System Options
Step 1. In the ROM-Based Setup Utility Main Menu select System Options and
press Enter. Then change the following System Options settings.
a. Select Serial Port Options and press Enter, select Virtual Serial
Port and press Enter, then change its setting to Disabled and press
Enter. Press Esc to return to the previous menu.
b. Select Embedded NICs and press Enter, then select NIC1 Boot
Options and press Enter twice.
Change its setting to Disabled and press Enter, then press Esc to return
to the previous menu.
Step 2. Press the Esc key to return to the ROM-Based Setup Utility Main
screen.
PCI Device Enable/Disable

Step 1. Select PCI Device Enable/Disable and press Enter to open its menu.
Step 2. Select PCI Embedded HP NC382i PCIe DP Multifunction 1Gb

Adapter Port 3&4 and press Enter to show its options:
Step 3. Press the Esc key to return to the ROM Based Setup Utility Main Menu.
Date and Time

Step 1. Use the down arrow key to select Date and Time and press Enter.
Enter.
7-121
Server Availability
Step 1. In the ROM-Based Setup Utility Main Menu select Server Availability
and press Enter to open its menu. Then change the Server Availability
settings as follows.
press Enter.
b. Select Wake-On LAN and press Enter twice. Change its setting to
c. Select POST F1 Prompt and press Enter. Change its setting to
d. Select Automatic Power On and press Enter. Change its setting to

Step 1. In the ROM-Based Setup Utility Main Menu select BIOS Serial Console
& EMS and press Enter to open its menu. Then change the BIOS Serial
Console & EMS settings as follows.

Step 2. Press the Esc key twice to return to the ROM-Based Setup Utility Main
Menu.
Server Asset Text

Step 1. In the ROM-Based Setup Utility Main Menu select Server Asset Text and
press Enter.
a. Select Server Info Text and press Enter.

b. Select Server Asset Tag and press Enter.
c. Type the following exactly (case sentive)
Philips-HC
d. Press Enter.
7-122
Advanced Options
Step 1. In the ROM-Based Setup Utility menu select Advanced Options and
press Enter. Select Advanced System ROM Options and press Enter,
then change the following settings.
a. Select NMI Debug Button and press Enter. Then change its setting to
b. Select Virtual Install Disk and press Enter. Then change its setting to
Step 2. Press Esc to return to the previous menu selections.
a. Select Video Options and press Enter.
b. Select Embedded Video Primary, Optional Video Secondary, then

press Enter.
Step 3. Select Asset Tag Protection and press Enter twice. Then change its setting
to locked.
Step 4. Press Esc to return to the ROM Based Setup Utility Main Menu.
Step 2. Select User Default Options and press Enter.

Step 3. Select Save User Defaults and press Enter. Then select Yes, Save and
press Enter.

• Press the Esc key three times, then press the F10 key to confirm and
save new BIOS settings and exit the ROM Based Setup Utility.
7-123
Information If the DC7700 or rp5700 PC mother board is replaced, use the BIOS that is pre-
Center/Client PC installed on the board. Then make changes to the default BIOS settings described in
BIOS Settings Table 7-23. All possible BIOS settings are not described; only BIOS settings that
require changes from defaults are described.
Table 7-23 DC 7700/RP 5700 BIOS Setting Changes

Setup Utility
Selection Setting/Selection Setting/Action
Menus
File Menu Default Setup Restore Factory Settings
as Default
Apply Defaults and Exit Restart Workstation.
Set Time and Date Use tab key to move between
hour and minute or day,
month, and year fields; use
right/left arrow keys to
change settings; use up/down
arrow keys to move between
Time and Date.
Storage Menu Device Configuration Hard Disk: SATA 0 Translation Mode:LBA
Default Values: IDE/SATA Assisted
Boot Order Select Hard Drive For DC 7700 move Hard
Drive to the third
position in Boot Order
list.
For RP 5700 move Hard
Drive to the second
position in Boot Order
list
Security Menua Network Service Boot Network Service Boot Disable
7-124
Table 7-23 DC 7700/RP 5700 BIOS Setting Changes

Setup Utility
Selection Setting/Selection Setting/Action
Menus
Advanced Menu Power On Options POST Mode Full Boot
POST Messages Enable
F9 Prompt Hidden
F11 Prompt
F12 Prompt
After Power Loss On
Onboard Devices Serial Port B 2E8-2EF IRQ 3
(for 4-Channel serial
recorder)
2F8-2FF IRQ 3)
(for DC 7700 external
modem)
Device Options Num Lock at Power-On On
S5 Wake On Lan Disable
NIC PXE Option ROM
Download:
File Menu Default Setup Save Current Settings as
Default
a
Additional configuration required when HP rp5700 system Board is replaced.
HP DC7700 If software for the HP DC7700 PC was loaded at the Philips factory, select Apply
Defaults and Exit from the File menu to restore the correct BIOS settings for the
IntelliVue Information Center PC.
If you must make changes to the default BIOS settings, do the following.
Step 1. Shut down and restart the PC to restart it and watch for the on-screen
message <F10 = Setup>.
Note The message <F10 = Setup> appears only briefly. If you miss it, restart the PC.
Step 2. When you see the message,<F10 = Setup>, press the F10 key.
Language Menu
Step 3. Select English in the Language selection menu and press Enter.
The Setup Utility opens.
File Menu
Step 1. From Setup Utility, select File > Default Setup and press Enter.
A Default Setup dialog opens.
Step 2. From the Default Setup dialog, select Restore Factory Settings as
Default and press F10.
7-125
A Success dialog displays the message, Default setup was successful.

Apply defaults to activate. Press any key to continue.
Step 3. Press any key to return to the Setup Utility. Then go to File > Apply
Defaults and Exit and press Enter.
An Apply Defaults and Exit dialog displays the message, Are you sure
you want to set defaults and exit?
Step 4. Press F10 for Yes. The PC will restart.
Step 5. When you see <F10 = Setup>, at the lower edge of the start up screen, press
F10. Then, select English in the Language selection menu and press
Enter.
Step 6. From the Setup Utility select File > Set Time and Date and press
Enter.
The Set Time and Date dialog opens.
Step 7. Set the desired time and date.

a. Use up/down arrow keys to move between Time and Date.
b. Use the tab key to move between Hour, Minute, Month, Day, and
Year.
c. Use right/left arrow keys to increase or decrease values.
Step 8. When the prompt, Are you sure... appears, press F10 to Accept.
Storage Menu
Step 1. From the Setup Utility select Storage > Device Configuration and
press Enter.
The Device Configuration dialog opens.
Step 2. In the Device Configuration dialog select Hard Disk : SATA 0 and
press Enter.
The SATA 0 dialog opens.
Step 3. In the SATA 0 dialog select Translation Mode, and change the setting to
LBA Assisted. Then press F10 to Accept.
Step 4. In the Device Configuration dialog select IDE/SATA and press Enter.
The IDE/SATA dialog opens.
Step 5. In the IDE/SATA dialog select Translation Mode, and change the setting
to LBA Assisted. Then press F10 to Accept.
Step 6. Press the ESC key to return to the Setup Utility.
Step 7. From the Setup Utility select Storage > Boot Order and press Enter.
The Boot Order dialog opens.
Step 8. In the Boot Order dialog use the up or down arrow to select Hard Drive,
and press Enter.
The selection is highlighted and an up/down Drag arrow displays next to the
selection. Use the Up or Down Arrow keys to position the selection in the
7-126
desired order. Hard Drive should be the third item in the Boot Order list.
The final settings should be in the following order:
ATAPI CD-ROM Drive

Diskette Drive
Hard Drive
Integrated SATA
Integrated IDE
USB Device
Network Controller
Intel Ethernet Controller (only appears if there is a second NIC installed)
Step 9. Press the F10 key to Accept.
Security Menu
Step 1. From Setup Utility go to Security > Network Service Boot and press
Enter.
A Network Service Boot dialog opens.
Step 2. In the Network Service Boot dialog use the right or left arrow keys to
change the setting to Disable and press F10 to Accept.
Step 3. If you did not replace the System Board, continue to Advanced Menu. If
you replaced the System Board you must update information stored on the
System Board as follows.
a. From the Setup Utility select Security.
The Security menu opens.
b. Select System IDs, then press Ctrl + A keys simultaneously.
c. When you release the keys press Enter.
The expanded System IDs menu opens.
d. Select Enter Chassis Serial Number and enter the PC Serial Number
from your PC label. You must use the Backspace key to correct typing
mistakes.
e. Select Enter Product Name and type the following case-sensitive text
exactly.
HP Compaq dc7700 Convertible Minitower
f. Press F10 then press Esc to save changes and exit.
The PC will restart.
g. When you see the message,<F10 = Setup>, press the F10 key to access
the BIOS.
h. Go to File > System Information. Verify the changed information for
accuracy. If you must make corrections, repeat steps a. through h.
i. If information is correct, proceed to Advanced Menu.
Advanced Menu
Step 1. From Setup Utility go to Advanced > Power On Options and press
Enter.
The Power On Options dialog appears.
Step 2. Change the following Power On Options settings:
POST Mode: Full Boot
7-127
POST Messages: Enable

F9 Prompt: Hidden
F12 Prompt: Hidden
After Power Loss: On
Step 3. Press F10 to Accept.

Step 4. From the Setup Utility go to Advanced > Onboard Devices and press
Enter.
The Onboard Devices dialog appears.
Step 5. In the Onboard Devices dialog change the following items to the settings:
Serial Port B: 2E8-2EF IRQ 3 (COM4) for 4-Channel recorder connection
or 2F8-2FF IRQ 3 (COM2) for external modem connection

Step 7. Go to Advanced > Device Options and press Enter.
The Device Options dialog opens.
7-128
Step 8. Change the following Device Options to the settings:

Num Lock at Power-On: On
S5 Wake On Lan: Disable
NIC PXE Option ROM Download: Disable
File Menu
Step 1. From the Setup Utility go to File > Default Setup and press Enter.
Step 2. Select Save Current Settings as Default and press F10 to Accept.
The current settings are saved as the defaults.
When you see the message, Default Setup was successful. Press any key to
continue, press any key.
Step 3. Go to File > Save Changes and Exit and press Enter.
The system restarts.
HP RP5700 The HP rp5700 Setup Utility, which you can by access by pressing the F10 key at start
up, permits verifying system configuration or changing factory default BIOS settings
(if necessary).
If you have not replaced the PC mother board and software for the HP rp5700 PC was
loaded at the Philips factory, you do not have to change BIOS settings in the Setup
Utility.
If you must replace the rp5700 PC mother board, use the BIOS that is pre-installed
on the board. Then make the changes to the factory default BIOS settings described
in the following steps. All possible BIOS settings are not shown; only BIOS
settings that require changes from defaults are described.
To make changes to the HP factory default BIOS settings, do the following.
Step 1. Shut down and restart the PC. Then watch for the on-screen message
<F10 = Setup>.
Note The message <F10 = Setup> appears only briefly. If you miss it, restart the PC.
Step 2. When you see the message, <F10 = Setup>, press the F10 key.
Language Menu
• Select English in the Language selection menu and press Enter.
File Menu
Step 1. From the Setup Utility, select File > Default Setup and press Enter.
A Default Setup dialog opens.
7-129
Step 2. From the Default Setup dialog, select Restore Factory Settings as
Default and press F10.
A Success dialog shows the message, Default setup was successful.
Apply defaults to activate. Press any key to continue.
Step 3. Press any key to return to the Setup Utility. Then go to File > Apply
Defaults and Exit and press Enter.
An Apply Defaults and Exit dialog shows the message, Are you sure you
want to set defaults and exit?
Step 4. Press F10 for Yes. The PC will restart.
Step 5. When you see <F10 = Setup> at the lower edge of the start up screen, press
F10. Then, select English in the Language selection menu and press
Enter.
The Setup Utility appears.
Step 6. From the Setup Utility select File > Set Time and Date and press
Enter.
The Set Time and Date dialog opens.
Step 7. Set the desired time and date.

a. Use up/down arrow keys to move between Time and Date.
b. Use the tab key to move between Hour and Minute or Month, Day, and
Year selections.
c. Use right/left arrow keys to adjust settings.
d. When changes are complete, press F10 to return to the Setup Utility.
Storage Menu
Step 1. From the Setup Utility select Storage > Device Configuration and
press Enter.
The Device Configuration dialog opens.
Step 2. In the Device Configuration dialog use the Up or Down arrow key to
move to the Hard Disk : SATA 0 selection and press Enter.
The SATA 0 dialog appears.
Step 3. In the SATA 0 dialog use the Up or Down arrow key to move to the
Translation Mode selection, and use the Right or Left arrow key to change
the setting to LBA Assisted. Then press F10 to Accept.
Step 4. In the Device Configuration dialog use the Up or Down arrow key to
move to the Default Values : SATA Defaults selection and press Enter.
The SATA Defaults dialog appears.
Step 5. In the SATA Defaults dialog use the Up or Down arrow key to move to
the Translation Mode selection, and use the Right or Left arrow key to
change the setting to LBA Assisted. Then press F10 to Accept. Press the
ESC key to return to the Setup Utility.
Step 6. From the Setup Utility select Storage > Boot Order and press Enter.
The Boot Order dialog opens.
7-130
Step 7. In the Boot Order dialog use the up or down arrow to select Hard Drive,
and press Enter.
The selection is highlighted and an up/down Drag arrow appears next to the
selection. Use the Up or Down Arrow keys to move the Hard Drive to the
second position in the Boot Order list. The final settings should be:
ATAPI CD-ROM Drive

Hard Drive
Integrated SATA
USB Device
Broadcom Ethernet Controller
Intel Ethernet Controller (only appears if there is a second NIC installed)
Step 8. Press the F10 key to Accept.
Security Menu
Step 1. From Setup Utility go to Security > Network Service Boot and press
Enter.
A Network Service Boot dialog appears.
Step 2. In the Network Service Boot dialog use the right or left arrow keys to
change the setting to Disable and press F10 to Accept.
Step 3. If you did not replace the System Board, continue to Advanced Menu. If
you replaced the System Board you must update information stored on the
System Board as follows.
a. From the Setup Utility select Security.
The Security menu opens.
b. Select System IDs, then press Ctrl + A keys simultaneously.
c. When you release the keys press Enter.
The expanded System IDs menu opens.
d. Select Enter Chassis Serial Number and enter the PC Serial Number
from your PC label. You must use the Backspace key to correct typing
errors.
e. Select Enter Product Name and type the following case-sensitive text
exactly.
HP rp5700 Business System
f. Press F10 then press Esc to save changes and exit.
The PC will restart.
g. When you see the message,<F10 = Setup>, press the F10 key.
h. From the Setup Utility go to File > System Information. Verify the
changed information for accuracy. If you must make corrections, repeat
steps a. through h.
i. If information is correct, proceed to Advanced Menu.
Advanced Menu
Step 1. From Setup Utility go to Advanced > Power On Options and press
Enter.
The Power On Options dialog appears.
7-131
Step 2. Change the following Power On Options settings:
POST mode: FullBoot

POST messages: enable
F9 prompt: hidden
F11 prompt: hidden
F12 prompt: hidden
After Power Loss: on

Step 4. From the Setup Utility go to Advanced > Onboard Devices and press
Enter. Then press Enter in the Help dialog.
The Onboard Devices dialog appears.
Step 5. In the Onboard Devices dialog change the following items to the settings:
Serial Port B: 2E8-2EF IRQ 3 (COM4) for 4-Channel serial recorder
connection

Step 7. Go to Advanced > Device Options and press Enter.
The Device Options dialog opens.
Step 8. Change the following Device Options to the settings:

Num Lock state at power-on: on
S5 Wake on LAN: disable
NIC PXE Option ROM Download: disable
File Menu
Step 1. From the Setup Utility go to File > Default Setup and press Enter.
Step 2. Select Save Current Settings as Default and press F10 to Accept.
The current settings are saved as the defaults.
When you see the message, Default Setup was successful. Press any key to
continue, press any key.
Step 3. Go to File > Save Changes and Exit and press Enter
Step 4. When you see the message, Are you sure you want to Save Changes and
Exit?, press F10 to Accept.
The system restarts.
7-132
Software Re-Installation Procedure
Philips systems are shipped with all system software properly installed. If software
functionality is lost, however, either by an unexpected electrical condition or a
system failure, it can be re-installed. This section describes the procedure for
installing or reinstalling Operating System and Application software. The procedures
apply to the Server and the Information Center workstations.
Note Before installing Philips application software on any device, copy and complete the
configuration Worksheets (Appendix A).
Completing an Installation Worksheet
Before you begin installing System Software, copy an Installation Worksheet in

Appendix A and use it to record information required during System installation.
Caution On an initial installation on a Database Server be sure to close all programs and
applications before running the Application setup program. Failure to close
programs and applications can cause the setup process to abort. If this happens
you will have to restart the setup process.
Creating a Current Archive
Warnings You cannot restore an archive from hardware earlier than the HP rp5700 that
has an assigned SDN device to an rp5700 that does NOT have an SDN card. In
order to create a compatible archive you must remove the SDN devices from the
current system, then create the archive.
If you intend to restore an archive on a Database Server make sure that you
remove all SCC equipment assigned to any IIC that will NO LONGER HAVE
AN SDN CARD. Remove equipment in Network Configuration and Equipment
Setup pages of Config Wizard.
• Before you start the software re-installation, create an Archive of the current
device (page 6-96). With Release N, your printer configuration will not be
archived, so be sure to save and restore your local printer configuration using
the Microsoft Windows Print Migrator Utility or equivalent.
http://www.microsoft.com/WindowsServer2003/techinfo/overview/
printmigrator3.1.mspx
7-133
Connecting Dual Displays
If an Information Center or Client has dual displays, be sure to physically connect

both displays before Installing the Operating System. If both displays are not
connected the Purchased Options screen # of Displays setting will be disabled
and set to 1.
Using the Installation The Installation Support Tool (IST) is a program that permits an unattended install
Support Tool (IST) of the Windows™ Operating System and Philips Application Software.
USB Flash Drive Media Kit 4535 642 01281

PIC /APS Software USB Flash Drive (UFD) 4535 642 21991
IST CD 4535 642 21981
DVD Media Kit 4535 642 01511

PIC /APS Software N.xx.xx DVD 4535 642 57771
IST CD 4535 642 21981
If you are using media that includes a USB Flash Drive you must have the media in
the appropriate port before you start the installation.
Step 1. Put the CD that contains the Installation Support Tool into the
appropriate drive, then restart the PC/Server.
Step 2. When the Philips banner appears, use the keyboard arrow to select
[1] Continue with installation then press Enter.
When the IST completes, a dialog displays a prompt to replace the CD with the
appropriate IntelliVue Application software media.
Step 3. When the Replace CD dialog opens, do the following.
a. If you are using a USB Flash Drive you will see the message, Please
remove the IST CD. Remove the CD, then click OK in the dialog.
b. If you are using a DVD you will see the message, Please replace IST CD
with the PIC APS Software DVD. Remove the CD, put the DVD into
the appropriate drive, then click OK in the dialog.
Step 4. The IntelliVue Installation Questionnaire opens (Figure 7-36). Active

selections vary according to hardware platform and components. When
entering information on the screen begin on the left then move to the right.
7-134
You must enter all required information before the Install button becomes
active.
Figure 7-36 IntelliVue Installation Questionnaire Example
Step 5. Enter all applicable information into the Intellivue Installation

Questionnaire.
Selection Description
Enter Hostname 15 character limit (follows conventions of MS NetBios device naming)
For information about naming devices see page 5-32.
Enter System Serial You can find the serial number on the product label.
Number
Enter IP Address of System Enter in the appropriate IP Address for this device. For valid IP Address Ranges, see page 5-29.
Enter IP Subnet Mask Change the subnet mask to 255.255.248.0
7-135
Selection Description
Enter Windows Server • Enter the Product Key.
2003 License Key The Product Key.is located on the Certificate of Authenticity label.
Select !!! Permits selection from a drop-down list of UPS types

Selections for Small Database Servers, Information Centers, Clients, Trend Display, and Patient
Link are: Tripp-Lite, Smart-UPS, Back-UPS, and Customer Supplied.
Selections for large Database Servers are: Black Cable Smart-UPS, Grey Cable Smart-UPS,
and Customer Supplied.
Each Tripp-Lite UPS has a Surge Only outlet. Refer to Connecting Devices to the
UPS, Chapter 2, for the devices that are supported on the Surge Only outlet.
Select Localization Permits selection of appropriate language
1. Click List by Code or List by Country button.
2. Click a selection from the list.
The selection appears below the Select Localization button.
Enter Default Gateway This selection does not appear for any system that contains two NICs.
For M3154/M3169 Database Servers and M3150 Local Database Information Centers press
Enter to accept the default (blank). The appropriate Default Gateway is assigned when you run
Config Wizard.
On systems that connect to a IntelliVue Telemetry System through a router:
• M3155 Network Information Centers and M3151 Information Center Clients: Enter the
following Router Address: 172.31.0.1 and press Enter. If using a separate subnet, use
172.xx.0.1 (xx is the subnet designated for the current IntelliVue Clinical Network).
The subnet may be different depending on the number of Clinical networks connected.
Refer to Appendix A for the appropriate subnet.
On systems that connect to a IntelliVue Telemetry System without a router:
• M3155 Network Information Centers and M3151 Information Center Clients: Enter the
Database Server IP Address and press Enter.
• Click Install to save changes or Cancel to exit screen.
Step 6. After you enter all required information on the IntelliVue Installation
Questionnaire screen, click Install.
Step 7. At completion of Application install, a Remove Media dialog appears.
a. If you are using a USB Flash Drive you will see the message, Please
remove the UFD and then select OK! When you see the message
remove the USB Flash Drive, then click OK in the dialog.
b. If you are using a DVD you will see the message, Please remove the
DVD and then select OK! When you see the message remove the media,
then click OK in the dialog.
7-136
The M3154, M3169, and M3150 open to Config Wizard. For detailed information
about Config Wizard, see page 6-7.
If you have a second NIC installed that requires a static IP Address rather than
DHCP (Default), Philips recommends that you configure the card before you run
Config Wizard. See Setting a Second NIC Static IP Address.
Setting a If you have a second NIC that you must configure with a static IP Address, do the
Second NIC following:
Static IP Address
Step 1. When the first page of Config Wizard opens, press the CTRL and ESC
keys simultaneously.
The Windows task bar displays at the bottom of the screen. However, if the
keyboard is locked a Service Password dialog displays.
Step 2. If the Service Password dialog displays enter the Philips Service
Password in the dialog and click OK.
Step 3. Follow instructions for configuring the second NIC, page 5-36.
Activating the
Windows 2003
Operating System Step 1. From the Windows task bar click the OS activation icon .
License The Activate Windows screen appears.
Step 2. If the DBS is connected to the internet, click the Yes, let's activate
Windows over the Internet now option and follow on screen instructions.
7-137
Step 3. If the DBS is not connected to the internet, click the option button adjacent
to the selection, Yes, I want to telephone a customer service representative
to activate Windows. Then click Next.
The Activate Windows by phone screen appears.
a. Select a location from the drop-down list adjacent to Step 1 in the

Activate Windows screen. A telephone number appears; a toll free
number, if available, appears also.
b. Call the customer service number. If you have a single activation request,
you can follow the automated voice prompts and enter required
information by voice input. If you require multiple activations, press 0
during the initial Microsoft license activation voice prompt, and you will
be connected to a Microsoft representative who can assist you with
multiple activation requests.
Note When reading the installation ID, you must say “zero” for the number, “zero”.
c. Enter the confirmation ID in the appropriate fields of the Activate

Windows screen. Then click Next.
d. Click Finish to complete the activation.
Configuring the On Simplified Chinese installations you must manually configure the date format
Simplified Chinese on the Database Server (or M3150 on local database systems).
Date Format
Step 1. From the Windows desktop open the Control Panel and select Regional
and Language Options.
7-138
Step 2. Click the Regional Options tab and select a long date format that does
not show Chinese characters.
Step 3. Click OK to save the change and close the Regional Options window.
Note If an ELO Touch screen display is connected, it must be calibrated. Refer to

page 5-20 for Touch screen calibration information.
7-139
Updating Firmware on Information Centers and DataBase Servers
Updating Firmware on Information Centers

and DataBase Servers
The Firmware Update procedure applies to the Hewlett Packard platforms in
Table 7-24.
Table 7-24 Applicable Platforms
DataBase Information
Servers Centers
ML350 G5 HP DC7700
ML350 G6 HP rp5700
DL380 G6
Table 7-25 Update CD Description
Update CD
Server Firmware Microcode

BIOS Version Version Part Numbera
Maintenance CD Version
ML350 G5 (D21)2009.07.10 N/A

ML350 G6 (D22)2009.07.24 N/A
DL 380 G6 (P62)2009.07.24 N/A
PC BIOS/Microcode Microcode
BIOS Version Version
Update Version Part Number
DC7700 1.10 1.05

HP rp5700 1.12 1.05
aAn ISO Image of each Update CD is on the InCenter System.
For updating hardware that is not supported by Release N, refer to IIC Addendum on
the InCenter System.
7-140
Updating the The IIC server firmware update corrects a false indication that the battery should be
DataBase Server replaced.
Firmware
The Server
Updates the following On the following
Firmware
firmware... DBS hardware
Maintenance CD
641/642 smart array controllera ML350 G5
Hot swap disk drives ML350 G6/DL380 G6
HP Proliant BIOS
a
This does not apply to the ML350 G5, which has an E200i Smart Array Controller,
or the ML 350 G6/DL380 G6, which have an E410i Smart Array Controller.
Running the Server Step 1. Go to the Windows Desktop and close any open applications.
Firmware Update
Software Step 2. Put the Server Firmware Maintenance CD-ROM into the Server CD
drive.
Step 3. Shut down and restart the server so that it starts up from the Update CD.
The Firmware Maintenance window appears.
After the Firmware Maintenance window the Select the Language

window opens.
Step 4. Select Continue in the Select the Language window to open the End
User License Agreement. Then click Agree.
The Home menu of the HP Proliant Firmware Maintenance CD appears.
Step 5. Select Firmware Update from the menu, then select Install Firmware to
start the HP Smart Update Manager.
The HP Smart Update Manager creates an inventory of server firmware that

requires update. During this process, progress bars appear. When the inventory
is complete, an Install-able Updates list shows updates that can be
installed. Each update has a checked green circle symbol followed by the
words, Ready for installation. Update to each checked item will occur unless
you remove the check next to the item.
Note The Server BIOS will appear on the update list and have a check if it is not up to date.
Step 6. If you are only performing a BIOS update, be sure that the particular Server
BIOS update is the only checked item in the possible update list;
e.g., HP Proliant ML350 G5 (Dxx).
7-141
Step 7. If iLO ROM Flash (or HP Integrated Lights-Out 2) appears on the

update list, be sure that it is not checked.
The iLO ROM is not used in the server application.
Step 8. Click Install to begin the firmware update.

An Installation progress bar appears.
When the installation update is complete, an Installation Results window appears

showing the status of each update. If any of the updates fail, contact the Philips
Response Center.
Step 9. Click Reboot Now in the Installation Results window.

The server will shut down then restart.
Step 10. When you see the message, Do you really want to reboot the Server?, click
Yes in the dialog.
Be sure to remove the Update CD before the server restarts. Then store the CD in a
safe place.
Step 11. During start up observe the firmware versions that appear on screen to
verify that the firmware is actually updated.
Step 12. Conduct Testing Product Assurance procedures to verify system

operation.
Updating the IIC You may need to flash the BIOS or update the microcode of your IIC PC if:
Firmware
• The PC becomes corrupted,
• after replacing the processor an 1801 error occurs (Incompatible Processor
Stepping), or
• the mother board is replaced.
The PC BIOS/microcode Update CD (Table 7-25) contains the latest, qualified

BIOS and microcode for applicable IIC PC platforms (see Table 7-24).
Once you have installed the new BIOS and microcode, you must accurately
configure the BIOS. (See Configuring BIOS Settings). If you replaced a mother
board, you must also update the data stored on the board with the correct chassis
information.
Once the firmware upgrade is complete, conduct Testing Product Assurance

procedures to verify system operation.
About the Microcode • If you must update both BIOS and microcode, update the BIOS before
Update updating the microcode.
• The microcode update replaces an older version of the microcode contained

within the BIOS.
• The microcode only updates if the processor requires an update.
7-142
• The microcode utility reads the current version installed on the CPU. If an
update is required, the utility performs the update; if the update is not required,
the utility does not perform it.
Updating the XP BIOS Step 1. Go to the Windows Desktop and close any open applications.
(DC7700, or rp5700)
Step 2. Put the Update CD-ROM into the appropriate drive.
Step 3. Open Windows Explorer and select the CD Drive. Then go to the
DC7700, or rp5700 BIOS folder and double-click the HPQFlash.exe icon.
Step 4. Follow the on-screen instructions to update the BIOS. Then restart the PC.
Step 5. During start-up observe the BIOS version that appears on screen to verify
that the BIOS is actually updated.
Updating the DC7700 Creating a Bootable Disk

Microcode
Because the DC7700 Microcode Update file executes from a DOS Boot Disk, you
must create a Boot Disk to do this update.
Step 1. Put a blank 3 1/2-inch disk into the appropriate PC drive.
Step 2. From Windows Explorer right-click 3-1/2 Floppy (A:) and select
Format from the drop-down list.
The Format 3 1/2 Floppy (A:) dialog opens.
Step 3. In the Format options section of the dialog check the Create an
MS-DOS startup disk option, then click Start.
Step 4. Click OK in the Warning to continue.
Step 5. Remove the boot disk from the drive, label it, and store it in a safe place.
Running the Microcode Update
Step 1. Go to the Windows Desktop and close any open applications.
Step 2. Put the Update CD-ROM into the appropriate drive.
Step 3. Open Windows Explorer and select the CD Drive. Then go to the DC7700
Microcode > DOS Flash directory.
Step 4. Put a 3 1/2-inch Boot Disk (see Creating a Bootable Disk) into the
appropriate drive and copy all the files in the directory to the disk.
Step 5. With the Boot Disk in the A: drive restart the PC.
Step 6. Enter Flashbin.exe at the A:> prompt to begin the microcode update.
Updating the If you run the BIOS 1.12 update, version 1.05 Microcode is installed concurrently.
HP rp5700 Microcode
7-143
Using the Japanese Keyboard
Using the Japanese Keyboard
When the Information Center software is newly installed on a system with a

Japanese language selection, the keyboard initially will use English characters. The
Japanese keyboard can toggle between English and Japanese characters as follows:
Step 1. To switch from English to Japanese, press the keys ALT, Shift, and J-tab.
J-tab
The system is configured with two input languages and two keyboards - English and
Japanese.
Step 2. If you want to toggle between the two input languages press ALT + Shift.
Step 3. If you want to toggle between the two keyboards when the input language is
Japanese, press Alt + J-tab.
If the input language is English nothing will change when you press Alt +
J-tab.
7-144
Using Antivirus Software
These guidelines apply to Symantic and McAfee antivirus software only. Be sure to
contact the Philips Response Center for a list of antivirus software versions tested.
Other antivirus software packages have not been tested by Philips and are not
supported.
Supported products include:
• M3140 IntelliVue Information Center Low Acuity Local Database

• M3150 IntelliVue Information Center Local Database
• M3145 IntelliVue Information Center Network Database
• M3155 IntelliVue Information Center Network Database
• M3151 IntelliVue Information Center Client
• M3170 IntelliVue Patient Link
• M3169 IntelliVue Small Database Server
• M3154 IntelliVue Database Server
Warning This procedure applies only to the products described and must not be applied to
any other Philips device unless separate, written authorization is obtained from
Philips.
Philips makes an effort to test products with current antivirus software. This
information serves as a guideline to outline the product-related features and
configuration of antivirus software that may impact performance of the supported
products.
At a high level, the following rules apply to the following features/options of

antivirus software:
• Virus Signature file updates

Automatic signature file updates must be disabled (e.g. Norton
LiveUpdate must be turned off). These must be updated manually.
Procedures are provided in the section Updating Virus Definitions
• Full System Scans

Automated full system scans are not supported
Full system scans while the Philips device is in monitoring mode (manual
or user-initiated) is not supported
7-145
• Active Scanning/Scanning configuration

Active scanning is not supported. Scan only on file Create (or
equivalent) is supported. (Active scanning may degrade system
performance)
Excluded directories must be configured as listed in the Antivirus

Configuration section for the appropriate product.
Other antivirus features that may be added have not been qualified and are not
supported (e.g. Intrusion prevention, Firewall
Configuring Step 1. Install the Antivirus software.

Antivirus Software
Step 2. Exclude the following directories:
Information Center Releases E.01.xx and later

Configure the following exclusions at each M3140/M3150/M3151/M3145/
M3155/M3170:
C:\WINNT\system32\Spool\Printers
D:\Stardate (or C:\Stardate for L.00.16 and later)

If the Information Center has a local database:
C:\Inetpub\wwwroot\Images
Database Server Releases E.01.xx and later

Configure the following exclusions at the M3154 and M3169:
C:\Inetpub\wwwroot\Images
D:\Stardate (or C:\Stardate for L.00.16 and later)
Step 3. Verify that Scan only on Demand (or equivalent) is configured.

Active scanning may degrade system performance and potentially affect
patient care. This configuration ensures that scanning is performed under
observation. If it is not possible to remove all scheduled scans, then
configure those scans to check the smallest number of files possible.
Step 4. Verify that Scan only on file Create is configured.

Scanning on creation identifies newly created suspicious files. Files may
change during normal system operation; therefore, scanning on file
modification may degrade system performance. If Scan only on file Create is
not an option, select Scan on Modify.
7-146
Updating Virus In order to Update the Virus Definition List, you must either copy it to removable
Definitions media or run it from the internet Web site.
Copying Updated You can copy an Updated Virus Definition List to removable media With a Full
Virus Definition List System Scan or Without a Full System Scan.
The following procedures require a PC with internet access and a writable
removable media drive.
With a Full System Scan

Step 1. Locate the Antivirus signature files on the vendor Web site.
Step 2. Download the new signature files and copy them to removable media.
Step 3. On the target device (Information Center, Database Server, Clinical Data
Server, for example) verify by means of Antivirus software that no viruses
have been found since the last update.
If viruses are discovered, refer to Virus Found.
Step 4. For Information Center Systems, notify all clinical unit personnel (for
each Information Center and Client) that their systems will restart and run in
Local mode (Information Centers) or at the desktop (Clients) while the
Antivirus software scans. There is no Wave Review, Event Review, or ST
Review when in Local mode. Also, data trended in Local mode is lost when
you reconnect to the Database Server. Once all notification is complete, put
each device in Local mode.
Step 5. Go to the Windows Desktop on the system to be scanned.
Step 6. Put the media into the appropriate drive and load the signature file.
Step 7. Start “on demand” antivirus scan. Be sure to monitor system during scan.
Step 8. Verify that the scan completes and no viruses are found.
Step 9. Return the system to Monitoring mode, and verify that all systems are
successfully running in Monitoring mode.
Without a Full System Scan

Step 1. Locate the Antivirus signature files on the vender Web site, and copy them
to removable media.
Server, for example) verify by means of Antivirus Software that no viruses
have been found since the last update. If viruses are discovered, refer to Virus
Found.
Review when in Local mode. Data trended in Local mode is lost when you
7-147
reconnect to the Database Server. Once all notification is complete, put each
device in Local mode.
Step 4. On the system to be updated, go to the Windows Desktop.
Step 5. Put the removable media into the appropriate drive and load the signature
file.
Step 6. Return the system to Monitoring mode, and verify that all devices systems
are successfully running in Monitoring mod.
Updating the Virus You can update the Virus Definition List from the internet With a Full System
Definition List from Scan or Without a Full System Scan.on devices with internet access.
the Internet
With a Full System Scan
Step 1. On the target device (Information Center, Database Server, for example)
verify by means of Anti-virus software that no viruses have been found since
the last update.
If viruses are discovered, refer to Virus Found.
Review when in Local mode. Data trended in local mode is lost when you
reconnect to the Database Server. Then put each device in Local mode.
Step 3. On the system to be scanned go to the Windows Desktop.
Step 4. Open the Web browser and locate the Antivirus signature files on the vendor
Web site.
Verify that the download completes without error.
Step 5. Start “on demand” antivirus scan; be sure to monitor system during scan.
Step 6. Verify that the scan completes and no viruses are found.
Step 7. Return system to Monitoring mode and verify that the system is successfully
running in Monitoring mode.
7-148
Without a Full System Scan

Server, for example) verify by means of Antivirus software that no viruses
have been found since the last update. If viruses are discovered, refer to Virus
Found.
Review when in Local database mode. Data trended in local mode is lost when
you reconnect to the Database Service. Then put each device in Local mode.
Step 3. On the system to be scanned go to the Windows Desktop.
Step 4. Open the Web browser and locate the Antivirus signature files on the vendor
Web site.
Verify that the download completes without error.
Step 5. Return the system to Monitoring mode, and verify that the system is
successfully running in Monitoring mode.
Virus Found If you find a virus during the scan process:
Step 1. Stop product operation and turn off the PC/Server.
Step 2. Reload the Operating System Software and Application Software.
Step 3. Reload Antivirus Software.
Step 4. Resume product operation.
If you require further assistance, contact the Philips Response Center.
7-149
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable parts for the Information Center system can be ordered from the Philips
Support Materials Organization. A complete list of replaceable parts that can be
ordered is available in the Replaceable Parts List on the documentation
CD-ROM.
Components, options, and accessories for Philips systems are described in
Chapter 1, Components and Options, and can be ordered from the Support
Materials Organization.
7-150
Replaceable Parts
7-151
Replaceable Parts
7-152
Replaceable Parts
7-153
Replaceable Parts
7-154
Replaceable Parts
7-155
Replaceable Parts
7-156
Replaceable Parts
7-157
Replaceable Parts
7-158
8
Testing Product Assurance
Overview
Before using the Philips system clinically with patients, proper performance of the
system shall be verified. This section includes a series of Product Assurance Tests
that shall be performed after system installation and any system repair or upgrade to
verify system functionality.
Note These validation tests do not check all system specifications but are intended to verify
performance of the primary features of Information Center functionality. However,
successful completion of the performance tests shall yield a fully functioning system.
When performing product assurance tests, Information Centers and Clients must be
connected to the SDN or Clinical Network.
Visual Tests Prior to using the Philips system with patients, thoroughly inspect all system
components, cables, and connectors.
System Components Step 1. Check all components of the Information Center system for signs of
mechanical damage. If you find any damage to a component, assess the
damage to determine if repair or replacement is required. Repair or replace the
component as required before continuing the Product Assurance Tests.
Step 2. Check all cables of the Information Center system for signs of abrasion,
wear, or other damage. If any cable appears damaged, repair or replace the
cable before you use the Information Center system for patient monitoring.
Step 3. Check all cable connectors for signs of mechanical damage and each cable
connection for connection integrity. If any cable connector appears damaged,
replace the cable before you use the Information Center system for patient
monitoring.
Step 4. Check that all cable connectors are securely fastened to the rear of each
device, including all cable ties. See Figure 5-8, Example of Rear Panel
Cable Strain Relief Method.
Warning Verify that the speaker plug is securely fastened and cannot accidentally be
pulled out. Verify the Strain Relief bracket and cable ties are attached. If a
Keyboard-Video-Mouse Switch is connected, verify that the keyboard and
mouse cables are securely fastened and cannot accidentally be pulled out. Refer
to Chapter 5 for details.
8-1
Overview
Power On
Test
Turning on the Turn on the components in the following sequence. On/Off switches for typical units are
Equipment shown in Figure 8-1.
UPS Display
HP DC 7700 Workstation
ML350 G6 Database Server
rp 5700 Workstation
ML350 G5 Database Server
Figure 8-1 On/Off Switch Locations for Components
Step 1. Turn on each UPS and Display. Verify that each unit turns on correctly and that the
On light is illuminated.
Step 2. Verify that all active Network devices (switches, repeaters, etc.) are on and that
each On LED is illuminated.
8-2
Overview
Observing The software boot process includes the Operating System boot process and the Philips
Software application boot process. Follow the startup sequence and verify the following:
Startup
OS Boot Process (approximately 120 seconds)
Step 1. Turn on the PC or Server.
Warning If any of the tests fail during POST, an Error Message displays and the POST is
terminated. If an Error Message displays, record the error message(s) and contact the
Response Center. DO NOT USE THE EQUIPMENT WITH PATIENTS!
• The Power-On Self-Test (POST) checks each of the subsystems.

• The OS Services are loaded.
• The Windows subsystem is initiated and the Microsoft Windows logo appears.
• The Information Center Boot Process begins.
Philips Services are first initialized and the stardate screen appears with Waiting for
services to initialize displayed in the center followed by Entering monitoring
mode....
• Information Center Services software is initialized and a the screen displays Testing
sound system....
During the sound system test, four distinct tone sequences play. If possible, listen to the
external speaker for the tones.
• After loading the SDProcess application, the Information Center system immediately
enters Monitoring Mode and the Main Screen appears on the Philips display.
Step 2. Turn on the Printer (if included).
Step 3. Conduct Performance Test.
Performance After the Philips system enters Monitoring Mode, fully test Philips patient monitoring
Test software as follows:
Step 1. Verify that the date and time display correctly.
Step 2. Verify mouse or trackball functionality by moving the cursor across the display to
see that it tracks normally. Click a Patient Window button to verify control and
display(s) response.
8-3
Overview
Step 3. Verify normal system operation by checking that:
Patient data appear for all configured Patient Sectors,

Patient numerics display normally,
Waveforms update smoothly,
Arrhythmia softkeys appear on bedside monitors,
For telemetry monitors, telemetry setup can be changed successfully, and
no error messages display
Step 4. Test the Philips Recorder(s) by requesting a recording from a Patient Sector, a
bedside monitor, or use the Recording/Printing Diagnostics application in the
Diagnostics menu of the Service screen. Verify that annotated data and waveforms
are recorded correctly.
Step 5. Verify alarm annunciation, sound, and recording, by making an alarm limit
adjustment or other means that does not interfere with patient care. Verify that the
alarm sound and alarm recording activate correctly.
Step 6. Test the printer by printing a text report or a graphical report with waveforms. You
can also use Diagnostics > Recording/Printing Diagnostics on the Service
menu. Check that reports print correctly.
Step 7. Test the keyboard by accessing the Purchased Options and Support Information
from the Service screen. Type characters from all keys, (upper and lower case) in the
Contact field and verify that the correct entries appear.
Step 8. Select each Information Center using the buttons on the KVM Switch front panel and
verify that the keyboard and mouse correctly control that Information Center’s Main
Screen applications.
Step 9. If the KVM Switch is being used to control a second display, verify the following for
each Information Center connected to the Switch that has dual display capability:
The proper applications are activated on the second display when selected on the
Information Center Main Screen,
The mouse cursor moves freely between the Main Screen and the second Display
for the selected Information Center,
The keyboard and mouse correctly control the applications in the second Display,
and
The connected second display is not a touch display.
Database After at least 10 minutes of monitoring, review Patient Data Review applications to verify
Storage Test that stored data are correctly displayed for all patient monitors -- SDN, M3/M4 (wired and
wireless) and the IntelliVue Patient Monitors.
8-4
Overview
Power Verify that the UPS will provide power in case of a loss of power to the Philips system as
Failure follows:
Response
Test Step 1. Disconnect the power cord of the UPS from the wall outlet or Power Distribution
Module for about 3 seconds.
Step 2. Verify that the Philips system continues to operate and the UPS makes an audible
tone.
Step 3. Restore the power cord connection.
For an APC UPS:
Step 4. From the Service screen, go to Support Logs > Event Logs > System.
Step 5. Review the log and verify that there are two UPS entries at the time of the test. One
entry should indicate that a power failure was detected, and one entry should indicate
that power was restored.
Setting For full compliance with Philips system specifications, the sweep speed of the display(s) shall
Display be 25mm/s + 10%. It is required that you set this value for any new or replaced display, but
Sweep not for replacement of the graphics card or video driver.
Speed
The following procedures describe how to make the sweep speed setting.
Flat Panel Step 1. Press the PROCEED button on the display front panel to open the On-Screen
Displays Manager window.
Step 2. If necessary, de-activate the LOCK OUT mode:

a. Hold down the PROCEED button.
b. Press and release the CONTROL button, then release the PROCEED button.
Step 3. If the On-Screen Manager opens but has the wrong orientation, press and release
the display EXIT button and press the display RESET button.
Step 4. Press and release the CONTROL button to highlight Auto.
Step 5. Press and release the PROCEED button.
The display will briefly go blank and then re-appear. The image position, horizontal size, and
fine display settings are automatically adjusted.
Step 6. If necessary, re-activate the ON-Screen Manager LOCKOUT mode:

a. Press EXIT twice to activate the On-Screen Manager.
b. Hold down the PROCEED button and simultaneously press and release the
CONTROL button.
c. Immediately press and release the CONTROL button.
d. Release the PROCEED button.
Step 7. Press and release the EXIT button, and repeat the steps for all Flat Panel Displays of
the system.
8-5
Overview
Verifying Verify the accuracy of the 25mm/s setting as follows:

Sweep Speed
Accuracy Step 1. Use the ruler to measure (in millimeters) the full width (W) of a waveform in a
Patient Sector of the Main Screen display.
(W)
Waveform Width in Millimeters (W)
0 Width
Step 2. Measure (in seconds) the time (t) for 10 full sweeps of the erase bar for the same
waveform as shown below. The measurement shall be to the nearest second.
(t) Total Time of 10 Sweeps in Seconds (t)
10
To meet the sweep speed specification of 25 mm/s +10%, the measured time (t) shall be
between:
9.1 x W < t < 11.1 xW

25 25
Modem Test Verify the factory installed modem external dial-in access as follows.
Step 1. From the Windows desktop, go to Start > Programs > Accessories >
Communications > HyperTerminal.
If the Location Information window (Figure 8-2) appears:
• Select a country/region
• Enter an area or city code
• Select Tone dialing or Pulse dialing
8-6
Overview
• Click Close.
Figure 8-2 Location Information Window
If a Dialing Properties window appears:
• Click Cancel
Step 2. When the Connection Description window appears click Cancel to access the
New Connection - HyperTerminal window (Figure 8-3).
Figure 8-3 New Connection - HyperTerminal Window
8-7
Overview
Step 3. Select File > Properties to open the New Connection Properties window
(Figure 8-4).
Figure 8-4 New Connection Properties Window
Step 4. Check the Connect using: text box for the Modem Manufacturer & Model.
Step 5. Click Cancel to c lose the New Connection Properties window.
Step 6. Verify the modem connection and dial-in access by following the Action steps in
Table 8-1
Table 8-1 Modem Test Procedure
D5000A
Model:
P2478U
P2478W
Action Notes
M3168A
Type: AT&F1 resets the modem to factory defaults
Press Enter
Response if OK OK
Type: ATM0 - last character is a 0 (zero)
Press Enter - turns the speaker off
Response if OK OK
Type: AT&T8 performs local analog loopback with self-test
Press Enter
Response if OK OK it is possible to include a blank line before OK
8-8
Overview
Table 8-1 Modem Test Procedure

D5000A
Model:
P2478U
P2478W
Action Notes
M3168A
Type: AT&T0 - last character is a 0 (zero)
Press Enter - ends testing
Response if OK 000
OK
Type: ATS0=1 - fourth character is a 0 (zero)
Press Enter - auto answer on first ring
Response if OK OK
Using any phone,
- dial the modem phone # to hear the modem tones
- hang up
Response if OK Ring
Press Enter
Response if OK no carrier
Type: AT&F1 resets the modem to factory defaults
Press Enter
Response if OK OK
Step 7. Close the New Connection - Hyperterminal window.
Step 8. Shut down and restart the PC or server.
8-9
Overview
Test and This section is intended for Philips Cardiac and Monitoring Systems Service Providers. It
Inspection documents requirements for test, inspection, and results reporting for Information Center
Procedures systems to help assure safe and reliable operation. The tests and inspections in Table 8-1
through Table 8-7 must be followed by Philips Service Providers when the Philips system is
installed and after any service event.
On all systems verify that the latest Operating System security patch is installed. Consult the
most recent security Field Change Order (FCO) for the correct Operating System Security
Update.
Check the Operating System Security update version as follows:
• From Service Mode, go to Other Services > Software Versions....

The System Software Versions and Updates appears.
Table 8-2 describes tests which must be performed for Philips system components --
Information Centers, Clients, Database Servers, Clinical Network components -- for each type
of service event.
Table 8-2 M3150/M3151/M3145/M3155/M3170/M3154/M3169/M3185 Test and

Inspection Requirements
Service Event Test Block(s) Required
When performing . . . . . . Complete these tests
Installation Visual, Power On, Performance, Safety
Preventive Maintenance Visual
Any component repair or replacement Power On, Performance, Safety
Hardware Upgrade Power On, Performance, Safety
Software Upgrade Power On, Performance
All other Service Events Visual, Performance
8-10
Overview
Information Table 8-3 describes the test or inspection to perform for each Information Center and
Centers and Client for each type of test specified in Table 8-2. Detailed procedures for performing the
Clients tests in the tables are given in the previous sections of Testing Product Assurance.
Table 8-3 M3150/M3145/M3155/M3151 - Test and Inspection Matrix

What to Record
Test Block
Test or Inspection to Perform Expected Results on Service
Name
Record
Visual 1. For installation, perform visual inspection of No visible damage V:P or V:F
shipping cartons and contents. where P = Pass
All other cases, inspect installed device. Expected answer is F = Fail
2. Is the speaker cable securely fastened? “Yes”. for steps 1 - 3. If
3. If a Keyboard-Video-Mouse Switch is installed, are so, Visual test passed.
keyboard and mouse cables securely fastened to the
rear of the KVM switch with cable ties?
Power On: 1. Power on all devices. Devices power up into PO:P or PO:F
2. Observe software startup. expected resting display where P = Pass
3. Observe that resting display shows appropriate status F = Fail
information for device configuration and options.
4. Observe that all lights visible from the front panels
are in proper status
Select onscreen display
5. If Elo Touch flat panel display is installed, were and power controls and
onscreen display and display power controls no visual changes occur
disabled? on screen
Performance: 1. Verify purchased options are enabled. Expected answers are P:P or P:F
2. Do appropriate data (waveforms and parameters) “Yes”. where P = Pass
appear? If so, Performance test F = Fail
3. Verify normal system operation. passed.
4. Do the devices respond to user inputs?
5. Do audible speaker tones occur?
If a Keyboard-Video-Mouse Switch is used, has the KVM Expected answers are PKVM:P or
Switch successfully passed its Performance Test? “Yes”. PKVM:F
If so, Performance test where P = Pass
passed. F = Fail
If HL7 Export option is installed, verify successful ping to Expected answer is PHL7:P or PHL7:F
the target HL7 client device by using hostname. “Yes”. If so, where P = Pass
Performance test passed. F = Fail
If 12-Lead Analysis/Export option is installed, verify Expected answer is P12LEAD:P or
successful ping to the 12-Lead TraceMaster system device “Yes”. If so, P12LEAD:F
by using hostname. Performance test passed. where P = Pass
F = Fail
If Holter Export option is installed, verify successful Ping Expected answer is PHE:P or PHE:F
to Holter System by using hostname. “Yes”. If so, where P = Pass
If Alert Data Integration is installed, verify successful Expected answer is PADE:P or
ping to Alert Data Integration device by using host name. “Yes”. If so, PADE:F
Performance test passed. where P = Pass
F = Fail
8-11
Overview
Table 8-3 M3150/M3145/M3155/M3151 - Test and Inspection Matrix

What to Record
Test Block
Name
Record
Safety 1. Is the device connected to a 78581A/B (SCC) or If answer is “No”, S:NA
telemetry mainframe? Safety test is not where NA = Not
required.
If answer is “Yes”, required
continue.
2. Is there a second earth ground connected to the SCC If answer is “Yes”, S:P or S:F
or telemetry mainframe Safety test passed. where P = Pass
F = Fail
3. Confirm that 78581A/B or telemetry mainframe has If answer is “Yes”, S:P or S:F
passed Safety Test Block (see 78581A/B or Safety test passed. where P = Pass
Telemetry Mainframe Test and Inspection If answer is “No”, F = Fail
Matrix). continue.
4. Perform 78581A/B or Telemetry Mainframe If answer is “Yes”, S:P or S:F
Safety Test Block Safety test passed where P = Pass
F = Fail
8-12
Overview
M3170 Patient Table 8-4 describes the test or inspection to perform for each M3170 Patient Link for each
Link type of test specified in Table 8-2.
Note Detailed procedures for performing the tests in the tables are given in the previous sections of
Testing Product Assurance.
Table 8-4 M3170 - Test and Inspection Matrix

What to Record
Test Block
Name
Record
Visual For installation, perform visual inspection of shipping No visible damage V:P or V:F
cartons and contents. Expected answer is where P = Pass
“Yes”. If so, Visual test F = Fail
passed.
Power On: Power on all devices. Devices power up into PO:P or PO:F
Observe software boot up. expected status on where P = Pass
Observe that support display shows that the DataServer support display F = Fail
Startup was complete.
Performance: Verify purchased options are enabled. Expected answers are P:P or P:F
Verify normal system operation. “Yes”. where P = Pass
Do LAN based monitors record and print requests respond If so, Performance test F = Fail
to user inputs? passed.
If HL7 Export is installed, ping by host name the target Expected answer is PHL7:P or PHL7:F
HL7 client device “Yes”. If so, where P = Pass
Safety Is the device connected to a 78581A/B (SCC) or telemetry If answer is “No”, no S:NA
mainframe? Safety test required. where NA = Not
If answer is “Yes”,
move to next step. required
Is there a second earth ground connected to the SCC or Expected answer is S:P or S:F
telemetry mainframe “Yes”. where P = Pass
If so, Safety test passed. F = Fail
Confirm that 78581A/B or telemetry mainframe has If answer is “Yes”, S:P or S:F
passed Safety Test Block (see 78581A/B or Telemetry Safety test passed. where P = Pass
Mainframe Test and Inspection Matrix). If answer is “No”, F = Fail
move to next step.
Perform 78581A/B or Telemetry Mainframe Safety Expected answer is S:P or S:F
Test Block “Yes”. If so, Safety test where P = Pass
passed F = Fail
8-13
Overview
M3169 Small Table 8-5 describes the test or inspection to perform for the M3169 Database Server for
Database each type of test specified in Table 8-2.
Server

What to Record
Test Block
Name
Record
cartons and contents. where P = Pass
F = Fail
Power On: Power on all devices. Expected answers are PO:P or PO:F
Observe software boot up. “Yes”. where P = Pass
After Self-Test, observe that DBS status LED is solid If so, Power On test F = Fail
green passed.
“Yes”. where P = Pass
Observe that all M3145/M3155 and M3151 Client If so, Performance test F = Fail
Device names configured on the DBS are displayed at passed.
the bottom of the service screen with a status of
Monitoring
M3154 Table 8-5 describes the test or inspection to perform for the Database Server for each type
Database of test specified in Table 8-2.
Server

What to Record
Test Block
Name
Record
cartons and contents. where P = Pass
F = Fail
Power On: Power on all devices. Expected answers are PO:P or PO:F
Observe software boot up. “Yes”. where P = Pass
After Self-Test, observe that DBS status LED is solid If so, Power On test F = Fail
green passed.
8-14
Overview

What to Record
Test Block
Name
Record
“Yes”. where P = Pass
Observe that all M3155 and M3151 Client Device If so, Performance test F = Fail
names configured on the DBS are displayed at the passed.
bottom of the service screen with a status of Monitoring
If Web Access option is installed, log in to the Database Expected answer is PWA:P or PWA:F
Server from a PC on the hospital’s intranet or from the “Yes”. If so, where P = Pass
Database Server Performance test passed. F = Fail
Verify that stored patient data are displayed properly
If Patient Data Transfer option is installed, verify in Expected answer is PPDT:P or PPDT:F
Add/Remove Database Servers configuration that all “Yes”. If so, where P = Pass
DBS hostnames participating in patient data transfer are Performance test passed. F = Fail
listed.
Ping by hostname each of the Database Servers
Clinical Table 8-7 describes the test or inspection to perform for active M3185A Clinical Network
Network components for each type of test specified in Table 8-2.
Table 8-7 M3185 Clinical Network Components - Test and Inspection Matrix
What to Record
Test Block
Name
Record
Visual Inspect all system components for obvious damage. No visible damage V:P or V:F
where P = Pass
F = Fail
Power On: Power on each active Network device. Devices power up into PO:P or PO:F
Observe that all lights visible on the front panel are in expected status; no error where P = Pass
proper status and that no error conditions are shown. indications are shown. F = Fail
Per device documentation observe normal conditions for
each type of device.
8-15
Overview
Table 8-7 M3185 Clinical Network Components - Test and Inspection Matrix
What to Record
Test Block
Name
Record
Performance: Perform an operational test of the Clinical Network by Expected answers are P:P or P:F
executing a data passing operation from each connected “Yes”. If so, where P = Pass
Information Center to every other Information Center, Performance test passed. F = Fail
Client, or Printer on the Network
For each M3150 and M3155 Information Center:
Verify that a review application (e.g. Wave Review) can
be executed. This verifies connection to the M3154
Database Server (if a M3155 Information Center).
For each M3151 Client:
Verify that waveforms from every Information Center on
the Network having a connection to an SDN can be
viewed on the Client.
Verify that a review application (e.g. Wave Review) can
be executed. This verifies connection to the M3154
Database Server
For each wireless Patient Monitor:
Verify that waveforms from each wireless patient monitor
on the network are displayed on an Information Center
and that the waveforms are continuous.
Safety No safety test is required S:NA
where NA = Not
required
8-16
A
Worksheets
Design and Configuration Overview
This appendix provides a set of worksheets that can be copied and used in the design,
installation, and configuration of Information Center Systems. These worksheets are
designed to assist with:
• Device Installation
• Network Configuration
• Equipment Setup
• Patient Data Transfer/Web Access
Note It is recommend that you copy these worksheets as needed and complete them
before you begin each associated task. Completed worksheets can be retained as a
record for future reference.
Device Installation Tables 1 through 15 permit recording names, IP Addresses, and locations of devices.
Up to (22) M3154 Database Server systems can be connected.
Use these tables to ensure that each device has a unique host name, device name, and
IP address. M3169 Database Server systems cannot be connected together.
Note If you intend to connect M3154 Database Servers to create a Large Central Database
System, you must identify and configure the “Master” Database Server.
Network Devices and Connection Requirements

Device Speed (in Mbps) Duplex setting
Database Server* 100 Full
Managed Switch (Core or Tier) 100 Full
Information Center* 100 Full
Information Center Client 100 Full
Access Point Controller 100 Full
WMTS Access Point 100 Full
Unmanaged Switch (Edge) Auto Auto
Access Point (RangeLAN2) 10 Half
M2/M3/M4 Bedside 10 Half
IntelliVue Patient Monitor 10 Half
Network Printer 10 Half
Paging Transmitter 10 Half
*If a second NIC is installed, the connection can be set to Auto, 100 Full, or
whatever the infrastructure requires.
A-1
Table 1 IntelliVue Clinical Network 1 - Device Names and Addresses

Default Default
Device Model Host Name Device Name Location IP Address Gateway - Gateway - Subnet Mask
w/ Router no Router
M3155 172.31.3.32 172.31.0.1 172.31.3.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.3.33 172.31.0.1 172.31.3.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.3.34 172.31.0.1 172.31.3.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.3.35 172.31.0.1 172.31.3.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.3.36 172.31.0.1 172.31.3.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.3.37 172.31.0.1 172.31.3.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.3.38 172.31.0.1 172.31.3.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.3.39 172.31.0.1 172.31.3.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.3.64 172.31.0.1 172.31.3.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.3.65 172.31.0.1 172.31.3.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.3.66 172.31.0.1 172.31.3.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.3.67 172.31.0.1 172.31.3.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.3.68 172.31.0.1 172.31.3.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.3.69 172.31.0.1 172.31.3.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.3.70 172.31.0.1 172.31.3.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.3.71 172.31.0.1 172.31.3.0 255.255.248.0

1
M3154 Master 172.31.3.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 255.255.248.0
Database Server
M3169 Server 172.31.3.0 172.31.0.1 0.0.0.0 255.255.248.0
12-Lead ECG
Management System
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
SNTP Time Source
1.
Database Server Default Gateway for the primary NIC (with a second NIC) is set to blank automatically by the OS
installer. The Default Gateway address comes from the hospital for the second NIC. The values in these tables are for
reference only.
A-2

Default Default
w/ Router no Router
M3155 172.31.11.32 172.31.8.1 172.31.11.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.11.33 172.31.8.1 172.31.11.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.11.34 172.31.8.1 172.31.11.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.11.35 172.31.8.1 172.31.11.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.11.36 172.31.8.1 172.31.11.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.11.37 172.31.8.1 172.31.11.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.11.38 172.31.8.1 172.31.11.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.11.39 172.31.8.1 172.31.11.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.11.64 172.31.8.1 172.31.11.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.11.65 172.31.8.1 172.31.11.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.11.66 172.31.8.1 172.31.11.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.11.67 172.31.8.1 172.31.11.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.11.68 172.31.8.1 172.31.11.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.11.69 172.31.8.1 172.31.11.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.11.70 172.31.8.1 172.31.11.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.11.71 172.31.8.1 172.31.11.0 255.255.248.0
M3154 Server 172.31.11.0 172.31.8.1 0.0.0.0 255.255.248.0
12-Lead ECG
Management System
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
SNTP Time Source
A-3

Default Default
w/ Router no Router
M3155 172.31.19.32 172.31.16.1 172.31.19.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.19.33 172.31.16.1 172.31.19.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.19.34 172.31.16.1 172.31.19.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.19.35 172.31.16.1 172.31.19.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.19.36 172.31.16.1 172.31.19.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.19.37 172.31.16.1 172.31.19.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.19.38 172.31.16.1 172.31.19.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.19.39 172.31.16.1 172.31.19.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.19.64 172.31.16.1 172.31.19.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.19.65 172.31.16.1 172.31.19.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.19.66 172.31.16.1 172.31.19.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.19.67 172.31.16.1 172.31.19.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.19.68 172.31.16.1 172.31.19.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.19.69 172.31.16.1 172.31.19.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.19.70 172.31.16.1 172.31.19.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.19.71 172.31.16.1 172.31.19.0 255.255.248.0
M3154 Server 172.31.19.0 172.31.16.1 0.0.0.0 255.255.248.0
12-Lead ECG
Management System
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
SNTP Time Source
A-4

Default Default
w/ Router no Router
M3155 172.31.27.32 172.31.24.1 172.31.27.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.27.33 172.31.24.1 172.31.27.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.27.34 172.31.24.1 172.31.27.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.27.35 172.31.24.1 172.31.27.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.27.36 172.31.24.1 172.31.27.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.27.37 172.31.24.1 172.31.27.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.27.38 172.31.24.1 172.31.27.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.27.39 172.31.24.1 172.31.27.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.27.64 172.31.24.1 172.31.27.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.27.65 172.31.24.1 172.31.27.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.27.66 172.31.24.1 172.31.27.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.27.67 172.31.24.1 172.31.27.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.27.68 172.31.24.1 172.31.27.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.27.69 172.31.24.1 172.31.27.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.27.70 172.31.24.1 172.31.27.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.27.71 172.31.24.1 172.31.27.0 255.255.248.0
M3154 Server 172.31.27.0 172.31.24.1 0.0.0.0 255.255.248.0
12-Lead ECG
Management System
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
SNTP Time Source
A-5

Default Default
w/ Router no Router
M3155 172.31.35.32 172.31.32.1 172.31.35.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.35.33 172.31.32.1 172.31.35.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.35.34 172.31.32.1 172.31.35.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.35.35 172.31.32.1 172.31.35.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.35.36 172.31.32.1 172.31.35.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.35.37 172.31.32.1 172.31.35.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.35.38 172.31.32.1 172.31.35.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.35.39 172.31.32.1 172.31.35.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.35.64 172.31.32.1 172.31.35.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.35.65 172.31.32.1 172.31.35.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.35.66 172.31.32.1 172.31.35.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.35.67 172.31.32.1 172.31.35.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.35.68 172.31.32.1 172.31.35.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.35.69 172.31.32.1 172.31.35.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.35.70 172.31.32.1 172.31.35.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.35.71 172.31.32.1 172.31.35.0 255.255.248.0
M3154 Server 172.31.35.0 172.31.32.1 0.0.0.0 255.255.248.0
12-Lead ECG
Management System
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
SNTP Time Source
A-6

Default Default
w/ Router no Router
M3155 172.31.43.32 172.31.40.1 172.31.43.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.43.33 172.31.40.1 172.31.43.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.43.34 172.31.40.1 172.31.43.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.43.35 172.31.40.1 172.31.43.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.43.36 172.31.40.1 172.31.43.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.43.37 172.31.40.1 172.31.43.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.43.38 172.31.40.1 172.31.43.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.43.39 172.31.40.1 172.31.43.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.43.64 172.31.40.1 172.31.43.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.43.65 172.31.40.1 172.31.43.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.43.66 172.31.40.1 172.31.43.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.43.67 172.31.40.1 172.31.43.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.43.68 172.31.40.1 172.31.43.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.43.69 172.31.40.1 172.31.43.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.43.70 172.31.40.1 172.31.43.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.43.71 172.31.40.1 172.31.43.0 255.255.248.0
M3154 Server 172.31.43.0 172.31.40.1 0.0.0.0 255.255.248.0
12-Lead ECG
Management System
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
SNTP Time Source
A-7

Default Default
w/ Router no Router
M3155 172.31.51.32 172.31.48.1 172.31.51.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.51.33 172.31.48.1 172.31.51.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.51.34 172.31.48.1 172.31.51.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.51.35 172.31.48.1 172.31.51.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.51.36 172.31.48.1 172.31.51.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.51.37 172.31.48.1 172.31.51.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.51.38 172.31.48.1 172.31.51.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.51.39 172.31.48.1 172.31.51.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.51.64 172.31.48.1 172.31.51.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.51.65 172.31.48.1 172.31.51.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.51.66 172.31.48.1 172.31.51.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.51.67 172.31.48.1 172.31.51.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.51.68 172.31.48.1 172.31.51.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.51.69 172.31.48.1 172.31.51.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.51.70 172.31.48.1 172.31.51.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.51.71 172.31.48.1 172.31.51.0 255.255.248.0
M3154 Server 172.31.51.0 172.31.48.1 0.0.0.0 255.255.248.0
12-Lead ECG
Management System
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
SNTP Time Source
A-8

Default Default
w/ Router no Router
M3155 172.31.59.32 172.31.56.1 172.31.59.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.59.33 172.31.56.1 172.31.59.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.59.34 172.31.56.1 172.31.59.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.59.35 172.31.56.1 172.31.59.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.59.36 172.31.56.1 172.31.59.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.59.37 172.31.56.1 172.31.59.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.59.38 172.31.56.1 172.31.59.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.59.39 172.31.56.1 172.31.59.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.59.64 172.31.56.1 172.31.59.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.59.65 172.31.56.1 172.31.59.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.59.66 172.31.56.1 172.31.59.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.59.67 172.31.56.1 172.31.59.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.59.68 172.31.56.1 172.31.59.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.59.69 172.31.56.1 172.31.59.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.59.70 172.31.56.1 172.31.59.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.59.71 172.31.56.1 172.31.59.0 255.255.248.0
M3154 Server 172.31.59.0 172.31.56.1 0.0.0.0 255.255.248.0
12-Lead ECG
Management System
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
SNTP Time Source
A-9

Default Default
w/ Router no Router
M3155 172.31.67.32 172.31.64.1 172.31.67.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.67.33 172.31.64.1 172.31.67.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.67.34 172.31.64.1 172.31.67.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.67.35 172.31.64.1 172.31.67.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.67.36 172.31.64.1 172.31.67.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.67.37 172.31.64.1 172.31.67.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.67.38 172.31.64.1 172.31.67.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.67.39 172.31.64.1 172.31.67.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.67.64 172.31.64.1 172.31.67.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.67.65 172.31.64.1 172.31.67.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.67.66 172.31.64.1 172.31.67.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.67.67 172.31.64.1 172.31.67.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.67.68 172.31.64.1 172.31.67.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.67.69 172.31.64.1 172.31.67.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.67.70 172.31.64.1 172.31.67.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.67.71 172.31.64.1 172.31.67.0 255.255.248.0
M3154 Server 172.31.67.0 172.31.64.1 0.0.0.0 255.255.248.0
12-Lead ECG
Management System
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
SNTP Time Source
A-10

Default Default
w/ Router no Router
M3155 172.31.75.32 172.31.72.1 172.31.75.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.75.33 172.31.72.1 172.31.75.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.75.34 172.31.72.1 172.31.75.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.75.35 172.31.72.1 172.31.75.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.75.36 172.31.72.1 172.31.75.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.75.37 172.31.72.1 172.31.75.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.75.38 172.31.72.1 172.31.75.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.75.39 172.31.72.1 172.31.75.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.75.64 172.31.72.1 172.31.75.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.75.65 172.31.72.1 172.31.75.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.75.66 172.31.72.1 172.31.75.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.75.67 172.31.72.1 172.31.75.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.75.68 172.31.72.1 172.31.75.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.75.69 172.31.72.1 172.31.75.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.75.70 172.31.72.1 172.31.75.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.75.71 172.31.72.1 172.31.75.0 255.255.248.0
M3154 Server 172.31.75.0 172.31.72.1 0.0.0.0 255.255.248.0
12-Lead ECG
Management System
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
SNTP Time Source
A-11

Default Default
w/ Router no Router
M3155 172.31.83.32 172.31.80.1 172.31.83.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.83.33 172.31.80.1 172.31.83.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.83.34 172.31.80.1 172.31.83.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.83.35 172.31.80.1 172.31.83.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.83.36 172.31.80.1 172.31.83.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.83.37 172.31.80.1 172.31.83.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.83.38 172.31.80.1 172.31.83.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.83.39 172.31.80.1 172.31.83.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.83.64 172.31.80.1 172.31.83.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.83.65 172.31.80.1 172.31.83.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.83.66 172.31.80.1 172.31.83.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.83.67 172.31.80.1 172.31.83.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.83.68 172.31.80.1 172.31.83.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.83.69 172.31.80.1 172.31.83.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.83.70 172.31.80.1 172.31.83.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.83.71 172.31.80.1 172.31.83.0 255.255.248.0
M3154 Server 172.31.83.0 172.31.80.1 0.0.0.0 255.255.248.0
12-Lead ECG
Management System
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
SNTP Time Source
A-12

Default Default
w/ Router no Router
M3155 172.31.91.32 172.31.88.1 172.31.91.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.91.33 172.31.88.1 172.31.91.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.91.34 172.31.88.1 172.31.91.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.91.35 172.31.88.1 172.31.91.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.91.36 172.31.88.1 172.31.91.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.91.37 172.31.88.1 172.31.91.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.91.38 172.31.88.1 172.31.91.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.91.39 172.31.88.1 172.31.91.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.91.64 172.31.88.1 172.31.91.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.91.65 172.31.88.1 172.31.91.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.91.66 172.31.88.1 172.31.91.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.91.67 172.31.88.1 172.31.91.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.91.68 172.31.88.1 172.31.91.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.91.69 172.31.88.1 172.31.91.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.91.70 172.31.88.1 172.31.91.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.91.71 172.31.88.1 172.31.91.0 255.255.248.0
M3154 Server 172.31.91.0 172.31.88.1 0.0.0.0 255.255.248.0
12-Lead ECG
Management System
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
SNTP Time Source
A-13

Default Default
w/ Router no Router
M3155 172.31.99.32 172.31.96.1 172.31.99.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.99.33 172.31.96.1 172.31.99.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.99.34 172.31.96.1 172.31.99.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.99.35 172.31.96.1 172.31.99.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.99.36 172.31.96.1 172.31.99.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.99.37 172.31.96.1 172.31.99.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.99.38 172.31.96.1 172.31.99.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.99.39 172.31.96.1 172.31.99.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.99.64 172.31.96.1 172.31.99.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.99.65 172.31.96.1 172.31.99.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.99.66 172.31.96.1 172.31.99.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.99.67 172.31.96.1 172.31.99.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.99.68 172.31.96.1 172.31.99.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.99.69 172.31.96.1 172.31.99.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.99.70 172.31.96.1 172.31.99.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.99.71 172.31.96.1 172.31.99.0 255.255.248.0
M3154 Server 172.31.99.0 172.31.96.1 0.0.0.0 255.255.248.0
12-Lead ECG
Management System
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
SNTP Time Source
A-14

Default Default
w/ Router no Router
M3155 172.31.107.32 172.31.104.1 172.31.107.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.107.33 172.31.104.1 172.31.107.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.107.34 172.31.104.1 172.31.107.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.107.35 172.31.104.1 172.31.107.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.107.36 172.31.104.1 172.31.107.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.107.37 172.31.104.1 172.31.107.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.107.38 172.31.104.1 172.31.107.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.107.39 172.31.104.1 172.31.107.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.107.64 172.31.104.1 172.31.107.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.107.65 172.31.104.1 172.31.107.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.107.66 172.31.104.1 172.31.107.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.107.67 172.31.104.1 172.31.107.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.107.68 172.31.104.1 172.31.107.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.107.69 172.31.104.1 172.31.107.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.107.70 172.31.104.1 172.31.107.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.107.71 172.31.104.1 172.31.107.0 255.255.248.0
M3154 Server 172.31.107.0 172.31.104.1 0.0.0.0 255.255.248.0
12-Lead ECG
Management
System
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
SNTP Time Source
A-15

Default Default
w/ Router no Router
M3155 172.31.115.32 172.31.112.1 172.31.115.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.115.33 172.31.112.1 172.31.115.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.115.34 172.31.112.1 172.31.115.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.115.35 172.31.112.1 172.31.115.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.115.36 172.31.112.1 172.31.115.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.115.37 172.31.112.1 172.31.115.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.115.38 172.31.112.1 172.31.115.0 255.255.248.0
M3155 172.31.115.39 172.31.112.1 172.31.115.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.115.64 172.31.112.1 172.31.115.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.115.65 172.31.112.1 172.31.115.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.115.66 172.31.112.1 172.31.115.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.115.67 172.31.112.1 172.31.115.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.115.68 172.31.112.1 172.31.115.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.115.69 172.31.112.1 172.31.115.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.115.70 172.31.112.1 172.31.115.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client 172.31.115.71 172.31.112.1 172.31.115.0 255.255.248.0
M3154 Server 172.31.115.0 172.31.112.1 0.0.0.0 255.255.248.0
12-Lead ECG
Management System
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
SNTP Time Source
A-16
Table 16
IIC Device Client Hardware

Printer Name Location Names Device Names Address IP Address
(from Printer
(using this Printer) (using this Printer)
Configuration Page)
172.31. .96
172.31. .97
172.31. .98
172.31. .99
172.31. .100
172.31. .101
172.31. .102
172.31. .103
Network Network Configuration permits identifying the network devices.

Configuration
Enter the Model #, Names, and Location selected for each Information Center and Client
connected to each SCC. Do this for each Clinical Unit.
Clinical Unit Name SCC Name Model # Host Name Device Name Location
A-17
Equipment Equipment Setup sheets list the patient monitors (hardwired and telemetry) that will be
Setup available to each Information Center for monitoring. The following tables can be used to
assign monitoring equipment to branches and beds.
Logical Setup
Clinical SCC Equipment Bed Monitor Equipment
Branch Equipment
Unit Name Name Type Label Label Label
# (LBN) Only
A-18
Logical Setup
Clinical SCC Equipment Bed Monitor Equipment
Branch Equipment
Unit Name Name Type Label Label Label
# (LBN) Only
A-19
Patient Data Use the following checklists to identify and record information and installation procedures
Transfer/Web necessary for installing Web Access capability in a hospital.
Access
Web Access The following specifications are required to install and utilize the Web Access capability.
Requirements
and • requirements for hospital LAN:
Specifications 100 Mbit/s connection from Database Server to hospital LAN
• requirements for hospital LAN PCs

industry standard web browsers
Netscape, Release 4.7 or greater. Netscape does not support near real time
overview,
Microsoft IE, Release 5.0 or greater and must allow downloads of signed Active
X controls
TCP/IP and HTTP networking protocols
• requirements for patient data access:

customer specified User name(s), log-in, and Password
specification of patient data access privileges by Domain or IP Address range
Note Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) protocol for public-key and encryption is not implemented for
access to patient data.
• limitations on patient data access:

100 PCs maximum can simultaneously access the Database Server
8,096 KB/s maximum Bandwidth Throttling for web access traffic on Internet
Information Server (IIS)
Passive The following table specifies requirements for the passive hospital infrastructure installation:
Infrastructure
Installation
Completion
Description Comments
Date
Installation of communication outlets near Label faceplates Information
Database Server and connection to hospital LAN Center Web
Installation of UTP patch cable from Server’s

Web NIC to communication outlet
Installation of in-wall cable run from Server to
location of hospital LAN network device
A-20
TCP/IP Network The following table specifies address requirements for the TCP/IP network card:
Card
Configuration
Description Answer Comments

IP Address specified for Information Center Web Server IP Address cannot be in the same Subnet
mask of the IntelliVue Clinical Network
(i.e. 172.31.xxx.xxx)
Managing IP Addresses by DHCP protocol
is not supported - static IP Address required
Subnet Mask specified for Web Server
Default Gateway specified for Web Server
Security The following table specifies requirements for customer password and domain name
Configuration restrictions:
Description Answer Comments

Web login information for each New User:
Username:
Full Name:
Description:
Password:
Computer Access: All computers? Yes/No If No, answer one of the selections below
Default = Yes
Single computer?
IP Address required
Group of computers? Network ID and
Subnet Mask required
Domain of computers? Domain Name
required
A-21
Web Operation After configuration of Web at the Database Server, the following performance verification
from Network should be performed:
PCs Verification
Completion
Date
Ping IP Address of Web NIC from a PC on the hospital LAN
For each PC on the hospital LAN:
- verify or load either Netscape Navigator (Revision 4.7 or later) IP Address of Database Server IC Web
or Microsoft Internet Explorer (Version 5.0 or later) NIC = http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, where
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx is the IP Address of the
- connect to IP Address of Database Server Web NIC server’s Web NIC
(http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)
- log in to Database Server with proper User Name and User Name:
Password Password:
Web Users Following Web verification, all potential users of Web should be notified of its availability
Notification and provided with log on instructions.
Completion
Date
Provide all Web users with: Web IP Address = http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, where
• Log on instructions xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx is the IP Address of the server’s
Web NIC
• Web IP Address User Name:
Password:
• User Name
• Password
A-22
B
Installing the Web Access Option
Overview
Appendix B describes the procedure for installing the Web Access option on a
Database Server or Information Center. The Web Access option permits viewing
Patient Data Review Applications stored on the Server via the hospital intranet.
The Web access option permits up to 100 simultaneous users to view stored patient
data (waves, alarms, events, ST segments, trends, viewable recording strip data)
using standard web browsers such as Internet Explorer or Netscape.
Compatibility
IIC Release Compatible DBSa

E.00 M3154
E.01
F.00 M3150, M3154, M3169
G.00
H.00
J.00
K.00
L.00
M.00
a
Each DBS must have Web Server option installed and
operating.
Web access installation with Software Release M.0, requires that the following
conditions are met.
• The Web Serving option must be purchased and enabled in the Purchased
Options and Support Information application on the DBS.
• If your hardware does not have a second NIC, a Network Interface Card
(NIC) must be installed in the appropriate slot of the DBS.
• A 100 Mbit/s network connection must be made between the Database
Server Web NIC and the hospital intranet.
• The hospital IT service must provide Database Server:
IP Address,
IP Subnet Mask,
Default Gateway,
B-1
Overview
DNS IP Address & Search Order, and

WINS IP Address.
• Microsoft Internet Explorer® (Release 5.5 or higher and must allow downloads of
signed Active X controls) web browser is installed on hospital intranet PCs accessing
the Information Center Web.
• Netscape® (Release 4.7 or higher) web browser is installed on hospital intranet PCs
accessing the Information Center Web. Note that this does not support near real-time
overview.
• Windows NT, 2003 or XP (or higher) is installed on hospital intranet PCs accessing the
Information Center Web.
• TCP/IP and HTTP networking protocol is on hospital intranet PCs accessing the
Database Server.
• A local printer must be installed.
• Web Access User Logon information including log on name, password, patient access
user rights (clinical unit permissions) is configured.
Note It is the responsibility of the hospital to manage the Web Access User Logon configuration, not
Philips HealthCare.
• SQL access from EWS to Information Center Database Servers requires Microsoft
Data Access Components (MDAC 2.8) and that the appropriate SQL port (default 1433)
is open.
• Real-time data access from EWS client(s) to Information Center Database Servers
requires that the configured port (default 9000) is open.
• Communications between EWS clients and the EWS Server requires that the
configured port (default 9001) is open.
Web access option installation requires that you modify an HTML file on the Database server
to support its functionality (page B-3). The application does not permit saving Favorite sites.
B-2
Installing Web Access
The procedure for installing web access is described in the following sections.
• Updating System files (For Enhanced Web Server only)
• Installing the Web NIC
• Updating the Database Server BIOS
• Entering customer specified IP Address on the Web NIC
• Changing the default Web Password to a customer specified password
• Testing web access to Database Server patient data
Updating In order for an Information Center Database Server Web to be launched in a topmost
System Files frame and for the EWS retrospective Review Applications to display properly, you must edit
For EWS the C:\InetPub\wwwRoot\VerifyFrame.html file on each Database Server connected to the
Systems EWS.
Step 1. On each DBS that is configured in the EWS, open

C:\InetPub\wwwRoot\VerifyFrame.html.
Step 2. Right-click the file and select Properties from the drop-down menu.
Step 3. On the General tab of the file Properties window clear the checkbox adjacent to
the Read Only attribute.
Step 4. Click OK to close the Properties window.
Step 5. Open the file with Notepad (or equivalent text editor) and delete the highlighted text.
Step 6. Save the changes. Then change the file properties back to Read Only.
Editing the If problems occur when you try to run Review Applications from Enhanced Web Server, you
Client PC must properly install Internet Explorer on the client PC running EWS and set the registry key
Registry to the full path specification for Internet Explorer.
Use regedt32 (or equivalent) to verify/edit the registry key:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\App
Paths\IEXPLORE.EXE\(Default): C:\Program Files\Internet Explorer\iexplore.exe
B-3
Setting Client If the client IIC Browser Internet Options > Client Advisor is enabled, you may have
Internet Options problems viewing graphics when you run Review Applications from a IIC-Web. If this is the
case you can add the Database Server URL to the Browser Approved Sites list.
Step 1. From the Windows task bar, go to Start > Programs > Internet Explorer, and
right-click to open the menu. Select Properties.
The Internet Properties dialog appears.
Step 2. From the Content tab in the dialog click Enable.

The Content Advisor dialog appears.
Step 3. Select the Approved Sites tab in the dialog. Then enter the Database server URL in
the Allow this Web Site text box. Click Always to add the URL to the List of
approved Web sites.
Step 4. Click Ok in the Content Advisor and Internet Properties dialogs to close them.
Installing Large DBS hardware does not require this NIC. Refer to page 2-61 for details about installing
the Web a second NIC on a Small Database Server or Information Center.
NIC
To install the NIC on a large Database Server:
Step 1. Go to Shutdown > Shutdown Normal from the Service screen of the Database
Server.
Step 2. Turn off the Database Server power and unplug it from the wall power.
Caution When opening the Database Server and handling the Web NIC (or any PC board),
follow all proper ESD protection guidelines including grounding the Database Server,
the work surface, and your self.
B-4
Step 3. Refer to the Manufacturer documentation for detailed instructions about Removing
and Replacing Covers on the M3154 Database Server. The server has a removable
Front Bezel that must be unlocked and opened before removing the cover. Remove the
Front Bezel as follows.
a. Turn the key provided with the Server clockwise to unlock the Server Front Bezel
.
b. Open the Front Bezel and lift it upward to remove it from the Server.l
Step 4. Remove the Server Cover.

a. While holding the front and back of the server cover, gently push inward on the
plastic spring latch.
b. Slide the cover to the back and remove it.
Step 5. Install the second LAN card as follows.

a. Unpack the LAN card (M1381-66407) and discard the cable.
B-5
b. Push the release latches on the expansion board retainer and pull the retainer
out away from the chassis.
c. remove the appropriate expansion slot cover.
d. Install the LAN card in the appropriate slot (page 2-8).
e. Secure the LAN card by pressing and closing the expansion slot latch.
Step 6. Replace the server cover.

Step 7. Plug in the Database Server power cord.
B-6
Warning All Philips Patient Monitoring products that operate in a LAN environment undergo
industry-standard virus checking as part of the product manufacturing process. If
installed as specified, the Information Center will not introduce a virus onto the hospital
LAN. In order to allow the level of access desired by users while ensuring viruses do not
affect the operation of the Information Center product, it is imperative that hospitals are
vigilant in maintaining a virus-free intranet. This is the responsibility of the hospital, not
Philips Healthcare.
Entering the The IP Address for the Network Interface Card should be provided by the hospital IT
NIC IP department and be compatible with the hospital intranet.
Address
Note If upgrading an existing Database Server with a second NIC, the OS must be re-installed. See
Software Re-Installation Procedure, page 7-133.
Network settings are site-specific and required for the NIC to connect to the hospital network.
The factory default of the second NIC IP address is DHCP. Use the settings defined in
Network Card and TCP/IP Settings on page 4-23 to perform the following:
Step 1. Open Network and Dial-Up Connections.
Step 2. Select the icon for Hospital LAN. Right-click and select Properties from the drop
down menu.
The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog opens.
B-7
Step 3. Click the Use the following IP address option and enter the following customer-
supplied information in the adjacent text boxes:
IP address
Subnet mask
Default gateway
If a customer-supplied IP Address is not available, change the factory default IP Address to
172.30.221.0 until a customer address is supplied. Do not use an IP Address of the form
172.31.xxx.x; this form is used for the primary Clinical Network. If the LAN portion of the
web access card’s IP Address is the same as that of the LAN card Web will not function.
Step 4. Click the Advanced button. Select the DNS and/or the WINS tab, and enter the
appropriate name and service information provided by the hospital. See Network Card
and TCP/IP Settings, page 4-23.
Step 5. Click OK to close the Advanced TCP/IP Settings dialog.
Step 6. Shut down and restart the Database Server using Shutdown > !Shutdown -
Normal from the Service screen.
B-8
Using the Web User Access Config Tool
The Information Center Web User Access Config Tool permits setting up user and access
privilege. It is recommended that at installation time there is at least one user (defined by the
hospital) configured. The Web Config Tool can be accessed from any PC connected to the
intranet. You can use this tool to set the Username and Password for users who will have
access to patient data on the Server.
Step 1. Log on to a PC that has access to a supported web browser.
Step 2. Open the browser and enter the hostname of the Database Server or Information
Center in Address box: http://hostname/.
Once connection is established, a login screen opens.
Note The default setting for the Username is ClinicalUser. The password is provided with
documentation accompanying your system shipment.
It is the hospital’s responsibility to manage clinical web access and audit trail data.
Users are to be defined by the hospital. Clinical Operators with administrative privileges can
add/remove Information Center Web clinicians and set up their access privileges. Clinical
operators without Administrative privileges can only change their password.
Adding Users Step 1. Log on the Information Center Web (page 1-28).
Step 2. Click Clinician Management.
The available Clinician Management options appear.
Step 3. Click Add Clinician.
Step 4. Enter a user name defined by the hospital in the Username box.
Step 5. Enter the first and last name of the user in the appropriate text boxes.
B-9
Step 6. Enter a new password in the appropriate Password text box, and re-enter the
password to confirm it.
Step 7. Select the Administrator checkbox if you want the user to manage the Clinical Web
Access and Audit Trail data.
Step 8. Click Update Information.
After a user logs on, a Patient List screen shows all beds from clinical units to which the user
has access. Each DataBase Server is listed along with the Clinical Units configured to that
Database Server. For details on the Web Access interface, refer to the Information Center
Using All beds that the user has access to appear when the user initially logs on the Information
Clinician Center Web. This is the window from which the Clinician Management screen can be
Management accessed.
The Information Center Clinician Management screen can be used to:
• Add, remove, and assign clinicians, and

• Export and view audit data.
Only clinicians with Administrative rights can grant Administrative rights to other clinicians.
Adding A maximum of 1000 clinicians can be added. User names are checked for uniqueness by the
Clinicians Master Database Server. To add a clinician:
Step 1. Click ADD CLINICIAN.
Step 2. Enter all necessary information:
• User Name: limit of 20 alphanumeric characters

• First Name: Clinicians first name, limit of 20 alphanumeric characters (used in the
Audit Trail function only)
• Last Name: Clinicians last name, limit of 20 alphanumeric characters (used in the
Audit Trail function only)
• Password: associated with User Name login (5-20 alphanumeric characters)
• Administrator: select the checkbox if clinician is to be an Administrator
If the clinician needs Administrator rights, the Administrator checkbox must be
checked.
B-10
Removing/ Step 1. Click REMOVE / VIEW CLINICIAN LIST.

Viewing
Clinician List Step 2. Select the clinician(s) for you want to remove or view.
Note A blue arrow beside the User Name indicates that the clinician has Administrator privileges. A
black arrow means that the clinician does not have those privileges.
Changing Step 1. Click CHANGE CLINICIAN PASSWORD.

Clinician
Password Step 2. Enter the User Name, and the New Password.
Step 3. Click Change Password.
Viewing Step 1. Click CLINICIAN ASSIGNMENTS.

Clinician
Assignments
B-11
Step 2. View and modify (if necessary) the Clinical Unit to Clinician assignments.
Viewing Audit The View Audit Data feature allows clinicians with administrative privileges to view an audit
Data trail of all clinical operations. The administrator can perform specific searches based on the
criteria entered in the search boxes.
Step 1. Click VIEW AUDIT DATA.
Step 2. Type search criteria in the search boxes, if necessary.
Step 3. Click View Audit Data.
The Audit trail stores approximately 100,000 entries. When entries exceed the maximum, the
earliest entries are deleted as required.
Exporting Audit Audit Data can also be exported. The export file is an.xml file (named with the date on which
Data is was exported). Audit files can only be exported to the Master Database Server.
Step 1. Click the EXPORT AUDIT DATA link.
Step 2. Enter the Export Path.
Step 3. Click Export Data.
B-12
Installing a Local Printer
Installing a Local Printer
If there are only network printers installed and configured on the Web Client, you must
configure a local printer.
Step 1. From the Service screen, go to Other Services > Control Panel and double-click
the Printers and Faxes icon.
The Printers and Faxes window opens.
Step 2. Double-click Add Printer. The Add Printer Wizard appears.

Step 3. Complete each Add Printer Wizard dialog box.
B-13
Testing and Inspecting
To test LAN connectivity of the NIC open the Command Prompt and type ping
hostname (where hostname is the computer name of the device with the second NIC given
in the Installing the Web NIC procedure).
If there is a reply from that hostname and the hostname can be resolved to the proper IP
Address, the LAN connection has been made. If the ping fails, the reason for the failure will
be shown. Identify the problem, correct it, and repeat the process.
Access patient data on the Database Server to verify that the Information Center Web is
functioning properly. It is recommended that you run the following test from a PC on the
hospital’s intranet, but you can run it from the Database Server.
Note At least one Information Center on the Network must be monitoring patients for patient data to
be available for review.
If accessing Server data from a PC on the hospital intranet:
Step 1. Open the web browser and enter the URL, http://IP Address, (IP Address is the IP
Address of the NIC set in Entering the NIC IP Address, press Enter, and the Login
window appears.
Step 2. Log in using the account added in Using the Web User Access Config Tool,
page B-9
Step 3. Assign a new user and password.
Step 4. Log out and log back in using the new user information.
Step 5. Verify that patient lists and data from all Database Servers are present.
Note The URL can also be the Host name of the Server if the hospital LAN’s DNS (Dynamic Name
Server) and/or WINS (Windows Naming Service) is properly configured to resolve the name. If
there are multiple Servers on the LAN, each Server’s Host name must be unique.
If you are accessing data from the Database Server:
Note Accessing patient data from the Database Server should only be done for testing Information
Center Web performance. It is not supported under normal operating conditions.
Step 1. Open the Service menu.
Step 2. Go to Support Logs > Network Statistics.

The Network Statistics screen appears.
B-14
Step 3. Click Search by IP to open the Enter Switch or Access Point IP Address
dialog.
Step 4. Enter the IP Address of the NIC and click OK. The Information Center WebTM
Login window opens.
Step 5. Log in using the account that was added. (Refer to “Using the Web User Access
Config Tool” on page B-9.)
Step 6. Assign the new user and password.
Step 7. Log off then log in as the new user.
Step 8. Verify that patient lists and data from all Database Servers are present.
Note The selected Information Center must be in Monitoring mode in order to verify that you are
accessing the most recent patient data.
Step 9. Close the Web Main Menu screen.
B-15
B-16
C
External Modem Installation
Overview
Important—ML350 G6 and DL380 G6 platforms do not support a serial external

modem.
Appendix C describes the procedure for installing an external modem on an M3154

Database Server running Windows 2003. The external modem permits Remote
Access Services (RAS) which gives it access to selected Windows applications
(e.g., Windows Explorer, Registry Editor, Performance, Event Viewer).
The external modem being connected is one that is specific to the country in which
the DBS is located. For required External Modem Specifications see
Chapter 2.
Caution To minimize potential problems and to assure system security, disconnect the
modem phone line when the external modem is not being used.
RAS Software All DataBase Servers shipped from the factory include RAS, whether a modem is
installed or not. When no modem is installed, the software for a null modem is
installed to COM1 as a place holder and RAS software is installed and configured to
use it. Since RAS is not started, no conflict with the UPS on COM1 occurs.
In order to use an external modem with the DataBase Server you must first install the
external modem, then configure RAS software to use the external modem rather than
the null modem. The external mode is installed on Serial Port B, which will also
be configured to use COM2, 2F8, and IRQ3.
C-1
Installing and Configuring an External Modem
Connecting the Step 1. Turn off the Database Server.

Hardware
Step 2. Connect the modem to the appropriate DBS Serial Port (refer to page 2-8
and page 2-6), UPS power source, and phone line.
Step 3. Turn on the modem, then restart the Database Server.
The Database Server will automatically configure the modem as long as it is

compatible with Plug and Play. If your modem does not install automatically, use
the modem manufacturer software to install it.
Configure Phone and Modem Options as follows.
Step 1. Go to Start > Settings > Control Panel > Phone and Modem
Options.
The Phone and Modem Options dialog opens.
Step 2. In the Modems tab click Add.

The Add Hardware Wizard opens.
Step 3. In the Add Hardware Wizard do not check the Don’t detect my
modem; I will select it from a list option, then click Next.
If the modem is compatible with Plug and Play, it will appear automatically in the
Phone and Modem Options dialog. If your modem does not install
automatically, refer to the manufacturer documentation and software.
Step 4. Click Finish.
Step 5. Restart the DBS.
If there are problems with the external modem installation, refer to the modem
manufacturer’s troubleshooting procedures.
C-2
Reconfiguring Step 1. Go to Start > Settings > Control Panel > Network and Dial-Up
RAS on Windows Connections.
2003 Server The Network and Dial-Up Connections dialog opens.
Step 2. Select Make a New Connection and click Next.
Step 3. Select Accept incoming connections and click Next.
Step 4. Select the external modem and click Next.
Step 5. Click Finish.
An Incoming connections icon appears in the Network and Dial-Up

Connections window.
Step 6. Right-click the Incoming connections icon and select Properties.
Step 7. Verify the Modem, User, and Networking properties.
Testing RAS To test the RAS connection:
Step 1. Go to Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Routing and

Remote Access and select the Server.
Step 2. Select All Tasks > Start or Restart to start the service.
If there are no errors, a dialog opens. Right-click All Tasks. Verify that the
Start button is disabled and that the Stop button is enabled.
Step 3. Connect a phone line to the external modem and follow the Dial Out
Procedure in Appendix D.
Step 4. When testing is complete, stop RAS services and disconnect the Phone Line.
Do not turn off the modem.
Note When RAS is stopped, the Incoming connections icon does not appear in the
Network and Dial-up Connections window.
Step 5. If the Incoming connections icon is not displayed, restart RAS services
and refresh the Network and Dial-up Connections dialog.
Testing and Performance assurance procedures must be performed before using the modem.
Inspecting Refer to “Chapter 8. Testing Product Assurance”.
C-3
C-4
D
Remote Access to Information Center
Systems
Overview
Appendix D describes the procedure to remotely access the Database Server from
another PC running Windows using the Remote Access Services (RAS)
capability.
RAS can be used to access the \Stardate\Logs drive of a networked Information

Center, or Client. Log files on the Information Center hard drive can then be
reviewed or copied to the accessing PC.
Examples of files that appear on the installation drive are:
• Run Time Error Log Files

• Exception Error Log Files
• Suspend Alarm Log Files
Server To use RAS, the remote Database Server that you want to access must meet the
Requirements following requirements:
• Modem is installed and turned on while the Database Server is starting up,
• Modem is connected to a dedicated, direct, incoming telephone line, and
• RAS feature is installed, configured, and starte).
Accessing PC To access a suitable remote Database Server, the accessing PC must meet the
Requirements following:
• Modem is installed and turned on,

• Modem is connected to a dedicated, direct, outgoing telephone lin,
• RAS feature is installed, configured, and enabled,
• Proper protocols are installed.
Protocol for Information Centers is TCP/IP
RAS setup parameters are Network / Dial out Protocols / TCP/IP
Additional information required to access a Database Server is:
• Specific DBS Hostname (e.g. Serv01)

• Telephone number of the DBS modem being accessed
• User Name (ServiceUser)
• Philips Service User password
D-1
Dial Out Procedure
Dial Out Procedure
Making the Step 1. Enter the Service Password.

Remote Access
Connection Step 2. Request the dial-in Phone Number for the remote DBS from the customer
whose remote Database Server you want to access. Be sure that the customer
enables the Database Server RAS application.
Enabling RAS
Step 1. Select Other Services and Remote Access Admin of the Service
application shell, or go to Control Panel > Administrative Tools >
Routing and Remote Access.
Step 2. Select the desired Server Name in the Routing and Remote Access
window.
Step 3. Right-click the Server Name and select All Tasks > Start or Restart to
start the service.
Connecting to the Step 1. Go to Control Panel > Network Connections.

Remote PC
Step 2. Double click Make New Connection.
Step 3. At the Welcome window click Next.
Step 4. In the Network Connection Type window select Dial-up to private

network and click Next.
Step 5. In the Phone Number to Dial window enable Use dialing rules, enter the
Area Code and Phone number of the DBS being accessed, and select the
appropriate Country/region code. Click Next.
Step 6. In the Connection Availability window select For all users and click
Next.
Step 7. In the Completing the Network Connection Wizard window enter a

Connection Name (the name of the customer site or a default name), select
whether a shortcut is desired on the desktop for this connection, and click
Finish.
D-2
Dial Out Procedure
Step 8. In the Connect Dial-up Connection window enter ServiceUser in the

User Name text box, enter the required password in the Password text box,
and click the Save password checkbox if desired.
Step 9. Click Dial.

The modem begins the dial-in process to the remote DataBase Server.
Note Connection will be successful only if the protocol of the accessing PC (TCP/IP) is
correctly matched to the software version of the remote PC.
When the connection is made, the Connection Complete dialog may appear.
Step 10. If necessary, click OK in the Connection Complete dialog to close it.
Using Remote IIC and Client Information Centers cannot support remote dektop; only Database
Desktop Servers support remote desktop.
You can access the remote device as follows:
Step 1. From the Windows desktop go to Start > Programs > Accessories >
Communications > Remote Desktop Connection.
The Remote Desktop Connection dialog appears.
D-3
Dial Out Procedure
Step 2. Type the desired DBS Hostname in the Computer text box. Then click the
Options button in the dialog.
The Remote Desktop Connection dialog expands.
Step 3. Select the General tab and type the DBS Hostname in the Computer text
box; type ServiceUser in the User name text box.; then type the Service
password in the Password text box.
Step 4. Click Connect in the dialog.
A warning popup may display during the connection process. If the warning
displays, click OK in the popup to complete the connection to the remote DataBase
Server.
D-4
Using RAS
Using RAS
This section describes how to access files in the Stardate\Log directory of the
remote DBS, Information Center, or client available via RAS. The files are found in
the C:\Stardate\Logs directory of the remote DBS or Information Center PC.
Reviewing the The following procedure describes how to review the Philips Log files, but you can
Remote Log Files also access available web browser support applications and utilities (e.g., Switch and
Access Point).
Step 1. Locate the Stardate\Logs directory on the remote device drive and open the
NetDeviceLink.html file.
Step 2. Click the Information Center or Client Hostname icons to view the log files
for those devices.
Accessing the Step 1. From the Windows desktop go to Start > Settings > Control Panel, and
Remote Event select Administrative Tools.
Viewer or The Administrative Tools screen displays.
Application Files
Step 2. Double-click the Event Viewer icon.
The Event Viewer screen displays.
Step 3. If you want to connect to another networked Information Center or client in

the monitoring LAN, go to Action > Connect to another computer....
The Select Computer dialog displays.
Step 4. To select a computer, enter the Hostname of the desired computer.
Step 5. After you select the computer, click OK in the dialog.
Step 6. View the file, selecting either System or Application, depending on log
file type you want to review.
D-5
Using RAS
Using the System Step 1. From the Windows desktop, go to Start > Run.
Tools Feature The Run dialog appears.
Step 2. Type SystemApps in the Open text box, then click OK.
The System Tools screen appears.
System Tools provides the same applications - System Validation, Backup

Logs, Archive - that are available through Service mode. You cannot access
Service mode with Remote Access.
Warning Do not run other executable files located on the DBS drive as this can cause
monitoring interrruption.
D-6
Using RAS
Logging Out of the • From the Windows desktop, go to Start > Log Off ServiceUser.
Remote Desktop The Remote Desktop Connection terminates.
Connection
Disconnecting Disconnect the RAS telephone connection as follows.

RAS
Step 1. Open the network window:
• Control Panel > Network and Dial-up Connections on Windows 2003

• Control Panel > Network Connections on Windows XP
• Control Panel > Dial-Up Networking on Windows NT
Step 2. Open the network connection to be disconnected.
Step 3. Select the Disconnect button.
Note If you do not close the RAS connection the Information Center will not be able to
return to Monitoring Mode.
Step 4. Disconnect the Phone Line. Do NOT turn the external modem off.
Test and Refer to the Test and Inspection procedures listed in Chapter 8.
Inspection
Procedures These performance assurance procedures must be performed.
D-7
Using RAS
D-8
E
Data Export - Installation on the
Database Server
Overview
This Appendix describes the procedure for installing and activating the Data Export
options:
• Holter option - this feature provides the ability to export a patient’s ECG
waveform data stored on the Database Server to a Philips/Zymed Holter
Scanner for Windows - Model 2010 for Holter analysis via the hospital’s
Network.
• 12-Lead option - this feature provides the ability to export 12-Lead ECG
captured conventional 12-lead ECG to a configured receiving system
Data Export requires the following conditions:
• Philips Application Software Release J.0 or later installed on the Database

Server and all Information Centers and Clients on the Network.
• The Holter Export and/or 12-Lead Export must be purchased and the
interface configured on the Information Center to recognize the hospital
receiving system.
• The hospital Holter System must be the Philips/Zymed Holter Scanner for
Windows - Model 2010 running Software Version 2.0 or higher on a
Windows 98/2000/2003, ME, or XP PC. The hospital’s Holter PC must also
be enabled to receive the exported patient data from the Information Center/
Database server (page E-8).
• The hospital’s TraceMasterVue must be the running software version B.01 or
higher.
• A second Network Interface Card (NIC) must be installed.
• A 100 Mbit/s network connection must be made between the Database
Server’s NIC and the hospital’s LAN.
• The hospital must provide the following configuration information for the
Database Server:
IP Address
IP Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
Host Name(s)
User Name
Password
E-1
Overview
• The networking protocol on The hospital LAN PCs accessing the Database Server must
be TCP/IP and HTTP.
• The Holter System PC Host Name must be configured via Config Wizard.
• The TraceMaster server Host Name must be configured via Config Wizard.
• The Username and Password must be configured in both the Database Server and
Zymed/Holter machine.
E-2
Installing Data Export
The procedures for installing the Data Export feature include:
• Installing the NIC (if necessary).

• Entering customer specified IP Address on the NIC.
• Entering the Host Name for Holter or 12-Lead ECG Management System in the
Network Configuration (via Config Wizard).
• Testing export of patient ECG data via hospital LAN to the receiving system.
Note If your system includes the Web Option, a second NIC is already installed. If this is the case
you do not need to install another NIC for the Data Export feature.
Installing The Web Option includes a second Network Interface Card (NIC) that must be installed in the
Second NIC Database Server.
in ML350 G5
Step 1. From the Database Server Service screen go to Shutdown > Shutdown Normal
to stop the Database Server.
Step 2. Turn off the power to the Database Server and remove the power cord from its AC
connector.
Caution When opening the Database Server and handling the NIC (or any PC board) follow all
proper ESD protection guidelines, which include grounding the Database Server, the
work surface, and your self.
Step 3. Refer to the Database Server User Manual for instructions about removing the cover.
Note Detailed procedures for Removing and Replacing Covers on the Database Server are
available in the ML350 G5 User Guide.
Step 4. Remove the I/O board clamp holding the PC boards in place.
Step 5. Insert the NIC into the appropriate Database Server slot. Be sure that the card is
securely connected to the backplane. See Chapter 5 for the appropriate slot placements
for the second NIC.
Step 6. Secure the NIC to the backplane with the screw provided.
Note All cards in the backplane should be secured by a screw.
Step 7. Re-install the I/O board clamp.
E-3
Step 8. Re-attach the left side panel and front bezel.
Step 9. Re-insert the Database Server power cord into its AC receptacle.
Note All Philips Patient Monitoring products that operate in a LAN environment undergo industry-
standard virus checking as part of the product manufacturing process. If installed as specified,
the Information Center will not introduce a virus onto the hospital LAN. In order to allow the
level of access desired by users while ensuring viruses do not affect the operation of the
Information Center product, it is imperative that hospitals are vigilant in maintaining a virus-
free intranet. This is the responsibility of the hospital, not Philips Healthcare.
Entering the The NIC IP Address should be provided by the hospital IT department and be compatible with
NIC IP the hospital intranet.
Address
Step 1. From the Windows Control Panel, open Network and Dial-Up Connections.
Step 2. Right-click the Hospital LAN icon and select Properties from the drop-down
menu.
The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window displays.
Step 3. Click the option button adjacent to Use the following IP address to select it.
Then and enter the following customer-supplied information in the adjacent fields.
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
E-4
Note If a customer supplied IP Address is not available, change the factory default IP Address to
172.30.221.0 until a customer address is supplied.
Do not use an IP Address of the form 172.31.xxx.x, which is used for the primary Clinical
NIC. If the LAN portion of the web access card IP Address is the same as that of the Clinical
NIC, Data Export will not function.
Step 4. Click the Advanced button.

The Advanced TCP/IP Settings window displays.
Step 5. Select the DNS and/or the WINS tab and enter the appropriate name and service
information provided by the hospital. See “Network Card and TCP/IP Settings”,
page 4-23.
Step 6. Click OK and close the window.
Step 7. From the Service screen go to Shutdown >!Shutdown - Normal to shut down
and restart the Database Server.
Configuring The host name of the hospital Holter System and 12-Lead ECG Management system is
the Host provided by the hospital’s IT service and must be configured in the NIC in order to export
Name data via the hospital LAN.
E-5
Step 1. Run Config Wizard and open the Network Configuration screen. In the List of
Network Devices section, click the New button:
Step 2. From the Network Devices window, select Holter or 12-Lead ECG
Management from the Device Type pull-down list
Step 3. Enter the customer-provided export device Host Name in the IP/Address/Host
Name box.
Step 4. Click OK and verify that the Host Name appears in the List of network devices.
Testing After all of the configuration settings are made, proper operation of the data export should be
Network tested to verify that patient data can be accessed. Philips recommends that you run this test
Connectivity from a PC on the hospital intranet; but it can also be run from the Database Server.
Step 1. Test Network connectivity of the NIC by pinging the NIC IP Address from the
Database Server.
a. From the Windows task bar go to Start > Run.

The Run dialog opens.
E-6
b. In the Open text box type, cmd

The cmd.exe window opens.
c. At the command prompt type ping IPAddress, where IPAddress is the actual
LAN NIC IP Address assigned in the Installing Second NIC in ML350 G5
procedure.
If you see a reply, the NIC is working properly. If the ping request fails, try to
identify the problem, correct it, and repeat the process. If you cannot correct the
problem, contact the hospital IT department.
Step 2. Test the Network connectivity by pinging the Host Name of the Holter System PC on
the hospital’s intranet as follows:
a. From the Windows task bar go to Start > Run.

b. In the Open text box type, cmd
The cmd.exe window opens.
c. At the command prompt type ping Host Name, where Host Name is the name
of the Holter System PC NIC.
If you see a reply, the connection is successful. If the ping request fails, notify the
hospital IT department to determine cause of failure. When connection problem is
corrected, repeat the process.
Step 3. Verify that the Philips/Zymed Holter Scanner for Windows - Model 2010 is running
Software Version 2.0 or higher.
Note The hospital Holter System must be the Philips/Zymed Holter Scanner for Windows -
Model 2010 running Software Version 2.0 or higher on a Windows 98, ME, or 2003 PC.
From the Philips/Zymed Holter Scanner System PC select Help > About Holter.
E-7
Enable the Receiving System to Receive Exported Data for Data Analysis
Enable the Receiving System to Receive Exported Data for Data

Analysis
Note The configuration activity in this section is to be performed at the Philips/Zymed Holter or 12-
Lead ECG Management system, not at the Database Server. Determine the system operating
system (Windows NT, 98, 2000, 2003, XP, ME), then follow the appropriate procedure.
In order for a system to receive data exported from a Database Server, the receiving computer
must have network connectivity to the Information Center network.
Windows NT Step 1. Configure the receiving system with a Computer Name and an IP Address.
a. Right click the My Computer icon on the Windows desktop.

b. Select Properties from the drop-down menu.
The System Properties dialog displays.
c. Select the Identification tab.
d. Verify the computer name. This is the name that will be used during the
Information Center network device configuration as the Host Name.
e. Verify that your computer has a Network Interface Card and that it has an IP
address. You can use either static IP or DHCP.
Step 2. Add the appropriate customer-defined Username and Password.
a. From the Windows Start Menu, go to Settings > Administrative Tools >
User Manager.
b. Under User select New User.
c. Enter customer-defined Username and Password and confirm password.
d. Click the checkboxes adjacent to User Cannot Change Password and
Password Never Expires.
e. Click OK
E-8
Step 3. Create a shared PMDExport folder.
a. From the Windows desktop, click the My Computer icon.

b. Double-click the C: drive.
c. Go to File > New > Folder.
d. Name the folder PMDExport.
e. Right-click the PMDExport folder, and select Sharing and Security from the
drop-down menu.
The folder Properties window displays.
f. On the Sharing tab, click the option button adjacent to Share This Folder.
g. Enter PMDExport in the Share name text box.
h. Click OK.
Windows Step 1. Configure the receiving system with a Computer Name and an IP Address.
2000
a. From the Windows desktop, right-click the My Computer icon.
The System Properties dialog displays.
c. Select the Identification tab.
d. Verify that you have a computer name. This is the name that will be used during
the Information Center network device configuration as the Host Name.
e. Verify that your computer has a network interface card and that it has an IP
address. Either static IP or DHCP can be used.
Step 2. Add appropriate Username and Password (defined by customer).
a. Go to Start > Settings > Taskbar and Start Menu.

b. Select the Advanced tab.
c. Check Display Administrative Tools under Start Menu Settings.
E-9
d. Click OK.
e. Go to Start > Programs > Administrative Tools > Computer

Management.
f. Under Computer Management (Local), choose System Tools, then Local Users
and Groups, then Users.
g. Under the Actions menu. Choose New User….
h. Enter user defined Username and Password and confirm password.
i. Uncheck the User must change password at next logon checkbox.
j. Click the checkboxes adjacent to User cannot change password and
Password never expires.
k. Click Create.
Note The Username and Password defined in the Zymed/Holter system must match exactly what is
configured in the Database Server.
E-10
Step 3. Create a PMDExport folder, and make it sharable.
a. From the Windows desktop, double-click the My Computer icon.

d. Name your folder PMDExport.
e. Right-click the PMDExport folder, and Select Properties.
f. Select the Sharing tab.
g. Click the Share this folder option button.
h. Type PMDExport in the Share name text box.
i. Click OK.
E-11
Windows Step 1. Enable Network Sharing on the PC

XP/2003
a. From the Windows desktop, right-click My Computer.
c. Select the Computer Name tab and verify that you have a computer name. This
is the name that will be used during the Information Center network device
configuration as Host Name.
d. Verify that your computer has a network interface card that has an IP address.
This can be either static IP or DHCP.
Step 2. Add User-defined Username and Password.
a. From the Windows task bar go to Start > Settings > Control Panel > User
Accounts.
The User Accounts window displays.
b. Go to Pick a Task > Create a new account.
c. Select the Users tab and enter user-defined User Name in Type a name for the
new account text box. Then click Next.
The User Accounts window displays.
d. Select Computer Administrator as account type and click Create Account.

e. Select desired account name, and click Create a password.
E-12
f. Type the user-defined password in the Type a new password text box and in
the password confirmation text box.
g. When complete, click Create Password and close the User Accounts screen.
Step 3. Create a PMDExport folder, and make it sharable.
a. Click the My Computer icon on the Windows desktop.
d. Name your folder PMDExport.
e. Right click the PMDExport folder, and select Properties from the drop-down
menu.
The PMDExport Properties dialog displays.
f. Select the Sharing tab of the PMDExport Properties dialog, and select Share
this folder.
g. Type PMDExport in the Share name text box.
h. Click Permissions.
i. Under Access Type select Full.
j. Click OK.
Note The Username and Password defined in the Zymed/Holter system must match exactly what is
configured in the Database Server.
E-13
E-14
F
Demo Mode
Overview
This appendix describes the procedure for installing the Demonstration Mode
software of the IntelliVue Information Center, Release M.0 on an IntelliVue
Information Center PC. The Demo Mode includes simulator patient data files and is
intended for use in sales demonstrations and training users on IntelliVue Information
Center Release M.0 software.
Demo Mode software can be installed on the IIC PC that meets the documented
requirements. This appendix describes installation on an IntelliVue Information
Center PC, however. Conversion from Demo Mode to the IntelliVue Information
Center software on a PC requires a complete IIC software installation.
Note If you installed the Demo Mode on an IntelliVue Information Center, you must
completely re-install IIC software before using the IIC for patient monitoring.
If you want to install Demo Mode on a field laptop for sales demonstration, use the
Demo Mode Software CD (989803164291) and refer to Release M Demo Mode User
Guide (4535 642 14041 ).
Hardware and
System
Specifications
Requirements • Windows XP SP2
• Display is set for 120 DPI (required by application)
Recommended Features • Resolution: 1280 x 1024

• Memory: 1 GB
• True Color
• Removal of previously installed Microsoft SQL Server versions
Notes Demo Mode software is contained on the IntelliVue Information Center Release M.0
Software media, which is provided with IntelliVue Information Center shipments.
When you are using the Demo Mode program for training on a customer’s systems
you must re-install the IIC Software before monitoring patients.
During the installation of the IntelliVue Information Center Release M.0 Software
you will be asked “Do you want to install DEMO MODE and simulator patient files?”
If you select Yes the Demo Mode and simulator files are installed. The factory default
is set to No.
F-1
Installing and Configuring Demo Mode Software
Installing the
Demo Software
Warning When you install Demo software hardware that has an existing IIC application,
the Demo application will overwrite the existing IIC application.
Step 1. Start the Information Center, then Insert the media containing Release M
software into the appropriate device drive.
Step 2. Go to Start > Run from the Windows desktop.

Step 3. Click Browse in the Run dialog and navigate the Philips software media
for viridia\setup.exe. Double-click the file to select it.
Step 4. Click Ok in the Run dialog.

The Philips Setup screen opens.
Step 5. The Welcome To Philips Setup screen opens. Be sure to exit all
Windows programs before continuing the setup program.
F-2
Step 6. Click Next > in the Welcome to Philips Setup screen. The Language
screen opens.
Step 7. Select a language from the list and click Next >.
Step 8. When the SDN Simulator (BedSim) screen displays click the option
button adjacent to Yes to install DEMO MODE and simulator patient files.
Then and click Next > to continue.
F-3
The Installing Software screen displays.
Step 9. Click Next > in the Installing Software screen to begin the Philips
Software installation.
Running Config When Config Wizard begins, the first screen is the Restore from Archive
Wizard screen.
F-4
Restoring the
Archive
Archive Path: Text box to enter the filename of the archive
Browse: Permits browsing the device drives for the archive file
Restore Patient ADT Permits restoration of the names of patients who were admitted when the archive media was
Settings? created
If the check box is not checked no patient names or ADT data are restored.
If the check box is checked the patient names are restored and will display on the Main Screen.
Patient ADT settings will also be restored for each patient on the Network.
• Patient Name
• Medical Record Number
• Admit State
• Paced Status
• Patient Type
Start Restoring: Initiates the Restore process once you enter the correct archive file in Archive path
Step 1. When the Config Wizard Archive Restore screen appears, click the
check box next to Restore Patient ADT Settings.
Step 2. Click Browse to open the Stardate directory.

The archive files are located in C:\Stardate\BedSim\Configs\Archive.
Step 3. Select an archive file, Demo16Pt.arc or Demo8Pt.arc, and click Open.
Step 4. Click Start Restoring in the Restore from Archive screen.
Step 5. If the message appears, Mismatched archive: Would you like to migrate the
archive to match your device (local hostname)?, click Yes to continue
restoring. Then click Yes to confirm the Archive details.
F-5
Archive Details Description of the Demo simulation files for SDN, ITS and IPM equipment, which
include approximately 120 minutes of data, follows.
Demo16 Patient Archive

Sector Bed Label Equipment Name Simulation Data
1 Demo1 DemoSDN1 SDN Telemetry EASI Data
2 Demo2 DemoSDN2 SDN Telemetry EASI Data
3 Demo3 DemoITS1 ITS EASI data with yellow and red HR alarms
4 Demo4 DemoITS2 ITS data with NSR and SpO2 data
Pleth is available as the secondary wave
Device location history
5 Demo5 DemoITS3 ITS data with QT information if QT Analysis is selected
(page F-22)
6 Demo6 DemoITS4 ITS data with AFIB and red HR alarms and Device location
history
7 Demo7 DemoITS5 ITS EASI Telemetry Data
9 Demo9 DemoITS7 ITS Telemetry
history
11 Demo11 DemoIntellivue1 IPM data with various arrhythmia alarms
Conventional 12-lead ECG captures
12 Demo12 DemoIntellivue2 IPM data with NSR, EASI, ST On, and ABP
EASI 12-lead ECG captures
13 Demo13 DemoIntellivue3 IPM with trend data and Mason-Likar 12-lead ECG captures
16 Demo16 DemoIntellivue6 IPM data with trend data
F-6
Demo8 Patient Archive

Sector Bed Label Equipment Name Simulation Data
1 Demo1 DemoSDN1 SDN Telemetry EASI data
2 Demo2 DemoITS1 ITS EASI data with yellow and red HR alarms
4 Demo4 DemoITS3 ITS data with QT information if QT Analysis is selected
(page F-22)
history
Conventional 12-lead ECG captures
EASI 12-lead ECG captures
8 Demo8 DemoIntellivue3 IPM with trend data and Mason-Likar 12-Lead ECG
captures
Step 6. Click Next > in the Restore from Archive screen.

The Software Versions and Security Updates screen displays.
Software Version and The Software Versions and Security Updates screen displays read-only
Security Updates information about the IIC software revisions. It also lists the operating system
security updates that have been installed.
• Click Next > in the Software Versions and Security Updates screen to
continue.
F-7
Purchased Options Purchased Options and Support Information displays information

and Support identifying hardware, software, and purchased options.
Information
Server Host Name Displays read-only host name (its own computer name)
This Device
Displays read-only device description - M3150 Information Center (Simulation)
Host Name Displays read-only Host Name of the device (assigned at installation)
Device Name Displays clinical name for the device (12 character limit)
Device Name is the same as Host Name.
If the computer has a Device Name exceeding 12 characters, an error message displays
when you try to continue. You must change the computer name before doing a Demo
software installation.
Monitoring LAN IP Address Displays an IP Address for the LAN connection
The Demo application sets this automatically.
*System Serial Number Displays computer serial number
*Device Serial Number Permits entry of the serial number
Software Release Displays read-only identifier of the installed software revision
*Contact Permits entry of Service contact information for users
(e.g. name and contact numbers of assigned support person or contractor, service contract
number, etc.)
• Enter contact information in the text box (255 character limit).
Purchased Options
# of Displays Shows the number of displays
For Demo, the setting is 1 and is read-only.
Visible Display Width Shows the size of the display
This setting is initialized to 306 mm (17 in).
F-8
# of ICs Sets number of Information Centers that can be connected to the device
The default setting is 1 and is read-only.
# of Patients Displays number of patients whose data can be stored by the device
Settings include 16 or 8.
Wave Storage Shows hours of patient waves stored by the system
Alarm Storage Sets number of 30 second alarm events stored by the Server
EASI Wave Storage (E01) Enables/disables EASI Wave storage
The default setting is Enable.
Alert Data Integration (C67) Enables/disables ability to interface with the external paging system
12-Lead Analysis/Export Enables/disables 12-lead export capability
(C17) The default setting is Enable.
HL7 Export (C14) Enables/disables HL7 export capability
Holter Export (C23) Enables/disables data export of ECG waveforms to a Zymed Holter Scanner for Windows.
Trend Display (TRD) Enables/disables Trend Display capability
Device Location (WLD) Allows you to remotely locate IntelliVue Telemetry devices (TRx and TRx+)
Research Data Export (C76) Enables/disables export of waveform, parameter, and alarm data from the Information
Center to one or more hospital-supplied research PCs.
The default for Demo Mode is Enabled and is read-only.
Master Server Displays Master Server name
• Click Next > in the Purchased Options and Support Information

screen to continue.
F-9
Database General
Configuration Settings
• Click Next > in the Database General Configuration Settings screen to

continue.
F-10
Local General
Configuration Settings
Patient Type Permits selection of the monitored patient type default setting
• Adult
• Pediatric
• Neonate (not supported for telemetry patients)
Patient Type can be changed for specific patients in the Admit screen.
All Arrhythmia Alarms Permits enabling/disabling arrhythmia alarms from telemetry monitors in the Arrhythmia
Off (Tele Only) Alarms Setup menu
• Enabled - telemetry arrhythmia alarms can be turned off at the bed
• Disabled - telemetry arrhythmia alarms cannot be turned off at the bed
No Data From Bed Permits enabling/disabling of INOP alert tone when there is a NoDataFromBed INOP
INOP - alerting • No Sound - disables alert tone
• Sound - enables alert tone
Arrhythmia Capability Permits selection of arrhythmia monitoring mode
(For SDN Bedsides and • Enhanced - 22 arrhythmia alarms
ITS only) • Basic - 10 arrhythmia alarms
Screen Notes Enables/disables Main Screen display of Screen Notes made in the patient Admit screen
• Yes - Screen Notes appear
• No - Screen Notes do not appear
Alarm Sounds Permits selection of alarm sound type
• IEC
Alarm Text Sets compliance format of alarm text, softkeys, and icons
• IEC
F-11
Record Button Permits selection of waveform Record/Store buttons that will appear on the Main Screen
• Record - displays button for recording waveforms
• Store - displays button for storing waveforms
• Both - displays buttons for recording and storing waveforms
Silence Bed at Central Enables/disables Patient Sector display of bedside monitor alarms silencing button
• Yes - silencing button appears in Patient Sectors
• No - silencing button does not appear in Patient Sectors and alarms can only be silenced
at the bedside monitor
Standby Messages Permits creation of up to 12 Standby Messages that can be selected in the Patient Window
when monitoring is in Standby
Each message that you type into a text box has a 15 character limit.
Factory Defaults:
• Cathlab
• Hemodialysis
• Orthopedics
• Pulmonary
• X-Ray
• Other
Laboratory Data Permits selection of Lab Data entry at IIC
Web Access Portal Permits assignment of Web Address
If enabled, a Browser button appears in the All Controls selections.
(Requires connection to an Application Server)
Data Export Settings Export Standard Leads (default)
Export EASI Leads - enabled if EASI storage is enabled in the domain.
If you export data to Research Data Export you must select Export Standard Leads.
Click Sector for If checked, activates the ability to generate a delayed recording when you left-click anywhere in
Recording the Patient Sector (other than over the Patient Window button).
It is recommended that you deselect this feature on touch screen systems.
HL7 Export Permits selection of HL7 output type
Configuration Selection is active if HL7 Export option is enabled on Purchased Options and Support
Information.
When selected, the HL7 Configuration dialog opens with the settings:
• LAN Based Monitors Only: Data originating from LAN monitors (IntelliVue Patient
Monitors) is HL7 output.
• Send Alert Messages: Alert, INOP, and parameter data is HL7 output.
• Send Aperiodic Data: Aperiodic measurements (e.g. noninvasive blood pressure) is
included in HL7 output.
• Send Patient Name: Patient Name is included in the HL7 output. Be sure that hospital
policy permits this feature.
• Target: Database Server host name
SRR Channel Opens dialog that permits setting Short Range Radio (SRR) Channel preference
Configuration Available Channels for SRR are Channel 11 through Channel 26. Available settings are:
• Off
• Low
• Medium
• High
F-12
Admit Required Fields Permits selection of required ADT information for an admitted patient
Last Name (default) - can only be clear if you check another selection
Lifetime Id
Encounter Id
Date of Birth
Admit Demographic Permits selection of Label type
Labels Lifetime Id Label
Possible settings are MRN (default), Record Id, Lifetime Id, Patient Id, Serial Number,
SSN, Not Used.
Encounter Id Label
Possible settings are Encounter Id (default), Account Number, Charge Number, Visit
Id, Case ID, Subject Number, Not Used.
If you select the setting, Not Used, no output for the label is sent via HL7.
Use Alternative Id Permits selection of alternative patient identification
• Click Next > in the Local General Configuration Settings screen to

continue.
F-13
Network Configuration For the Demo application, a default Holter device This DevHolter and Alert Data
Integration Client This DevADI are created in Network Configuration page. Also,
several smart hopping Access Points are included to support Device Location.
• Click Next > in the Network Configuration screen to continue.
A message warns that the device is configured for use with a SCC or SDN recorder
but no SDN card installed. You must click OK in the message dialog to continue.
F-14
Unit Paging Settings Demo permits assignment of paging devices. Paging controls are supported in Demo,
output to actual paging devices is not supported.
• Click Next > in the Unit Paging Settings screen to continue.
Display Setup
• Click Next > in the Display Setup screen to continue.
F-15
Equipment Setup
• Click Next > in the Equipment Setup screen to continue.
F-16
Bed Config Bed labels and equipment labels have the prefix, Demo. This is also true for unit
name (DemoUnit), SCC name (DemoSCC), and switch name (DemoSwitch).
On the Demo Bed Config screen the Fast Alarm Display selection is Red and
Yellow alarms. The Setup Sector Layout section of the screen permits selection
of Waves Per Sector.
If you have simulation data for. . . The Waves Per Sector selection can be . . .
16 patients 1
8 patients 2
• Click Next > in the Bed Config screen to continue.
F-17
Report Settings
• Click Next > in the Report Settings screen to continue.
Report and Recording

Destination
• Click Next > in the Report and Recording Destination screen to

continue.
A message warns that without a default printer defined you will not be able to
print, and that you can use Report/Recording Destination from Service
mode to set a destination. Click OK in the message dialog to continue.
F-18
Security Access
• Click Next > in the Security Access screen to continue.

The Date and Time Setup screen displays.
Date and Time Setup
• Click Next > in the Date and Time Setup screen to continue.
F-19
Archive When the Archive screen displays click Finish.

A message warns that the device is configured for use with a SCC or SDN recorder
but there is no SDN card installed. You must click OK in the popup to continue.
A CfgWizard popup opens which reminds you to run System Validation.
Step 7. Click OK.

The Setup Complete screen appears.
Step 8. Click Finish in the Setup Complete screen.

Windows shuts down and restarts the computer.
Logging On Step 1. When the computer restarts the Welcome screen displays. Press the
Ctrl-Alt-Delete keys simultaneously to open the Log on to Windows
screen.
Step 2. Enter your Username and Password.

The Windows Desktop displays with a RunDemo shortcut.
F-20
Starting Demo • To start the Demo application double-click the RunDemo shortcut on the
computer desktop.
When the application launches the DEMO Main Screen displays.
Illustration of Demo8 Patient Archive
Restarting Whenever you exit the Main Screen to Service mode, you must restart Demo
Simulation Files simulation files when you return to monitoring.
Step 1. From the Main Screen, press ALT + F11 keys simultaneously to unlock
the keyboard.
The Desktop Access dialog displays.
Step 2. Enter the Service password in the dialog text box and click OK.
Step 3. Press the CTRL + ESC keys simultaneously to display the Windows task
bar. then click the Bed Simulator application in the task bar.
The Bed Simulator window opens.
Restart all <SDN> beds as follows.
F-21
Step 1. To stop all <SDN> beds in the Bed Simulator window, select all the SDN
beds in the window, then click the Stop Selected Bed(s) button.
The State of the selected beds changes from Running to Stopped.
Step 2. While the beds are still selected click the Start Selected Bed(s) button.
The State of the selected beds changes to Running.
Restart all <IPM> beds as follows.
Step 1. To stop all <IPM> beds in the Bed Simulator window, select all the IPM
beds in the window, then click the Stop Selected Bed(s) button.
The State of the selected beds changes from Running to Stopped.
Step 2. While the beds are still selected click the Start Selected Bed(s) button.
The State of the selected beds changes to Running.
The Running simulation files populate the patient sectors.
Turning On QT Although you can access and use the QT screen on all ITS beds, you can only view
Monitoring QT monitoring on specific beds.
Simulation File QT-Enabled Sector Bed Label
8 patient simulation file 4 Demo4
16 patient simulation file 5 Demo5
Step 1. Select one of the appropriate Sectors and click the Patient Window button
within the sector.
Do not use Unit Settings to turn on QT monitoring.
Step 2. Go to All Controls > QT Setup.

The QT screen opens.
F-22
Step 3. Click the QT Analysis On checkbox.

QT Analysis begins, and QT data becomes available in the patient window
within 5 minutes.
Step 4. Click the Patient Window button.
Things to Know • Although you can access and use the QT screen on all ITS beds, you can only
About Demo view QT monitoring on Demo4 in the 8 Patient simulated data file and Demo5
in the 16 Patient simulated data file.
• Bed labels, equipment labels, unit name, SCC name, and switch name have the
prefix “Demo” to show you are running the demo application.
• The IPM simulated beds have limited capabilities from the aspect of the IIC
user interface. If you silence an alarm when it occurs the simulation file
assigned to that sector will stop and restart shortly. You can silence Demo1 -
Demo5 (in the 8 Patient simulated data file) and Demo1 - Demo10 (in the 16
Patient simulated data file) without stopping the simulator files.
• Simulator files run continuously until the recorded duration ends

(approximately 120 minutes), at which time the file restarts. During this time
the waveform disappears for 20-30 seconds before the waveform restarts.
• Although the Trend Display option is not supported, Trend display Demo
functionality is enabled. From Main Screen press the Alt-Backspace keys.
To return to normal mode, press Alt-Backspace again.
• The demo program can run with or without a switch connection. If you want to
use a switch, any switch with a link beat will work. Network connectivity is
not required for the switch. If you install Demo Mode from the IIC product
media, ITS Telemetry simulated waveforms will not display unless you have a
switch connected to the IIC.
• Device location information is provided in some ITS sectors.
• The USB Recorder will not operate if connected to the laptop because required
drivers are not available.
• An IntelliVue Telemetry System (ITS Telemetry) simulation file with SpO2
data allows you to select Pleth as the secondary wave. It also enables the SpO2
related controls in the Patient Window and Telemetry Setup application.
• Although ITS controls in Telemetry Setup (e.g. Pleth Wave, SpO2 Mode) are
active, you cannot make changes to the ITS Telemetry behaviors of the Demo
program.
• ITS Telemetry and IntelliVue simulated waveforms take about 30 seconds to
appear after Demo start up. SDN bed waveforms appear immediately.
• STindx is configured as a parameter of the VITAL SIGNS trend group.
• If you access an IntelliVue Patient’s Arrhyth Alarms in the Patient Window
and try to change the HR Limits, the screen will blank and monitoring in the
patient sector will stop temporarily.
F-23
• Demo Mode does not support Data Export. If you open an admitted patient’s
Patient Window and go to ALL Controls > Data Export, the Data
Export screen appears. If you click the Export Button, the system behaves
as expected but an SDProcess error is generated. The Patient Window
reappears but when you go to ALL Controls > Data Export again an
SDProcess Error popup appears. You must click OK in the popup to close
the error.
• Paging controls are supported in Demo; output to actual paging devices is not
supported. Demo permits assignment of paging devices.
• Demo Mode Release M includes the following new features:
– Lab Data Entry is available.
– New fields are added on the Admit screen and required fields are
identified by a red asterisk.
– Afib simulation files are added to the simulations files (Demo5 in the 8
Patient simulated data file, Demo6 and Demo10 in the 16 Patient
simulated data file).
– 12 lead export has required fields for export to emphasize new export
settings.
• If you discharge the IntelliVue bedside monitor beds that have 12 leads
attached to them you will lose the 12 leads attached to each bed (Demo6-
Demo8 in the 8 Patient simulated data file, and Demo11-Demo13 in the 16
Patient simulated data file). You can restore from archive again to get the
captured 12 leads back in the simulation file.
Re-installing IIC If you install Demo Mode on a IIC that you want to use later for monitoring patients.
Software You must re-install the IIC software before you can monitor patients.
F-24
G
ActiveX Control Deployment Tool
Introduction
This Appendix describes the ActiveX Control Deployment Tool which allows you
to download required ActiveX controls to Web Server clients.
When you disable ActiveX downloading and installing controls via the web it
presents a problem for the delivery and installation mechanism of the IIC Web
Server.
The ActiveX Deployment Tool is an installer that accommodates a manual

installation of the required IIC Web Server Active X controls, effectively bypassing
the security limitation from Internet Explorer (IE). This installer manually installs
the IIC Web ActiveX control and allows client users to view IIC Web data.
Technical Detail The IIC Web provides a Patient Window that allows viewing Near Real Time (NRT)
bedside data over the web using Internet Explorer. The first time a user browses to
the Patient List screen and clicks on a bed, Internet Explorer prompts the client to
download and install the ActiveX control.
• Click Yes to install the ActiveX control from the web server and install it on
your machine/client.
ActiveX control installation is allowed by IT in most customer locations
because it does not cause security risk.
If your IT Department does not allow download and installation of ActiveX controls,
you must manually copy the required .dll files to your computer and register them
with Windows.
The ActiveX Deployment Tool installs the following:
The tool is designed so that patient safety is not compromised. The IIC Web provides
read-only access to patient data from a remote client. If the installation fails for any
reason, there will be no impact on actual patient data or the Philips Information
Center.
G-1
Introduction
Supported IIC Release E.01

Information Center IIC Release F.00
Versions IIC Release G.00
IIC Release H.00
IIC Release J.00
IIC Release K.00
IIC Release L.00
IIC Release M.00
IIC Release N.00
G-2
Installation Procedure
Step 1. Load the IIC - Web Client ActiveX Deployment Tool CD in the
appropriate device drive.
Step 2. Click setup.exe on the installation CD. If a silent installation is required

(such as when run from a login script), execute the following command:
Setup.exe /S /v/qn
If the installer is run in silent mode, no other prompts will occur. If you are not
running the installer in silent mode the InstallShield Wizard displays:
Step 3. Click Next to continue.
G-3
Step 4. When the IIC - Web Client ActiveX Deployment Tool - InstallShield
Wizard screen displays, click Install.
As the installer performs the required tasks a current progress screen displays.
When the installation is complete, the InstallShield Wizard Completed screen

displays.
Step 5. Click Finish in the InstallShield Wizard Completed screen.
Note—If a client is running during upgrade, you will be prompted to reboot

the server. Reboot at this time.
G-4
Verifying Tool If you want to verify installation of the IIC - Web Client ActiveX Deployment
Installation Tool:
• Go to Start > Control Panel > Add or Remove Programs.

The Tool is listed in the Add or Remove Programs window.
Checking the Tool If you want to check the IIC - Web Client ActiveX Deployment Tool revision:
Revision
Step 1. Go to Start > Control Panel > Add or Remove Programs.
Step 2. Open the IIC - Web Client ActiveX Deployment Too and select Click
here for support information.
The Tool Revision displays in the Comments field.
G-5
G-6

PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

IntelliVue Information Center System

Installation and Service Manual

Part Number 4535 642 58111

Manufacturer Philips Medical Systems

First Edition ........................................................................................... June 2011

Model Referred to in text as . . .

M3169 IntelliVue Small Database Server Small Database Server

M3154 IntelliVue Large Database Server Large Database Server

M3150 IntelliVue Information Center Local Database Information Center

M3140 IntelliVue Information Center Low Acuity Database Information Center

M3155 IntelliVue Information Center Network Database Information Center

M3145 IntelliVue Information Center Small Network Database Information Center

M3170 Patient Link Information Center

M3151 IntelliVue Information Center Client Information Center Client

M3177 Trend Display Trend Display

Refer to Software Release History for supported PC/Server Hardware.

Site Planning and Preparation 4

Software Installation & Configuration 6

Maintenance, Troubleshooting, and Repair 7

Testing Product Assurance 8

Installing the Web Access Option B

External Modem Installation C

Data Export - Installation on the Database Server E

ActiveX Control Deployment Tool G

Chapter 1 includes the following:

Information Center Systems page 1-2

Information Center Systems

Figure 1-1 Basic Information Center Workstation Components

• Display (must be ordered separately)

• SDN Interface Card

• PC processing unit with:

• SDN Interface Card

• Mounting Hardware for PCs, Displays, and UPS

Standard • PC processing unit with:

• SDN Interface Card

Information Center Systems

Standard • Server with:

Optional Options for the Large Database Server follow:

Table 1-1 Time Synchronization Behavior

Optional Options for the Small Database Server include:

• USB Recorder Device

Optional The following optional components are also available:

• SmartPro Rack Mount 500VA Watchdog UPS (120V or 230V)

Optional The following optional components are also available:

Table 1-2 Topologies

Figure 1-2 Typical Basic System Topology

CareNet IntelliVue Clinical Network

V24 Patient 16 patients

100 Mbps Network Switch

Wired IntelliVue 16 patients 100 Mbps

Wireless Intellivue 16 patients Network Switch

Figure 1-3 Typical Complex System Topology

Philips CareNet is a local area communications network designed to share patient

Patient Monitors PCC/SCC Information Center System

Figure 1-4 Typical Information Center Monitoring System Network

Compatible Patient Monitors and Software

CMS 2002 Patient Philips Telemetry

Philips IntelliVue Wired/Wireless M2/M3/M4

Wired/Wireless MP5 Wired/Wireless Wired/Wireless

Figure 1-5 Information Center Compatible Bedside and Telemetry Monitors

Table 1-3 Products Compatible with Release N.0 and EASI

Software Release Software Release

IPM Information Center